I • #

rait PUBLIC UGMRY

Copley Square

A
i
4
 REPERTORIUM COLUMBIANUM

Volume III

THE BOOK OF PROPHECIES EDITED BY

CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS
 REPERTORIUM COLUMBIANUM

Geoffrey Symcox
General Editor

UCLA

M. J. B. Allen

Philip Levine

Norman J. W. Thrower
Edward Tutde
UCLA

Luciano Formisano
UNIVERSITY OF BOLOGNA

Publication of this volume was made possible

by the generous support of the

COMITATO NAZIONALE PER LE CELEBRAZIONI DEL V CENTENARIO DELLA

SCOPERTA DELL’aMERICA

Published under the auspices of the

UCLA CENTER FOR MEDIEVAL AND RENAISSANCE STUDIES

 SERIES PREFACE

The Repertorium Columbianum is a collection of contemporary sources relating to

Columbus’s four voyages, and the interpenetration of the hitherto separate worlds that

resulted from them. This multivolume series will provide in readily accessible form the
basic documents that are the starting point for research into this pivotal moment in

world history; they form the indispensable tools for all scholarly inquiry into the en-

counter. The series provides accurate editions of the essential texts in their original
languages, for the use of specialists, while at the same time making them available to

students and scholars in related fields through parallel translations into modern English.

The Repertorium Columbianum was originally conceived by the late Professor

Fredi Chiappelli, former director of the Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies
at the University of California, Los Angeles. The series is respectfully dedicated to his

memory. He intended it to be an up-to-date, greatly expanded version of the Raccolta

Colombiana published on the occasion of the Columbian quatercentenary in 1 892. He
laid down the basic lines of editorial policy that are being followed in these volumes, in

an approach that blends philological and historical methodologies. Because of the dual
approach, the editing of most volumes is an interdisciplinary undertaking among spe-
cialists in the field represented by the source materials in that volume. The Reper-
torium’s scope is generally limited to sources from the period between Columbus’s
first voyage and the Spanish conquest of Mexico in 1519— 1521, although certain
volumes, by their nature, may extend the chronological range of the series beyond
these dates.

Since 1892 historical perspectives on the Columbian encounter have shifted, and
the techniques of philological analysis have made enormous The Reper-
strides.

torium’s presentation of the sources reflects these changes. Centennial commemora-

tions such as the Columbian quincentenary serve to remind us of the way in which

scholarly methods and concerns have altered over the intervening years; they are occa-

sions for taking stock of the past century’s achievements, for seeing how interpreta-

tions have changed, for scrutinizing new material that has come to light, and for chart-
ing the course for future research. These are the purposes that inform the editorial

1 1
 policy of the Repertorium Columbianum. It seeks to sum up what has been achieved

in the field of Columbian studies over the past century, to throw new light on the
encounter and its immediate aftermath, to collect in a standardized format the essential

materials for research, and to suggest lines of inquiry for the years ahead.
The original Columbian ventures were international in conception and execution,

and in this same spirit the Repertorium Columbianum is an international undertaking.

The contributing scholars and the members of the editorial board are drawn from both
sides of the Atlantic, and the costs are being borne with the help of generous funding
from the United States National Endowment for the Humanities, the Italian Comitato
Nazionale per le Celebrazioni del V Centenario della Scoperta dell’America, and the
Spanish Sociedad Estatal para la Ejecución de Programas de Quinto Centenario. The
administrative and editorial work for the series is being performed by the UCLA Cen-
ter for Medieval and Renaissance Studies, under whose auspices these volumes will

appear. As general editor it is my pleasant duty to acknowledge a profound debt of

gratitude to the three government sponsors, without whose generous and enlightened
support this project would have been impossible.

Geoffrey Symcox
General Editor

i V SERIES PREFACE
 REPERTORIUM COLUMBIANUM

Volume III

THE BOOK OF PROPHECIES EDITED BY

CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS

Roberto Rusconi
Historical and Textual Editor

Blair Sullivan

Translator

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PRESS

Berkeley Los Angeles London
University of C'alifornia Press

Berkeley and Los Angeles, California

Universiry of California Press, Ltd.

London, England

©1997 by
The Regents of the University of California

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Libro de las profecías. English & Spanish.

The book of prophecies edited by Christopher Columbus / Roberto

Poisconi, historical and textual editor; Blair Sullivan, translator

p cm. — (Repertorium Columbianum; v. 3)

Commentary in English; Spanish and English parallel text.

Includes bibliographical references (p. ) and index.

ISBN 0-520-20047-0 (alk. paper)

I . America —Discovery and exploration—Spanish — works Early to

iHoo. 2 Columbus, Christopher— Religion Columbus, Christo-I

pher. II. Rusconi, Roberto. III. Title. IV. Series. ,

El 17 I 53 1997
970.oiV>- dc2i 96-49651
CIP

Printed in the United States of America

987654321

The paper used in this publication meets

the minimum requirements of American

National Standard for Information Sciences

— Permanence of Paper for Printed Library

Materials, ANSI Z39 48-1984.

CONTENTS

Preface ix

Sigla xi

Abbreviations to the Textual Apparatus xii

Introduction i

Part I 3

1.1 Christopher Columbus in Spain between the third and fourth

voyages 3

1.2 The redaction of the Book of Prophecies 5

1 .j The history of the manuscript 8

1
.4 Studies of the manuscript and editions of the text 1

Part 2: The Principal Themes of the Book of Prophecies 17

2.1 The draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella and the purpose

of the collection of texts 1

2.2 Augustine’s Opuscula plurima and Columbus’s conception of

history 1
9

2.J Christopher Columbus and Scripture 22

2.4 The anthology of the works of Pierre d’Ailly: from geoyiraphy

to eschatoloj^y 23

2.3 Gorricio’s collaboration in the redaction of the Book of Prophecies 26

2.6 The Bible and the myth of the islands 27

2.7 Evangelization and eschatology 28

2.8 The conversion of the people of Israel 30

2.9 Christopher Columbus, Joachim of Fiore, and Iberian political

messianism 3

2.10 The “prophecy” of Seneca and astronomical almanacs 33

V 1 I
 Part 3: The edition 35

j.i The manuscript of the Book of Prophecies 35

J.2 The handwriting 40

j.j Criteria used in the edition 48

Edition and Translation 53

Commentary ''

359

Bibliography 397

Index Fontium 409

Index Biblicus 41

Subject and Name Index 415

V i i 1 CONTENTS
 PREFACE

The unpredictable process by which chairs are assigned in the Italian university system
was inadvertently responsible for this new critical edition of the Book of Prophecies of

Christopher Columbus. In 1986 I was appointed professor of Church History at the

University of Salerno and met Luciano Formisano, a member of the editorial commit-
tee of the Repertorium Columbianum. Subsequently I was asked, as a specialist in the

religious history of the Italian Renaissance and late-medieval eschatology, to revise the
edition of the Book of Prophecies prepared in 1894 for the Raccolta Colombiana by
Cesare De Lollis. The proposal was generously supported by Fredi Chiappelli, who
was at the time general editor of the Repertorium Columbianum.
During the initial work, my original conception of the task was transformed into a

new critical edition that would revise the incomparable work of Cesare De Lollis

according to modern editorial criteria and, above all, with respect to the historical and
critical apparatus. I was able to complete this project during the academic year 1991-

92, which I spent as a visiting member of the School of Historical Studies at the

Institute for Advanced Study in Princeton, New Jersey. (At that time I was, in fact,

working on other completely unrelated research, whose results have already been pub-
lished.) I want to mention in particular Giles Constable and Irving Lavin, both mem-
bers of the Institute, and visiting scholars Robert C. Davis, Paul R. Hyams, Gary A.
Macy, and Katherine H. Tachau — all of whom helped to create an intellectual envi-
ronment extremely favorable to my work. I am indebted to Richard A. Jackson for
various “rescue operations” of an electronic nature and for his skill as a textual editor.

I want as well to thank warmly the staffs of the various libraries and the individual
scholars who have provided me with so much information. While fearing that the list

is incomplete, I want to mention in particular the invaluable staffs of the library of the
Institute for Advanced Study, the Firestone Library in Princeton, the libraries of the

University of California at Los Angeles, the Library of Congress, the Biblioteca Na-
zionale Céntrale “Vittorio Emanuele 11
” in Rome, the Bibliotheca Apostólica

Vaticana, the Pontificia Universitá in Rome, and the Societa Geográfica Italiana in

Rome.
 Thanks to the generosity of the Ministero dell’Universita e della Ricerca Scientifica
e Tecnológica and of the Consiglio delle Ricerche, in January 1991 I was able to work
directly with the original manuscript of the Book of Prophecies and with the other books
that had been in Columbus’s possession and are now conserved at the Biblioteca

Colombina y Capitular in Seville. I received the patient assistance of the library staff
and the wise advice of Juan Gil and Consuelo Varela.
Because I published in 1993 — in the edition of the Book of Prophecies included in the

Nuova Raccolta — a more complete commentary on the critical text, I allow myself to
refer specialists to that publication and thus to limit bibliographic references in the

present work to the absolutely essential. (I have added a few studies published in the

intervening years that deal specifically with material connected to the Book of Prophecies
and make significant additions.)

With respect to the end of my labor on this project, I want in particular to mention
the recent directors of the UCLA Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies for
their friendly patience and for including my work among the Center’s publications.

Above all, Geoffrey Symcox closely supervised the final stages of manuscript prepara-
tion and submission in 1992.

Blair Sullivan has made excellent translations of the text of the critical edition and of

my introduction; modern Italian is at times more intricate than biblical, patristic, and
medieval Latin. She has frequently helped me with textual and bibliographic matters.
This project has been in its own way a voyage across the Atlantic. During the period
of navigation, Paolo Emilio Taviani, senator a vita of the Republic of Italy, has been
particularly attentive; I wish to pay homage to the passion of this Columbian scholar.

Roberto Rusconi
Rome — Los Angeles
I April 1996

X PREFACE
 SIGLA

BMC Catalogue of the Books Printed in the XVth Century now in the

Library of the British Museum. London, British Museum Pub-

lications, 1963—.

CCCM Corpus Christianorum, Continuado Mediaevalis. Turnhout,

Brepols, 1969-

CCSL Corpus Christianorum, Series Latina. Turnhout, Brepols,

1982-

CGIE Catálogo General de Incunables en Bibliotecas Españolas. Ma-

drid, Ministerio de Cultura, 1989-

CSEL Corpus Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Latinorum. Vienna, Holder-

Pichler-Tempsky, 1897-

GW Gesamtkatalo^ der Wie^endrucke Leipzig, K. W. Hiersemann,

1925-

Hain Repertorium Biblio^raphicum ed. L. Hain. Stuttgart, J. G.

Cotta, 1826—38.

IGI Indice Generale de^li Incunaboli delle Biblioteche d’Italia. Rome,

La Libreria dello Stato (Istituto Poligrañco e Zecca dello
Stato), 1943-81.

PG Patrologiae cursus completus . . . Series j^raeca, ed. J. P. Migne.

Paris, 1857-66.

PL Patrolo^iae cursus completus . . . Series latina, ed. J. P. Migne.

Paris, 1841-1902.
 ABBREVIATIONS TO THE TEXTUAL APPARATUS
V

A Alfonso de Falencia, Universal Vocabulario en Latino y en Ro-

mance. Seville, Compañeros Alemanes, 1490 (GW 1267).

Aa Aurelii Augustini De civitate Dei. Venice, Gabriel Petri, 1475

(GW 2880).

Ab Sancti Aurelii Augustini De civitate Dei libri XI— XXII, edd.

Bernardus Dombart et Alphonsus Kalb. Tumhout, Brepols,
1955 (CCSL XLVIII).

Ac Sancti Augustini De doctrina Christiana, cur. losephus Martin.

Turnhout, Brepols, 1962 (CCSL XXXII).

Ad Sancti Aureli Augustini De divinatione daemonum, rec. lose-

phus Zicha. Prague-Vienna-Leipzig, F. Tempsky-G.

Frey tag, 1900 (CSEL XXXXI).

Ae Sancti Aureli Augustini De consensu Evangelistarum libri quat-

tuor, rec. Franciscus Weirich. Vienna— Leipzig, F.

Tempsky-G. Freytag, 1904 (CSEL XXXXIII).

Al Sancti Augustini Confessionum libri XIII, ed. Lucas Ver-

heijen. Turnhout, Brepols, 1981 (CCSL XXVII).

Ao Aurelius Augustinus, Opuscula plurima. Venice, Dionysius

Bertochus, 26.iii.1491 (GW 2866).

Ap Sancti Aurelii Augustini Sermones ad populum (PL 38).

As Aurelius Augustinus, Sermones. Basel, Johann Amerbach,

1494-1495 (GW 2920).

B Biblia sacra (cum glossa ordinaria et interlineari et cum postillis

Nicolai de Lyra). Venice, Paganinus de Paganinis, 18.iv.1495

(GW 4283).

X 1 1
E Samuel de Fez, Epistula ad rabbi Isaac contra Judaeorum errores.

Barcelona, Paulus Hurus et Johannes de Salisburgo, ca. 1475

(BMC X, 27).

F F. Colombo, Ee Elistorie della vita e dei fatti dell Ammiraj^lio

Don Cristqforo Colombo, ed. Ilaria Luzzana Caraci (Nuova
Raccolta Colombiana, vol. VIII, t. I). Rome, Istituto Poli-

grafico e Zecca dello Stato, 1990.

G Diego Alejandro de Gálvez, Papeles varios de India. London,

British Library, Ms. Add. 13984.

H Bartolomé de las Casas, Historia de las Indias. Madrid, Biblio-

teca Nacional, MS. Res. 21.

/ Isidorus Hispalensis, Etymologiae. De sumrno bono. Venice,

Petrus Loslein, 14H3 (Main ^9272=9279; BMC V, 379).

J Juan de Luzon, Suma de las virtudes. Zaragoza, Jorge Coci,

12. X. 1 508.

L Libro de la profecías. Seville, Biblioteca Colombina y Capitu-

lar.

M Sancti Gregorii Magni XL Homiliarum in Evan^elia libri duo

(PL 14).

N Madrid, Biblioteca Nacional, Ms. 8586.

Pc Petrus de Alliaco, Tractactus de concordia astronomice veritatis et

narrationis historice. Louvain, Johann von Paderborn, ca. 1483

(Ham ^836=837; BMC IX/II, 146).

Pi Petrus de Alliaco, Tractatus de lej^ibus et sectis contra superstitio-

sos astrónomos. Louvain, Johann von Paderborn, ca. 1483

(Ham -^836=837; BMC IX/II, 146).

Pv Petrus de Alliaco, Vi^intiloquium de concordia astronomice

veritatis cum theologia. Louvain, Johann von Paderborn, ca.

1483 (Hain *836=837; BMC IX/II, 146).

R Rabbi Samuel Marochiani De adventu Messiae praeterito Liber

(PL 149, cols. 337-368).

S Seneca, Medea, ed. Charles Desmond Nuttall Costa. Ox-

ford, Clarendon Press, 1973.

T Lucius Annaeus Seneca, Tra^oediae, comm. Bernardinus

Gellius Marmita. Venice, Lazarus de Soardis, 12.xii.1492

(Hain 14666; BMC V, 491)

ABBREVIATIONS TO THE TEXTUAL APPARATUS X I i i

 V Biblia Sacra iuxta Vulj^atam Clementinam, ed. Alberto
Colunga and Laurentio Torrado. 4'^ ed. Madrid, Biblioteca
de Autores Cristianos, 1965.

man correction in an unidentified handwriting

man^ Gaspar Gorricio

man^ “Italian scribe’’

man^ Christopher Columbus

man'* “public scribe’’

man^ Ferdinand Columbus

man^ anonymous hand

indicates postil apparatus

XIV ABBREVIATIONS TO THE TEXTUAL APPARATUS

INTRODUCTION
 INTRODUCTION’
Part 1

CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS IN SPAIN

1. 1

BETWEEN THE THIRD AND FOURTH VOYAGES

In the final days of November 1 500, Christopher Columbus returned to Europe, end-
ing his third voyage to the Indies in chains rather than triumph. In September of that
year the royal commissioner Francisco de Bobadilla, sent by the Spanish rulers to
investigate reports of serious disorder on the island of Hispaniola, had made the drastic

decision to send Columbus back to Spain under indictment.

Columbus, with his brother Bartholomew and his son Diego, was received by the
Catholic monarchs at Granada the following December 17. He then began a period of
frenetic activity that occupied all of 1501 and much of 1502, undertaking a broad and
well-constructed piece of propaganda designed to defend himself against the charges
made against him and, above all, to justify his own actions. He sought in addition to
protect the rights that he believed he had legitimately acquired. To these goals were
added the promotion and organization of his fourth and final voyage to the Indies.

At the Spanish court Columbus had the opportunity to come again into contact

with people like the Lombard humanist Peter Martyr, who was persuaded to complete
as rapidly as possible the first section of his Latin history of the discoveries, the Decades

de Orbe Novo, incorporating material supplied to him directly by Columbus. Peter

Martyr had begun the work, dedicated to Cardinal Luis de Aragón, in 1493, but in the
intervening time had written only the first two books.
At this time Columbus engaged in intense literary activity, producing a scries of
writings directly reflecting his aims and attitudes. One of the first was his emotional
letter to Doña Juana de la Torre, nurse of the deceased prince and heir apparent, Don

'Much of the matenal summanzed in the following pages has been discussed at greater length
that is in

Rusconi 1993a: scheda i. For economy of space, only the specific supporting document will be cited.
^Cf Lunardi, Magioncalda, and Mazzacane 1988, and the accompanying bibliography. See also Gil 1984.

3
 Juan.^ This letter, undated but probably written shortly after his return to Spain, has

survived in different copies/ It contains recurrent autobiographical themes and reli-

gious overtones that correspond in large part to the contents of the draft of a letter to
the Catholic rulers, also undated, which is transmitted in its entirety only in the copy
inserted into the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies.^

Probably still in 1501 Christopher Columbus wrote in his own hand a series of
letters and memoirs defending his actions; numerous themes and assertions occur that
are also present in the undated draft of a letter to Ferdinand and Isabella. The series

includes a short letter that was probably intended for the members of the Council of
Castile^ and several drafts of a single text written in the third person designed to defend
his privileges and to rebut the accusations that had been brought against him."^

In August or September of 1501, Columbus sent to the queen a letter in his own
hand containing the principal arguments that appear in his drafted letter to the Catho-
lic sovereigns.^ Finally, he sent another long letter to her on 6 February 1502, after he
had reestablished his own legal standing and had been authorized to sail again to the
Indies.’

Certain other themes, which correspond in large part to the material contained in
the Book of Prophecies, can be found as well in the copy of a letter from Columbus to

Pope Alexander VI, perhaps never sent but datable to February-March 1502.’“

Later during this brief period, while at Granada, Columbus sent letters in his own
hand to a monk of Italian origin, Gaspar Gorricio. Gorricio belonged to the Carthu-
sian monastery of Santa Maria de las Cuevas in Seville’ ' and had become Columbus’s
religious counselor after the cooling of his relations with the Franciscans.’^ The monk
was entrusted with the duty of safeguarding in his monastery the Columbus family’s
archives.’^ Columbus wrote two letters to him in April and May of 1 502, before setting
sail on his fourth voyage.
Finally, a few months before leaving on his last voyage, Columbus ordered copies
to be made by “public scribes’’ of the most important documents dealing with his own

^The pnnce died in Salamanca on 4 October 1497, Columbus’s sons Diego and Ferdinand had joined his
entourage in the final months of 1493, when they were accepted as pages at the court of the Catholic
monarchs (Boscolo 1986).
^Cf Varela 1984: 263-71 (no. XLl).
®Cf Rusconi 1993a: scheda 11 .

'Cf Varela 1984; 271-72 (XLll).

’Cf Varela 1984: 291-302 (nos. LlIl-LVl).

"Cf Varela 1984: 303 (no. LVll).

’Varela 1984: 305-308 (no. LIX).

'“Cf Varela 1984: 310-313 (no. LXl).

”Cf the recent profile given in Varela 1989b (and also Rusconi 1993a: schede Vll and Vlll).
'^Cf Gil 1986b. See also Meseguer Fernández 1985.
”Cf Varela 1984: 281-286 (nos. XLVl-Ll). See also Serrano and Sanz 1930 and Gil 1989a.
'^Cf Varela 1984: 315-316 (nos. LXIV-LXV).

4 INTRODUCTION
claims in the new world — a new “edition,” for the most part authenticated, of the
Booh of Privilegies, originally copied and notarized by Martin Rodriguez in Seville on 1

March 1498.’“^ On 5 January 1502, at Columbus’s request, this same Rodriguez started

production of notanzed copies of the full set of documents in their complete versions;
he finished his work on March 14 of the same year with the production of four com-
plete sets of the documents.’^
One of the four, written on parchment, was sent sometime prior to 21 March 1 502
to Nicolo Oderigo, the Genoese ambassador at the court of the Catholic monarchs;’^
a second parchment copy arrived in the ambassador’s hands at a later time.’'’ In fact, a
notarized copy of the Book o f Privilejies must have been sent to the Bank of San Giorgio
in Genoa, which had been entrusted by Columbus with safeguarding the interests of
his heirs.” A third parchment copy was put in the care of Gaspar Gorricio and was kept
in the Carthusian monastery in Seville until at least 1511.^’’ The fourth, copied on
paper, ended up in the hands of Alonso Sánchez de Carvajal in Santo Domingo, the
protector of Columbus’s interests on the island of Hispaniola.

1.2 THE REDACTION OF THE BOOK OF PROPHECIES

During his residence at Granada, Columbus added to his projects the compilation of a
manuscript that Ferdinand, Columbus’s natural son, referred to as the Book of Prophe-

cies; Gorricio, however, provided a title that corresponded to its contents: “Book or
collection of auctoritates (authoritative writings), sayings, opinions, and prophecies con-

cerning the need to recover the Holy City and Mount Zion, and the finding and
conversion of the islands of the Indies and of all peoples and nations.”^'
Designed from the outset as a manuscript to be presented to Isabella of Castile and
Ferdinand of Aragón, the Book of Prophecies is a collection of biblical texts and auctori-

tates drawn from the fathers of the church and from medieval theologians and cano-

nists. Its purpose was to locate within the historical schema of the salvation of the
human race the discovery of the Indies, presented as the first step toward the liberation
of Jerusalem and the Holy Land from Muslim domination, and to assign a prominent
role in these events to Christopher Columbus.
For some time Columbus had been gathering evidence to support his arguments,
reading and making marginal notes in the printed books that he possessed. It seems

’*Cf. Pérez-Bustamente 1951 (and Nader 1991).

'‘“Cf. Pérez-Bustamente 1951; L.
'^Cf. Varela 1984; 313-314 (no. LXII).

'*Cf. Varela 1984; 347-348 (no. LXXX).

”Cf. Varela 1984; 314-315 (no. LXlll).
^®Cf. Herbert 1992: 102-104.
^'Fol. 1 verso.

1.2 THE REDACTION O E THE BOOK OF PKOFHLCIFS 5

 rather unlikely, however, that this activity began as early as 14H1, as has been sug-
gested.^^ The first allusions to the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies do not occur
until Columbus’s autograph correspondence with Gorricio in 1501. Furthermore, it is

not certain that the references in this correspondence to a “book” or a “writing” are
not to some other collections, for example, the various copies of the Book of Privileges
In fact, the first precise information about the Book of Prophecies is found in a letter

dated 13 September 1 501 that Columbus sent to Gorricio from Granada, subsequently
transcribed by Gorricio at the beginning of the manuscript.^'’

In this letter Columbus claims to have worked at collecting texts following his

arrival in Granada in mid-December of 1 500. Overcome, however, with political and

legal affairs, he no longer had time for this project and had decided to send the manu-
script to Seville to the Carthusian monk, who would be able to help him accomplish
his ends. Columbus urged Gorricio to select passages from the Bible and from the
exegetical commentary of the Franciscan theologian Nicholas of Lyra. (This commen-
tary, written during the first half of the fourteenth century, had become the traditional

reference text for the study of Scripture.) According to Columbus’s letter, the material

collected from these sources would have to be put in order at some later time.^"^

On 23 March 1502, undoubtedly because of the approaching departure date for

Columbus’s fourth voyage, Gorricio returned the manuscript. In the text of the letter,

which Gorricio copied into the manuscript directly following Columbus’s letter to

him, the Carthusian monk gave a detailed description of his contribution to the manu-
script, which had been accomplished in the course of approximately six months. Fie
had added and inserted into the collection many additional auctoritates — excerpts that
are easily identified on the basis of Gorricio’s distinctive handwriting. Gorricio had
not, however, attempted to eliminate inconsistencies among the texts already in-

cluded; rather he limited himself to the insertion of several “rules” — largely having to
do with scriptural exegesis — that would allow the readers of the Book of Prophecies to

resolve for themselves any possible doubts. In conclusion, he stated that he had de-

cided, for the sake of brevity, to make reference to works by the cited authors, rather
than to copy the texts in their entirety.
It seems reasonable to assume that the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies was never
sent to the Spanish sovereigns and that Columbus took it with him on his fourth and
last voyage. Indeed, on 7 July 1503, Columbus sent a letter to Gorricio from Jamaica
along with a narrative account of his fourth voyage, written a month after Columbus’s

^^Cf. Juan Gil, in Varela 19X4: 13; West and Kling 1991: 86 If.

^^Cf. Varela .984; 281-285 (nos. XLVI-XLIX).

^^Fol. I recto. Varela 1984: 285 (no. L).

^®The hypothesis, advanced in many después tornarlas rrever y las

studies, that the expression, “para

poner en rnma,” indicates Columbus’s intention to compose an eschatological poem does not, however,
seem reasonable. For an opinion to the contrary, see West and Klmg 1991; 35.
^‘’Fol. I recto-i verso. Cf. Gil and Varela 1984: 293-296 (no. XXX).

6 INTRODUCTION
arrival on that island. series of passages in that document refer unquestionably to
excerpts from the Book of Prophecies. In addition, an emphasis is placed on certain
themes that echo those of the drafted letter to Isabella and Ferdinand — for example,
Columbus’s preoccupation with the universal diffusion of Christianity and the recon-
quest of Jerusalem.
It seems also that certain autograph notes relating to this voyage (principally, the

series found on folio 59 verso) must in fact have been added to the manuscript before
Columbus’s return to Europe.
On 28 May 1503, while the admiral was still in the West Indies, El libro del famoso

Marco Paulo Veneciano de las cosas maravillosas que vido en las partes orientales was published
by the pnnting house of Stanislas Polski andjakobus Kromberger in Seville. This first

translation into Castilian of Marco Polo’s work, produced by the Sevillian canon Ro-
drigo Fernández de Santaella, was clearly motivated by the publication of the first

Portuguese version of the text. Ho liuro de Marco Paulo, printed in Lisbon by Valentim
Fernandes on 4 February i 502. The introduction of the latter celebrates the grandeur
of the Lusitanian expansion toward the Orient, identified with Cathay.
In the Sevillian edition, at the end of its “first prologue,’’ the author, who was the
queen’s archdeacon, launched a vigorous attack on an unnamed person for having
identified the West Indies with the biblical islands of Ophir, Tarshish, and Kittim.^’

These accusations may have been based on a direct knowledge of the Book of Prophecies
and in particular of its final pages, which were drafted by Gorricio.^^
It is quite likely that passages in a letter in Columbus’s hand, written to his son

Diego between 21 and 28 November 1504 (after Columbus’s return to Spain on 7

November), refer to these criticisms: “St. Augustine says that what is happening and
what will happen was already determined before the creation of the world’’^^ and “If
I am lying. Chronicles, the Book of Kings, Josephus’s Antiquities, and others will tell

what they know about this.’’^**

In any case, it does not seem likely that Columbus, prior to his death in Valladolid
on 20 May 1 506, had ever thought of transforming the texts that had been collected in
the manuscript into a proper book;^"^ even the letter to Isabella and Ferdinand re-

mained in draft form and was never sent. Above all, Columbus’s own level of biblical
and theological expertise was completely inadequate for the purpose. The group of

^’Varela '1984: 316 (no. LXV).

^"Gil and Varela 1992; 406-441 (no. IX). Cf. also Varela 1984: 316-330 (no. LXVI) and Rumen de
Annas 1989: 573-594 (doc. IX).
^’Cf. Rusconi 1993a; schede XII-XIV. See infra.

"°Cf. Gil 1987: XXIIl-XXIX. See also Wagner 1949.

^'Ed. Gil 1987: 174-177.

^^Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda XI.

”Varela 1989: 335—337 (no. LXXIII).

^•Varela 1984: 337-338 (no. LXXIV).
”See, for example, West and Kling 1991: 35, for a contrary opinion.

1.2 THK REDACTION OE THE BOOK Of- BROPHECItiS 7

 texts collected in the manuscript was never brought into a codified literary form,

because ultimately the motives that had inspired the drafting of the Book of Prophecies
faded with the passage of time.

1.3 THE HISTORY OF THE MANUSCRIPT

The fate of the Book of Prophecies after Columbus’s death in Valladolid on 20 May 506 1

is not known for sure. It is reasonable to believe that the manuscript remained in the
possession of Columbus’s legal heir, his son Diego, at least until the latter’s death in

1526. In fact, in an inventory made by Ferdinand Columbus, probably on this occa-

sion Memorial de las cosas que hay que de hazer y dezir en Castilla
— “a handwritten
book of prophecies about the Indies, selected by Don Gaspar” is recorded.
The Book of Prophecies had been, in any case, available to Columbus’s other son
Ferdinand for consultation,^^ for it undeniably provided a source of inspiration for
Ferdinand’s lost treatise Colón de concordia, sent in 1 5 1 1 to Cardinal Francisco Jiménez
de Cisneros as part of Ferdinand’s numerous eflforts to protect the rights acquired by his

family through the discoveries made by his father. In another text, written in 1524 after
Ferdinand had been included among the arbiters designated to define the rights of

Spain and Portugal on the Moluccan islands,^” namely, the Declaración del derecho que la

real Corona de Castilla tiene a la conquista de las provincias de Persia, Arabia e India, e de

Calicut e Malaca, the contents of the treatise Colón de concordia, written more than ten

years previously, are summarized as follows: ‘‘a volume (. .

.) divided into three books;
the first shows that in our time the whole world, from east to west, will be navigated
and how it will be done; the second tells that throughout the world in the same way,
in our time, the word of the gospel will be divulged and received; the third proves that
universal dominion must be granted to the crown of Spain.
After the death of his brother Diego in 1526, it is likely that Ferdinand Columbus
gained possession of some volumes that had belonged to his father, along with the Book

of Prophecies. He placed at the bottom of the verso of the last folio his own inventorial

annotation in the form that he customarily used for books that he had not acquired
directly: “Registered. 2091.”“”
(

As an assiduous bibliophile,'*^ Ferdinand had initially described the manuscript in a

^Me Berwick, y de Alba 1892: 97.

”Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda XV.
^"Cf. Marin Martinez 1973.
^’Cited by Rumeu de Armas 1973: 48-49. The descnption given by Ferdinand in the Registrum B of his
own number 3783
library for is slightly different and much less detailed (in Gallardo 1866: 538; cf Hunting-
ton 1905 and Colón 1992).
^‘’A hypothesis which seems less probable is advanced by Streicher 1928; 226. According to Stretcher, the
manusenpt was left to Ferdinand by his uncle Bartholomew after his death in the winter of 1514- 1515.
^'Fol. 84 veno.
^^For a listing of the vanous catalogs of his own library which Ferdinand produced, see Mann Martinez
1970; cf Mann Martinez, etc. 1993.

8 INTRODUCTION
brief Latin entry in the Indice general alfabético of his own library (also known as the

Abecedarium B): “Prophecies concerning the recovery of Jerusalem and the discovery
of the Indies, handwritten.”'’^ A later bibliographic description given in the Indice
numeral de los libros (also known as Rej^istrum B) is much more detailed; “A book that

contains all the prophecies related to the discovery and conversion of the Indies. At the
beginning is a letter from Lord Christopher Columbus with the opening words, ‘Most
reverend and very devoted.’ The reply to this letter begins, ‘Very magnificent and

most excellent.’ The work begins with the words, ‘Holy Scripture is interpreted.’ It

ends, ‘Every island fled and the mountains were not found.’ — It is in folio: at the end
is a table of prophecies on a single folio in two columns. It is handwritten.
In 1 544, after the death of Ferdinand Columbus in Seville on 1
2 July 1 539, his heirs,
ignoring the wishes expressed by Ferdinand in his will, deposited the contents of his
library at the Dominican convent of San Pablo in Seville. In 1552 the library was
transferred to the library of the chapter of the cathedral of Seville.'*^

The first interventions in the Book of Prophecies of the sort that a librarian would
make are attributed to the famous Iberian historian Ambrosio de Morales (i 5 1
3-1 591),
named royal chronicler in 1565,'*^ and date back in all probability to one of the trips
made by Morales to Seville in the years 1569 and 1576.'”’ He placed in the upper
lefthand margin of the first folio an inventorial note summarizing the incipit written by
Gorricio at the bottom of the verso of the same folio and emphasizing, however, the
Columbian parentage of the collection: “7816. Prophecies gathered by Admiral Chris-
topher Columbus that concern the recovery of the Holy City of Jerusalem and the
discovery of the Indies, addressed to the Catholic Rulers.”
An addition placed at the end of the rubric preceding Columbus’s letter copied on
folio I recto of the manuscript and identifying Gorricio as a “monk of the Carthusian
monastery of Seville” was probably also written by Ambrosio de Morales. More sig-

nificantly, he was responsible for the phrase added to folio 77 recto, which documents
the mutilation of the manuscript that had occurred and which has given rise to much
speculation about the contents of the missing folios:'*^ “Whoever removed these pages

acted badly, for this was the best prophecy in this book.”
The first accurate survey of the contents of the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies

and, to all appearances, its present arrangement were undertaken in 1682^” by the

Lollis 1894b; LVIII n.i.

^*Gallardo 1866: 518-519. Cf. Huntington 1905 and Colón 1992.

‘'^In theory, the library could have been consulted at this location by the Dominican friar Bartolomé de
Las Casas, when he was drafting the Historia de las Indias. It does not seem, however, that Las Casas consulted
the Book of Prophecies.

*^C(. Hernández Diaz y Muro Orejón 1941: xxxvi-xxxvih.

^’Cf. Gallardo 1866; 500.

‘"Cf de Hornedo 1973.

”lt makes no sense to enumerate the many hypotheses that have been advanced without documentary
support.
*‘’Cf. Gallardo 1866: 500-501.

1.3 I HE HISTORY OF I HE MANUSCRIPT 9

 Sevillian canon Juan de Loaysa (1^33-1709) as part of an inventory concluded in 1684
with the compilation of the Indices and Rei^isters of the library. At this time a covering
page was added stating that the manuscript originally must have consisted of 84 folios
(not counting the final unnumbered page mentioned in the description given in the
inventory of Ferdinand Columbus’s library): “Sir Christopher Columbus wrote this

book in 1 502 with the help of Gaspar Gorricio, a monk of the Carthusian monastery of
Seville, as is clear from the following letter. It has 84 leaves of which 14 are missing,
undoubtedly the best, as whoever read many years ago observed and said on folio 77.
it

This was written on Saturday 24 October 1682.’’ The absence of 14 folios (namely,
numbers 28, 63-66, 68—76) is formally noted and attested.
In 1823 B. G. Galvez, librarian of the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular in Seville,

intervened in the manuscript, writing the “reclamos” in red ink at the foot of each of

the verso folios of the Book of Prophecies and making a penstroke across the sections of
the single pages that still remained blank. At the foot of folio 83 recto, he wrote that he
had taken these actions in order to document the true configuration of the manuscript
and to prevent further tampering: “The ‘reclamos’ in this codex have been placed as

testimony to its condition in 1823. B. G. Gálvez.”

In order to preserve the manuscript, whose external folios had deteriorated greatly,

Gálvez inserted it into a two-leaf paper folder. Then he transcribed on the folder some
of the texts of the Book of Prophecies that were already mutilated beyond repair: “Letter

from Sir Christopher Columbus, Admiral of the Indies, to Father Gaspar Gorricio, a
Carthusian monk; his reply; and other letters to the Catholic Rulers. This copy has
been placed here because the original folios, which this extremely rare codex contains,
are in the process of deterioration.” In fact, his transcription was limited to the episto-

lary exchange between Columbus and Gorricio (omitting the draft of the letter to

Ferdinand and Isabella, probably because it probably presented him with significant
paleographic difficulties).

Finally, B. G. Gálvez is responsible for copying an article on a Columbian topic

from the Gaceta de Madrid of 4 February 1830 onto the recto and verso of a third page
that he added to the manuscript.
The restoration of the Book of Prophecies, carried out after a facsimile reproduction

of the manuscript had appeared in 1984 in the series Tabula Americae, was necessitated
by its increasing state of deterioration and the progressive loss of sections of the text, no
longer confined to the initial folios of the codex. Although this restoration has stabil-

ized the manuscript and improved its legibility in some places, it has made some of the
texts harder to decipher. Unfortunately, as none of the documentation describing the
technical aspects of this restoration has been made public, no further information on

®'Cf. Hamsse 1872: 176—182; Beer 1894: no. 3; ESFASA 30: 1232a.

”I quote the courteous letter from Juan Guillen Torralba, director of the Biblioteca Colombina y
Capitular, dated 16 July 1992: “no tenemos el relato que Vd. solicita sobre el restauro del Libro de las

profecías de Cristóbal Colón.”

I o I N r R oDUCT oN I
the origins ot the Book of Prophecies, which otherwise might have been obtained, has
been derived.

1.4 STUDIES OF THE MANUSCRIPT

AND EDITIONS OF THE TEXT
The first reproductions of the texts included in the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies

were carried out by Diego Alejandro de Gálvez, chief librarian of the Biblioteca
Colombina y Capitular of Seville and cataloguer of printed books and manuscripts.^^
As he states in a letter sent in 1766 to Donjuán Manuel de Santander, he recopied the
draft of the letter to the Catholic monarchs, the epistolary exchange with Gaspar Gor-
ricio, Columbus’s autograph annotations on folio 59 verso — the parts dealing with the
lunar eclipses of 1494 and 1504 — and the lines of Castilian verse scattered throughout
the codex. Fie explicitly attributed the latter to Ferdinand Columbus, whose hand-
writing, moreover, he identified in much of the main text. Gálvez’s transcription was
very accurate and indicates that the manuscript was much less deteriorated at that time;
it remained, however, unpublished. His transcriptions eventually became part of the
first of the five eighteenth-century codices of the Papeles varios de Indias, presently
conserved at the British Library in London.

The first step toward the actual rediscovery of the Book of Prophecies was taken in
1784, when Juan Bautista Muñoz visited the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular in
Seville and wrote on 14 March an admittedly summary description of the codex.

Subsequently, his notes were brought together within the 1 59 handwritten volumes of
the present day “Colección Muñoz’’ of the Real Academia de la Historia in Madrid. In

these volumes between 1779 and 1799 he gathered the material to be used to write an
unfinished Historia del Nuevo Mundo, a work requested personally by the King Carlos
III of Spain. The first and only volume of this Historia was published in Madrid in

1793.55

Approximately ten years later, another learned Spanish scholar, Martin Fernández
de Navarrete, published Juan Bautista Muñoz’s brief description of the Book of Prophe-
cies.^^ In 1793 Navarrete had finished gathering material for the five volumes of his

Colección de los viajes y descubrimientos, which appeared between 1825 and 1837. At this

time, several texts taken from the Book of Prophecies appeared in print for the first time
in a semi-normalized orthography, along with some rather limited observations about
the different hands in the manuscript. Included were the epistolary exchange between
Columbus and Gorricio, the incipit of the collection found at the foot of the verso of

the first folio, the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, the Castilian verses

*^Cf. Aguilar 1972; 968-969.

^^MS. Additional 13984. Cf. Catalogue Additions 1850: 7-8; de Gayangor 1976: 316-317.
^*Cf. Conti 1990; xxxi-xxxii.
^‘“Navarrete 1954: 458-465 (no. CXL).

1.4 s r UD I hS OH THH MANUSCR 1 P1 AND t D 1 H I Ü N S OH 1 H K TKXT I I

 copied by Ferdinand Columbus, the chapters of the vernacular version of the letter

from Rabbi Samuel of Fez, the notes in Columbus’s handwriting on folio 59 verso,

and the samples of handwriting located on folio 77 recto.

At some time prior to 1H46 Francisco Adolpho de Varnhagen made the first com-
parison of the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies and the marginal postils found in
Columbus’s copy of the works of Pierre d’Ailly, also conserved at the Biblioteca

Colombina y Capitular; as a result of this investigation, he concluded that the manu-

script was “an autograph book’’ by Christopher Columbus.
In 1866, despite the fact that he had personally examined the manuscript in Seville,

Henry Harrisse described the Book of Prophecies somewhat summarily. Curiously,

when he later decided to publish the Castilian lines of verse written out by Ferdinand
Columbus, he used the eighteenth-century transcription made by Diego Alejandro de
Galvez.
Published in the same year was the second volume of the collection of “rare and
curious books,’’ undertaken by Bartolomé José Gallardo; the volume includes an-
other brief description of the Book of Prophecies, which in truth is not particularly
enlightening.^® Gallardo did make a first attempt at an exact determination of the
sections written by the various hands that had played a substahtial role in the compi-
lation of the manuscript. He identified a first hand, “apparently the primary one,’’
responsible for the two initial letters and a large part of the manuscript; a second,
which had transcribed only the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella; a third,

which the learned Spaniard considered to be that of Columbus, responsible for the
postil in Italian on folio 58 recto, the entire series of annotations on folio 59 verso,

the addition to the end of the letter to Isabella and Ferdinand on folio 6 recto, and
the notes on folio 83 verso; and finally, a fourth hand, assigned to Ferdinand Co-
lumbus, which had written the Castilian lines of verse mentioned above. Gallardo
also published, although in normalized spelling, the letters of Columbus and Gor-
ricio, the Latin prayer on folio 2 recto, a few excerpts from the vernacular version of
the letter of Rabbi Samuel of Fez, the postil in Italian on folio 58 recto, the notes in

Columbus’s handwriting on folio 59 verso, and the Castilian lines of verse contained
in various pages of the manuscript.
Several decades later the celebration in 1 892 of the fourth centenary of the discov-
ery of America led to intensified scholarly interest, which was destined to influence

profoundly later studies of the Book of Prophecies.^'

In several papers published between 1888 and 1891, Simón de la Rosa y López,
bibliographer and Official Primero of the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular, undertook

for the first time a serious investigation of Columbus’s autograph materials based on

Varnhagen 1858; 71.

^"Harrisse 1866; 156-158, 217-218.
^Harrisse 1872: 187-190.
'"Cf. Gallardo 1866: 500-508.
*'Cf. Rusconi 1993a: appendix 111 .

I 2 INTRODUCTION
paleographic principles.'’^ Initially, in order to determine the particular characteristics
of the difl'erent Columbus family hands, he carefully examined the marginal postils
written in several incunabular editions, preserved in the library in Seville, that had
certainly belonged to Chnstopher Columbus and had later become part of Ferdinand’s
library. Refernng to the Book of Prophecies , he observed with great acumen that the
codicological structure formed by the insertion of successive fascicles gave evidence of
an arrangement stratified in time. The hypothesis, however, that the manuscript repre-
sented the fair copy, accomplished by several copyists, of “notes, recollections, and
odd bits of writing” was not persuasive.'"’

In conclusion, in the opinion of Simón de Rosa y López the manuscript was the la

fruit of a collaboration between the son Ferdinand, the father Christopher (many of

whose autographic interventions he had correctly identified), and the brother Bar-
tholomew. On the basis of this assumption he arrived at a division of the Book of

Prophecies based on the different hands involved: to the first hand, “that of an unknown
scribe, skilled in writing,” he ascribed the first two folios and all others throughout the

manuscript presenting the same graphic characteristics; the second hand, appearing
first on folio 3 recto, he assigned to the barely thirteen-year-old Ferdinand; the third
hand belonged to Christopher Columbus, who had written the draft of the letter to the

Spanish monarchs — but not the corrections made to this draft — and the entire verso

of folio 59.

All the Sevillian librarian’s paleographic puzzles were solved with the final attribu-

tion to Bartholomew Columbus of the Latin verses of Seneca at the top of folio 59

verso and the two marginal notes on folio 1 8 verso. The paragraph added to the end of
the draft of a letter to Ferdinand and Isabella (folio 6 recto), the marginal notes on folio

15 verso and 16 verso, and the text copied at the bottom of folio 37 verso were
attributed to Christopher Columbus.
Following in the footsteps ofjuan Bautista Muñoz, in 1
893 Juan de Dios de la Rada
y Delgado determined that the entire folio 59 verso had been copied by Columbus,
although in two different styles of writing; he also published in their entirety the texts

contained on this folio.

In 1888, as part of the grand project, the “Raccolta Colombiana,” the young secre-
tary of the Istituto Storico Italiano, Cesare De Lollis, carried out a complete survey of
the Spanish archives and libraries.^'’ In 1892 he published a photographic facsimile of
those folios in the manuscript of the Book o f Prophecies containing texts that he took to
be in Columbus’s hand, with a facing-page diplomatic transcription.'’^

•“Me la Rosa y López 1888; 1891a; 1891b. The results of his investigations were in part anticipated by de
Ariola 1889.
above all de la Rosa y López 1891a: xxiv-xxvi.

'’’Ibid: xxiv.

de la Rada y Delgado 1893.

**Cf. Caraci 1965: 1 1

'^De Lollis 1892. The reproductions are found at plates CII-CLVIII.

1.4 S 1 UD 1 KS 01 T H K MANUSCRIPT AND K D 1 1 I ONS O I 1 H K t K X 1 • 3

 On this occasion, largely in agreement with Simón de la Rosa y Lopez, he charac-
terized four distinct types of writing.^” Further, reasoning that an unstable handwriting

is more common for a nonprofessional scribe, he tried to identify, although with some
reservations, the hand of Columbus in the section written by Gorricio. He hesitated,

however, to take a position with regard to the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and
Isabella, while assigning to Ferdinand Columbus the handwriting of the original nu-
cleus of the manuscript. In fact, only two years later in 1894, De Lollis made open and
drastic corrections to his own conclusions, now identifying in rigorous fashion the

pages that had been transcribed by Gorricio.

The fruit of the labors of this dedicated and erudite Italian was, above all, the

appearance in 1
894 of the first critical edition of the complete Book of Prophecies, pro-

duced according to criteria that maintained with extreme accuracy the configuration
of the manuscript; to this day few faults can be found in this edition, and all are of slight
importance, pertaining for the most part to the historical apparatus.^® De Lollis was able
to partition the manuscript with considerable accuracy on the basis of the main hands
found within it. The first hand was that of Gorricio, to whom are attributed the
sections added to the original nucleus of the Book of Prophecies. A second hand had been
particularly active in the second fascicle; this was, in his opinion, an example of the
writing of the very young Ferdinand Columbus, who De Lollis believed to have writ-
ten the original nucleus of the collection. The transcription of the draft of the letter to

the Catholic monarchs was attributed to a third hand; and a fourth hand was identified

as that of Christopher Columbus, present however in two different writing styles.

The publication of the critical edition of the Book of Prophecies in the Raccolta Colom-
biana, which presented the principal historical, codicological, and paleographic infor-
mation, came to constitute a deterrent to further consultation of the original manu-
script on the part of scholars, as they no longer deemed it necessary. In addition, the

limitated availability of these voluminous tomes restricted access to the parts of the
codex that had been reproduced photographically.
After John Boyd Thacher, who published in 1904 a quite careful, if not always
accurate, analysis of the Columbian autographs and of the postils in the incunabula
conserved in the Biblioteca Colombina -y Capitular, study of the manuscript of the

Book of Prophecies was limited to references to the work of De Lollis. The American
scholar, however, pointed out clearly the role played by Gorricio in the redaction of
the final version of the collection.^’

A notable exception to the general trend is found in work published in 1928 by a

German Jesuit, Fritz Streicher. Streicher concentrated on an exclusively paleographic

^«Cf. De Lolhs 1892: X-XVI.

‘’’Cf. De Lollis 1894a: VII n.6.

’°Cf. De Lollis 1894b.

”Cf. Thacher 1904: 462. On the other hand, Curtis 1895 did no more than refer to the work of Simón
de la Rosa y López, somewhat inaccurately at that.

I 4 INTRODUCTION
analysis of all the autographs that had been attributed to Christopher Columbus^^ His
evaluations, drastically reducing the previous number of attributions, were immediately
and bitterly contested by Columbian scholars, but were never really refuted.^^ In fact,

the German scholar denied Columbian authorship to most of the postils written in the

margins of the incunabula possessed by Columbus and now in the Biblioteca Colom-
bina y Capitular in Seville. He came to the conclusion that only a very limited part of the
manuscnpt of the Book of Prophecies should be attributed to the hand of Columbus: the
draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, some corrections written on folio 4 recto, 4

verso, and 5 verso, the marginal note on folio 5 recto, and an addition to folio 6 verso;

the marginal annotation to the Augustinian and pseudo-Augustinian texts on folio 1

verso, 16 recto, and 18 verso; the excerpt from the prophet Jeremiah transcribed at the
foot of folio 37 verso; all the texts found on folio 59 verso; and a phrase — now almost
completely invisible — at the top of folio 84 verso. Streicher concluded that the manu-
script had been compiled almost entirely by Corrido and by an “unknown hand.” He
did not explicitly reject the identification of the latter as Ferdinand Columbus.
In succeeding decades, a number of clever and intriguing observations about the

Book o f Prophecies and its composition were in fact discredited by the lack of adequate
consideration and direct examination of the codicological and paleographic character-
istics of the manuscript.
Even in the schematically precise description of the Book of Prophecies provided by
Juan Gil for the collection of Columbian texts edited by Consuelo Varela and first

published in 1982, a detailed discussion of the manuscript in paleographic terms is not

given; Gil’s remarks are limited to the observation that “various hands can be de-

tected” within it.^^ This edition provides a list of Columbian autographs, including the
texts in Castilian on folio 59 verso, but also the writing samples on folio 77 recto and
the notes on folio 83 verso, and the lines of Castilian verse found on various pages.
Published in the same collection is the letter from Columbus to Corrido dated 26
February 1501, extracted from the Book of Prophecies, and the draft of the letter to

Ferdinand and Isabella from the same year.^^ Gorricio’s response has been included in

another collection of Columbian documents, edited jointly by the two scholars and
published in 1984.^*

^^Streicher 1928; see also Streicher 1929.

more articulate criticism, however, dealing with the postils found in the mcunabular edition of
Marco Polo owned by Chnstopher Columbus, is given in Gil 1986a: 1 16-125.
’^Cf the data summarized in Streicher 1928: 247-249.
”For example, see Ballestreros Beretta 1945: 683-700; Taviani 1991; 283-284 and 288; Watts 1985. Cf
also Cioranescu 1961: 492-496. In addition, Milhou 1983 does not distinguish completely the different
handwntings.
’*Cf Varela 1984: 286-291 (no. LI). According to Varela 1989a: 31, the draft of the letter to the Catholic
Monarchs earned corrections in the hand of Christopher Columbus, but was wntten by Gorricio.
^’Varela 1984: 277-281 (no.XLV) and 286 (no. L).

^*Gil and Varela 1984: 293-296 (no. XXX).

1.4 STUDIES OF THE MANUSCRIPT AND EDlllONS OF IHE TEXT 1

5
 An extremely accurate facsimile edition of the Book of Prophecies accomplished with
great care prior to the restoration of the manuscript, was published in Madrid, also in

1984. Unfortunately, the facsimile is preceded by a very sketchy introduction. The

publication includes a somewhat flawed translation of the Book of Prophecies into mod-
em Spanish.

Recently, Delno C. West, in successive stages, has investigated the Book of Prophe-
cies in preparation for a volume that reproduces, as it stands and without textual appara-
tus, the edition prepared by Cesare De Lollis for the Raccolta Colombiana, with a facing-

page translation into English made by August Kling.*”

Previously, as part of a survey of the critical-historical studies of the Book of Prophe-

cies, West had advanced the hypothesis that the conception of the entire Columbian
collection of texts could be dated to a decade before the first voyage of discovery. He
argued that Gorricio’s contributions to the manuscript were of very minor impor-
tance, as the latter states explicitly in his letter to Columbus. The long list of biblical
auctoritates given on folio 84 verso, in West’s opinion, were intended to indicate the
texts to be included in a subsequent updating of the Book of Prophecies.'^'
In two brief papers, published a year apart. West asserted that Gorricio had left

nearly intact the original configuration of the manuscript, which had been written in

three or four different hands under the direct supervision of Christopher Columbus.*^

He considered the postil in vernacular Italian on folio 58 recto to be a Columbian

autograph, thus demonstrating Columbus’s working knowledge of this language.*^
West outlined his hypotheses with respect to the Book of Prophecies in a paper pre-
sented in 1989 at an international congress: in his opinion eight different scribes had
taken part in the compilation of the manuscript.”'’
In the 1991 publication produced with August Kling, West increased unnecessarily
the number of different hands appearing in the Book of Prophecies. In the first place, he

accepted the assumption that the major part of the manuscript had been written out by
the thirteen-year-old Ferdinand Columbus, whose handwriting was associated with

the original nucleus of the manuscript. But Ferdinand’s hand is not identified in either
the lines of Castilian verse inserted at various places in the manuscript or in the long

passage transcribed from the scriptural commentary of Nicholas of Lyra on folio 62

verso (or in numerous other excerpts assigned by West to different “unidentified

hands’’). The role played by Gorricio was placed in a perspective that is fundamentally
correct. On the other hand, the conclusions about the autographic interventions of

Christopher Columbus seem misleading; to his handwriting are ascribed both the draft

”Alvarez Seisdedos 1984.

**‘^West and Kling 1991.
*'West 1987.
"^West 1988a.
"’West 1988b.
""West 1991.

I 6 INTRODUCTION
of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella and the marginal postils on folios i
5 verso
through 20 verso, the note in vernacular Italian on folio 58 recto, an entire paragraph
on folio 61 verso, and a lengthy marginal annotation on folio 77 verso. The attributions

relating to folio 59 verso and folio 83 verso are correct.”'’

Kay Brigham’s publication, which came out in the same year, consists of a simple
photographic reproduction of the original manuscript, followed by an English transla-
tion. The historical commentary on the separate parts of the Book of Prophecies re-
produces in substance that of the Raccolta Colombiana. A translation in Italian and one
in French, both published in 1992, are based on the critical edition of Cesare De
Lollis.”^ The recent translation into Spanish of Juan Fernández Valverde is also based

on the 1894 edition, while the apparatus to the sources and the individual texts of the
Book of Prophecies draws on the recent work of Francisco Alvarez Seisdedos and Juan
Gil, in addition to the Raccolta Colombiana.

Part 2 : The Principal Themes of the Book of Prophecies’^^

THE DRAFT OF THE LETTER TO

2.1

FERDINAND AND ISABELLA AND THE

PURPOSE OF THE COLLECTION OF TEXTS

At the beginning of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, Columbus describes his pur-

pose, namely, the promotion of the reconquest ofjerusalem: “my plan for the restitu-

tion of the holy temple to the holy Church Militant.’’^" Fie attempted to connect the
enterprise of the Indies to the liberation of the Holy Land from Muslim domination in

a draft of a letter to Pope Alexander VI, written about the same time but never sent;

“This enterprise was undertaken with the purpose of expending what was invested in
aiding the holy temple and the holy Church. After I had made the voyage and had seen
the land, I wrote to the king and queen.
The idea of the reconquest ofjerusalem and of the liberation of the holy sepulchre,

in the wake of the discovery of the Indies, had been present for a long time in Colum-
bus’s mind and gradually became his obsession. In a letter addressed to the Spanish

**^West and Kling 1991: 81-82 and 260-262.

“'’Bngham 1991.
'‘^Lequenne 1992; Melczer 1992.
“"Fernández Valverde 1992; Colección documental 1994 contains a diplomatic edition.

“’A more detailed exposition than that which follows can found in Rusconi 1993b. (For the analysis of
individual points, see Rusconi 1993a.)
’°Fol. 4 recto.

’’Varela 1984; 310 (no. LXI). The final allusion is in reality a repnse of a passage from another letter,

wntten “en la mar” on 4 March 1493 and sent to the Catholic Monarchs at the moment of Columbus’s
return from the first voyage. See Gil and Varela 1992: 192 f (no. 1 ).

2.1 THE DRAFT OF THE LETTER TO FERDINAND AND ISABELLA 1 7

 sovereigns from Hispaniola, 3 February 1 500, this theme is expressed in terms that are
amplified in the Book of Prophecies

The connection between the enterprise of the Indies and the liberation ofjerusa-

lem, with the success of the former serving to provide credibility for the latter, appears

to be a focal point m the autograph letter addressed to Queen Isabella, which can
probably be dated to August-September 1501.’^
In the first section of the draft of the letter to the Catholic monarchs Columbus
outlines his autobiography in rather self-serving terms designed to support his asser-

tions in the face of the inevitable critics. Having first gone to sea as an adolescent and
having followed that profession for some forty years, he had travelled all the known
routes and had been exposed to all the religions and cultures of the time, driven, on the
one hand, by a sort of mariner’s curiosity
— “This profession creates a curiosity about

the secrets of the world’’ — and following, on the other hand, the inspiration of an
“intelligent mind’’ granted to him by God directly. Indeed, the presentation of the
Columbian “entendimiento” as a direct gift from God recurs throughout the draft. All

the auctoritates drawn from the New Testament and cited in the course of the text treat
a single concept, that is, the prophetic vocation of the uneducated, as was Columbus,
who described himself as “an uneducated man” and “an uninformed sailor.”

In an obvious attempt to find an incontestable basis for his requests, Columbus

points out, although indirectly, the more markedly intellectual aspect of his own train-

ing. He states explicitly his desire to become better acquainted with various texts:

“During this time I have studied all kinds of texts: cosmography, histories, chronicles,
philosophy, and other disciplines.” When Columbus emphasizes, “He endowed me
with sufficient ability in astrology,” it is not unlikely that he had in mind books such as

Regiomontanus’s Ephemerides astrologicae and Abraham Zacut’s Almanack perpetuum.

He had printed editions of both, published during the last decades of the fifteenth
century.’^

In the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, however, Columbus appeals to
biblical authority to support his affirmations and to advance his projects: “I base what

’^Gil and Varela 1992: 402 and 404 (no. VIll); “Yo creo que se acordarán que aquel buen religioso, fray
Juan Pérez, el qual incitó a V. Al. a otras enpresas, ansí como a lade Granada y de los judíos, qu’él y yo
heñimos a su real solio con ésta de Yndias y apropriada para la
las conquista de la Casa Santa (. .) así como .

el templo de Jherusalem se hedificase con madera y oro de Ofir, que agora ello mesmo se restaure: a la

Yglesia Santa y se redifique él más suntuoso de lo qu’estava de primero.”

’Warela 1984: 303 (no. LVII): “Yo veu este negocio de las Indias muy grande. Los otros muchos que
Vuestra Alteza tiene, con su indisposición, non da lugar que el regimiento d’este vaya perfeto. Esto me
contnsta por dos cabos: el uno es por lo de Yerusalem, de que suplico a Vuestrao Alteza que non le tenga en
poco, ni que yo fablé en ello por arte; el otro que yo he miedo que este negocio se pierda (. . .). Vea agora
SI le aplaz de me experimentar como a tal en esto de las Indias y del otro de la Casa Santa.”
’^The following excerpts are all from folio 4 recto. The cited text is the edition published in the Reper-
tonum Columbianum, which refers to the numeration of the folios in the original manuscnpt, presently
conserved in the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular in Seville.

’^Cf moreover p. 35.

I 8 INTRODUCTION
I say only on holy and sacred scripture.”’^ This is seen in his careful enumeration of
Old and New Testament books, the Gospels, and the apostolic letters. (Rather
however, he mentions neither the Apocalypse nor 4 Ezra). His central argu-
strangely,

ment turns on the conviction that Scripture had long since foretold, through the
mouths of Christ and his prophets, the Columbian geographical discoveries. The cog-
nizance of these predictions, however, had been hidden up until then from the edu-
cated but revealed to the “uneducated” through the illumination of the Holy Spirit.

In addition to the authority of holy scripture, to which Columbus appeals in an

attempt to affirm the supernatural character of his own vocation (in a “prophetic” tone
sui generis, not burdened with messianic overtones), he states in the draft that he had
also consulted “the prophetic statements of certain holy persons who through divine
revelation have spoken on this subject.

The principal source of reference material for Columbus, although he cites Augus-
tine and the astronomical tables attributed to Alfonso X, was in fact a work of Pierre
d’Ailly, Eluddarium astronomicae concordiae cum theologica et histórica veritate.^'^ From that

source he deduced a universal chronology based on Augustinian theory, according to

which the world would last a total of 7000 years, beginning with the creation of Adam.
Counting 5343 years from that time to the birth of Christ, and from then 1 501 years to
the moment at which he drafted the letter to the Catholic monarchs, a total of 6845

years had already passed, leaving only 155 years until the time “when the world must
end.”^^ This temporal extension, moreover, serves to weaken substantially the urgency
of any eschatological-apocalyptic expectations.

2.2 AUGUSTINE’S OPUSCULA PLURIMA AND

COLUMBUS’S CONCEPTION OF HISTORY’"”

It seems likely that Columbus had indicated to an anonymous “Italian scribe” the

passages which he wanted to have copied into the manuscript, placing indications in
the margins of the printed editions he himself owned:’”’ a collection of the writings of

the French theologian Pierre d’Ailly, chancellor of the Sorbonne and a cardinal (1350-
1420), printed around 1483 at Louvain by Johann von Paderborn; and an anthology of
the works of Augustine, both authentic and spurious, published in Venice under the
title Opuscula plurima by Dionisio Bertocchi on 26 March 1491.’”^

’‘’Fol. 4 verso.
’^Ibidem.
’"Cf. Rusconi 1993b: 316-319.
’’Fol. 5 recto. Cf. Rusconi 1993b: 3 12-3 13.

Rusconi 1993a: scheda IV.

"”Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda III.

'“^The copy used by the “Italian scribe” is not, however, included among the volumes of the Biblioteca
Colombina y Capitular of Seville. For the texts gathered in such an edition, see the description given in GW
2866.

2.2 Augustine’s opuscula plurima and Columbus’s conception oe history 1 9

 The manuscript sent to Gorricio in September of 1501 was made up of four fasci-

cles:’”^ the first assembled the patristic and theological auctontates whose writings had

supplied Columbus with the criteria on which his collection had been based (as well as

the copy of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella), while the others contained a selection

of scriptural passages divided into three sections referencing either the past (“De
pretérito”), the present and the future (“De presenti et futuro”), or the end of time
(“De futuro. In novissimis”).

At the beginning of the first fascicle, on the recto of the first folio, a sort of title page
is written: “Saint Augustine. Remember the mercy you showed to us, so that from the
beginning, etc. Look for the rest in chapter 26 of the Soliloquies’’ (085).’”'* In fact,

Columbus had his “Italian scribe” transcribe first of all a group of Latin excerpts,
Augustinian and pseudo-Augustinian, selected from the writings included in his Vene-
tian edition of the Opuscula plurima.
From the pseudo-Augustinian Soliloquies of the Soul with God, a devotional work
from the end of the twelfth century that was more widely-known in the Middle
Ages than the authentic Augustinian Soliloquies, Columbus had specified a short ex-

cerpt to be copied (086). In the margin he placed a rubric in which he indicated

simply the first words of the text, “Before you formed me, you knew me,” thus

calling attention to the autobiographical and predictive character that he attributed

to the text.’”^

Some brief passages drawn from On the Divination of Demons follow in the manu-
script (087), in the margin of which Columbus wrote another rubric, recopying several
words of the text without observing the elementary rules of Latin grammar: “Univer-
sum orbem et omnes insulas convertentur ad Dominum.” As a result of the grammati-
cal lapse, the emphasis was shifted from his personal role to the universal significance of
the events for which he was protagonist, and in particular to the evangelization of the
peoples who had been destined to enter into the inheritance of the Hebrews, as a

subsequent autograph in the margin emphasizes: “The God of Israel is not among
these (people).”’”^

The theme of the universal conversion of the peoples, which the prophet Isaiah had
foretold in the Old Testament as an event destined to occur during the final days of the

world, constitutes the common denominator of the following three passages from
Augustine’s Confessions, again copied out from the Venetian edition (088-090).’”^

Rusconi 1993a: appendix I.

'°^Fol. 15 recto.

'“*Fol. 15 verso. Cf. PL 40, c.884.

'“'’Fol. 15 verso and fol. 16 recto. Cf. CSEL XXXXI, p. 611 (ch. VII: lines 17-22); pp. 614-615 (ch.
VIII: lines 13-22; i) and p. 6i6 (ch. VIII: lines 3-14); p. 618 (ch. X: lines 7-13).
'“^Fol. 16 recto-16 verso. Cf CCSL XXXII, p. 140 (V, 13: lines 8-10), p. 227 (XVI, 23: lines 6-19), p.

265 (XXV, 38: lines 24-26).

2 o INTRODUCTION
 As for Ofi Christian Education, a passage from the first section has been transcribed
that deals with biblical hermeneutics and the precise critena that should be used to
investigate the meaning of Scripture (091). From the second section Columbus se-

lected a much longer passage discussing the eschatological prophecy “de terra futuri
saeculi,” related in the Augustinian commentary to the Israel of the spirit, and thus to
Christians instead of Hebrews (092).’®“

A rather more extensive selection of texts is copied from On the Agreement of the
Evangelists (094—100), which is preceded in the manuscript by a rubric written by the
“Italian scribe”: “In the cited chapters he said many things about the Jews and about
what was going to happen. For the sake of brevity I have not written everything. I will

include something, nevertheless, as a reminder” (093: 2-3).’”^

Columbus’s interest is directed specifically toward two of Augustine’s subjects,

namely, prophecies concerning either the intransigence of the Hebrews or future

events connected to the universal conversion of mankind. The exact focus of his read-
ing is further confirmed by two autographic glosses, written in the margin at the

beginning of this section of the collection: “India lies at the extreme east of the world
and Spain with Ethiopia at the west: the Ocean sea lies in between”; and a little lower:
“Already the Indians are coming and destroying their idols.””®
In Columbus’s eyes, therefore, the Christians are the true heirs of the Old Testa-
ment prophecies; the conversion to Christianity of the peoples living in the farthest

corners of the earth is contrasted with the intransigence of the Hebrews. The tran-

scribed passages which follow, selected from the second and third book of Augustine’s
work, evidence a strong interest in the problem of the universal preaching of the
gospel as the final days of the world approached.

The presence at the beginning of of the Book of Prophecies of this selection of pas-

sages copied from Augustinian texts seems of exceptional importance, given that it

reflects a thoroughly personal choice indicated by Columbus in a printed anthology;

he had evidently gone to these texts in search of passages that seemed to lend support
to his personal role in the context of a markedly eschatological perspective. But be-
cause of the pragmatic way in which Columbus chose the texts, the rather improbable
hypothesis of his Augustinianism does not make sense. It is useful, however, to ac-
knowledge the extent to which these particular texts influenced Columbus’s reading
of Scripture and his choice of biblical passages to be entered in the remaining sections
of the original nucleus of the Book of Prophecies.

'‘'"Fol. 16 verso and 17 recto-18 verso. Cf. CCSL XXXII, p. 56 (XXI, 32: lines 29-36); pp. 107-110
(XXXIV, 48-49: lines 36-103).
'“’Fol. 18 verso-20 verso. Cf. CSEL XXXXIIl, pp. 39-40 (bk. I, ch. XXVI: lines 11-14); pp. 40-41
(ch.XXVI: lines 15-21); p. 42 (ch. XXVII: lines 11-14); P- 47 (ch. XXX; lines 2-4); pp. 53-54 (ch.
XXXII) and pp. 252-254 (bk. II, ch. LXXVII: lines 20-27; 1-25; 1); p. 380 (bk. Ill, ch. XXV: lines 7-1 1).

""Fol. 18 verso.

2.2 Augustine’s opuscula plurima and Columbus’s conception oe history 2 1

 2.3 CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS AND SCRIPTURE'"

In the first fascicle of the manusenpt, Columbus had the “Italian scribe” transcribe
in its entirety a long passage from the commentary on chapter 8 of the Book of Daniel,
drawn from one of the numerous printed editions of the Biblia sacra cum j^losa ordinaria

et interlinean, in particular, from an edition containing the scriptural commentary of

Nicholas of Lyra from the first half of the fourteenth century (oio)."^

In this passage, the Franciscan exegete discusses the double literal significance of

Scripture, that is, the prefiguration in the books of the Old Testament of what would
be realized in the New Testament: basically, the fact that each biblical personage is in

substance a prefiguration of Christ. The final phrase of the transcribed passage suggests
that Columbus’s reading was not focused strictly on exegesis, but could become genu-
inely eschatological: “His principal purpose is to discuss the battle of the Antichrist, or
of his followers, with the Christians; and so there exists a twofold literal meaning”
(010.9)."^

Moreover, although it is beyond doubt that Columbus and his “Italian scribe” had
access to a glossed edition of the Bible, it is not reasonable to assume his great familiar-
ity with the five voluminous tomes in folio of the fifteenth-century printed editions,
whose format was very different from that of the extremely manageable volumes
owned by Columbus.
Columbus’s recourse to the writings of Augustine and to the biblical commentary
of Nicholas of Lyra does not seem at all surprising, given the likelihood that his atten-
tion was drawn initially to the geographical information contained in their discussions

of specific scriptural passages. Augustine and Nicholas of Lyra had been at the center of
the dispute between Columbus and his detractors, mainly ecclesiastics, during the
discussion of his projected enterprise at the Junta de Santa Fe in the winter of 1491.

Alessandro Geraldini da Amelia, at the time a young legate from Pope Innocent VIII to

the Spanish court, relates (in an account written thirty years after the fact) that Colum-
bus had been accused of heresy by many of the Spanish bishops, “because Nicholas of
Lyra says that the continuous stretch of land extending from the Canary Islands in the
east to beyond the sea has no coasts extending to the lower part of the sphere. And
divine Augustine says that the Antipodes do not exist.” Geraldini had approached the
influential Cardinal Mendoza, asking him to reflect carefully on the consequences of

'"Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda VI.

'"Cf. Gosselin 1970; Reinhardt 1987.
"^Fol. 3 recto— 3 verso. Cf. Biblia Sacra (cum glossa ordinaria et interlinean et cum postillis Nicolai de Lyra),
Venice, Paganino Paganini, 18. IV. 1495 (GW 4283), III, fol. 890 versob.
"•Columbus’s copy of the Latin Bible has not yet been identified, given that it is absolutely not the case
that It has been identified with a manuscript conserved in the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular in Seville,
Cardinaiis S. P. Concordantiae Bibliae, as many have claimed, following de la Rosa y López 1891a: xix. Cf
Rusconi 1993a: scheda VI; and Avalos 1994.

2 2 1 N r R ODUC I I ON
affirmations of this nature, “because I felt that although Nicholas of Lyra was famous
for explicating sacred theology, and Augustine was impressive dealing with questions
of doctnne and sanctity, nevertheless they were deficient in cosmography.’’"^
In the original composition of the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies, the three

fascicles, “De pretérito,” “De present! et futuro,” and “De futuro. In novissimis,”
were included at this point. At first glance, Columbus’s choice of biblical passages to

be transcribed in these fascicles does not seem particularly discerning; it seems less

subjective, however, when placed in the framework of the historical theology that
Columbus had read in the works of Augustine and Pierre d’Ailly, filtered through the
scriptural commentaries of Nicholas of Lyra.
The morphology of the texts transcribed by the “Italian scribe,” sometimes in en-
tire chapters in an order that follows that of the individual books of the Bible, leads one
to think that Columbus had singled out these passages while leafing through the pages

of a printed edition of the Bible and had marked them for his collaborator to copy into
the Book of Prophecies, probably with marks of the type found in the incunabula in his
possession.

Columbus’s knowledge of Scripture should not be exaggerated, nor should it be

excessively underestimated. During his time, the introduction of moveable-type print-
ing had in fact facilitated the laity’s direct access to the Bible. There is no doubt,
furthermore, that Columbus’s approach to the Bible was generally of a traditional

nature and that, characteristically, he went to sacred text in search of authoritative

confirmation of his own discoveries.’"

2.4 THE ANTHOLOGY OF THE WORKS OF PIERRE

D’AILLY: FROM GEOGILAPHY TO ESCHATOLOGY'”*

An analogous reading on two levels moving from physical geography to historical

theology characterized Columbus’s approach to selecting texts from his heavily-an-

notated copy of the complete works of Pierre d’Ailly published at Louvain around
1483 by Johann von Paderborn.’" Approximately the first third of this edition was
devoted to the text of Itnaj^o mundi, which is considered to be the most important
source for Columbus’s knowledge of cosmography and for his many citations of au-
thors whose works he certainly had not consulted directly. He did not, however,

turn to this work — or to the astrological works included at the end of this collection

”*Geraldini 1631: 204 (lib. XIV). Cf. Menesto 1993-

"‘In the present arrangement, fols. 30 verso-53 recto; 55 verso-57 verso; 67 verso.
"’Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda VI.
"*See in particular Watts 1985; Gil 1989b (passim). Cf also Rusconi 1993a: scheda V.

"’Facsimile editions of the incunabulum owned by Columbus and presently conserved at the Biblioteca

Colombina y Capitular in Seville were published in Boston in 1927 by the Massachusetts Histoncal Society
and in 1990 m Madnd in the senes Tabula Americae.

2.4 THE ANTHOLOGY OF THE WORKS OF PIERRE d’aILLY 2 3

 of another chancellor of the Sorbonne, Jean Charlier de Gerson (1363-1429) — but
to other works of d’Ailly, when he made marginal indications for the “Italian
scribe.”

Columbus marked for transcription all of argument V of chapter IV of d’Ailly’s

Tractatus de lei^ibus et sectis contra superstitiosos astrónomos, a rather long selection that seeks
to trace chronological predictions dealing with the imminent fall of Muslim rule
(109).’^" Columbus’s essentially eschatological reading of this material can be deduced
from his marginal annotation in which only the citation from Acts 1.7’^’ is given (with
one of the grammatical errors typical of his modest knowledge of Latin): “Non est

vestrum nosce témpora vel momenta.

Following this excerpt in the manuscript, Columbus selected the entire passage “in

verbo XI” (i 10) from the Vi^intiloquium de concordia astronomicae veritatis cum tlieologia,^^^

marked in the margin of his copy with a sign in ink that draws attention to an excerpt
citing Augustine’s millenarist chronology as set out in the City of God.^^‘* This passage
is reprised in the draft of the letter to the Spanish monarchs, where both Augustine and
d’Ailly are mentioned (01 1.30).

Also in the drafted letter, calculating the date of the end of the world, Columbus
had made use of an abridged version of a general chronology presented in the thir-

teenth century in the Tabulae astronomicae, attributed to Alfonso X, “the Wise,” (on.

31) and derived from another work by d’Ailly, the Elucidarium astronomicae concordiae

cum theologica et histórica veritate, specifically from the section of the passage “in verbo
X” that contains the brief chronology copied into the Book of Prophecies by the “Italian
scribe” (i 1

Finally, from his own copy of d’Ailly’s treatise De concordia astronomicae veritatis et

narrationis historicae, a veritable outline of naturalist historical theology, Columbus had

the “Italian scribe” transcribe the beginning of chapter LVII (i 12), indicated by means
of two marginal signs accompanied by the autograph postil, “Joachim abbas Cala-
brus.”’^^ In addition, from chapter LXI of the same work the “Italian scribe” tran-

scribed an entire passage (i 13), indicated by the customary marks in Columbus’s hand
and the postil, “Sarra<;:eni Ysmaelis,” which drew attention to the central argument of
the selected passage: The sons of Ishmael, identified with the Saracens, will be the
leaders of the persecutions of Christians in the final days of the world, before the
coming of a king of the Romans. This king will fight victoriously against the forces of

'^“Fol. 24 recto-25 recto. Cf. the Louvain edition, Johann von Paderborn, ca. 1483 (Hain *836=837),
fol. 47 recto.
’^'Fol. 47 verso.
Rusconi 1993a: scheda XII.

'^^Fol. 27 recto-27 verso. Cf. ed. cit., fol. 97 recto.

’^“CeSL XLVIII, bk. XXII, ch. XXX, pp. 865-866.
’^^Fol. 25 verso. Cf ed. cit., fol. 97 recto.
*^*Fol. 25 verso-26 recto. Cf ed. cit., fol. 1 18 recto- 1 18 verso.

2 4 INTRODUCTION
Cíog and Magog and will reign in Jerusalem for ten and one-half years before the
coming of the Antichnst.’^’

From his reading ot d’Ailly’s treatises, Columbus derived an eschatological and

chronological frame of reference in which the related themes of Islamic religion and
the Saracens and the coming of the Antichrist are prominent. In fact, in the final
section of the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, as part of a section written by

the same scribe after Gorricio had returned the manuscript, the entire chapter LXI of
De concordia astronomicae veritatis et narrationis historicae was summarized, beginning with
the words: “The cardinal Pierre d’Ailly wrote at length about the end of the religion of
Mohammed and the coming of the Antichrist,” and continuing with a direct reference

to the last nine chapters of the treatise (oi 1.53).’^®

In conclusion, Columbus turned to the writings of Pierre d’Ailly in order to im-

prove his understanding of the connection established in Christian eschatology be-
tween the imminent last days of the world and a providential view of history. His aim
was to locate his own enterprise within this scheme, without going too deeply into the
details of apocalyptic prediction.
It is very difficult to establish exactly when Columbus read selections from the
printed anthology of Pierre d’Ailly’s works or, above all, when he personally glossed
the texts. But given the evident parallelism, the autograph notes on the incunabulum,
the passages transcribed in the Book of Prophecies, and some excerpts from the letter to
Ferdinand and Isabella strongly support the hypothesis that he was particularly inter-
ested in historical eschatological writings toward the end of 500,
1 after his third voy-
age.

In fact, in the narrative account of the third voyage written in 1498, Columbus
referred to “the cardinal Pierre d’Ailly,” and specifically to chapters XI and XII of his
Imago mundi in the course of a long digression on the dimensions of the globe in which
he cites a large number of classical and medieval auctoritates that he could have known
only secondhand. But in the group of passages copied from other works of the
French theologian into the Book of Prophecies (and in the references to him in the letter

to Ferdinand and Isabella), d’Ailly was to Columbus an unquestioned authority on

chronology, as well as eschatological events and apocalypticism, and therefore on pre-
dictions about the defeat of Islam and the coming of the Antichrist. In the last analysis,

d’Ailly is the inspiration for the brief marginal annotations

— “Concerning the coming
of the Antichrist” and “This chapter with end of
deals world” —
the the written by
Columbus beside the two passages from the prophet Daniel (01 1.18; 012. i), copied by
the “Italian scribe” into the Book of Prophecies.

'^’Fol. 26 recto— 26 verso. Cf. ed. cit., fol. 120 recto— 120 verso.
’^**Fol. 6 recto.
and Varela 1992: 390 and 392 (no. VI).
'^Fol. 42 verso. Actually, m the manusenpt Columbus wrote “istum” in place of the correct fonn
“istud.”

2.4 THE ANTHOLOGY OF THE WORKS OF PIERRE d’aII. LY 2 5

 It seems difficult, however, to argue from this evidence that a reading of the entire

works of Pierre d’Ailly, in the Louvain edition of ca. 14H3, had made Columbus aware
from the outset of the eschatological relevance of his own enterprise, or that on the

authority of these works, he had come to believe that he had been predestined to carry
out his own deeds in the final moments of history. Rather, his attention was directed
to the prediction contained in these works of the impending defeat of the Saracens and
the installation of a Christian monarch in Jerusalem.

Taken in this light, Columbus’s reading of the treatises of Pierre d’Ailly comple-
mented his reading of Augustine in the configuration of his personal conception of
history. Thus it is very likely that Columbus’s eschatological awareness, that of a largely
self-taught layman, matured gradually; and that little by little he came to believe that he
had found in the traditional encyclopedic literature from the late Middle Ages a his-

toric and theological context in which he could locate his geographical discoveries.

2.5GORRICIO’S COLLABORATION IN THE

REDACTION OF THE BOOK OF PROPHECIES'^'
From the moment he received from Columbus the original manuscript of the Book of

Prophecies, Gorricio’s principal concern seems to have been that of consolidation; that
is, he sought to provide more solid foundations, primarily theological and scriptural,

for Columbus’s assertions, which were in his opinion not adequately supported by the
texts already copied into the various fascicles.

Reordering the documents in the first fascicle, Gorricio inserted several brief texts
before the passage that the “Italian scribe’’ copied from the biblical commentaries of
Nicholas of Lyra. His purpose was to provide a much more careful definition of cor-
rect scriptural exegesis.

The first text is an illustration of the traditional four interpretive levels of Scripture,
copied in its entirety from the Summa de casibus conscientiae of a Franciscan, Angelo
Carletti of Chivasso (ca. 1415- 1495) (004). The passage possibly was taken from an
exemplar of the edition printed Venice on 7 June 1499 by Paganino Paganini,
in

contained in the library of the Carthusian monastery of Santa Maria de las Cuevas, to
which Gorricio belonged. Directly after this text, he placed the extremely well-
known mnemonic verses by the Dominican Agostino di Dacia, written around 1260 in

the Rotulus pu^illaris (005).'^^ Although the verses are attributed in the manuscript to

Jean Charlier de Gerson, it is more likely that they were taken from the entry “alle-

Rusconi 1993a: scheda VIII.

'^^Fol. 2 recto. The passage is found on fols. i 58 verso- 159 recto of the 1499 edition. For the exemplar,
cf Tamayo y Francisco and Ysasi Ysamendi 1967: 7 (no. 15). For information about the theologian and
Franciscan canonist, see at least Fezzella 1977.
'^^Cf Kaeppeli 1970: 135 (no. 341).

2 6 INTRODUCTION
goria” in a treatise written around 1286 by another Dominican, Ciiovanni Balbi of
Genoa, the Catholicon seu sumtna prosodiae, possibly from the edition printed in Venice
in 1487 by Hermann Liechtenstein of Cologne.’^'* Continuing his pedantic accumula-
tion of traditional authorities on scriptural exegesis, Gorricio added at this point a

compendium of a passage from the introduction to Rationale dwitwrum officiorum by the

canonist Guillaume Durand (ca. 1231-1296) (006). The work, printed first in 1459,

was published in over forty editions during the remainder of the fifteenth century;
Gorricio might well have used an edition printed in Naples in 1478.’^-^

Gorricio followed these texts with two passages, the first taken from the edition of
Augustine’s sermons (Sermonum opera) printed at Basel by Johann Amerbach in 1494
and 1495 (008),’^^ and the second from the edition of Isidore of Seville’s Sententiae

published (together with the Etymolo^iae) in Venice by Peter Loslein in 1483 under the
title De summo bono (009—010).’^’
It is clear that the Carthusian monk’s additions to the original collection were in-

tended to gather auctoritates to support, on the level of theological and exegetical meth-
odology, the selection of biblical passages made by Columbus and completed by Gor-
ricio. He wanted to provide the foundation for a reading of Scripture that would yield
an eschatological interpretation of the events connected to Columbus’s discoveries.

2.6 THE BIBLE AND THE MYTH OF THE ISLANDS

Gaspar Gorricio’s objective was to complete the program which Columbus had
sketched out, and his work could not help but accentuate the fundamentally orthodox
nature of the appeal to biblical authority in the Book of Prophecies.
By way of confirmation, we may note that at the time the original manuscript was
sent from Granada to Seville, Gorricio had inserted a group of passages to fill up pages
in the various fascicles left blank by the “Italian scribe.’’’^** But in this context, the two
sections of the Book of Prophecies compiled in their entirety by the Carthusian monk
seem more relevant: a culling of prophetic passages from the Book of Psalms (012—
076),’^’ and parts of the fourth fascicle containing biblical texts that mention islands
(224-274).’'“’

Gorricio’s methods, derived from his theological and exegetical training, are subs-

Kaeppelli 1975: 3X0-383 (no. 2199). On this subject, see particularly Pittaluga 1987.

Cf. Langártner 1980. For the exemplar, see Tamayo y Francisco and Ysasi Ysasmendi 1967: 28 (no.

92).
”‘'Fol. 2 verso. For the charactenstics of the edition, cf GW 2920.
’’’Fol. 2 verso. See also the other excerpt on fol. 12 verso, copied from the Etymoloj^iae. For the charac-
tenstics of the edition cf. Cataloj^ue of Books 1924: 379.

*^*Cf infra.
'^’Fols. 6 verso- 1 1 verso.

'“'Fols. 77 verso-83 verso.

2.6 r H K H BLKI AND THK MY HI () |- F H E ISLANDS 2 7

 tantially different from those of Columbus. Clearly, the monk used a biblical concor-
dance to select passages, probably the Concordatitia hihliomm from the end of the thir-

teenth century, traditionally attributed to the Dominican friar Konrad von Halberstadt
and available in print since 1474.'“’'

Curiously, none of the marginal notations that Columbus made in the manuscript
after it had been returned to him were placed in the margins of the large selection of
passages which Gorricio had taken from the Book of Psalms. Nonetheless, Columbus
had to have been struck by the selections the monk had made; the two dominant
concerns were, in fact, the recovery of Mount Zion and the ultimate conversion of all
the peoples of the world. Indeed, this collection of biblical passages went somewhat
beyond the simple function of providing necessary scriptural support for the program-
matic assertions contained in the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella.

Gorricio, who must have used either a biblical concordance or a glossed edition of
the Bible, is responsible for the final section of the Book of Prophecies, which contains an
orderly arrangement of all scriptural passages in which Tarshish, Kittim, Ophir, and the
islands of the sea are mentioned. The provisional state in which his work was left is

demonstrated by the many pages in the manuscript that remain blank, despite the great
care that had gone into transcription and rubrication, indicated by several corrections,
signs of last minute reconsideration and by his hasty concluding comment: “We have
omitted writing many things about the islands of the sea, believing that these few
things will be sufficient for our purpose” (275).'“*^

Notwithstanding the absence of an explicit assertion to this effect, it is clear that

Gorricio had wanted to cite all biblical passages referring to islands because their identi-
fication with the lands discovered by Columbus had become a crucial factor in the

explorer’s thinking.’'*^

2.7 EVANGELIZATION AND ESCHATOLOGY'-'^

In the process of the double redaction of the Book of Prophecies, Columbus’s initial

indications and Gorricio’s additions became an organic whole. Greatly preoccupied

with finding an eschatological foundation for his own undertaking, Columbus began
with Augustine and Pierre d’Ailly, while Gorricio appeared to have more interest in
establishing correct criteria for scriptural exegesis.

The common denominator among Gorricio’s additions to the Book of Prophecies

appears to have been a great preoccupation with the universal preaching of the gospel.

'"Cf. Kaeppeli 1970: 276-278; Rouse and Rouse 1974: 19-21.

'•^Fol. 83 verso.

Rusconi 1993a: scheda XI; and West 1992.

Rusconi 1993a: scheda VIII; Rusconi 1993b: Rusconi 1993c; and West 1992.

2 8 I N I R ODUC r I ON
given the imminent end of the world. In addition to several evangelical passages and
Nicholas of Lyra’s corresponding commentary (101-104), a more recent work is ex-
plicitly mentioned in a “Nota” (105) and an accompanying marginal rubnc, “How the
Gospel of Christ has been preached throughout the world, the Postilla litteralis in

evan^elium Xiatliaei by Alfonso Fernández de Madrigal, known as “el Tostado” (ca.

1410-1455), a theologian in Salamanca and bishop of Avila from 1445.’'’'^

Corrido refers briefly to a passage of this commentary taken from two dense col-
umns of text in the second volume of Floretum Sancti Matlmei, an abridged edition
prepared by Pedro Jiménez de Préxamo and published in folio in Seville 30 September
1491 by the Compañeros Alemanes.''*®

In the body of the quaestio “el Tostado” reworks Nicholas of Lyra’s commentary,
inserting here and there pieces of text, which appear in square brackets in the in-

cunabular edition. In the first group the Salamancan theologian discusses whether the
universal preaching of the gospel had taken place in the age of the apostles, or whether,

given the approaching end of the world, a new universal evangelization should be

expected. In these pages, the theme of the eschatological conversion to Christianity of

the peoples of the world seems to have been an urgent concern well before Colum-
bus’s discovery of the “islands.”

The second part of the same quaestio takes up the problem of the “subversion” of
Jerusalem, taken as a certain sign of the end of history and again directly connected to
the urgency of universal evangelization: “because no one knows when the preaching
throughout the whole world will be finished.”
A reading of the entire quaestio in “el Tostado’s” commentary supports the notion
that it played an important role in the formation of Gorricio’s eschatology that is

ultimately and directly reflected in his contributions to the Book of Prophecies.

A passage from the last section of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella confirms the

general direction of Gorricio’s efforts in the final redaction of the Book of Prophecies.
For, after a folio of the manuscript had been removed, he rewrote the last part of the
draft himself, although in a more cursive hand than that which he used elsewhere in

the manuscript. In particular, he is responsible for a paragraph written in his usual

hand, insisting on the eschatological imminence of the universal preaching of Chris-

tianity, and attributing the thoughts to Columbus: “I said above that much that has

been prophesied remains to be fulfilled, and I say that a sign of this is the acceleration

of Our Lord’s activities in this world. I know this from the recent preaching of the
gospel in so many lands.” (01 1.5

Rusconi 1993a: sclieda VIII.

'^'’Fol. 21 recto.

Reinhardt and Santiago Otero 1986: 64-79.

'-“Vol. II, ch. XXIV, q. 47.

'^’Fol. 6 recto.

2.7 KVANGLl. IZATION AND HSCHAIOIOGY 2 9

 2.8 THE CONVERSION OF THE PEOPLE OF ISRAEL''^*’

Gaspar Gorricio, in rearranging the first fascicle of the manuscript of the Book of Prophe-
cies, transcribed in their entirety chapters i6 to i8 ofa vernacular Castilian version of
the Epistula rabbi Samuel de Fez de adventu Messiae, missa rabbi Isaac. The precise mar-
ginal rubrics are his as well, indicating the care he took in copying this text.’^'

The letter is written in the customary style of an anti-Judaic apologia and en-
deavours to demonstrate that because the messianic scriptural prophecies had found
their historical realization in the person of Jesus of Nazareth, from that point on the
true religion was Christianity.’^^

The main message of the Epistula is given in the central chapters that Gorricio
copied into the Book of Prophecies: the God of Israel has made a new alliance with a new
people, the Christians. It is quite likely that Gorricio was led to this particular tran-
scription by the perceived need to substantiate Columbus’s reference at the beginning

of his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella to the theme “of the restitution of the Holy
Temple to the Holy Church” (oi 1 . 2 )’” with the words of an author having a solid

reputation in theology.
Once again it seems that the criterion that had directed Gorricio in his choice of
texts was the eschatological value assigned to the conversion of the Hebrews to the
Christian faith. Indeed, the convergence of eschatologico-apocalyptic expectations
and anti-Judaic apologia was characteristic of many collections of texts printed during
these years in the Iberian peninsula.”’"’

The chapters of the Castilian translation of the Epistula attributed to the rabbi Sam-
uel of Fez that Gorricio copied are not particularly important to the Book of Prophecies

as a whole. It would be very difficult, in any case, to argue from a familiarity with this

anti-Judaic treatise to a supposed Jewish ancestry of Christopher Columbus.”’"’

Rusconi 1993a: scheda IX.

'^’Fol. 13 recto— 14 verso. Cf. Samuelis Marochiani De adventu Messiae praeterito Liber, m PL 149, cols.
353AC-354AB; 354C; 355AC.
'®^The work, however, was known only through its Latin translation, sent in 1339 to the Master-general
of his own Order by the Dominican Alfonso Bonhombre. A context of this nature casts doubt on the
existence of an onginal redaction written around 1070 in Arabic. (Furthermore, some of the author’s argu-
ments reveal a scholastic training in theology). On this subject, see primarily Meersseman 1940; Kaeppeh
1970: 48-55; Reinhardt and Santiago-Otero 1986: 57-58 (no. 2/2).

'*^Fol. 4 verso.

'^''For example, an anthology edited by the Aragonese humanist Martin Martinez de Ampies, Los libros

del Anticristo y judycio Jinal 0 postrimero con el sermon del señor Sant Vicente bienaventurado (namely, the Aragonese
Dominican fnar Vicente Ferrer, canonized in 1455), had appeared for the first time m Saragoza, in the type
of Paul Hurus, between 8 and 15 October 1496, and had been pnnted by Friedrich Biel in Burgos in 1497.

In the appendix to both editions, a version in Castilian of the Epistula had been inserted, probably the one
made by Alvaro de Villaescusa in Salamanca in 1458. Cf. Reinhardt and Santiago-Otero 1986: 229—230 (no.
104).

most through presentation of the hypothesis of Columbus’s Hebraic ongins, see Gil 1977 and
'**For the

Gil 1989b; 206-217. For a summary of problems with the supporting arguments, cf Milhou 1983 (passim)

and West-Klmg 1991; 43-46.

3 o INTRODUCTION
 Within the eschatological framework of Christianity the theme of the conversion of
Israel loomed large from the very beginning. It was given renewed strength, however,
m the Christian west after the capture of Constantinople by the Turks in 1453,'^^ and

in the Jewish world after the expulsion from Spain in 1492.'-'^’

2.9 CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, JOACHIM OF

FIORE, AND IBERIAN POLITICAL MESSIANISM'^”

In the original arrangement of the Book of Prophecies the fourth section of the manu-
senpt was intended to include a collection of auctoritates “De futuro. In novissimis”

(22 1. 1), relating to the final days of history. It seems, however, that the “Italian scribe”
transcribed only a few lines from the prophet Jeremiah at the beginning of the verso of

the first page (221.2).’” In the space left blank Corrido later copied a passage from a

letter which the ambassadors of the republic of Genoa had presented to the Spanish

sovereigns in Barcelona in 1492 (222).’^’’

Immediately below the passage in question, the folio has been cleanly cut, opening
the door to endless speculation on the contents of the missing piece, as well as of the

other folios that were removed after it.

The passage contained in the manuscript mentions a prophecy attributed to Joa-

chim of Fiore, the Calabrian monk who died in 1202, author of several theological
works that contain the most innovative eschatologico-apocalyptic exegesis of the last

centuries of the Middle Ages.’^’ For this reason, he soon was widely-known as a

prophetic authority, with the consequent attribution to him of a series of undoubtedly

spurious predictions. One of these is the prophecy transcribed in the Book of Prophecies,

“that someone from Spain would restore the arch of Zion.”’^^ This is, in fact, an

adaptation of the vaticination Vae rtmtido in centum annis, handed down in the Tractatus

de mysterio cymbalorum written in 1301 by the Catalonian physician and theologian

Arnold of Villanova: “The earth will be destitute, until the new David comes to

restore the arch of Zion.

The initial wide circulation of this prediction occurred above all in radical Francis-

'^'’See, at least, Pertusi 1988.

'”See, for example, the episodes recorded in Gil 1989b: 214-217.

Rusconi 1993a: sclieda X; Rusconi 1993d.
'”Fol. 67 verso.
'*“No copy of this letter from the Genoese ambassadors is otherwise known; and, as a matter of fact, even

the dating of the manusenpt to 1492 does not seem to be entirely correct, because the ambassadors of the
Genoese Republic, Francesco Marches! and Giovanni Antonio Gnmaldi, did not arnve in Barcelona until
10 Apnl 1493. Their mission was to congratulate Ferdinand and Isabella on the recent reconquest of the
kingdom of Granada. Cf Rumeu de Armas 1989: 93-94.

'"'Cf De Fraja 1988.

'*^Fol. 67 verso.
'*^ln Pou y Marti 1930: 54-55. For this identification, see pnmanly Milhou 1983: 375-379.

2.9 CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, JOACHIM OF FIORE, & IBERIAN POLITICAL MESSIANISM 3 1

 can circles; but after 1377 when the infante Pedro of Aragon, who had joined the
Order, restated it in political terms, the oracle was interpreted with ever greater resolu-
tion in favor of an Iberian monarchy and seemed to have been realized with the
reunification of peninsular royal authority in the hands of Ferdinand of Aragon and
Isabella of Castille. In fact, messianic prophecy, which associated the defeat of Islam
and the reconquest ofjerusalem, had become a characteristic element of political prop-
aganda on the peninsula from the beginning of the fifteenth century.
Joachim of Fiore’s name appears several times in the collected works of Pierre
d’Ailly printed at Louvain around 1483.'^’’ In his personal copy Columbus had marked
two passages that mention the monk and Calabrian theologian for the “Italian scribe’’

to copy into the Book of Prophecies. In the first of these, recopied from the fourth
chapter of the treatise De lej^ihus et sectis contra superstitiosos astrónomos, Joachim is in-

cluded within a brief list of prophetic auctoritates (109,16);’^^ the second, taken from

chapter LVII of De concordia astronomicae veritatis et narrationis liistoricae, includes among

the decisions taken in the course of the fourth Lateran council in 1215 the condemna-
tion of Joachim’s trinitarian doctrines (112.5).^^^ But it was above all the following

passage — which refers to the prediction made by Joachim to Philip Augustus II of

France and Richard I of England, the “Lion-hearted,” about the liberation of the holy
sepulchre (1 12.6) — that surely attracted Columbus’s attention, for next to this passage

in his copy of the works of Pierre d’Ailly is a marginal rubric, probably autograph:
“Joachim abbas Calabrus.”’^®
The figure of Joachim of Fiore had become familiar to Columbus through his

reading of d’Ailly. In this way he had learned that the Calabrian monastic theologian
was one of the most important prophetic auctoritates of the medieval west and that he
had made predictions about the liberation of Jerusalem, which seemed increasingly
close to fulfillment in the explorer’s own time.

It is not reasonable to assume, however, that Columbus had direct knowledge ei-

ther of Joachim’s theological and exegetical writings or of the prophetic literature

(including a prophecy attributed directly to a “frater Colombinos”) that circulated

under his name during the thirteenth to fifteenth centuries. Consequently it cannot
be argued on good grounds that his eschatological views could have been derived from
a Joachimitic framework, whether authentic or spurious.
To Columbus, however, the text of the pseudo-Joachimitic political prophecy
transcribed by Gorricio in the Book of Prophecies seemed very important because it

complemented his own expectations. In an autographic addition at the end of the

'*^See the large number of references throughout Milhou 1983.

'**Cf Rusconi, 1993a; sebeda X. See Milhou 1983; West 1991.
'‘’'’Fol. 25 recto.
'*^Fol. 26 recto.
Mundi: fol. i i8 recto.

'*’Cf Kerby-Fulton and Daniel 1991: Brown and Lerner 1989-1990.

3 2 INTRODUCTION
drafted letter to Ferdinand and Isabella he translated it accurately into Castilian as
follows: “The Calabrian abbot Joachim said that whoever was to rebuild the temple on
Mount Zion would come from Spain” (oi

Derived also from the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies, which Columbus had
probably carried with him, is the reference to this prophecy in the letter describing the
fourth voyage, which he sent to Ferdinand and Isabella from Jamaica on 7 July 1503:
“Jerusalem and Mount Zion will be rebuilt by a Christian; God tells who it will be
through the mouth of the prophet in the fourteenth psalm. The abbot Joachim said

that this person would come from Spain.””’

For Columbus the theme of Spanish political propaganda, central throughout the
fifteenth century, was placed in a framework that was eschatological only in a periph-

eral sense, at least during the period included between the first voyage in 1492 and his

return in chains from the third voyage in 1500. But with the passage of time it is

undeniable that Columbus began to view the goal of the liberation ofJerusalem from
Muslim domination in more apocalyptic sense. At some point the discovery of the
West Indies became identified in his mind with one of the events which would pre-
cede the end of the world, along with the liberation of the holy sepulchre and the
universal conversion of the peoples to the gospel of Christ.

All these factors, in truth, converged rather rapidly on the Iberian peninsula during
the first years of the sixteenth century under the influence of the broad tradition of

apocalyptic eschatology in the Franciscan circles and the vast diffusion of a form of
messianic political propaganda in favor of the Crown. But several decades would pass

after the discovery of the new world before the religious orders, and in particular the
Franciscan missionaries in America, would view the process of evangelization of the

new peoples in the light of an eschatological and apocalyptic interpretation that is

undeniably Joachimitic.”^

THE “PROPHECY” OF SENECA

2.10

AND ASTRONOMICAL ALMANACS”^

It is quite reasonable to think that Columbus took the manuscript of the Book of

Prophecies with him on his last voyage. The text of the letter that he sent to Ferdinand
and Isabella from Jamaica on 7 July 1503, in addition to emphasizing central themes
present in the drafted letter from the Book of Prophecies (the evangelization of all the

'^®Fol. 6 recto.
and Varela 1992: 432 (no. IX). Furthermore, Psalm 14 was not included among the passages
'^'Gil

collected by Columbus and Corrido m the Book of Prophecies. In any case, the prediction appeanng m verse

7 IS of a generic type: “Quis dabit ex Sion salutare Israel? Cum averterit Dominus captivitatem plebis suae,

exultabit lacob, et laetabitur Israel.”

'^^See at least Phelan 1956 [1970
‘^

1 ;
Baudot 1977; Prospen 1976, 1991, and 1992.
’’^Cf Rusconi 1993a: schede XIII and XIV.

2.10 THE “prophecy” OE SENECA AND ASTRONOMICAL ALMANACS 33

 peoples and the liberation ofJerusalem) definitely borrows some texts from the collec-
tion.'^'*

In addition to the reference to the pseudo-Joachimitic prophecy about the creation

of a messianic kingdom in Jerusalem, two other excerpts from the same letter refer to

a page in the Book of Prophecies on which Columbus had personally written a series of
notes. In the letter he refers to a nocturnal vision that he had during a moment of
great distress, and attributes the following words to a voice that spoke to him: “I gave
you the key to free the timid inhabitants of the Ocean sea, who were restrained by

such strong chains.”'^*

At the top of this page in the manuscript, which had been left blank, Columbus had
transcribed, in a book hand somewhat different from his habitual cursive, some lines

from the tragedy Medea, written by the Latin poet Lucius Anneus Seneca (204).'^^

Immediately below he had written a Castilian translation that seems to wander a bit

from the original text, in the addition of a gloss identifying the pilot Tiphys, Jason’s

guide on the mythical voyage, as a prefiguration of the Genoese navigator: “During

the last years of the world, the time will come in which the Ocean sea will loosen the
bounds and a large landmass will appear; a new sailor like the one named Tiphys, who
was Jason’s guide, will discover a new world, and then Thule will no longer be the

most remote land’’ (205).

The reference to himself and to his enterprise had appeared more than plausible to

Columbus from the moment he had laid his hands on a printed edition of Seneca’s
tragedies, prepared by the Italian humanist Bernardino Gellio Marmita and published
for the first time in Lyon in 1491. In this edition the text of Medea was part of an
interpolated redaction in which the correct reading “Tethysque” had been replaced
with “Tiphisque,’’ the basis of the Columbian interpretation of the lines, which, in any
case, reproduced many of the elements from the gloss in the early printed edition.'^**

Christopher Columbus was looking for any type of prediction, even in classical texts,

that could conceivably refer to him; for this reason he had turned even to Seneca’s
Medea, which perhaps had seemed to him to be an account of a sea voyage toward
unknown Asia. He wanted, moreover, to clinch the argument that these events were
part of a wider eschatological perspective. Toward that end, in the margin of the letter

to Ferdinand and Isabella in the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies he wrote the same
rubric that precedes the Latin lines of verse and placed a sign indicating that in the final

version of the letter a paragraph, inspired by these verses, should be inserted before the
one identifying premonitory signs of the final days of the world found in the Bible.

Gil and Varela 1992: 406-439 (no. IX).

'”Fol. 59 verso.
'^*Gil and Varela 1992: 420.
'^^Seneca, Medea, vv. 374-379.
'^"See the reedition pnnted in Venice by Lazzaro Soardi on 12 December 1492 (Ham 14666), fol. V
recto. Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda Xlll; Moretti 1986; and Romm 1994.
'”Fol. 5 recto.

3 4 INTRODUCTKJN
 Even the other excerpt from the letter describing the fourth voyage, which refers to
the page containing autograph notes in the Book of Prophecies, is an important testimony
to Columbus’s intellectual and cultural outlook: “I know that in 1494 1 sailed 24
degrees to the west until 9 o’clock and could not take a bearing because there was an
eclipse; the sun was in Libra and the moon in Aries. What I knew by word-of-mouth
I had learned a great deal about by reading.”’*^*’

The rest of that page is taken up by two long annotations recounting the astro-
nomical observations made by Columbus during the second and the fourth voyage,
specifically, during the lunar eclipses on 14 September 1494 and 29 February 1504
(206—207).’”’ These annotations were intended to determine the longitude of the
island on which he was located and thus to locate it in current geographical
knowledge. At that time the only known method for determining longitude was
by means of an eclipse, making reference to an astronomical almanac. “See the Al-
manac,’’ Columbus wrote on the last line (207.5), probably referring to a book in

his possession printed at Leiria in Portugal in 1496, Tabulae tabularum coelestium

motuum astronomi Zacuti nec non stellamm fixarum lon^itudinem ac latitudinem ad motus

veritatem mira diligentia reductae in principio cánones ordinatissime incipiunt felici sidere,

bound together with a copy of the Almenach perpetuum cuyus radix est annum 147J
compositum ab excelentisimo magistro in astronomia nomine vocatur Zecutus, the work of
the doctor and astrologist Abraham ben Samuel ben Abraham Zacut, translated into

Latin in 1481.’”^
Columbus also possessed an edition of the Ephemerides astronomicae of the German
astronomer Johann Müller von Konigsberg (known as “Regiomontanus’’), printed in

Venice in 1481, which was also entitled “Almanach” on the front page of many edi-

tions. In fact, the idea of using a lunar eclipse as a reference point to calculate longitude
comes from the editio princeps of this work, which appeared in Germany in 1474. It is

very possible that Columbus used the Ephemerides to make the observations mentioned
in his notes.

Part j: The Edition

3.1 THE MANUSCRIPT OF THE BOOK OF PROPHECIES

The original manuscript of the Book of Prophecies is conserved at the Biblioteca Colom-
bina y Capitular in Seville and is arranged as follows, subsequent to the recent restora-
tion;

and Varela 1992: 412.

Rusconi 1993a: scheda XIV.
de Albuquerque 1986; for the Columbian exemplar, see Biblioteca Colombina 1 ,
3-4.

'”See Zinner 1937. Cf Zmner 1935 and 1990. For the Columbian exemplar, see Biblioteca Colombina V,
58-59.

3.1 THE MANUSCRIPT OE THE BOOK OB BROBHUCIliS 3 5

 I folio added in 16S2

II— III folios added in 1823

1-85 four original fascicles, numbered through 84 in 1682

(I: 1-29; 11:30-53; III: 54-h6; IV: 67-85)

IV folio added in 1830

On the spine of the parchment binding appear the words: “Colón. Prophec. de

civit. Hierusalem et Indias.” The handwriting leads one to think that the manuscript of
the Book of Prophecies may have been bound in its current form some time after the

transfer of Ferdinand Columbus’s library to the cathedral of Seville in the second half
of the sixteenth century.
Before the recent restoration the folios of the manuscript had deteriorated
greatly, particularly along the margins; in particular, the first folio contained, prior

to 1766, a large lacuna which later became larger. The dimensions of the folios,

measured at the center of the second fascicle, are approximately 300 x 215 mm.
All the fascicles derive from the folding of folios containing the same watermark:
“Main, aux quatre doigts serrés, le pouce seul écarté,” like Briquet 11151-11168,’**'*

surmounted by a six-pointed star from which a line descends to touch the finger-
tips, while on the wrist a double band is drawn, one on the back of the hand and
the other at the base. This watermark is comparable to Briquet 11154 (Palermo
1482, with attested variants at Milan 1479 and Catania 1480), Briquet 11159
(Genoa 1483’*^), or Briquet 11164 (Genoa 1493-1494’**^). The watermark has nota-
ble similarities, however, with that of register 3.569 of the Archivo de la Corona
de Aragón, on which were written the Capitulations of Santa Fe,’®^ agreed to in
1492 by Ferdinand and Isabella and Christopher Columbus. It is even more likely

to be associated with the Iberian watermarks from the group Vails i Subirá 150—

173, particularly no. 17 1

(Barcelona 1501).’®®
A personal examination of the manuscript carried out after its restoration, with-

out benefit of a description of methodology and results, has verified that only the
second fascicle of the Book of Prophecies is likely to have been kept in its original

complete form down to the present. The other fascicles have been mutilated and
tampered with at different times and in different ways that cannot be specified with
any reliability. In particular, there is no trustworthy means by which to determine
incontrovertibly the exact number of missing folios and, above all, the nature of
the texts they contained.

Bnquet 1907.
"**Genoa, Archivio di Stato, Liher diversorum, no. 128.
'^‘’Archivio di Stato, Liher diversorum, no. 152.

"*^Rumeu de Amias 1985: iio-ni.

iHBValls i Subirá 1980: 155-156.

3 6 INTRODUCTION
Fascicle 1

The first fascicle, at the time of cartularization in 1682, was made up of twenty-nine
folios; one had been npped out between folios 5 and 6 and was never replaced. Origi-
nally, the last section of the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella had been
written there; it was rewritten in three different hands (in order, Gorricio, Christopher
Columbus, and a “public scribe”). Furthermore, the loss of folio 28 was attested by the
cartularization. In any case, other alterations to this fascicle must have taken place
earlier on, for the sequence of watermarks on the folios seems very irregular.’”^

At the time when it was sent by Columbus to Gorricio, the fascicle had been almost
entirely written in the hand of a “Italian scribe,” who had copied the collection of
Augustinian and pseudo-Augustinian texts (085 — 100), Nicholas of Lyra’s commentary
on the prophet Daniel (010), and the excerpts from the works of Pierre d’Ailly (109-
1 13). The draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, on the other hand, had been

transcribed by a “public scribe.”’^®

After receiving the Book of Prophecies, it seems that Gorricio decided to reorder the
first fascicle so as to place at the very beginning of the collection both a copy written in

his own hand of the letter sent to him by Columbus on 13 September 1501 (001), and
a copy of his own missive of 23 March 1502 (002), written when he returned the
manuscript. He completely rearranged the fascicle, inserting in his own hand a series of
supplementary texts: auctoritates on scriptural exegesis (004-009); a long sequence of
biblical excerpts taken almost exclusively from the Book of Psalms (012—077); two
texts, also of exegetical character, taken from Isidore of Seville (079—080); three chap-
ters of the Castilian translation of the anti-Judaic treatise attributed to Rabbi Samuel of
Fez (081—084); some passages from the New Testament and from the scriptural com-
mentaries of Nicholas of Lyra (101 — 104 and 106—107), as well as a summary reference

to the commentaries of Alfonso Fernández de Madrigal, known as “el Tostado” (105);

and finally, a passage drawn from the works of Augustine (108).

Gorricio also made another series of additions to the same fascicle of a largely edito-
rial nature; in particular, he placed various rubrics in the margins of the texts of Augus-

tine and Pierre d’Ailly, written by the “Italian scribe.” Finally, he rewrote the last

paragraphs of the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, following the removal of
the last section; on this occasion, he wrote in a more cursive style than that which he
used in the other sections of the manuscript in an obvious attempt to achieve uniform-
ity through imitation of the chancery hand found in the preceding folios.

Columbus’s interventions in the first fascicle are difficult to place precisely in time;

some, such as the few marginal notes to the Augustinian texts (086.3; 087.5; 094 -L 3 ).

'“’The numbers indicated between parentheses in the text correspond to the paragraphs of the present
edition of the Book of Prophecies.
'’"The problem of identifying the different handwritings found in the Book of Prophecies is discussed

below.

3.1 THE MANUSCRIPT OF THE BOOK Oh BROhHhClhS 3 7

 could have been made before sending the manuscript to Gorricio. However, the para-
graphs that he personally added to the end of the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and
Isabella (oi 1.52) were doubtless made after he got the manuscript back from Gorricio.
There are no indications, however, of the chronology of the corrections and additions
to that text (01 1 .8, 9, 21, 25, 3 i, 37, 38, 39, 49); the only marginal addition (01 1.29) is

in any case very late and was deduced from the autograph notes written in the third

fascicle at folio 59 verso.

The lines of Castilian verse were inserted by his son Ferdinand in the space left

blank on folio 12 recto (078), very probably at a time somewhat after the completion
of the manuscript (as were the other lines of verse written by him in the following
fascicles).

Fascicle II

The arrangement of the second fascicle of the Book of Prophecies has remained intact
and, as a result, allows some reasonable assumptions to be made about the original
configuration of the manuscript at the time it was sent by Columbus to Gorricio. This

fascicle, in fact, had been conceived as an autonomous entity, written entirely by the
“Italian scribe” and intended to contain a long series of biblical excerpts, occasionally
lengthy, transcribed from Isaiah (125-141), Jeremiah (143-150), Ezekiel (153-162),
Daniel (163 — 165), and minor prophets of the Old Testament (151 — 152 and 166—184).
The two outside pages of the fascicle had been left blank; the first (folio 10 recto)

probably had been intended as a kind of title page like the one in the first fascicle

preceding the selection of Augustinian texts. In this case, however, the phrase “De
pretérito” added at the top of folio 30 verso (125. i) was made to serve as an awkward
substitute for a title page.
Gorricio, for his part, used the first blank page to continue the transcription of a

series of excerpts from Isaiah that had been initiated on what was now, as a result of his
arrangement, the last folio of the preceding fascicle. Clearly, his purpose was to

broaden and complete Columbus’s collection of Old Testament prophecies (114-

124). Within the second fascicle, Gorricio did not more than correct an error of tran-
scription from chapter 42 of Isaiah (127.4), possibly make some corrections in ink, and
place signs in the margins.

It is again difficult to date with any certainty the marginal annotations made by
Columbus in this fascicle (137.7; 164.2; 165.2). On the other hand, the addition of an
excerpt from Jeremiah ( 1 42) which he made in the small space left blank at the bottom of
the verso of folio 37, must have been made after he got the manuscript of the Book of
Prophecies back from Gorricio, because he recopied, albeit with many errors and subse-
quent corrections, a passage already transcribed by Gorricio in the last fascicle (246).

”’Cf. (085).

3X INTRODUCTION
 Ferdinand Columbus in turn, after gaining possession of the manuscript, copied
other lines of Castilian verse (i 84) in the blank space on folio 53 recto. On the verso of
the same folio, he began to recopy a passage from the scriptural commentary of Nicho-
las of Lyra (185). He stopped, however, after the second line and began to transcribe it

in its entirety on a blank page located in the following fascicle (219).

Fascicle III

The third fascicle of the Book of Prophecies, in contrast to the first two, has undergone
extensive tampering, which presumably has caused the loss of more than half of the

original folios, at least as far as it is possible to tell after the restoration of the manuscript,
which itself raises a large number of questions. That is, as a consequence of the restora-
tion, it now appears that a series of mutilations of the manuscript, which certainly took
place before the cartularization in 1682, went unnoticed at that time. Based on this

very limited evidence, it can only be hypothesized that this fascicle was conceived
analogously to the preceding one, although perhaps it was not of the same length.
Furthermore, there is absolutely no way of knowing for sure that the current sequence
of texts corresponds either to the original ordering or to that created by Gorricio.
Again in this case the passages taken from Isaiah (186-193) and from Chronicles
(194-200) had been copied into the original nucleus of the Book of Prophecies by the
“Italian scribe.” He had left blank the first page of the fascicle (folio 54 recto); and once
again a phrase inserted at the top of folio 54 verso (186.1) served as a title page.

In the third fascicle there are also numerous passages added by Gorricio, copied by
him from the Scriptures, the exegetical commentary of Nicholas of Lyra, and the

writings of the fathers of the church (201, 208-218).

The folios of this fascicle must have been mixed up and reordered prior to cartulari-

zation, because the current location of folio 59 seems somewhat incongruous; on this

folio Columbus made a series of transcriptions and annotations in his own hand, the
last one definitely after 29 February 1504 (204-207).

Apparently incongruous as well is the location of folio 52, on the verso of which
Ferdinand Columbus copied a long passage of exegetical commentary by Nicholas of
Lyra (219). He also transcribed additional lines of Castilian verse on the verso of folio
58, which had been left blank (203).
Finally, it has not yet been possible to determine the identity of the writer, or the

form and date of writing, of an annotation in vernacular Italian, placed next to the last

line of a biblical passage transcribed by Gorricio on folio 58 recto, even though there
was plenty of blank space on the page (202).

Fascicle IV

An entire, and perhaps very important, section was removed from the fourth and last

fascicle of the Book of Prophecies prior to the cartularization of the manuscript (fol.

3.1 THK MANUSCRIPT OF TH F HOOK OH HKOPHHCIHS 39

 68-76). Folio 67 was cut in half and a note on folio 77 recto, evidently written by
Ambrosio de Morales between 1 569 and 1 576, has provided the starting point for a
extensive series of hypotheses about the contents of the missing pages, none of which
seems in truth to have the smallest degree of objective confirmation.'*^^ Almost an
entire fascicle, which must have been written by the “Italian scribe” on the model of
the preceding ones, has disappeared. All that remains is the first passage, on folio 67
verso (221), as the collection was probably interrupted in some way even before the

Book of Prophecies came to Gorricio. The latter transcribed a pseudoprophecy attributed

to Joachim of Fiore (222) directly following a passage from Jeremiah; the page was cut
immediately below this excerpt. v

It is also possible, however, that the fourth section of biblical auctoritates transcribed

by Gorricio had its own autonomous location. This section deals with Tarshish (224—

234), Ophir (236-243), Kittim (245-247), and islands in general (248-274). In addi-

tion to the biblical excerpts, Gorricio added a text from the Universal Vocabulario of
Alfonso of Falencia (235),
The tabula on folio 84 verso, in the hand of the “Italian scribe,” lists a long series

of scriptural texts, which, however, do not correspond to any specific texts in the
collections in the different sections of the Book of Prophecies. The references provided
are limited to the title of the biblical book and the chapter number and are, as a
consequence, too summary to permit the identification of the exact verses referred
to (280).

An autograph annotation by Columbus was once located at the top of the same
folio; because of the progressive deterioration of the manuscript, only the lower ends
of the individual letters remain (278).'” The concise notes written on folio 83 verso

and 84 recto do not seem to be, on the other hand, Columbian autographs and perhaps
were really written by three different hands (276-277).
Ferdinand Columbus is responsible for the transcription of a passage from the Can-
cioncero of Juan de Luzon on folio 67 recto (220), perhaps the pen-testings on folio 77
recto (223), and certainly the lines of verse in Castilian, written in disorderly fashion in

the blank margins of the tabula on folio 84 verso (279).

3.2 THE HANDWRITING

Several different hands have participated in the redaction of the Book of Prophe-
cies.^'^'* This kind of collaboration should not be surprising, for the studies of the
marginal notations found in the printed editions owned by Columbus show that

”^In particular, hypotheses related to the presumed Joachimism of Columbus that ignore the fact that
Gorncio transenbed the text in question (222).

'”The reproduction is based exclusively on the suggestions provided by Streicher 1928; 249.
’’^The following section draws heavily on the advice and opinions of Stefano Zamponi (Universita di
Fadua), Armando Petrucci (Scuola Nórmale Supenore di Pisa), and Fabio Troncarelli (Universita della
Tuscia), to whom am profoundly indebted.
1 Naturally, any errors or misconceptions are my responsibility.

4 o INTRODUCTION
they correspond to different interests and abilities and reflect a sort of teamwork.
Although it is quite difficult to imagine that these notations were coordinated, it is

interesting to note, for example, that in the incunabular edition of Marco Polo, the
hand of Gorricio has written a series ot marginal rubrics calling attention to por-
tions of the text,’**^ just as he did in the Book of Prophecies in the section transcribed

by the “Italian scribe.”

The handwriting of the original nucleus of the manuscript belongs to an un-

identified “Italian scribe,” who wrote an Italian chancery hand in a style that was
beginning to be used in Italy starting in the 1480s but did not become canonical until
the early years of the sixteenth century with the engraving of Aldo Manuzio’s cursive

in 1 501 This style of writing was not introduced on the Iberian peninsula until some
decades later,’’’ allowing the definite rejection of the customary identification of this
handwriting with that of Ferdinand Columbus.
Columbus’s anonymous collaborator must have been chosen from among the nu-
merous Italians called to Granada because of the presence there of the royal Spanish
court. The handwriting of the “Italian scribe” is quite similar to that of the scribe of the

so-called “Thacher manuscript.”^®” This manuscript conserves four letters sent be-
tween 21 August 1501 and January 1502 by Angelo Trevisan, a Venetian in the chan-
cery and secretary to Domenico Pisani, the ambassador of the Venetian Republic to
the king of Portugal and to the Catholic Monarchs at Granada. He remained in

Granada at least from 20 March to 1 1 April 1501. Trevisan had four packets containing
the translation into Italian of the first decade of Peter Martyr’s De orbe novo sent with his

own letters to Venice.^®’

This “Italian scribe” was not, however, completely comfortable with Latin, judging
from the number and typology of errors of transcription that he committed through
homoeoleuton and incorrect expansion of the abbreviations in the the printed works.

It is likely that Columbus had indicated directly to the scribe the passages to be

copied from the printed editions of the individual works he owned — as is suggested by
the signs placed in the margins of the edition of the works of Pierre d’Ailly published

in Louvain by Johann von Paderborn around 1483.^®^

’’'‘As Streicher had already observed m 1928: 230 and 236.

”*Cf. above all Gil 1986a: in particular 1 16 and 122.

”’Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda III.

'’“Cf. Millares Carlo 1983: 256.

'”Cf. Millares Carlo 1983: 252.
^““Currently conserved in the Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. For information about its history

and composition see Wilson 1940: 203-206; Wilson 1942: 193-194; Miglioli 1968; cf Hebert 1992: 105. A
reproduction of folio 2 recto of this nianuscnpt is found in Berchet 1892: plate (where the four letters are 1

also published).

For biographical mfonnation, see De Cesare 1990. Cf also Lucchetta 1980: 434-436.
202
presently conserved m Seville m the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular. For information on this

edition, see Biblioteca Colombina 1 , 49-69, and Buron 1930. For a facsmule reproduction see Ima^o Mundi

1 927; Imago Mundi 990. 1

3.2 IHE HANDWRITING 4 •

 In addition to various texts gathered from the writings of the French theologian,
clearly drawn from this incunabulum, the scribe transcribed numerous passages from
Scripture, quite probably drawing them from one of the first printed editions of the

Vulgate, and perhaps from a Biblia sacra cum j^lossa ordinaria et interlineari et cum postillis

Nicolai de Lyra, produced in several editions between 1481 and 1497.^'’^ As for a long

series of Augustinian and pseudo-Augustinian passages, it is very likely that he used the
edition of the Opuscula plurima printed in Venice by Dionisio Bertocchi on 26 March
1491

2.^”'’ Gaspar Gorricio made a large number of interventions in the manuscript of

various kinds, but all in a handwriting that corresponded perfectly to a description

given of it by Columbus himself in his missive of 26 February 1501: “in more rounded
letters. It is in fact a very individualized version of the semigothic hand that in
fifteenth-century Spain competed with the cursive style of writing for use in vernacu-

lar texts. In the case of the Carthusian monk, the script presents extremely accen-

tuated personal characteristics, which can be found also in his signatures on various
documents. (Unfortunately, no manuscripts written by Gorricio have as yet been
identified).^®*

Part of Gorricio’s work appears to have been merely editorial and redactional. He
placed in the margins of the manuscript, on the pages written by the “Italian scribe,”
a notable number of rubrics calling attention to specific sections of the text, especially,

to the passages drawn from the authentic and spurious writings of Augustine and from
Pierre d’Ailly. The characteristics of this type of intervention are substantially the same
as those made in the copy of the Latin translation of Marco Polo, which Columbus
acquired around 1497.^®®
Gorricio’s contribution to the collection assumes greater importance when we take
into account the large number of texts he copied into the manuscript himself, in the

end completely changing the entire configuration of the Book of Prophecies.

Gorricio probably started by rewriting the last paragraphs of the draft of the letter to

GW 4286-4294.
2866.
Rusconi 1993a: scheda VIII.

Varela 1984: 282 (no. XLVI).

Millares Carlo 1983: 207-220.
^“"For the characteristics of the handwriting, cf. Streicher 1928: 232-233 and 236; for more recent
work, see primarily Gil 1986a: 116. For a comparison, see the signature to the notanal act of 1509, re-
produced in Varela 1989b: 110 (from the Archivo de Protocolos of Seville). Cf also De Lollis 1984b:
LVIII.
^°’In the margins of the incunable edition, Columbus noted only the names of cities, regions, sovereigns,
and personages; in other words, he sought to attract the reader’s attention to the histoncal and geographical
data that appeared in the pnnted text. At these locations he also drew a small hand, its index finger pointing
toward a specific line (Gil 1986a: 116).

4 2 INTRODUCTION
 • ^

Ferdinand and Isabella, following the removal of a folio of the manuscript of the Book
of Prophecies (oi i. 49-51); he used, moreover, a more cursive hand than he used on
other pages.
In a single case Gorricio’s source is a manuscript copy of a work, the Castilian
translation of the Epistula rabbi samuel de Fez de adventu Messiae, also available in print in
an edition published in Spain both in Latin and in the vernacular.^’” It is, however,
very interesting to note that despite his declared Italian origins, the Carthusian monk
appears to have been greatly at ease writing Spanish, as he transcribed three chapters of
the anti-Judaic treatise (081-084).
For the other passages that he inserted into the Book of Prophecies, Gorricio made
almost exclusive use of printed books from the end of the fifteenth century — although
it is not possible in every case to identify with absolute certainty the edition, particu-
larly in the case of a frequently reprinted work (for example, the Biblia sacra . . . cum
postillis Nycolai de Lyra).^^'
His transcriptions from Latin are quite correct and certainly do not contain the
defects and the characteristic shortcomings of the other hands present in the Book of
Prophecies, whose most grievous errors he corrected.^'

In the case of the Summa angelica de casibus conscientiae, written by Friar Angelo
Carletti da Chivasso, it is very likely that Gorricio used the edition printed in Venice
by Paganino Paganini on 7 June 1499; a copy was owned by the library of the Carthu-
sian monastery of Santa Maria de las Cuevas in Seville (004).^’^

Gorricio also used the following works;

the Catholicon of the Genoese Dominican Giovanni Balbi — perhaps the Venetian

edition of 1487, printed by Hermann Liechtenstein of Cologne (005)^’"’

the Rationale divinorum officiorum of the canonist Guillaume Durand, printed in forty

editions during the fifteenth century (that is to say, an average of one a year starting in

1459), perhaps the edition printed in Naples on 28 July 1478 by Matthias von Olmiitz
(006)^’^

the edition in seven volumes of Augustine’s sermons, published in Basil by Johann

Amerbach in 1494 and 1495 (008; 213; 218),^’'’ and an edition of the City of God —
perhaps the one published in Venice by Ottaviano Scoto at the beginning of 1490

^'”Cf. Rusconi 1993a: scheda IX and the bibliography indicated there.

^"Cf. GW '4286-4294
^'^For a particularly staking case, see (126.2).
^’
’Currently conserved at the library of the University of Seville, it carries on the verso of the last page
the following indication of ownership: “Es de las Cuevas este libro”: cf GW 1945; Tamayo y Francisco and
Ysasi Ysasmendi 1967: 5 (no. 15).

^'^GW 3193. Cf Pittaluga 1986 and 1987. See also Gil 1989: 139—140.
^'*Cf GW 91 16. For the exemplar conserved at the library of the University of Seville, which contains
a senes of corrections and other interventions made in a handwriting very close to that of Gorncio, see
Tamayo y Francisco and Ysasi Ysasmendi 1967: 28 (no. 92).
2
'^Cf GW 2866.

3.2 THE HANOWRIIING 4 3

 (2 1
6),^'^ in addition to the collection of Opuscula plurima used by the “Italian scribe”

(io8)

the combined edition, printed in Venice in 1483 by Peter Loslein, of the Etymolo-
(fiae and of the Sententiae of Isidore of Seville (009; 079—080)^’'’
the Postilla litteralis in cvan^elium Mathaei of Alfonso Fernández de Madrigal, known
as “el Tostado,” printed in Seville on 30 September 1491 by the Compañeros Ale-
manes (105)^’’

an incunable edition, perhaps, of the Homiliae super Evan^elia of Gregory the Great
(212; 215)^^®

the editio princeps of a work by the historian Alfonso of Falencia, the Universal

Vocabulario en Latin y en Romance, printed in Seville in 1 490 by the Compañeros Ale-

manes (235).^^’

3
222 interventions in the manuscript in Christopher Columbus’s own hand-
writing are easily identifiable by means of a comparison with the other autographs
from the same period.
The usual characteristics are the irregular drawing of individual letters, the marked
inclination of the hurried cursive writing, the use of the cedilla in the combinations

-9c- and -9Í, the constant presence of ligatures between some letters, and a rather

moderate use of abbreviation:^^^ “a noticeable angularity overall, with a marked incli-

nation of the letters toward the right, the r formed by two divergent strokes from
bottom to top, of which the left (. .
.) is noticeably more fine and extends toward the
space between the lines; the e without any curvature, formed of two straight lines, one
of which runs crosswise from right to left and the other horizontally, with a visible

separation between the two (. . .); the long s which extends below rather than above
the line, and finally abbreviations above the letters in a straight line rather than a curved
one.’’^^-»

Columbus’s interventions consist of completions of lacunae left by the “public

scribe” in the transcript of the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella (01 1,8, 9, 21,

25, 31,37, 38, 39, 49) and of various marginal notes in Castilian (137.7) or an extremely
elementary Latin, limited to repeating bits of text (086.3; 087.5; 164.2; 165.2) in all but
two cases (094.1; 094.3). To these are added the scriptural passage in Latin transcribed

at the bottom of folio 37 verso (142), copied from the transcription made by Gorricio
in the last fascicle on folio 81 recto (246); and, above all, the autograph annotations on

folio 59 verso (204-207).

GW 2889.
Hain *9272=*9273; Catalogue . . . Venice 1924: 379. See also Gil 1989b: 138—140.

^’’Hain *15581. Cf. Reinhardt 1976: 148-153; Reinhardt and Santiago-Otero 1986: 64-79.
Hain 7947-7952.
^^'GW 1267. Cf. Reinhardt 1976: 173-176.
^“Cf Rusconi 1993a: scheda XII.
^^^Cf Streicher 1928: 247-249.
^^•De Lollis 1892: X.

44 INTRODUCTION
 The interventions in the Book of Prophecies confirm the fundamental characteristics
of the wntten and spoken language of Christopher Columbus: Castilian, with a no-
ticeable presence of Lusitanisms and Italianisms.^^^ Linguistic peculiarities occur m his

annotations on folio 59 verso and are associated with his use of specialized nautical
terminology: marinero (205.2); cabo (206); poerto (207.1, 6); septrional (207.1); ampolletas

(207.}); j^uardas (207.6); bra(o (207.6).^^^

Columbus’s use of Latin depends on the circumstances. The rubrics in the mar-
gins of a text, transcnbed by the “Italian scribe,’’ simply reproduce individual terms,
not, however, without obvious syntactical errors (086.3; 087.5). The marginal postils

on folio 18 verso (094.1,3) indicate, on the other hand, an ability to construct elemen-
tary sentences in Latin, albeit with a strong tendency toward the use of vulgarisms. The
“abnormal syntagma’’ of the entitling of Seneca’s poetry on folio 59 verso (204. 1), later

repeated in the margins of folio 5 recto (01 1.29), could perhaps be explained as an

incorrect expansion of an abbreviation found in a note.^^®

The translation into Castilian of the pseudo-Joachimitic prophecies contained in

the letter of the Genoese ambassador (011.52) and the verses from Seneca’s Medea (205)
reveal an adequate comprehension of written Latin.

Finally, the transcription at the foot of folio 37 verso (142) of a passage from Jere-
miah (2.10- 1 1), starting from a text written by Gorricio on folio 8 1 recto (246), is very
accurate, although it contains two glaring errors arising through homoeoteleuton,

both connected to the verb “videte,” and corrected at the same time, moreover, by

Columbus himself On the other hand, the use of the cedilla in the formation -ce- is

characteristic of his spelling.^^’

230
4 handwriting present in the draft of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella is a

cursive gothic of the type used in many of the documents issued by the royal chancel-
lery from the second half of the fourteenth century through the early years of the
sixteenth; it is formally defined in 1503 in a letter from these monarchs as “letra cor-
tesana.’’^^’

It is likely that Columbus employed a public scribe he had used on other occa-
sions;^^^ for example, Alonzo Lucas, Juan Fernández, and Martin Rodriguez, who had

most recent results are those of Juan Gil, in Varela 1984; xxiii— Ivi, and of Consuelo Varela, in

Taviani and Varela 1988: 43—49.

^^‘Cf Guillen Tato 1951 and 1952. Cf. Formisano 1983.
^^^Cf the recent publication of Caraci and Luzzana Caraci 1976, but also Moretti 1986.
^^*Cf Moretti 1986: 103 n. 21.

^^’Cf Streicher 1928: 218; Menéndez Pidal 1968b; 46; Gil 1986a; 128.

^^’Cf Rusconi 1993a; scheda II.

^^’Millares Carlo 1983; 235. Cf also Pérez-Bustamante 1951; Ixii-lxiv.

^^^Cf Streicher 1928; 220. As an example, the hand which wrote the non-authenticated “traslado” of
the letter to Doña Juana de Torres (cf Varela 1984; no. XLI) in the exemplar of the Book of Privileges

conserved in Paris contains graphic charactenstics that are extremely close to those attested in the draft of the
letter to Ferdinand and Isabella. In addition, this scribe used systems of pagination and marginal signs com-
pletely analogous to those used in this draft (cf. facsimile Stevens 1893). The hand of the same “public senbe”

3.2 THE HANDWRITING 45

 copied the act establishing the Mayorazgo, finished and authenticated in Seville on 28
May 1501.“^ On 5 January 1502, he entrusted to Rodriguez the execution of four
copies of an updated redaction of the Book of Privileges, which were finished the fol-
lowing May 14.^^'*

5.^^^ For a long time it was thought that it was Ferdinand Columbus who had
written the original nucleus of the Book of Prophecies between 1501 and 1502, when
he was scarcely thirteen years old. The characteristics of the handwriting of the “Italian
scribe’’ in this part of the manuscript cannot, however, be related in any way to the
intellectual background of the young Ferdinand, who was educated as a page at the

royal court of Spain. In any case, there is no correspondence between this handwrit-
ing and his autographs from a later period.
If we leave aside the many marginal notes found in printed volumes that became
part of Ferdinand’s library, the earliest certain example of his handwriting is the Memo-
rial de los libros naufragados, a manuscript dating from the years 1520-21 and conserved
at the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular in Seville. By means of a simple compari-
son, his personal interventions in the Book of Prophecies are easily identified. On the

verso of a page still left blank after Corrido had returned the collection to his father,
Ferdinand copied a long passage of Nicholas of Lyra’s commentary on the first verse of

Psalm 2 (219). This is the same text that he had started to transcribe on the verso of
another partially blank folio, but had only written a few lines (185).^'*° In addition, on
several occasions he copied lines of Castilian verse into the manuscript’s various blank
spaces (078; 184; 203; 220; 280).^"”

seems to have been particularly active in the exemplar of the Book of Privileges conserved in Genoa, whether
in the part authenticated by him or in the the additional sections (cf. Codice Privilegi 1893; Libro dei privilegi

1987). See also Piergiovanni 1994.

“^Cf Thacher 1904; 159.
^^*Two examplars of the Book of Privileges were sent toGenoa by means of Nicolo Oderigo, ambassador
of the republic to the Spanish crown. At present they are conserved, respectively, in Genoa (facsimile
reproduction in Codice privilegi 1893 and the Libro dei privilegi 1987) and in Paris (facsimile reproduction in
Stevens 1893). For the early history of the two collections, see the texts of Columbus’s letters in Varela 1984:

3 >
3
“ 3*5 (nos. LXII-LXIII). Cf. also Nader 1991; Hebert 1992: 102-104; and Nader-Fonnisano 1996.
”*Cf Rusconi 1993a: scheda XV.
^^*Cf for example Jos 1945: 47-48; West and Kling 1991.
^”Cf Boscolo 1986.
^^“On the question of Ferdinand’s handwriting, see Mann Martinez 1970.
”’MS. BB 148 26. Cf Marin Martinez 1970: xxix.
^^“On folio 63 verso and folio 53 verso, respectively.

^•'Correctly described as “ensayos deplorables de algún aficionado al metro castellano” by Simón de la

Rosa y López 1891a: XXV. Cf Varela 1983 for infonnation about other verses composed by Ferdinand
Columbus.
In particular, the “Gozos del nacimiento de san Juan Bautista,” transcribed by Ferdinand on a blank page
67
(folio were copied by him from the Cancionero
recto), di Juan de Luzón, pnnted m Zaragoza on 12
October 1508; cf Dutton 1982: I, p. 254 and II, p. 96.

46 INTRODUCTION
 .

Ferdinand Columbus used a humanistic handwriting ofltalian origin that had been
impc'irted to Spain by the middle ot the fifteenth century and subsequently passed into
general use with the first pnnted editions. His language was a substantially correct

C'astilian, which contained some Andalusian traces. It exhibited, however, no traces of

the typical characteristics of his father’s autographs: the anomalies connected to the

diphthong -ie- (in particular, its absence in the perfect tense); the oscillation between
f and h (with an overall prevalence of h); and the consonant x written in place of
His knowledge of Latin, at least on the basis of what emerges from the single Latin

passage that he copied in the Book of Prophecies, seems to be generally adequate.

The annotations in Italian on folio 58 recto (202) have been for a long time
considered the most important attestations to Columbus’s knowledge of that language,
along with a marginal postil in his edition, printed in Venice in 1489, of the vernacular
Italian version made by Cristoforo Landino of Pliny the Elder’s Natural History,
which, however, seems to be written in a mixture of Castilian and Italian.

In reality, despite the fact that they are cited in all the studies relating to the language

used by Christopher Columbus, the few lines traced on folio 58 recto of the Book of
Prophecies in a vernacular Italian having no Castilian or Lusitanian characteristics, turn
out to be irrelevant to the investigation. In fact, there is no possible way that the

semi-gothic Italian handwriting, with signs of Spanish graphic influence, can be identi-
fied with the Columbian hand. Furthermore, the way that this text is inserted in the

page of the manuscript does not resemble any other of Columbus’s interventions in the
manuscript. At the beginning of the sentence, for example, the hand of the anonymous
scribe had even traced two guide letters before undertaking the actual writing. Finally,
the contents of the excerpt show no evident connection with the biblical passage that

occupies most of the page.^'*^

In conclusion, the different handwritings are distributed throughout the folios of

the manuscript of the Book of Prophecies as follows. (An asterisk indicates one or more
marginal annotations or interlinear corrections on the part of one hand to a principal

text written by another hand.)

I . “Italian scribe’’

folios 3 recto-3 verso; 15 recto-20 verso; 24 recto-27 verso; 30 verso-53 recto; 54

verso- 57 verso; 67 verso; 84 verso.

Millares Carlo 1983: 218-219.

Menéndez Pidal 1968a.

Rusconi 1993a: scheda XI 1 .

2 .* 5
presently conserved in Seville at the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular: cf. Biblioteca Colombina VI,
20-21
^^'’For the postil to the Naturalis historia, see Conti 1986.

^"^In agreement with Stretcher 1928, for example, Jane 1930: 512 n. 61; and Varela 1984: 287, are of the
opinion that Columbus did not wnte it.

3.2 T H L HANnW R I r I NC 4 7
 2. Gaspar Gorricio
folios I recto-2 verso; 3 recto ('^); 3 verso {*); 4 recto (*); 6 recto (?); 6 verso- 14
verso; 15 verso ('^); 16 recto {*)\ 16 verso ('*^); 17 recto (*); 17 verso ('*'); 18 recto (*); 18

verso (^); 19 recto (^); 19 verso {*); 20 recto (*); 20 verso (*); 21 recto— 22 recto; 24
recto (*); 24 verso {*); 25 recto ('^); 29 recto-30 recto; 30 verso (*); 31 recto (*); 32

recto {*); 34 verso (*); 45 recto (^); 58 recto; 60 recto-62 recto; 67 verso; 77 verso-78

verso; 79 verso-80 recto; 81 recto-83 recto.

3. Christopher Columbus
folios 4 recto (*); 4 verso (*); 5 recto (*); 5 verso (^); 6 recto;' 15 verso {*); 16 recto

(*); 18 verso (*); 35 recto (*); 37 verso; 42 verso ("*);

59 verso; 83 verso— 84 recto (?).

4. “public scribe”
folios 4 recto- 5 verso; folio 6 recto (?).

5. Ferdinand Columbus
folios 12 recto; 53 recto; 53 verso; 58 verso; 62 verso; 67 recto; 77 recto; 83 verso (?);

84 verso.
6. Italian copyist (?)

folio 58 recto.

The following pages are entirely blank:

folios 22 verso-23 verso; 54 recto; 59 recto; 79 recto; 80 verso; 81 verso.
The following folios are definitely missing:

folios 28, 63—66, 68—76.

3.3 CRITERIA USED IN THE EDITION

The manuscript of the Book of Prophecies constitutes the draft of a work whose redac-
tion was never finished, written by different people at various times. For this reason,

with the exception of the annotations added by different librarians, the manuscript has
been edited as a whole, with the inclusion of some sections that were very likely added
at some time after its original redaction in the form that Christopher Columbus
wanted, and after its revision by Gaspar Gorricio. The criteria for this edition were
established in accordance with these textual characteristics:

I. Passages from Latin works in printed editions were copied at length into the
manuscript. In the case of the writings taken from the edition of Pierre d’Ailly’s Ima^o
mundi printed at Louvain around 1483, the copy personally owned by Christopher
Columbus is conserved at the Biblioteca Colombina y Capitular of Seville; it was in all

likelihood used to transcribe some sections of the collection. This copy has been the
basis for the indication of variants introduced by the “Italian scribe” and correction of
errors of transcription.
In other cases, a similar comparison, less stringent on the textual level, was made
with the printed edition likely to have been used to transcribe parts of the manuscript:
for example, for the authentic and spurious writings of Augustine, the collection of the

48 INTRODUCriON
Opuscula plurima printed in Venice in 1491 and the collection of Semwm edited in Basel
in 1494 and 1495; for the Etymolo^iae and the Sententiae — titled in the printed version
De sunmw bono — oí Isidore of Seville, the edition printed in Venice in 14S3; for the

Universal Vocabulario en Latino y en Romance of Alfonso of Falencia, the edition which

appeared in Seville in 1490; for Seneca’s Medea, the collection of Traj^oediae published
at Lione in 1491 and in Venice in 1492.^'*’’

In every case in which a work copied in part into the manuscript exists in a modern
edition edited according to reliable criteria, this edition has been used either for com-
parison to establish the configuration of the text accessible to Columbus and to his

collaborators, or to correct some excerpts rendered incomprehensible by gross misin-

terpretations or mutilated by obvious mistakes, in particular, incorrect expansions of
abbreviations and omissions through homoeoteleuton, often already present in the
fifteenth-century printed editions.^'*’

Because of the large number of fifteenth-century printed editions of the Vulgate

and the version of the Biblia sacra cum ^lossa ordinaria et interlinean et cum postillis Nicolai

de Lyra, it was not feasible to find the very edition used to transcribe the biblical
passages chosen for the manuscript. It seemed useful, however, to make note of the
most significant variants from a single edition (Venice 1495) — above all, for the ex-

cerpts chosen from the scriptural commentary of Nicholas of Lyra. Again for the pur-

pose of comparison, the most important variants with respect to a modern edition of

the Vulgate have been indicated. In particular, a modern edition has been used to bring

the division into paragraphs accomplished in this edition into line with the division

into verses of the biblical text and to coordinate the punctuation.

2. The chapters of the Castilian translation of Rabbi Samuel de Fez’s letters were
transcribed by Corrido from a manuscript of the same textual family as MS. 85 86
of the Biblioteca Nacional of Madrid. The variants with respect to this codex, the
Latin editio princeps of the letter (Barcelona ca. 1475), and the edition of the Patrologia

latina have been indicated in the apparatus for the purpose of emending certain er-
rors.

3. The draft of Columbus’s letter to the rulers of Spain, as well as his autograph

annotations on folio 59 verso, have been faithfully reproduced. It does not seem likely
that an original redaction of it remained in existence, transcribed by the notarial scribe,

or that a copy was ever sent to Ferdinand and Isabella. As a consequence, it seems that
Ferdinand Columbus reproduced the first paragraphs of the draft from the Book of

Prophecies in his Castilian text of the History of the Life and Deeds of Admiral Christopher

^^"The bibliographic abbreviations for these editions are included in the list of sigla used in the cntical
apparatus.
^^’These editions are also indicated in the list of abbreviations used in the apparatus.

3.3 CRITERIA USED IN THE ED II ION 4 9

 Columbus, and it is likely that the parallel passage in Bartolomé de Las Casas’s Historia de

las Indias derives from Ferdinand Columbus’s History. These considerations notwith-
standing, both the variants from the Italian translation of Ferdinand’s History (which

allow the identification of obvious errors in translation or the paraphrasing of the

original text) and from the Las Casas’s History are given in the apparatus, since both
texts prove the uniqueness of the original.

4. The grave deterioration of the first page of the manuscript, evidently not pro-
tected by adequate binding perhaps until its entry into the Biblioteca Capitular in
Seville, and the continued deterioration until the recent restoration, has seriously

mutilated the first texts of the collection: the letters from Christopher Columbus to

Corrido (001), Gorricio’s reply (002), and the heading (003). In order to go back as

much as possible to the original text, it has been necessary to use, at least in part, the

older transcription of these letters by Diego Alejandro de Gálvez in 1766 (while avoid-
ing his tendency to normalize the original spelling of the manuscript).

In accord with the general criteria adopted for the Repertorium Columbianum,^^^
which aim at the production of an accessible critical edition and not a strictly diplo-

matic edition, the standard of conserving the medieval Latin spelling of the text has
been adopted, both in the printed editions and in the manuscript. In particular, the

spelling of biblical names of persons and places have not been standardized, and neither
has the irregular use of numbers both in ordinal and in numeral form, and in Arabic
and Roman characters, because these characteristics were determined by the configu-
ration of the text from which each of the individual scribes made his transcription.

In rather conservative fashion, therefore, the characteristics of the text of the manu-
script have been maintained: the distinction between u and v, the vocalic use of y, and
the utilization of the consonant f in place of h. In every case the letter s has been

^*®Despite recent suggestions that Las Casas could have consulted the Book of Prophecies dunng his stay in

Seville from December 1552 to March 1553 (Varela 1989a: 29), the parallel versions of the initial section of
the letter in Ferdinand’s History and in Las Casas’s History of the Indies, and the Dominican friar’s failure to use
the information contained therein does not support the hypothesis that he used another exemplar of the draft
of the letter to Ferdinand and Isabella (as De Lollis had observed in 1894: LVll).

In Ferdinand’s History, chapter 4, the passage is introduced with these words; “But m a letter that he
wrote in 1501 to the most serene Catholic Monarchs, to whom he did not dare to wnte more than the truth
required” (Colón 1990: 29), in the History of the Indies the passage ends as follows: “These are the Admiral’s

words that he wrote to the Monarchs m 1501 from Cáliz or Seville, 1 believe; with this letter he sent to them
a certain round or sphencal figure” (Las Casas 1957: 23b). This last observation is found neither m the text
contained in the Book of Prophecies nor in that written by Ferdinand Columbus.
^*'London, British Library, ms. add. 13984, fol. 34 recto-36 recto. Cf Catalogue of Additions 1850: 7-8;
de Gayangor 1877: 316-317.
^*^ln several particular cases, the suggestions of Tognetti 1982 and Normas 1984 have been considered.
^^’Because there were different copyists, who worked in general from published texts, graphic and
phonetic characteristics often depend only on the edition from which the text in question was drawn.

5 o INTRODUCTION
conserved and also the doubling of r at the beginning of a word or of a syllable. The
only exception is the use of the letter e to indicate all the spellings of the conjunction
(e, et, y, 7) in Castilian.

As a consequence, the modernization of the text has been limited to the diacritical

use of capital letters and of accents, to the separation of words, the expansion of ab-
breviations, and punctuation.
The variants with respect to the preceding editions of the complete Book of Prophe-
cies have not been recorded in the apparatus, because we are dealing with a single

original manuscript copy, which forms the base text. In fact, it would be completely
useless to indicate substantially incorrect readings, graphic normalizations, and conjec-
tures necessitated by physical lacunae present on several of the pages.
The various marks present in the margins of the manuscript, which, unlike the
postils, have no textual relevance, have not been reproduced in the text.^'*'* Similarly,

the presence of crosses, usually traced on the upper border of each page, has not been
indicated.

^^^These are reproduced in the West and Kling 1991 edition (but not in I)e Lollis 1892).
^^^Fols. I recto; 2 recto; 2 verso; 4 recto; 6 verso; 7 recto; 8 recto; 8 verso; 9 verso; 10 recto; 12 recto; 12

verso; 13 recto; 14 recto; 21 recto; 21 verso; 22 recto; 29 recto; 30 recto; 58 recto; 59 verso; 60 recto; 60
verso; 61 recto; 61 verso; 62 recto; 67 verso; 77 verso; 78 verso; 79 verso; 81 recto; 82 recto; 83 recto; 84

verso (?).

The crosses are correctly reproduced in the 1892 De Lollis edition. With the exception of folio 59 verso

(and probably 84 verso) these crosses are associated with texts copied by Gorncio and seem to have been
made with the same implement.

3.3 CRITERIA USED IN THE E D II O N

I
5 I
EDITION AND TRJ\.NSLATION
 // recto/

[001]
[i] Yíiesus cum Maria sit nobis in via. Amen.

[2] Carta del muy magnífico e prudentísimo señor don

Christóval Colón, almyrante e visorrey e governador perpetuo

de las yslas de las Indyas e tie[rras] firmes por él descubiertas et

cetera al padre don frey Gaspar Gorritio et cetera.

V

[3] Reverendo e muy devoto padre: [4] Quando vine [aquí]

comen(;;:é a sacar las auctoritades que me parescía que ha(;:ían al

caso de [Jerusalem en un] <libro> para después tornarlas a rrever

*'*^'*'
e las poner en rrima en [su lugar adonde] <en los les> [sea] al

caso. [5] my otras

Después succedió en occup[aciones, por
donde no ovo lugar de proseg]uir my obra, ny lo hay. [6] E ansy
os lo [enbío que le] <vedieses>. [7] [Podrá ser que el ánima os]

incitará a proseguir en él e que nuestro [Señor vos alunbrará

auctoridades muy a]uténticas. [8] En la Biblia es de continua[r,

e en muchos lugares la Glosa a]provecha e alumbra, e es de

ha(j:er d’ella muncha [memoria, al tiempo se oviese de s]acar en
lympio.

[9] 1501 [9] Fecha en Granada a XIII de Setienbre [de 1501].

[002]
[i] Respuesta de [el susodicho padre].

[2] Muy magnífico e singularíssimo Señor myo.

[3] Por otras mys letras escriví a vuestra Señoría como

havía rre^ibido su carta e libro de las prophetías e dichos e
auctoritades tocantes al caso del monte Syón e lerusalem, e

de las gentes de las yslas e nationes universas, e que segund

(001) man^\ postl.míiM'.

2. tierras G.
4. aquí G. Jerusalem en un] G libro] G. su adonde G. en los . . .

*** les] G. sea G.

5. occupaciones proseguir G.
. . .

6. enbío que le G. vedieses] G.

7. Podrá ... os G. Señor auténticas G. . . .

8. continuar . aprovecha G. memoria: moría G. al tiempo .

. . . .

sacar G.
9. de 1501 G.

(002) man'
I. el susodicho padre G.

5 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 (001]
[i] May Jesus and Mary go with us. Amen.

[2] Letter from the very magnificent and most prudent Don
Christopher Columbus, admiral, viceroy and governor in per-
petuity of the islands of the Indies and the mainland regions

discovered by him, etc., to Father Gaspar Gorricio, etc.

[3] Reverend and very devoted father: [4] When I came

here, I began to collect in a book excerpts from authoritative
sources that seemed to me to refer to Jerusalem; I planned to
review them later and to arrange them appropriately. [5] Then
I became involved in my other activities and did not have time
to proceed with my work; nor do I now. [6] And so I am
sending the book to you so that you can look at it. [7] Perhaps
your soul will motivate you to continue the project and our
Lord will guide you to genuine auctoritates. [8] The search for

texts should be continued in the Bible, and the Commentary is

often useful and illuminating and should be used for clarifica-

tion.

[ 9 ] 1501 [9] Granada, 13 September 1501

[002]

[1] Reply from the abovementioned

[2] My very magnificent and most excellent lord.

[3] Previously I wrote to you that I had received both your

letter and the book of prophecies, sayings, and auctoritates refer-

ring to Mount Zion and Jerusalem and the island peoples and

the nations of the universe and that, in order to comply with

EDITION AND TRAN S I, AT I ON 5 5

 my pobre intelligentia por complir su mando, travajaría en
ello quanto pudiesse; [4] maiormente viendo ser exercitio

tam sancto e esperando de me enseñar e despertar my enten-

dimiento en cosa tam [salutífera], consolatoria, admonitoria e
provocativa al serv[icio de nuestro señor Dios, e al pjro e a
la honrra d’estos nuestros rreyes e de toda la rreligión [ehris-

tianaj. [5] [E ansy] mediante la gracia del Spíritu sancto, e /i

verso/ guyándome el travajo de vuestra señoría, la qual toda

la flor de tantas e tan veras auctoritades, sententias, dichos, e
prophetías allegó, yo he enterpuesto e añadido algunas reli-

quias, como quien llega la<s> sobras de los rra^imos e olivas e

<e>spigas; [6] e ansy de lo principal como de las migajas yo
quedo muy consolado, e en alguna manera introducido en lo

que de mis estudios estava bien apartado, e d’ello muncho

me fuelgo, rrogando a nuestro Señor que compla ''quod locu-

tus est per os prophe<tarum>'\ e plega a su infinita dementia de

lo assy ha<;:er e llevar los sanctos desseos de vuestra señoría
[adelante, como sin] causa por vuestra magnífica persona
traxo a nuestra notitia la<s> yslas de las I[ndias e tierras fir-

me]s. [7] Esso poco, señor myo, que yo he añadido e en-

tretex[ido, vuestra señoría lo verá en la] letra de my mano.
[8] Todo lo rremitto a la correction de [su espirito e pru-
dente] <juicio>, [yo non me he cura]do de concordar los di-

chos ny las ma[terias, ni menos e las historias]. [9] Pero

he interpuesto algunas reglas e dich[os de los doctores cerca
d’ello, por las] quales podrá qualquier diligente lector ser

instr[uido e declarado de las dudas que se l]e oflfre<;:ieren. [10]

Insuper yo he sido lo más breve que p[ude rremi tiendo a los]

originales, e también por non ser molesto con muncha es-

críptura: presertim cognosciendo, que sy en lo que vuestra

señoría travajó e en lo que yo añadí, non hay habundantís-
sima copia de auctoritades e prophetías para el propósito ut

4. salutífera C. servicio . . . pro G.

5. E ansy C.
6. per os prophetarum: per prophetas C. adelante . . . sin C. Indias
. . .firmes C.
7. entretexido ... la C.
8. su prudente G. juicio] G. yo
. . . . . . curado: yo non me curado
G. materias historias G. . . .

9. dichos las G. instruido ... le G.

. . .

10. pude . . . los G.

5 6 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

your wishes to the best of my meager abilities, 1 would work on
this book as much as I could. l4ll saw it principally as a spiritual

exercise, hoping to instruct myself and to awaken my under-

standing by means of a salutary, consolatory, admonitory, and
provocative project undertaken in the service of our Lord God
for the advantage and the honor of our rulers and of the entire
Christian religion. [5] Accordingly, through the grace of the
Holy Spirit and guided by the work of your lordship, who had
gathered all the choicest selections from so many auctoritates,

opinions, sayings, and prophecies, I have gleaned some inser-

tions and additions, figuratively speaking, from what remains
on the grapevines, olive trees, and stalks after the harvest. [6]

The result is that I am very satisfied with the main part as well

as with the additions and have to some degree contributed to a

work that I regret to say is quite removed from my own studies.

I beg our Lord to carry out “what he said through the mouths
of the prophets” and beseech his infinite mercy to accomplish

this by fulfilling your lordship’s holy wishes; there could be no

other reason for the Lord to have directed your magnificence
to bring us knowledge of the islands of the Indies and the main-
lands. [7] My lord, you will see in my handwriting the few
things that I have added and inserted. [8] I submit everything to
the approval of your intelligence and your prudent judgment,

as I have not tried to relate the sayings or the subjects, much less

. . . the histories. [9] But I have inserted some relevant rules and
sayings from the doctors of the Church so that a diligent reader

can answer his own questions. [10] Moreover, I have been as

concise as possible, supplying references rather than whole texts

to avoid an annoying number of pages. Above all, I am certain

that, even though your lordship and I have not included an

enormous number of auctoritates and prophecies in this book,
written for the purpose described above, [i i] the collection is

sufficient for the task and neither all the books of the Old and

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 5 7

 supra [ii] non al<can(;aron> [todos] los libros del Testamento
viejo e nuevo, ny quanto escrivieron los sanctos varones e
doctores.

1 12] Plega al Señor que hayga spírito cum gana e desseo para
ello. Et sufficit. [13] Si [otrja cosa alguna manda vuestra señoría,

assy en esto como iti reliquis, me semper promptum et paratissimum

fore iam novit.

[14] Fecha en esta su sancta casa de las Cuevas en XXIII de

mar(;:o de 1 502 años. v

[003]

[i] Incipit liber s[ive manipulus de aujctoritatibus, dictis ac

sententiis et pfrophetiis circa] materiam recuperande sánete

civitatis et montis Dei Syon ac inventionis et conversionis in-
sularum Indye et omnium gentium atque nationum, ad Fer-
dinandum et Helysabeth reges nostros hyspanos.

II. alcanzaron] C. todos C.

13. otra G.

(
003 ) man'
I. sive . . . auctoritatibus C. prophetiis circa C. Ferdinandum
. . . Helysabeth add. ad mar^. man'.

5 « EDITION AND TRANSLATION

New Testaments nor all that the saints and doctors have written
will make it more so.

[
1
2] I implore the Lord to make my mind willing and eager.
That is sufficient. [13] If your lordship wishes me to do any-
thing else, in this, as in the rest, you know that I will always be
completely at your disposal.

[14] Monastery of Las Cuevas, 23 March 1502.

I003]

[i] This is the beginning of the book or collection of auctori-

tates, sayings, opinions, and prophecies concerning the need to

recover the holy city and Mount Zion, and the discovery and
conversion of the islands of the Indies and of all peoples and
nations, for Ferdinand and Isabella, our Spanish rulers.

F.OrnON AND TRANSI A TION .s 9

 U recto/

[004]
[i] In Summa angelica sub dicto: “expositio”.

[2] Sacra Scriptura exponitur quattuor modis. [3] Primo,

secundum hystoriam: hystoria est rei geste narrado, ab hystrion,

quod est videre vel cognoscere, quia apud veteres nemo scribe-

bat hystoriam, nisi interfuisset. [4] Secundo, allegorice: a leon,

quod est aliud, et gore, quod est dicere vel locutio; et est

quando per unum factum datur intelligi aliud, quod est creden-
dum. [5] Tertio, tropologice: a tropos, quod est conversio, et
logos, quod est sermo; et est quando per unum factum datur
intelligi fatiendum. [6] Quarto, anagogice: ab ana, quod est sur-

sum, et goge, quod est ductio; et est quando per unum factum
datur intelligi desiderandum, scilicet gloria.

[005]
[i] Item lohannes Gerson et in Decretis.

[2] Littera gesta docet, quid credas allegoria, moralis quid

agas, quo tendas anagogia.

[006]
[i] Item in Rationali divinorum offitiorum.

[2] Quadruplex sensus sacre Scripture aperte insinuatur in

hac dictione: lerusalem. [3] Hystorice enim significar civitatem

illam terrestrem, ad quam peregrini petunt. [4] Allegorice si-

gnificar ecclesiam militantem. [5] Tropologice significar quam-

libet fidelem animam. [6] Anagogice significar celestem lerusa-
lem, sive patriam vel regnum celorum.

[007]
[i] His prelibatis oremus.

[2] Deus, qui corda hominum sine strepitu verborum doces

et sine labore, quique linguas balbutientium fads disertas et qui

presto ades in omni tempore o<p>portuno, intuere /z verso/

(004) man'
6. sursum L: sursursum con. man'.
(005) man'
(006) man'
(007) man'

6 o KDITION AND TRANSLATION

[004]
[i] From the Summa angelica, under the rubric “exposition”

[2] Sacred Scripture is interpreted in four ways. [3] First, as

history, which is the narration of events; the word is derived

from hystrioti, meaning “to see” or “to experience,” for in pre-

vious times no one wrote the history of an event who had not
been present at it.
[4] Second, as allegory, from lean, which
means “something else,” and j^ore, meaning “to say” or
“speech”; through allegory, a text reveals a truth of doctrine.

[5] Third, tropologically, from tropos, meaning “change,” and

loj^os, meaning “a group of words conveying some meaning”; a

tropological interpretation of a given text reveals a moral truth.

[6] Fourth, anagogically, from ana, which means “upwards,”

andj^oj^e, which means “leading”; an anagogical interpretation

of a text reveals something to be desired, for example, eternal

felicity.

[005]
[i] Additionally, from Jean Gerson in the Decrees

[2] A literal reading teaches the facts; allegory, what should

be believed; a moral reading, what should be done; anagogy,
what one should desire.

[006]

[i] Moreover, in Rationali divinorum officiorum.

[2] A fourfold meaning of Scripture exists in the word, “Je-

rusalem.” [3] Historically, it signifies the earthly city to which
pilgrims travel; [4] allegorically, the Church Militant. [5]

Tropologically, it signifies any faithful soul. [6] Anagogically, it

signifies heavenly Jerusalem, the country or kingdom of

heaven.

[007]

[1] After these preliminaries, let us pray.

[2] O God, who instructs the minds of men with ease and in
silence, who clarifies the speech of stammerers, and who is near

whenever needed, consider our intent and be favorable to our

EDITION AND TRANSI A TIO N 6 1

 mentis nostre conccptum et propitius esto desiderio nostro. [3]

Nos enim, quoniam non cognovimus litteraturam, introibimus

in potentiarn tuam: quia beatus est homo, quern tu erudieris,

Domine, et de lege tua docueris eum. [4] Fac ergo, quesumus,

ut eo, quo de te et de loco sancto tuo conscripti sunt spiritu,

sermones ac libros et prophetias intelligamus. Amen.

[008]

[1] Notandum quod in sacra Scriptura aliquando ponitur [l] Nota.

tempus pro tempore, sicut preteritum pro futuro et cetera.

[2] “Omnia, quecumque audivi a Patre meo, nota feci

vobis”.[3] Unde beatus Augustinus in quodam sermone, qui [3] Augustinus

legitur a quibusdam in festo sancti Thome apostoli: “Dominus in quodam

sermone.
noster Yhesus Christus, quod facturus est, fecisse se dicit, qui
Psalmo 2 1
[3]
ea, que futura sunt, fecit, sicut enim dicit per prophetam:
‘Foderunt manus meas et pedes’ nec ait: “fossuri sunt”, velut

pretérita dicens, et ea tamen futura predicens.[4] Ita et hoc loco

ait omnia se nota fecisse discipulis, que se novit ea esse facturum
in ilia plenitudine scientie: et cetera, que requirantur, si placet.

[009]

[1] Unde et beatus Isydorus, libro I De summo bono, [1] Isydorus.

capitulo 25.

[2] Est et ilia de temporibus figura, per quam quedam, que [2] Psalmo 2 1

futura sunt, quasi iam gesta narrantur, ut est illud: “Foderunt

manus meas et pedes meos, dinumeraverunt omnia ossa mea”,
et “diviserunt sibi vestimenta mea”, et his similia. [3] Sed cur
que adhuc fatienda erant, iam facta narrantur? [4] Quia que
nobis adhuc futura sunt, apud Dei eternitatem iam facta sunt. Et
cetera, que secuntur atque precedunt, per totum.

(008) matt'', postls. matt'

(009) matt'', postls. matt'

2. meas: meas meas L.

6 2 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

requests. [3] Because we are not learned, we place ourselves in
your power: blessed is the man whom you instruct, O Lord,
and to whom you teach your law. [4] We ask, therefore, that

you lead us to understand, through the same spirit that inspired

them, the discussions, books, and prophecies about you and
your holy place. Amen.

[008]

[i] In Sacred Scripture one tense is often used in place of [i] Note
another; for example, the past tense instead of the future, etc.

[2] “All that I have heard from my father, I have made known
to you. ”[3] St. Augustine writes in a sermon on this text, which [3I Augustine
is read by some on the feast of St. Thomas the apostle: “Our in a sermon
[3I Psalm 21
Lord Jesus Christ, who did things that were going to happen,
says that he has already done what he is going to do. Thus he
says through the prophet: ‘They have pierced my hands and
’’
feet,’ not ‘they will pierce,’ speaking of past events but fore-
telling the future. [4] Similarly, in the cited passage he says that

he told his disciples all the things that his complete knowledge
told him he was going to do. Other examples can be found by
anyone who wishes to look.

[009]

The same topic is discussed by

[1] St. Isidore in chapter 25 of [1] Isidore

book of De sumrno bono.

I

[2] In a certain usage of tense, things that are about to hap- [2] Psalm 21

pen are related as if they had already taken place. For example:
“They have pierced my hands and feet and they have counted
out all my bones,’’ and “they have divided my garments among
themselves,’’ and other similar passages. [3] But why are events

that have not yet happened described as if they have already

taken place? [4] Because those things which are presently in our
future have already taken place in God’s eternity. And so on,

throughout the entire chapter in the preceding and subsequent

text.

K I) I I I O N AND TRANSIA I I ON ^ 3
 /j recto/

[010]
[i] In G]osa super Danielem, super capitulo H°. [
1
1
Nicolai de
Lyra.

[2] [double [2] Notandum, ad evidentiam sequentis littere, quod in [2] I Corintiis
cross] [hand] 10.
Sacra Scriptura aliquando est duplex sensus litteralis, quia ea,
que sunt facta in veteri Testamento, sunt figure eorum, que
fiunt in novo, dicente Apostolo, primo Corintiis, décimo
capitulo: “Omnia in figura contingebant illis”. [3] Ideo,

quando in veteri Testamento predicitur aliquid esse impletum

in aliqua persona veteris Testamenti, verius tamen et perfectius

in aliqua novi Testamenti, tunc est ibi duplex sensus literalis:

unus minus principalis et alius principalior, de illo scilicet, in

quo perfectius impletur verbum predictum. [4] Verbi gratia, I

[4] I

Paralippemenon XXII dicitur: “Ego ero ei in patrem, et ipse Paralipomenon

22.
erit mihi in filium”, quod est verbum Domini loquentis de
Regum
[4] II
Salamone, qui fuit filius Dei per adoptionem in principio regni 12.

sui, propter quod amabilis Domino dictus est, ut patet secundo

Regum, capitulo 12°. [5] Et sic verbum illud inpletum est ad
litteram in Salamone. [6] Perfectius autem inpletum est in

Christo, qui est filius Dei per naturam, cuius figura fuit Salo-

[7] Ad mon. [7] Et ideo illa auctoritas ad litteram intelligitur de Salo-

Hebreos 1.
mone et de Christo, de Salomone minus principaliter et de
Christo principalius, propter quod Apostolus /} verso/ ad
Hebreos I addegat predictam auctoritatem tamquam de Christo
dictam ad litteram. [H] Sic est in proposito, quia sub similitudine

arietis et <h>irci tractat Daniel de pugna regni Grecorum et

Medorum. [9] Principalis eius intentio est tractare de pugna

Antichristi vel membrorum eius et c<h>ristianorum, et ideo est

ibi duplex sensus literalis, ut patet ex predictis, et cetera.

(010) man^\ postls., cross man'-, hand nian^(?)

1. ** Nicolai de Lyra add. ad marg. man.'.

2. Corintiis: Conntibus L. contingebant: contingenbat con. man.

3. aliqua persona L: aliquo persona con. s.l. man. perfectius: perfectius
vide L.

4. ei add. s.l. L. qui: quis con. man.

7. dictam L: dictas con. man^.

6 4 EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT I ON

 [010]

[2] [cross] [
I
]
From the commentary on chapter 8 [
I
]
Nicholas of
[hand] Lyra of )aniel. 1

[2] To understand the fo]]owing passage, it must be kept in [

2 ]
I

mind that Sacred Scripture often has a doubie literal meaning: Connthians 10

events in the Old Testament prefigure events in the New Tes-

tament. For example, the apostle Paul writes in chapter 10 of
the first letter to the Corinthians, “All these things happened to

them as a warning.” [3] Therefore, when in the Old Testament

it is said that something has been fulfilled in an Old Testament
person and it is more truly and completely fulfilled in the New
Testament, there exists a double literal meaning: a primary
meaning and another more fundamental sense related, of
course, to the person who seems to fulfill the prediction more
completely. [4] Consider this example from 1 Chronicles 22: “I [4] I

shall be a father to him and he will be a son to me.” This is the Chronicles 22
[4] 2 Kings 12
word of God speaking about Solomon, who was adopted as a

son of God at the beginning of his reign and was called “be-
loved of the Lord,” as told in chapter 12 of the second book of
Kings. [5] Clearly this passage is literally fulfilled in Solomon;
[6] but it is fulfilled more perfectly in Christ, who is the natural

[7] To the son of God prefigured by Solomon. [7] The text refers literally
Hebrews 1
both to Solomon and to Christ, but more fundamentally to
Christ. Thus the Apostle in the first chapter of the letter to the
Hebrews alleges that this passage is a reference to Christ in the

literal sense. [8] In the same way Daniel discusses the battle

between the kingdoms of the Greeks and the Medes through

the metaphor of the ram and the goat. [9] His principal purpose

is to discuss the battle of the Antichrist, or of his followers, with

the Christians; and so there exists a twofold literal meaning, as is

evident from the things mentioned above, etc.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 6 5

 /4 recto/

[on]
[i] Carta del almyrante al rey e a la rreyna.

[2] Christianisimos e muy altos priiK^ipes: la rasón que tengo

de la restitu(;:ión de la Casa santa a la santa Yglesia militante es la

syguiente:

[3] Muy altos rreyes: de muy pequeña hedad entré en la mar

navegando e lo he continuado fasta oy. [4] La mesma arte yn-
clina a quien le prosigue a desear de saber los secretos d’este
mundo. [5] Ya pasan de XL años que yo voy en este uso. [6]

Todo lo que fasta oy se navega todo lo he andado. [7] Trauto e

conversa<;ión he tenido con gente sabia, heclesiásticos e se-

glares, latinos e griegos, judíos e moros e con otros muchos de

otras setas. [8] A este mi deseo fallé a nuestro Señor muy pro-
picio, e ove d’él para ello espirito de ynteligen<;:ia. [9] En la

marinería me fiso abondoso, de astrología me dió lo que abas-

tava e asy de geometría e arismética e engenio en el ánima, e
manos para debujar espera, e en ella las (;:ibdades, ryos y mon-
tañas, yslas e puertos, todo en su propio sytio.

[10] En este tiempo he yo visto e puesto estudio en ver de

todas escrituras: cosmografía, ystorias, corónicas e fylosofía e de

otras artes, a que me abrió nuestro Señor el entendimiento con

mano palpable a que era hasedero navegar de aquí a las Yndias,
e me abrió la voluntad para la hexecu^ión d’ello. [i i] E con este

fuego vine a vuestras altezas. [12] Todos aquellos que supieron

de mi ynpresa con ríxa le negaron burlando. [13] Todas las

<;:iencias de que dise arriba non me aprovecharon ni las ab-

toridades d’ellas. [14] En sólo vuestras altezas quedó la fee e

costan(;:ia. [15] ¿Quién dubda que esta lunbre non fuese del Es-
pirito santo, asy como de mí? [16] El qual con rrayos de claridad

(01 1) man*: 1-48; man'(?): 49-51; man^: 52; man*(?): 53; posti.

I. Carta rreyna add. ad mar<¡. man'.

. . .

4. de L: om. H.
6. todo lo he L: e H.
7. Trauto L: trato H. judíos L: Indiani con. F. setas L: sectas H.
8. propicio L: prospero con. s.l. matF.

9. para . . . espera add. in lac. matF: a debuxar esta espera FI, a disegnar

questa sfera F.
10. a que me L: de forma que me H. abrió la L: abraso la H.
12. con . . . burlando L: con nxa e burlando la negavan H.

6 6 FDITION AND TRANSLATION

(on]

[
1
1
Letter from the admiral to the king and queen

[2] Most Christian and Supreme Rulers: my plan for the

restitution of the holy temple to the holy Church Militant is the
following;

[3] Most exalted rulers: At a very early age I began sailing the

sea and have continued until now. [4] This profession creates a

curiosity about the secrets of the world. [5] I have been a sailor

for forty years, [6] and I have personally sailed to all the known
regions. [7] I have had commerce and conversation with
knowledgeable people of the clergy and the laity, Latins and

Greeks, Jews and Moors, and with many others of different

religions. [8] Our Lord has favored my occupation and has
given me an intelligent mind. [9] He has endowed me with a

great talent for seamanship; sufficient ability in astrology, ge-

ometry, and arithmetic; and the mental and physical dexterity

required to draw spherical maps of cities, rivers and mountains,
islands and ports, with everything in its proper place.
[10] During this time I have studied all kinds of texts: cos-
mography, histories, chronicles, philosophy, and other disci-
plines. Through these writings, the hand of Our Lord opened
my mind to the possibility of sailing to the Indies and gave me
the will to attempt the voyage, [i i] With this burning ambition
I came to your Highnesses. [12] Everyone who heard about my
enterprise rejected it with laughter and ridicule. [13] Neither all

the sciences that I mentioned previously nor citations drawn

from them were of any help to me. [14] Only Your Highnesses
had faith and perseverance. [15] Who could doubt that this

flash of understanding was the work of the Holy Spirit, as well

rniTlON AND TRANSLATION 6 7

 maravillosos consoló con su santa c sacra Escritura a vos muy
alta c clara con quarenta e quatro libros del viejo Testamento, e
quatro hevangelios con veynte e tres hepístolas de aquellos
bienaventurados apóstoles, abibándome que yo prosyguiese e
de contino sin <;:esar un momento me abíban con gran priesa.

[17] Milagro ebidentísimo quiso faser nuestro Señor en esto del

viaje de las Yndias por me consolar a mí e a otros en estotro de
la Casa santa: [18] siete años pasé aquí en su real corte dispu-

tando el caso con tantas pre- verso/ sonas de tanta abtoridad e

sabios en todas artes, e en fin concluyeron que todo hera vano,
e se desistieron con esto d’ello; después paró en lo que Ihesu
Christo nuestro redentor diso, e de antes avía dicho por boca de
sus santos profetas, [19] E así se deve de creher que parerá esto-
tro; e en fee d’ello, si lo dicho no abasta, doy el sacro ebangelio,

en que dixo que todo pasaría, mas no su palabra maravillosa;

[20] e con esto diso que todo hera nes<;:esario que se acabase
quanto por él e por los profetas estava escrito.

[21] Yo dise que diría la rasón que tengo de la restitu(;:ión de

la Casa santa a la santa Yglesia. [22] Digo que yo deso todo mi
navegar desde hedad nueva e la pláticas que yo aya tenido con
tanta gente en tantas tierras e de tantas setas, e dexo las tantas

artes e escrituras de que yo dyxe ariba; [23] solamente me tengo

a la santa e sacra Escritura, e a algunas abtoridades proféticas de
algunas presonas santas, que por revelación divina han dicho
algo d’esto.

[24] Pudiera ser que vuestras altezas, e todos los otros que me
conoscen e a quien esta escritura fuere amostrada, que en se-

creto o públicamente me reprehenderán de la reprehensión de

diversas maneras: de non doto en letras, de lego marinero, de
honbre mundanal, et cetera,

[25] Respondo aquello que dixo san Mateus: “¡O, Señor,

que quisistes tener secreto tantas cosas a los sabios e rebelástelas

a los ynocentes!”, e el mesmo san Mateos: “Yendo nuestro

Señor en Iherusalem cantaban los mochachos: ‘¡Osana ñjo de
David!’. [26] Los scribas por le tentar le preguntaron sy oya lo

que desían, e él les respondió que sy disiendo: ‘?No sabéys vos

que de la boca de los niños e ynocéntes se pronuns^ia la ver-

19. parerá estotro L: paretará estrotro corr. man.

31 de la restitu9Íón L: a restitución add. in lac. man^.
.

35. san Mateus add. in lac. man^. el Mateos add. . . . in lac man^.

6 8 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

my own? [i6] The Holy Spirit illuminated his holy and sacred
Scripture, encouraging me in a very strong and clear voice from
the torty-four books of the Old Testament, the four evange-
lists, and twenty-three epistles from the blessed apostles, urging

me to proceed. Continually, without ceasing a moment, they

insisted that 1 go on. [17] Our Lord wished to make something
clearly miraculous of this voyage to the Indies in order to en-
courage me and others about the holy temple. [18] 1 spent
seven years here in your royal court discussing the project with
many people of great authority and with learned men from all

disciplines, and they finally concluded that it was all in vain and
abandoned it. But finally, what Jesus Christ Our Redemptor
said and had previously said through the mouths of his holy
prophets came to be. [19] And so one should believe that the

other thing will also happen; and as witness to that, if what has

been said is not enough, 1 offer the holy gospel in which Jesus
Christ said that all things would pass away, but not his miracu-
lous word. [20] He also said that everything that had been said
by him and written by the prophets must be fulfilled.
[23]
[21] 1 said that 1 would present my argument for the restitu-

tion of the holy temple to the holy Church. [22] I am not

relying on my lifetime of navigation and the discussions that I

have had with many people from many lands and religions, or

on the many disciplines and texts that I spoke of previously.

I base what I say only on holy and sacred Scripture, and on
the prophetic statements of certain holy persons who through
divine revelation have spoken on this subject.

[24] Perhaps Your Highnesses and all the others who know
me and to whom this letter may be shown will criticize me,
publicly or privately, as an uneducated man, an uninformed
sailor, an ordinary person, etc.

[25] I respond with the words of Saint Matthew: “Oh, Lord,

how many things you have kept secret from the wise and have
made known to the innocent!” And again from Saint Matthew,
“As our Lord entered Jerusalem, the children sang, ‘Hosanna,

son of David!’ ” [26] In order to test him, the scribes asked him
if he had heard what they were saying; and he answered that he
had, saying, “Don’t you know that truth comes from the

LDITION AND TRANSI ATION 6 y

 dad?’ o más largo de los apóstoles, que dixieron cosas tan
fundadas, en espe<;ial san Juan: “V» principio erat Verhum, et Ver-

hum erat apud Deum'\ et cetera, palabras tan altas de presonas que
nunca deprehendieron letras.

(27] Digo que el Espíritu santo obra en christianos, judíos,

moros e en todos otros de toda seta, e no solamente en los

sabios, más en los ynorantes; que en mi tiempo yo he visto

aldeano que da cuenta del <;:ielo e estrellas e del curso d’ellas

mejor que otros, que gastaron dineros en ello; [28] e digo que
no solamente el Espíritu santo rebela las cosas de porvenir a las

/s recto/ criaturas racionales, mas nos las amuestra por señales

del <;:ielo, del ayre e de las bestias quando le aplaz, como fue del

boy que falló en rRoma al tiempo de Julio (^ésar, e en otras

muchas maneras que serían prolixas para desir e muy notas para

todo el mundo.
[29] La sacra Escritura testifica en el Testamento viejo, por [29] Seneca, in

boca de los profetas, e en el nuebo por nuestro redentor Ihesu VI 1° tragetide

Medee, in
Christo, qu’este mundo a de aver fin; las señales de quando esto
choro “Auda.x
aya de ser diso Mateo e Marco e Lucas; los profetas abon- nimium”:
dosamente tanbién lo avían predicado. ‘Vernán los
tardos años del
[30] Santo Agostín diz que la fin d’este mundo ha de ser en
mundo’.
el sétimo millenar de los años de la criación d’él; los sacros
teólogos le siguen, en espe(;:ial el cardenal Pedro de Aylíaco en
el verbo XI e en otros lugares como diré abaso.
[31] De la criación del mundo o de Audan fasta el aveni-
miento de nuestro señor Ihesu Christo son <;:inco mili e tresien-

tos e quarenta e tres años e tresientos e diez e ocho días, por la

cuenta del rey don Alonso, la qual se tiene por la más <;:ierta:

Pedro de Aylíaco, Elucidario astronomice concordie cum theolo^ica et

histórica veritate, sobre el verbo X. [32] Con los quales poniendo

mili e quingentos e uno ynperfeto, son por todos seys mili

ocho(;:ientos quarenta e <;:inco ynperfetos.

[33] Segund esta cuenta no falta salvo (j:iento e <^inquenta e

^inco años para conplimiento de siete mili, en los quales dise

arriba por las abtoridades dichas que avrá de feneí^er el mundo.

[34] Nuestro Redentor diso que antes de la consumación

29. las; los L. abondosamente L: yn abondosamente con. man.

30. diz L: diz afirmativo con. man. le; be con. man*. XI L: XI de.o.a.v.e.t.

con. man.
31. años add. s.l. man^. Pedro . . . veritate; p.de.a.e.a.e.e.t.et.h.v. L.

70 rnrnoN and iranslaiion

mouths of innocent children.” Or consider the apostles, who
wrote such profound things, in particular St.John, “/// the he^in-

tiin^ was the Word, and the word was God," etc.; such great words
from uneducated men.
[27] I believe that the Holy Spirit operates in Christians,

Jews, Moors, and in all others of any religion, not only in the
wise, but in the ignorant as well. I met a villager who describes
the heavens and the stars and their paths better than others who
paid to acquire this knowledge. [28] And I say that the Holy
Spirit not only reveals the future to rational creatures, but
shows us by means of signs m the heavens and the air and

through beasts, however he wishes, as was the case with the ox

in Rome during the time of Julius Caesar, and in many other

ways too numerous to list and well-known to the entire world.

[29] Holy Scripture attests in the Old Testament, through [29] Seneca,

the mouths of the prophets, and in the New Testament book 7 of the
tragedy of
through our redemptor Jesus Christ, that this world will end.
Medea, from
The signs of when this must happen are described by Matthew the chorus

and Mark and Luke, and the prophets frequently predicted the “Audax
nimium”;
event.
‘During the
[30] St. Augustine said that the world would end in the sev- last years of
enth millenium after its creation; the holy theologians agree the world’

with him, in particular, the cardinal Pierre d’Ailly in Statement

XI and in other passages, as I will indicate below.

[3 1] From the creation of the world or from Adam until the

coming of Our Lord Jesus Christ there are 5,343 years and 3 18

days, according to the calculation made by King Alfonso (the

Wise), taken to be the most accurate by Pierre d’Ailly in state-

ment X of his Elucidario astronomice concordie cum theolo^ica et his-

tórica veritate. [32] Adding to this number 1,500 years, and one
not yet completed, gives a total of 6,845 years counted toward
the completion of this era.

[33] By this count, only 155 years remain of the 7,000 years
in which, according to the authorities cited above, the world
must come to an end.

[34] Our Redeemer said that before the consummation of

K D n I o N AND TRA N s 1 A r I oN 7 1
 d’estc mundo se abrá de conplir todo lo qu’estava escrito por los

profetas.

[35) Los profetas escri viendo fablavan de diversas maneras el

de por venir por pasado e el pasado por venir, e asymismo del

presente, e disieron munchas cosas por semejan(;:a, otras propin-

cas a la verdad e otras por entero a la letra, e uno más que otro,

e uno por mejor manera, e otro no tanto. [36] Ysayas es aquel

que más alaba san Gerónymo e san Agostín e los otros dotores,

a todos apruevan e tienen en grande reveren(;:ia; de Ysaya disen

que <es> no solamente pro<p>heta, más hevangelista; este puso

toda su diligen(;:ia a escrevir lo venidero e llamar toda la gente a

nuestra santa fee católica.

35. por pasado L: por sasado con. man*.

1 2 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

this world all that had been written by the prophets would have
to be fulfilled.

[35] The prophets wrote about the future as if it were the

past and about the past as if it were yet to happen, and similarly

with the present. Sometimes they spoke figuratively, other

times more realistically, and on occasion quite literally. One
says more or less than another or expresses it in a better way.
[36] Isaiah is the prophet who is most highly praised by St.

Jerome and St. Augustine and the other teachers and is ap-
preciated and greatly revered by all. Concerning Isaiah, they say
that he was not just a prophet, but also an evangelist; he put all

his efforts into describing the future and calling all people to
our holy Catholic faith.

KDITION AND TRANSI A TION 7 3

 /5 verso/

[37] Muchos santos dotorcs e sacros teólogos escryvieron

sobre todas las profe(;:ías e los otros libros de la sacra Escritura;

mucho nos alunbraron de lo que teníamos ynnoto, bien que en

ello en muchas cosas discordan; algunas ovo de que no le fue

alargado la ynteleg<enc>ia.

[38] Torno a replicar mi protesta(^ión de no ser dicho pre-

sun<;ioso sin (;:ien(;:ia, e me allego de contino al desir^de san

Mateus, que diso: “¡O Señor, que quisyste tener secreto tantas
cosas a los sabios e rebelástelas a los yno^entes!”; e con esto

pago e con la espirien(;:ia que d’ello se a visto.

[39] Grandísyma parte de las profe(;:ías e sacra Escriptura está

ya acabado: ellas lo disen, e la santa Yglesia a alta boz sin (;:esar lo

está disiendo, e no es menester otro testimonio; de una diré

porque haz a mi caso, e la qual me descansa e fas contento
quantas vezes yo pienso en ella.

[40] Yo soy pecador grabísimo. La piadad y misiricordia de

nuestro Señor sienpre que yo he llamado por ellas me han co-
bierto todo: consola(;:ión suabísima he fallado en hechar todo

mi cuydado a contenplar su maravilloso conspeto.

[41] Ya dise que para la hesecu<;:ión de la ynpresa de las

Yndias no me aprovechó rasón ni matemática ny mapamundos;

llenamente se cunplió lo que diso Ysayas. [42] E esto es lo que
deseo de escrevir aquí por le redusir a vuestras altezas a memo-
ria, e porque se alegren del otro que yo le diré de Iherusalem

por las mesmas autoridades, de la qual ynpresa, si fee ay, tengan

por muy cierto la vitoria.

[43] Acuérdense vuestras altezas de los hevangelios e de tan-

tas promesas que nuestro Redentor nos fiso, e quan esperimen-
tado está todo: san Pedro quando saltó en la mar andovo
sobr’ella en quanto la fee fue firme. [44] Quien toviere tanta fee

como un grano de paniso le obede(;:erán las montañas; quien

toviere fee demande, que todo se le dará; pusad e abriros han.

(45] No deve nadie de temer a tomar qualquiera ynpresa en

nonbre de nuestro Salvador, seyendo justa e con sana yntin^ión

37. ynnoto L: ynebto con. s.l. mati^.

38. san Mateus add. in lac. man^.

39. e . . . Escriptura: ystona esptura del., e sacra senptura add. s.l. tnan^.

43. sobr’ella] G: sobiella L.

7 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [ 37 ]
Many holy teachers and sacred theologians have written
about the prophecies and the other books of holy Scripture.
They have greatly enlightened us about things that we did not
understand, although they often disagree. Some things are
beyond the reach of human intelligence.

[38] I repeat my objection to being called presumptuous and

uneducated and allege that I am following the wishes of St.

Matthew, who said, “Oh Lord, how many things you have
kept secret from the wise and have made known to the inno-
cent!’’ I offer this on my behalf, along with the benefits of per-
sonal experience.

[39] Most of the prophecies of holy Scripture have already

been fulfilled. The Scriptures say this and the Holy Church
loudly and unceasingly is saying it, and no other witness is nec-
essary. I will, however, speak of one prophecy in particular

because it bears on my argument and gives me support and

happiness whenever I think about it.

[40] 1 have greatly sinned. Yet, every time that I have asked,
I have been covered by the mercy and compassion of Our
Lord. I have found the sweetest consolation in throwing off all
my cares in order to contemplate his marvellous presence.

[41] I have already said that for the voyage to the Indies
neither intelligence nor mathematics nor world maps were of
any use to me; it was the fulfillment of Isaiah’s prophecy. [42]

This is what I want to record here in order to remind Your

Highnesses and so that you can take pleasure from the things I

am going to tell you about Jerusalem on the basis of the same

authority. If you have faith in this enterprise, you will certainly

have the victory.

[43] Your Highnesses, remember the writings of the evan-

gelists and the many promises that Our Redeemer made to us,

and the extent to which all this has been tested. When St. Peter

stepped into the sea, he was able to walk on its surface, as long
as his faith was firm. [44] Whoever has as much faith as a grain

of mustard seed will be obeyed by the mountains. Whoever has

faith has only to ask for something in order to receive it. Knock
and it will be opened to you. [45] No one should be afraid to

H Dili ON AND TRANSI A riON 7 .S

 para su santo scrvi<;io; a santa Catalina socorrió después que

vido la prueva d’ella. [46] Acuérdense vuestras altezas que con

pocos dineros tomaron la ynpresa d’este reyno de Granada. [47]
La determinación de toda cosa la desó nuestro Señor a cada uno
en su albedrío, bien que a muchos amonesta. [48] Ninguna /6
recto/ cosa le falta que sea en el poder de la gente para dársela.

[49] ¡O, que Señor tam bueno que dessea que faga la gente con
que le sea él a cargo! [50] De día e de noche e todos momentos
le debrían las gentes dar gratias devotíssimas. ^

[51] Yo dise arriba que quedava muncho por complir de las

prophetías, e digo que son cosas grandes en el mundo, e digo

que la señal es que nuestro Señor da priessa en ello: el predicar
del Evangelio en tantas tierras de tan poco tiempo acá me lo

dice.

[52] El abad Johachín calabrés diso que había de salir de

España quien havía de redificar la Casa del monte Sión.

[53] El cardenal Pedro de Aylíaco mucho escrive del fin de la

seta de Mahoma, e del avenimiento del Antechristo en un

tratado que hiso De concordia astronomUoe ueritatis et narrationis

historice, en el qual recita el dicho de munchos astrónomos sobre

las diez reboluciones de Saturno, e en especial en el fm del

dicho libro en los nueve postreros capítulos.

49. él add. s.l. ttian^.

76 F.DITION AND TRANSLATION

undertake any enterprise in the name of Our Saviour, as long as

It IS just and appropriate to his holy service. He helped St. Cath-

erine after testing her. [46] Remember, Your Highnesses, that
with very money you undertook the reconquest of the
little

kingdom ot Granada. [47] The working out of all things has

been left by Our Lord to individual free will, although he ad-
vises many. He lacks nothing that the people can give
[48] to

him. [49] Oh how good is the Lord who wishes the people to

do things for which he assumes the responsibility! [50] Day and

night and at all times the people should give to him their most
devoted thanks.
[51] I said above that much that has been prophesied re-

mains to be fulfilled, and I say that these are the world’s great

events, and I say that a sign of this is the acceleration of Our

Lord’s activities in this world. Iknow this from the recent

preaching of the gospel in so many lands.

[52] The Calabrian abbot Joachim said that whoever was to
rebuild the temple on Mount Zion would come from Spain.

[53] The cardinal Pierre d’Ailly wrote at length about the

end of the religion of Mohammed and the coming of the Anti-

christ in his treatise, De concordia astronomice veritatis et narrationis

historice; he discusses, particularly in the last nine chapters, what

many astronomers have said about the ten revolutions of Sat-
urn.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 7 7

 /6 I'crso/

[012]

[ 1 ]
Psalmo 2°.

[2] Ego autem consdtutus sum rex ab eo super Syon, mon-

tem sanctum eius, predicans preceptum eius. [3] Dominus dixit
ad me: “Filius mens es tu; ego hodie genui te. [4] Postula a me,

et dabo tibi gentes hereditatem tuam et possessionem tuam tér-

minos terre”. Et cetera.

[013]
[i] Psalmo 5.

[2] Introibo in domum tuam; adorabo ad templum sanctum

tuum in timore tuo. Et cetera.

[014]

[1] Psalmo 8.

[2] Domine, Dominus noster, quam admirabile est nomen

tuum in universa terra. Et cetera.

(oi5l
[i] Psalmo 9.

[2] Increpasti gentes, et periit impius: nomen eorum delesti

in eternum et in seculum seculi. Et cetera. [3] Psallite Domino,

qui habitat in Syon; annuntiate inter gentes studia eius. Et ce-
tera. [4] Miserere mei. Domine; vide humilitatem meam de
inimicis meis, qui exaltas me de portis mortis, ut annuntiem
omnes laudationes tuas in portis filie Syon. Exultabo in salutari

tuo. [5] Infixe sunt gentes in interitu, quern fecerunt; et cetera.

[6] Convertantur peccatores in infernum, omnes gentes, que

obliviscuntur Deum. Et cetera. [7] Exsurge, Domine, non con-
fortetur homo; iudicentur gentes in conspectu tuo. [8] Consti-
tue. Domine, legislatorem super eos, <ut> sciant gentes quoniam
homines sunt. Et cetera. [9] Dominus regnabit in eternum et in
seculum seculi: peribitis gentes de terra illius. Et cetera.

(
012 ) man'
(013) man'
(014) man'
(015) man'

4 . annuntíem: annuntien L.

8 ut sciant V: sciant L.
.

78 EDITION AND TRAN S I. A I I ON

[012|

[ 1
]
Psalm 2

[2) He has made me king of Zion, his holy mountain, and I

preach his holy commandment. [3] The Lord said to me: “You
are my son; today I have begotten you. [4] Ask of me, and I will

give you the peoples as your inheritance and the ends of the
earth as your possession.” Etc.

[013]

[1] Psalm 5

[2] I will enter your house; I will worship at your holy tem-
ple in fear of you. Etc.

[014]

[
1 ]
Psalm 8

[2] Lord, our Lord, how wonderful is your name through-

out the entire earth. Etc.

[015I

[
I
]
Psalm 9

[2] You have rebuked the peoples, and the impious one has
perished; you have erased his name for ever and ever. Etc. [3]

Sing hymns to the Lord, who lives in Zion; make his wishes
known among the peoples. Etc. [4] Have mercy upon me.
Lord; behold my humiliation by my enemies, you who lift me
up from the gates of death so that I may recount all your praises

at the gates of the daughter of Zion. I will rejoice in your salva-

tion. [5] The peoples are immersed in the destruction that they
have created; etc. [6] Let the sinners be sent to hell, all the

nations who forget God. Etc. [7] Arise, O Lord, let not man
prevail; let the nations be judged before you. [8] Appoint, O
Lord, a lawgiver over them so that the peoples know that they

are human. Etc. [9] The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
Vanish, heathens, from his earth. Etc.

rniTION ANO I RANSI A l ION 7 9

 /j recto/

[o 1 6]

[i I
Psalmo 17.

[2] Constitues me in caput gentium. [3] Populus, quern non

cognovi, servivit mihi, et in auditu auris obedivit mihi. Et cete-
ra. [4] Propterea confitebor tibi in populis, Domine, et nomini
tuo psalmum dicam, et cetera.

[017]

[1] Psalmo 18.

[2] Celi enarrant gloriam Dei, et opera manuum eius annun-

tiat firmamentum. [3] Dies diei eructat verbum, et nox nocti

indicat scientiam. [4] Non sunt loquele ñeque sermones, quo-

rum non audiantur voces eorum: in oninem terram exivit sonus

eorum et in fines orbis terre verba eorum.

[018]
[i] Psalmo 19.

[2] Exaudiat te Dominus in die tribulationis, protegat te

nomen Dei lacob. [3] Mittat tibi auxilium de sancto et de Syon

tueatur te. Et cetera.

[019]
[i] Psalmo 21.

[2] Reminiscentur et convertentur ad Dominum universi

fines terre, et adorabunt in conspectu eius universe familie gen-

tium. [3] Quoniam Domini est regnum, et ipse dominabitur
gentium. Et cetera.

(016) man'
3. cognovi: cognovit L. et L: om. V.

4. populis L; nationibus V'.

(017) man'
2. enarrant: ennarrant L.

4. loquele: loquelle L.
(018) man'
(019) man'

8 o KDIIION AND I R ANSI. ATI ON

[016]

[i] Psalm 17

[2] You will place me at the head of the nations. [3] A peo-
ple whom I did not know has served me, and hearing, has
obeyed me. [4] Therefore, I will praise you to the peoples, O
Lord, and I will sing a psalm to your name. Etc.

[017]

[
I
]
Psalm I 8

[2] The heavens tell the glory of God, and the firmament
proclaims the works of his hand. [3] Day speaks the word to

day, and night reveals knowledge to night. [4] There is neither

speech nor language in which their voices are not heard; their
voices have gone out to the whole land and their words to the

ends of the earth.

[018]
[i] Psalm 19

[2] May the Lord hear you on the day of tribulation; may the
name of the god ofjacob protect you. [3] May he send you help
from his sanctuary and protect you from Zion. Etc.

[019]

[
I
]
Psalm 2

[2] All the ends of the earth will remember and turn to the

Lord, and all the families of the nations will worship before

him. [3) Because the kingdom is the Lord’s, he will be the

sovereign of all peoples. Etc.

KDITION AND TRANSLATION 8 I

 (020]

[
1 1
Psalmo 23.

[2] Domini est terra et plenitudo eius, orbis terrarum et <uni

versi> qui habitant in eo. Et cetera.

[021]
[i] Psalmo 25.

[2] Domine, dilexi decorern domus tue et locum habitado

nis <glorie> tue. Et cetera.

(
020 ) man'
2. et imiversi V: et L.

(021) man'
2. habitationis gloríe V: habitationis L.

8 2 EDITION AND TRANS I. A E I ON

[020]

[
I
]
Psalm 23

[2] The earth and its abundance belong to the Lord, the

world and all who live in it. Etc.

[021]

[i] Psalm 25

[2] Lord, 1 have loved the beauty of your house, and the
dwelling place of your glory. Etc.

KDITION AND TRANSI AT ION X 3

 // uerso/

[022]
[i] Psalmo 26.

[2] Unam petii a Domino, hanc requiram, ut inhabitem in

domo Domini omnibus diebus vite mee, ut videam voluntatem

Domini et visitem templum eius. Et cetera.

[023]
[i] Psalmo 28.

[2] Et in templo eius omnes dicent gloriam. Et cetera. [3] Et

sedebit Dominus rex in eternum. Et cetera.

[024]
[i] Psalmo 32.

[2] Misericordia Domini plena est terra. Et cetera. [3] Ti-

meat Dominum omnis terra, ab eo autem commoveantur
omnes inhabitantes orbem. Et cetera.

[025]

[1] Psalmo 42.

[2] Emitte lucem tuam et veritatem tuam; ipse me dedu-

xerunt et adduxerunt in montem sanctum tuum et in taber-

nacula tua. Et cetera.

[026]

[i] Psalmo 45.

[2] Vacate et videte quoniam ego sum Deus: exaltabor in

gentibus et exaltabor in terra.

(022) man'
1. 26; 25 L.
2. inhabitem: inhabiten L. voluntatem V: voluptatem L. visitem: vi-
siten L.

(
023 ) man'
(
024 ) man'
(
025 ) man'
2. ipse V: ipsa L.

(
026 ) man'

84 EDITION AND TRANSI, AT ION

[022]

1
1 ]
Psalm 26

[2] I have asked one thing from the Lord, this I will seek, to

live in the house oí the Lord all the days of my life, to contem-
plate the will of the Lord, and to visit his holy temple. Etc.

[
02 }]

[1] Psalm 28

[2] In his temple all will sing his glory. Etc. [3] And the Lord
shall sit as king forever.

[024]
[i] Psalm 32

[2] The earth is full of the Lord’s mercy. Etc. [3] Let the
whole earth fear the Lord; let him make the earth’s inhabitants
tremble. Etc.

[025]

[
1
1
Psalm 42

[2] Send out your light and your truth, which have led me
and brought me onto your holy mountain into your taberna-
cles. Etc.

[026]

[1] Psalm 45

[2] Be still and see that I am God; I will be exalted among

the peoples and I will be exalted on the earth.

KDi riON AND I RANSl A ION

I X 5
 [
027 ]

[
I
j
Fsalmo 46.

]
[hand] [2] Omncs gentes, plaudite manibus, iubilate Deo in voce
exultadonis, quoniam Dominus excelsus, terribilis, rex magnus
super omnem terram. [3] Subiecit populos nobis et gentes sub
pedibus nostris. Et cetera. [4] Regnavit Deus super gentes, et

cetera.

(027) man'-, hand nian^(?).

HDITION AND TRANSLATION

 |
027 ]

[
I
]
Psalm 46

[2] [hand] [2] All peoples of the world, clap your hands; raise a shout of
joy to the honor of God, for the Lord is exalted, frightful, a

great king over the whole earth. [3] He has subdued the people
and placed them under our feet. Etc. [4] God ruled over the
nations, etc.

KDITION AND TRANSI ATION s?

 1

/S recto/

[028]
[
i]
Psalmo 47.

(
2 ] [hand] [2] Magnus Dominus et laudabilis nimis, in civitate Dei no-
stri, in monte sancto eius. [3] Fundatur exultatione universe
terre mons Syon, latera aquilonis, civitas regis magni. Et cetera.

[4] Sicut audivimus, sic vidimus in civitate Domini virtutum, in

civitate Dei nostri; et cetera. [5] Secundum nomen tuum,

Deus, sic et laus tua in fines te<r>re; iustitia plena est dextera tua.

[6] Letetur mons Syon, et cetera. [7] Circumdate Syon et com-

plectimini earn, et cetera per totum.

[029J
[i] Psalmo 49.

[2] Deus deorum Dominus locutus est et vocavit terram a

solis ortu usque ad occasum. [3] Ex Syon speties decoris eius.

[030]
[i] Psalmo 50.

[2] Benigne fac, <Domine>, in bona volúntate tua Syon, ut

edificentur muri lerusalem. Et cetera.

[03 1

[i] Psalmo 56.

[2] Nota. [2] Confitebor tibi in populis. Domine, et psalmum dicam

tibi in gentibus, quoniam magnificata est usque ad celos miseri-
cordia tua et usque ad nubes veritas tua. [3] Exaltare super celos,
Deus, et super omnem terram gloria tua.

(028) man'\ hand ntan^(?).

1. **Psalmorum ad mar^. del. man.
4. audivimus: audivimis L.
6. Letetur: Letetutur L.

(029) man'
(030) man'
2. fac, Domine V: tac L. ut V: et L.

(031) man'\ postl. man'.

8 8 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [
028 ]

[ 1 ]
Psalm 47

[2] [hand] [2] Great is the Lord and greatly to be praised, in the city of
our God, on his holy mountain. [3] With the exultation of the
whole earth. Mount Zion is founded, the northern extremes,
the city of the great king. Etc. [4] As we have heard, so we have
seen in the city of the lord of miracles, in the city of our God;
etc. [5] As your name, O God, so your praise reaches to the

ends of the earth; your right hand is filled with justice. [6] Let

Mount Zion rejoice, etc. [7] Surround Zion and embrace her,

and so on, to the end.

[029]

[i] Psalm 49

[2] The Lord God of gods, the Lord, has spoken and he has

called the earth from the rising of the sun to its setting. [3] From
Zion comes the vision of his beauty.

[030]
[i] Psalm 50

[2] Be generous, O Lord, in your goodwill to Zion, so that

the walls of Jerusalem may be built up. Etc.

[031]
[i] Psalm 56

[2] Note [2] I will praise you, O Lord, among the peoples, and I will

sing a psalm in your honor, for your mercy has been praised to

the heavens and your truth to the clouds. [3] Be exalted, O

God, above the heavens, and let your glory be above all the

earth.

EDITION AND I RA N S I. A 1 1 ON 89
 I0321

[
I
)
Psalmo 58.

[
2 ]
Intcndc ad visitandas omnes gentes; et cetera. [3] Ad
nihilum deduces omnes gentes. Et cetera. [4] Et scient quia
Deus dominabitur lacob et finium terre.

[03 3 1

[
I
]
Psalmo 64.

[
2 ] Nota. [2] Te decet hymnus, Deus, in Syon; et tibi reddetur votum
in lerusalem. [3] Exaudi orationem meam, ad te omnis caro
veniet. Et cetera. [4] Beatus, quern elegisti et assumpsisti; in-
habitabit in atriis tuis. [5] Replebimur in bonis domus tue;

sanctum est templum tuum, mirabile in equitate. [6] Exaudi

nos, Deus salutaris noster, spes omnium finium terre et in mari
longe. Et cetera.

(032) man'
(033) man'; postl. man'

90 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [
032 ]

[
1
1
Psalm 58

[2] Turn your attention to the peoples. Etc. [3] You will
bring all the nations to nothing. Etc. [4] And they will know

that God will be the lord and master ofJacob and of the ends of
the earth.

I0331

[1] Psalm 64

[2] Note [2] Praise is due to you in Zion, and in Jerusalem a solemn
vow to you will be recited. [3] Hear my prayer; all mortal flesh
will come to you. Etc. [4] Blessed is the one whom you have
chosen and received; he will live in the halls of your temple. [5]

We shall be satisfied with the wealth of your house; your tem-

ple is holy, admirable for its equity. [6] Hear us, God of our
salvation, hope of all the ends of the earth and the distant sea.

Etc.

HDIllON AND TRANSI A TION 9

 /S verso/

I034I
(
I ]
Ex libro Psalmorum.

[2] Psalmo 65.

(3] lubilate Dco, omnis terra, psalmum dicite nomini eius,

date gloriam laudi eius. Et cetera. [4] “Omnis terra adoret te et

psallat tibi, psalmum dicat nomini tuo.” Et cetera. [5] Oculi

eius super gentes respitiunt; et cetera. [6] Benedicite, gentes,

Deum nostrum, et auditam facite vocem laudis eius. [7] In-

troibo in domum tuam in holocaustis; reddam tibi vota mea,

que distinxerunt labia mea, et locutum est os meum in tribula-

tione mea. Et cetera.

[035]
[i] Psalmo 66.

[2] Conñteantur tibi populi, Deus; confiteantur tibi populi

omnes. [3] Letentur et exultent gentes, quoniam indicas popu-

los in equitate et gentes in terra dirigis. Et cetera.

[03b]

[i] Psalmo 67.

[2] A templo tuo in lerusalem tibi offerent reges muñera.

[037]
[i] Psalmo 68.

[2] Quoniam zelus domus tue comedit me, et opprobria

exprobrantium tibi ceciderunt super me. Et cetera. [3] Quo-
niam Deus salvam fatiet Syon et ediñeabuntur civitates lude, et

cetera.

(034) man'
(035) man'
(036) man'
(037) man'

9 2 KOrnON AND TRANSLATION

(034I

[
I
]
From the Book of Psalms

[2] Psalm 65

[3] Raise a shout ofjoy to God, all the earth; sing a psalm to

his name. Give glorious praise to him. Etc. [4] Let the whole
earth adore you and sing to you; let the earth sing a psalm to

your name. Etc. [5] He keeps watch on the peoples; etc. [6]

Bless our God, all people; let the sound of his praise be heard.

[7] I shall enter your house with burnt offerings; I shall recite to

you my solemn vows, which my lips have phrased and my

mouth has spoken in my tribulation. Etc.

[035]

[
I
]
Psalm 66

[2] Let the peoples praise you, God; let all the peoples praise

you. [3] Let the nations be glad and rejoice, for you judge the

people fairly and you direct the nations of the earth.

[03b]

[
I
]
Psalm 67

[2] At your temple in Jerusalem the kings will bring gifts to

you.

[037]

[
I
]
Psalm 68

[2] Because the zeal of your house has consumed me and the
insults of those who reproach you have fallen upon me. Etc. [3]

For God will save Zion and the cities ofjudah will be built. Etc.

KOn iON AND I RANSl A ION

l
9 3
 .

I0381

[
I
]
Psalmo 7 1

[2] Reges Tharsis et insule muñera Arabum

offerent, reges

et Sabba dona adducent. (3) Et adorabunt eum omnes reges,

omnes gentes servient ei. Et cetera. [4] Sit nornen eius benedic-
tum in sécula, et cetera. [5] Omnes gentes magnificabunt eum.
Et cetera. [6] Et replebitur maiestate eius omnis terra. Et cetera.

[039]
[i] Psalmo 73.

[2] Redemisti virgam hereditatis tue: mons Syon, in quo

habitasti in eo. Et cetera. [3] Incenderunt igni sanctuarium
tuum, in terra polluerunt tabernaculum nominis tui; et cetera.

[4] Deus autem rex noster ante sécula, operatus est salutem in

medio terre.

(038) wíjh'
(039) man '

9 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

(03H]

[ 1
)
Psalm 7

[2] The kings of Tarshish and of the island will offer pre-
sents; the kings of Arabia and of Saba will bring gifts. [3] And all

kings will adore him; all mankind will serve him. Etc. [4] Let
his name be blessed for evermore, etc. [5] All people will exalt

him. Etc. [6] And the whole earth will be filled with his maj-

esty. Etc.

[039]

[1] Psalm 73

[2] You have redeemed the seed of your inheritance: Mount

Zion, where you have dwelled. Etc. [3] They have set fire to

your sanctuary; they have soiled the tabernacle of your name.

Etc. [4] But God, our king from ages past, has brought about
salvation in the midst of the earth.

EDITION AND TRANSI A 1 ION 9 5

 /p recto/

[040]
(
I ]
Psalmo 75.

[2] Notus in ludea Deus, in Israel magnum nomen eius. [3)

Et factus est in pace locus eius, et habitado eius in Syon. Et

cetera.

[041]

[1] Psalmo 78.

[2] Deus, venerunt gentes in hereditatem tuam, polluerunt

templum sanctum tuum, posuerunt lerusalem in pomorum
custodian!. Et cetera.

[042]
[i] Psalmo 81.

[2] Surge, Deus, iudica terram, quoniam tu hereditabis in

omnibus gentibus.

[043]
[i] Psalmo 83.

[2] Quam dilecta tabernacula tua. Domine virtutum! [3]

Concupiscit et deficit anima mea in atria Domini. Et cetera. [4]

Etenim benedictionem dabit legislator. [5] Ibunt de virtute in

virtutem, videbitur Deus deorum in Syon.

[044]
[i] Psalmo 85.

[2] Non est similis tui in diis. Domine, et non est secundum
opera tua. [3] Omnes gentes, quascumque fecisti, venient et
adorabunt coram te. Domine, et glorificabunt nomen tuum,
quoniam magnus es <tu>, et fatie<n>s mirabilia: tu es Deus solus.

Et cetera.

(040) man'
(041) man'
(042) man'
(043) man'
(044) man'
3. es tu V: es L.

96 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[040]
[2]

[
1
]
Psalm 75

God is known injudea; in Israel his name is great. [3] His

abode has been established in peace and his dwelling place in
Zion. Etc.

[041]
[i] Psalm 78

[2] God, the peoples have come into your inheritance; they

have soiled your holy temple, and they have reduced Jerusalem
to a storehouse for apples. Etc.

[042]

[
I
]
Psalm 8

[2] Arise, O God, and judge the earth, for you will have an
inheritance among the nations.

Í043]
[i] Psalm 83

How beloved are your tabernacles, O God of miracles!

[2]

[3] My soul longs and grows weak for the halls of the Lord. Etc.
[4] For the lawgiver will give a blessing. [5] They will go from
miracle to miracle, the God of gods will be seen in Zion.

[044]
[i] Psalm 85

[2] There is no other god comparable to you. Lord, and no

works comparable to yours. [3] All people whom you have
created will come and worship before you, O Lord, and glorify
your name, for you are great and do wonderful things; you
alone are God. Etc.

r.niTION AND TRANSI A 1 ION 9 7

 [
045 l

[ij Psalmo 86.

[2] Fundamenta eius in montibus sanctis; diligit Dominus

portas Syon super omnia tabernacula lacob. [3] Gloriosa dicta
sunt de te, civitas Dei! Et cetera.

[046)
[i] Psalmo 88.

[2] Misericordias Domini in eternum cantabo, et cetera. [3]

Confitebuntur celi mirabilia tua, <Domine>, etenim veritatem

tuam in ecclesia sanctorum. Et cetera. [4] Tunc locutus es in
visione sanctis tuis et cetera. [5] “Inveni David servum meum”;
et cetera per totum.

(045) wia«'
(046) man'
3. tua, Domine V: tua L.

98 EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT ON

I
[045]

[
I
]
Psalm 86

[2] His foundations are on the holy mountain; the Lord

loves the gates of Zion more than all the tabernacles of Jacob.

(3] Glorious things have been said of you, the city of God! Etc.

[046]
[i] Psalm 88

[2] 1 will sing forever of the mercies of God, etc. [3] The
heavens will praise your marvellous deeds, O Lord, and your
truth in the congregation of the saints. Etc. [4] Then you spoke
in a vision to your saints, etc. [5] 1 have found David, my ser-

vant; and so on, to the end.

EDITION AND TRAN S 1. AT I ON 99

 .

/p verso/

|047l

[
I
]
Psalmo 9 1

[2] Bonum est confiten Domino et psallere nomini tuo, Al-

tissime, et cetera. [3] Plantad in domo Domini, in atriis domus
Dei nostri florebunt. [4] Adhuc multiplicabuntur in senecta
uberi et bene patientes erunt, ut annuntient et cetera.

[048]

[1] Psalmo 92.

[2] Dominus regnavit! [3] Decorem indutus est; indutus est

Dominus fortitudinem et precinxit se. Et cetera. [4] Testimonia

tua credibilia facta sunt nimis; domum tuam decet sanctitudo,

Domine, in longitudinem dierum.

[049]
[i] Psalmo 95°.

[2] Cantate Domino canticum novum, cantate Domino,

omnis terra. Et cetera. [3] Annuntiate inter gentes gloriam eius,

in omnibus populis Quoniam magnus Domi-

mirabilia eius. [4]

nus et laudabilis nimis, terribilis est super omnes deos. [5] Quo-
niam omnes dii gentium demonia, Dominus autem celos fecit.
Et cetera. [6] Afferte Domino, patrie gentium, afferte Domino
gloriam et honorem, afferte Domino gloriam nomini eius. [7]
Tollite hostias et introite in atria eius, adórate Dominum in

atrio sancto eius. [8] Commoveatur a fade eius universa terra,

dicite in gentibus, quia Dominus regnavit. Et cetera per totum.

[050]

[1] Psalmo 96.

[2] Dominus regnavit! Exultet terra, letentur insule multe.

Et cetera. [3] A<n>nuntiaverunt cell iustitiam eius, et viderunt

omnes populi gloriam eius. [4] Confundantur omnes, qui ado-

(
047 ) mart'

3. domo V\ domino L.

(
048 ) man'
(
049 ) man'
3. gloriam eius L: eius add. si . matt'.

(
050 ) man'

oo EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[047]

[
I
]
Psalm 91

(2] It is a good thing to praise the Lord and to sing hymns to

your name, most high one, etc. [3] Planted in the house of the
Lord, they will flourish in the halls of the house of our God. [4]

Moreover they will experience a fruitful and vigorous old age

so that they may make known, etc.

[048]

[
I
]
Psalm 92

[2] The Lord has prevailed! [3] He has been clothed in

beauty; the Lord has been arrayed in strength and has armed
himself Etc. [4] Your testimonies are very sure; sanctity befits
your house, O Lord, for evermore.

[049]
[i] Psalm 95

[2] Sing a new song to the Lord, sing to the Lord, all the

earth. Etc. [3] Declare his glory among the nations, and his

marvellous works among all the peoples. [4] For the Lord is

great and greatly to be praised; he is more terrible than all the

gods. [5] For all the gods of the peoples are merely idols; but

God made the heavens. Etc. [6] Give to the Lord, homeland of
the peoples, give to the Lord glory and honor; give to the Lord
glory for his name. [7] Offer sacrifices and enter his halls, adore
the Lord in his holy court. [8] Let the whole earth tremble
before him; tell the tribes that the Lord has prevailed. And so

forth to the end.

[050]

[ 1 ]
Psalm 96

[2] The Lord has prevailed! Let the earth exult; let the many
islands rejoice. Etc. [3] The heavens have proclaimed his jus-

tice, and all peoples have seen his glory. [4] Let all those who

L 1) IT 1 O N AND I RA N S 1 A 1 I ON I O I
 rant sculptilia ct qui gloriantur in simulacris suis. [5] Adórate
euin, omnes angelí eius. [6] Audivit et letata est Syon, et cetera

per totuin.

[051]

{ 1 )
Psalmo 97.

[2] Notum fecit Dominus salutare suum, in conspectu gen-

tium revelavit iustitiam suam. Et cetera.

(
051 ) man'

o2 EDITION AND TRANSI. ATI ON

worship carved images and who take pride in their idols be
rebuked. [5] Adore him, all you angels. (6] Zion heard and was
glad, and so forth, to the end.

[051]

[
I
]
Psalm 97

[2] The Lord has made known his salvation, in full sight of
the tribes he has revealed his justice. Etc.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION I 03

 .

/¡o recto/

(052]

[
1 1
Psalmo 98.

[2] Dominus regnavit! [3] Irascantur populi; qui sedet super

cherubyn, moveatur terra. (4] Dominus in Syon magnus et ex-

celsus super omnes populos. Et cetera. [5] Exáltate Dominum
Deum nostrum et adórate in monte sancto eius, quoniam sanc-
tus Dominus Deus noster. Et cetera.

10531
[i] Psalmo 99.

[2] lubilate, Domino, omnis terra, et cetera.

[054]
[i] Psalmo 101.

[2] Tu exsurgens misereberis Syon, quia tempus miserendi

eius, quia venit tempus, et cetera. [3] Et timebunt gentes
nomen tuum. Domine, et omnes reges terre gloriam tuam, quia

ediñcavit Dominus Syon et videbitur in gloria sua. Et cetera.

[4] Ut annuntient in Syon nomen Domini et laudem eius in

lerusalem, et cetera per totum.

[0551
[i] Psalmo 104.

[2] Conñtemini Domino et invócate nomen eius, annuntia-

te inter gentes opera eius. Et cetera. [3] Ipse Dominus Deus
noster; in universa terra iuditia eius.

[056]
[i] Psalmo 105.

[2] Conñtemini Domino, quoniam bonus, quoniam in

seculum misericordia eius. Et cetera. [3] Salvos fac nos, Do-

(052) man'
3. sedet V: sedes L.

(053) man'
(054) man'
(055) man'
(056) man'
3. fac nos L: nos fac transp. man'

I o 4 KOI XION AND TRANSLATION

(
052 ]

[
1
1
Psalm 98

[2] The Lord has prevailed! [3] Let the peoples tremble; he
will sit above the cherubim. Let the earth be moved. [4] The
Lord is great in Zion and distinguished above all peoples. Etc.

[5] Praise the Lord our God and worship at his holy mountain,
for the Lord our God is holy. Etc.

I°53l

[
I
]
Psalm 99

[2] Sing joyful hymns to the Lord, all the earth, etc.

[054]

[1] Psalm loi

[2] Arise and have mercy on Zion, because it is time to take

pity on her, because the time has come, etc. [3] The peoples
will fear your name. Lord, and all kings of the earth your glory,
because the Lord has built up Zion and he will appear in his

glory. Etc. [4] So that they proclaim the name of the Lord in

Zion and his praise in Jerusalem, and so on, to the end.

l°55l

1
1 ] Psalm 1
04

[2] Praise the Lord and invoke his name, make known his

works among the peoples. Etc. [3] He is the Lord, our God; his

judgments are everywhere on earth.

[056]
[i] Psalm 105

[2] Praise the Lord, because he is good, because his mercies

endure forever. Etc. [3] Save us, O Lord our God, and gather us

EDITION AND TK ANSI AT ION I o 5

 mine Deus nostcr, ct congrega nos de nationibus, ut con-
fiteamur noniini sancto tuo et gloriemur in laude tua. Et cetera.

I° 57 l

[
I
]
Psalmo 107.

[2] Confitebor tibi in populis, Domine, et psallam tibi in

nationibus, quia magna <est> super celos misericordia tua et

usque ad nubes veritas tua. [3] Exaltare super celos, Deus, et

super omnem terram gloria tua. [4] Ut liberentur dilecti tui,

salvum fac dextera tua et exaudi me. [5] Deus locutus est in

sancto suo: et cetera.

(
057 ) man'
2. magna est V: magna L.

I o6 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

trom the peoples, so that we may celebrate your holy name and
glory in your praise.

[057]
[i] Psalm 107

[2] I will praise you to the peoples, O Lord, and sing hymns
to you among the nations, for your mercy is great above the
heavens and your truth extends to the clouds. [3] Rise up above
the heavens, O Lord, and let your glory cover the earth. [4] So
that your chosen ones may be free, bring me to salvation with
your right hand and give heed to me. [5] God has spoken in his
holy place, etc.

KDITION AND TRANSI ATI ON I O 7

 /lo verso/

[058]
[i] Psalmo 1 12.

(2] Sit nomcn Domini benedictum ex hoc nunc et usque in

seculum. [3] A solis ortu usque ad occasum laudabile nomen

Domini. [4] Excelsus super omnes gentes Dominus, et cetera.

[o 59 j

[1] Psalmo 1 13.

[2] Non nobis, Domine, non nobis, sed nomini tuo da glo-
riam super misericordia tua et veritate tua. [3] Ne quando di-

cant gentes: “Ubi est Deus eorum?’’. [4] Deus autem noster in

celo; omnia, quecumque voluit, fecit. [5] Simulacra gentium

argentum et aurum, opera manuum hominum. [6] Os habent
et non loquentur, oculos habent et non videbunt. Et cetera.

[060]
[i] Psalmo 1 15.

[2] Diripuisti vincula mea: tibi sacrificabo hostiam laudis et

nomen Domini invocabo. [3] Vota mea Domino reddam in

conspectu omnis populi eius in atriis domus Domini, in medio

tui, lerusalem.

[061]
[i] Psalmo 1 16.

[2] Laúdate Dominum, omnes gentes, laúdate eum, omnes

populi. [3] Quoniam confirmata est super nos misericordia
eius, et veritas Domini manet in eternum.

[062]

[i] Psalmo 12 1.

[2] Letatus sum in his que dicta sunt mihi: ‘In domum
Domini ibimus’. [3] Stantes erant pedes nostri in atriis tuis,

Hierusalem. Et cetera.

(058) man
(059) man
(060) man
(061) man
(062) man

I o 8 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

(05S]

1 1 ]
Psalm 1 1

[2] May
name of the Lord be blessed from henceforth,
the

now and forever. [3] From the rising of the sun to its setting,
the name of the Lord is worthy of praise, [4] The Lord is high
above all the peoples, etc.

[059]

[
I
]
Psalm 1 1

[2] Not to us, O Lord, not to us, but to your name give
glory through your mercy and truth. [3] So that the nations

never say, “Where is their God?” [4] For our God is in heaven;

he has done all that he desired. [5] The idols of the heathens are
silver and gold, the works of men’s hands, [6] They have
mouths and they will not speak; they have eyes and they will
not see. Etc.

[060]

[
I
]
Psalm 1
1

[2] You have separated my chains; I shall celebrate a sacrifice

of praise to you, and I will invoke the name of the Lord, [3] I

will recite my solemn vows to God in the full sight of all his

people in the halls of the house of the Lord, in the midst of you,
Jerusalem.

[061]

[
I
]
Psalm 1 1

[2] Praise the Lord, all the nations; praise him, all peoples. [3]

For his mercy towards us is certain, and the truth of the Lord is

eternal.

[062]
[i] Psalm 121

[2] I rejoiced that they said to me: “We will go into the
house of the Lord.” [3] We were standing at your gates, Jerusa-
lem, Etc.

KDITION AND TRANSLATION I O9

 (o^>3l

[i] Psalmo 125.

[2] In convcrtendo Dominus captivitatem Syon, facti sumus

sicut consolati. [3] Tunc repletum est gaudio os nostrum, et

lingua nostra exultatione. [4] Tunc dicent inter gentes: ‘Ma-

gnificavit Dominus facere cum eis’. Et cetera.

(
063 ) man'

1 10 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[o(n]

[
I
]
Psalm 1
25

[2] When the Lord brought back the captives of Zion, our
Then our mouths were filled with joy, and
souls rejoiced. [3]

our tongues with exultation. [4] Then they will say among the
peoples, “The Lord has done great things with them.” Etc.

to IT ION ANO TK ANSI AT ION I 1 I

 .

/i i recto/

[064]
[i] Psalmo 127.

[2] Bead omnes, qui dment Dominum, qui ambulant in viis

eius. Et cetera. [3] Benedicat tibi Dominus ex Syon, et videas

bona lerusalem omnibus diebus vite tue; et videas filios filio-

rum tuorum, pacem super Israel.

[065]
[i] Psalmo 128.

(2] Dominus iustus concidet cervices peccatorum. [3] Con-

fundantur et convertantur retrorsum omnes, qui oderunt Syon.
Et cetera.

[066]
[i] Psalmo 1 3 I

[2] Memento, Domine, David et omnis mansuetudinis eius,

et cetera. [3] “Ecce audivimus earn <esse> in Effrata, invenimus

earn in campis silve. [4] Introibimus in tabernaculum eius,
adorabimus in loco, ubi steterunt pedes eius”. Et cetera. [5] ‘‘Et

filii eorum usque in seculum sedebunt super sedem tuam”. [6]

Quoniam elegit Dominus Syon, elegit earn in habitationem

sibi: et cetera.

[067]
[i] Psalmo 133.

[2] Ecce nunc benedicite Dominum, omnes servi Domini,

qui statis in domo Domini, in atriis domus Dei nostri. [3] In

noctibus extollite manus vestras in sancta et benedicite Domi-

num. [4] Benedicat tibi Dominus ex Syon, qui fecit celum et
terram.

(
064 ) man'
(
065 ) man'
(
066 ) man'
3. earn esse V\ eum L. eam in V: eum in L.

(
067 ) man'
3. manus: manuus L.

4. tibi L: te V.

I 12 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

i
[064]

[i] Psalm 127

[2] Blessed are they who fear the Lord, who follow his ways.
Etc. [3] May the Lord bless you from Zion; may you see the

prosperity of Jerusalem all the days of your life. May you see

your children’s children; and peace be upon Jerusalem.

|o'>5]

[i] Psalm 128

[2] The just Lord will cut the throats of sinners. [3] Let all

who have hated Zion be confounded and turned back. Etc.

[066]

[
I
]
Psalm 1 3

[2] Lord, remember David and all his gentleness, etc. [3]

Behold, we heard that it was in Ephrath, and we found it in the

open fields of the forest. [4] We will enter his tabernacle; we

will worship at the place where his feet have stood. Etc. [5] And
their children will sit on your throne forever. [6] For the Lord
chose Zion; he chose her as his dwelling place, etc.

[067]
[i] Psalm 133

[2] Come today and bless the Lord, all you servants of the

Lord, you who stand in the house of the Lord, in the halls of the
house of our God. [3) In hours of the night lift up your hands
toward the holy place and bless the Lord. [4] May the Lord,

who made heaven and earth, bless you from Zion.

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I I

3
 [o6H|

[
I
]
Psalmo 1 34.

[
2 ]
nomen Domini, laúdate, servi, Dominum, qui
Laúdate
statis in domo Domini, in atriis domus Dei nostri. Et cetera. [3]

Benedictos Dominus ex Syon, qui habitat in lerusalem. Et

cetera.

[069]
[i] Psalmo 135.

[2] Confitemini Domino, quoniam bonus, et cetera. [3]

Confitemini Deo deorum, et cetera. [4] Confitemini Domino

dominorum, et cetera per totum.

(
068 ) man'
(
069 ) man'

I 14 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

1
[068]

[
I
]
Psalm 1 34

[2] Praise the name of the Lord; you servants, praise the

Lord, you who stand in the house of the Lord, in the halls of the

house of our God. Etc. [3] Blessed is the Lord from Zion, who
lives in Jerusalem. Etc.

[069]
[i] Psalm 135

[2] Praise the Lord, because he is good, etc. [3] Praise the

God of gods, etc. [4] Praise the Lord of lords, and so forth, to

the end.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 1 ' .S

 /a verso/

[070]

[ 1 ]
Fsalmo 137.

[2] In conspcctu angelorum psallam tibi, adorabo ad tern-

plum sanctum tuum; et confitebor nomini tuo et cetera. [3]

Confiteantur tibi, Domine, omnes reges terre, quia audierunt

omnia verba oris tui. Et cetera.

[071]

[1] Psalmo 144.

[2] Confiteantur tibi. Domine, omnia opera tua; et sancti tui

benedicant tibi. [3] Gloriam regni tui dicent et potentiam tuam

loquentur, ut notam fatiant filiishominum potentiam tuam et
gloriam magnificentie regni tui. [4] Regnum tuum regnum

omnium seculorum, et doniinatio tua in omni generatione et

generatione. Et cetera.

[072]
[i] Psalmo 145.

[2] Lauda, anima mea, Dominum; laudabo Dominum in

vita mea, psallam Deo meo, quamdiu fuero. Et cetera. [3] Re-
gnabit Dominus in sécula, Deus tuus, Syon, in generatione<m>
et generatione<m>.

[073]
[i] Psalmo 147.

[2] Lauda, lerusalem, Dominum; lauda Deum tuum, Syon.

Et cetera per totum.

(070) man'
(071) matt'
4. in . . . generatione L: in generationem et generationem V.

(072) matt'
(073) man'

I I 6 FDITION AND TRANSLATION

[oyo]

[i] Psalm 137

{2] In full sight ot the angels I will sing psalms to you; I will

worship at your holy temple, and I will praise your name, etc.

[3] Let them praise you. Lord, all the kings of the earth, because

[2]have heard
they all the words from your mouth.

[071]
[i] Psalm 144

Let all your works reveal you, O Lord; and let your saints
bless you. [3] They will describe the glory of your kingdom and
they will speak of your power to make known to the children

of man your power and the glory of your magnificent king-

dom. [4] Your kingdom is a kingdom for all ages, and your
[3]
dominion will endure throughout all generations. Etc.

[072]
[i] Psalm 145

[2] Praise the Lord, my soul. I will praise the Lord through-
out my life; I will sing psalms to my God as long as I live. Etc.

The Lord will reign forever; your God, Zion, throughout

all generations.

[073]
[i] Psalm 147

[2] Praise the Lord, Jerusalem; praise your God, Zion. And
so on, to the end.

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I I

7
 [
074 ]

[i] Psalmo 148.

[2] Laúdate Dominum de celis, et cetera. [3] Reges terre et

omnes populi, principes et omnes iudices terre, iuvenes et vir-

gines, senes cum iunioribus, laudent nomen Domini, quia exal-

tatum est nomen eius solius. Et cetera.

10751
[i] Psalmo 149.

[2] Cantate Domino canticum novum; et cetera. Et filii

Syon exultent in rege suo. Et cetera.

[076]
[i] Psalmo 150.

[2] Omnis spiritus laudet Dominum. Amen.

(074) man'
3. Domini V: Domini, etc. L.

(075) man'
3. filii V: filie L.

(076) man'

I I 8 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

I°74l

[
I
]
Psalm 1 48

[2] Praise the Lord from the heavens, etc. [3] Let the kings of
the earth and all the peoples, the princes and all the judges of
the earth, young men and virgins, the old with the young, let

them praise the name of the Lord, because only his name has
been exalted. Etc.

[075]
[i] Psalm 149

[2] Sing a new song to the Lord; etc. May the children of
Zion exult in their king. Etc.

[076]
[i] Psalm 150

[2] Let every soul praise the Lord. Amen.

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I I

9
 //2 recto/

[077]
[i] Oratio Salomonis. Ecclesiastici 36,

[2] Miserere, Domine, plebi tue, super quam invocatum est

nomen tuum, et Israel, quern coequasti primogénito tuo. [3]

Miserere civitati sanctificationis tue, Jerusalem, civitati requiei

tue. [4] Reple Syon inenarrabilibus virtutibus tuis et gloria tua

populum tuum. [5] Da testimonium <his>, qui a<b> initio crea-

ture tue sunt, et suscita pre<di>cationes, quas locuti sunt in no-
mine tuo prophete priores. [6] Da mercedem. Domine, su-

stinentibus te, ut prophete tui Fideles inveniantur. [7] Et exaudi

orationem servorum tuorum, secundum benedictionem Aaron
de populo tuo, et dirige nos in viam iustitie, ut sciant omnes,

qui habitant terram, quia tu es Deus conspector seculorum.

(078]

[ 1 ]
Haré semeiante a este mi siervo

al sabio varón, sagaz e prudente,

que funda e hordena por modo exelente.

(077) man'
2. Domine L: om. V.

4 . inenarrabilibus: inennarrabilibus L. virtutibus V\ verbis L.

5 . bis . . . ab V: quia L.
6. Domine L: om. V.

7. orationem L: orationes V. de V: da L. ut L: et V.

(078) man^

I 2 o EDITION AND TRANSLATION

|077l
[i] Solomon’s prayer, Ecclesiastes 36

[2] O Lord, have mercy on your people over whom your

name has been invoked and on Israel, whom you have treated

as your firstborn. [3] Have mercy on the city of your sanctifica-

tion, Jerusalem, on the city of your repose. [4] Replenish Zion
with your indescribable achievements and your people with
your glory. [5] Give proof to those who from the beginning are
your creatures and set in motion the predictions that the first

prophets spoke in your name. [6] Reward, O Lord, those who

support you, so that they, your prophets, will be vindicated. [7]

Hear the prayer of your servants, according to the blessing of

Aaron on your people, and lead us into the way of justice, so

that all who inhabit the earth know that you are God, the be-
holder of all ages.

[078]

[1] I shall make my servant like this one,

like the wise man, farsighted and prudent,

who builds and arranges skillfully.

EDITION AND TRANSI AT ION I 2 I

 / 12 verseo/

[079]

[1] Isydorus, libro 7° Ethymologiarum, capitulo 8.

[2] Prophetic genera sunt septem. Primum genus éxtasis, [3] [3~9] ••

quod est mentis excessus; sicut vidit Petrus vas illud summissum
de celo in stupore mentis cum varáis animalibus. [4] Secundum .2.

genus visio; sicut apud Isayam diccntem: “Vidi Dominum

sedentem super solium excelsum”. [5] Tertium genus som- .3.

pnium; sicut lacob subnixam in celo scalam dormiens vidit. [6]

Quartum genus per nubem; sicut ad Moysem et ad lob post .4.

plagam loquitur Deus. [7] Quintum genus vox de celo; sicut ad .5.

Abraam sonuit dicens: “Ne iniitias manum tuam super pue-

rum”, et apud Saulum in via: “Saule, Saule, quid me perse-

queris?”. [8] Sextum genus accepta parabola; sicut apud .6.

Salomonem in Proverbiis, ct apud Balaam, cum evocaretur a .7.

Balach. [9] Septimum genus repletio Sancti Spiritus; sicut pene

apud omnes prophetas.

[080]

[i] Sequitur.

[2] Alii tria genera visionum dixerunt <esse>. [3] Unum [3-5] -i

secundum oculos corporis; et cetera. [4] Alterum secundum .2.

spiritum, quo imaginamur ea que per corpus sentimus; et ce-

tera. [5] Tertium autem genus visionis est, quod ñeque cor- .3.

poreis sensibus, ñeque ulla parte anime qua corporalium rerum

imagines capiuntur, sed per intuitum mentis quo intellecta con-
spicitur veritas et cetera, ut ibidem.

(079) man'; postls. man'.

1. 7® corr. in ras. man'.
(080) man'; postls. man'.
2. dixerunt esse /; dixerunt L.

122 E D T
I I (Í N AND THAN S I. AT I (J N
[079]

[
I
]
Isidore, Etymolo^iae, book 7, chapter 8

[2] There are seven kinds of prophecy. The first is ec-

[3] [3-9] •

stasy, a transport of the mind; for example, when Peter, m a

state of mental contusion, saw the vessel containing various ani-
mals being lowered from heaven. [4] The second kind is a vi- .2.

sion, exemplified by the words of Isaiah, “I saw the Lord seated

on a lofty throne.” [5] The third is a dream; for example, Jacob, .3.

sleeping, saw a The fourth kind of

ladder leading to heaven. [6] .4.

prophecy occurs in a cloud, for example, when God spoke to

Moses and to Job after his misfortune. [7] The fifth is a voice .5.

from heaven, like the one that spoke to Abraham saying, “Do
not lay a hand on that boy,” and to Saul on the highway, “Saul,
Saul, why do you The sixth kind is received
persecute me?” [8] . 6 .

through a parable; for example, Solomon in Proverbs and Ba-

laam when he was commissioned by Balak. [9] The seventh .7.

kind of prophecy is permeation by the Holy Spirit, experienced

by nearly all the prophets.

[080]

[1] Continuation

[2] Others have said that there are three kinds of vision. [3] I3-5]
The first is received by means of the eyes of the body; etc. [4]

Another is received through the mind when we form mental .2.

images of those things that the body experiences; etc. [5] The
third kind of vision involves neither physical sensation nor any .3.

part of the mind in which images of physical things are con-

ceived, but comes through an intuitive understanding of truth,

and so forth, in the same selection.

KDITION ANU TKANSl ATION > 3

 /i j recto/

[o8il
[i] Rabí Samuel et cetera.

[2] En una epístola o carta trasladada de arávigo en rro-

maní^e, la qual embió el rrabí Samuel de Israel, natural de la

(;:ibdad de Fis, a maestre Ysaach, rrabbí de la synagoga de Mar-

rucos et cetera, los quales después fueron buenos e fieles chri-

stianos.

[082]
[i] Capítulo 16.

[2] Señor myo maestro, como nos entre nos e yo entre my [

2 ] Isaye 30°.

leo e nos leemos, que so e que somos fijos de Jacob patriarcha,

mucho he pavor que sea complido en nos aquello, que es dicho
por la boca de Ysaías en el capítulo XXX°: “Matar te ha Dios,
o Israel, e llamará sus siervos por otro nombre”. [3] Temor he, [3] Moysen.
señor, que aquellos siervos son los gentiles, a los quales deve ser

puesto aquel nombre segund que di(;e Moysén: “Serán los gen-
tiles a la cabella e el pueblo incrédulo a la cola”, segund que nos
somos ya son más de mili años. [4] Aun de los gentiles di(^e Hie- [4] Hieremie
remías en el capítulo VI°: “Fenchir se ha la tierra <de la fe> de
Dios e sobrará asy como la agua del mar”. [5] E d’ellos di<;:e [5] 3 Regum
Salomón en el 3° libro de les rReyes en el capítulo XLVIII® en capitulo 48.

la su oration assy: [6] “Señor Dios, quando veniere el

avenediso, e él de tierra agena a la sancta Casa tuya, e llamare él

tu sancto nombre muy béndito, oyr lo has. Señor myo, porqué

todas las cosas aprendan temer el tu nombre, assy como el tu

pueblo de YsraeF’.fy] ¿Pues, señor myo, en qué nos gloriamos [7]Moysen.

e porqué menospretiamos lo,s gentiles, pues que Salomón los
Numeri,
capitulo 14.
fa(^e parti<;:ipantes del temor del Señor e de la Casa sancta suya e
por ventura Dios nos desechó a nos de aquella su sancta Casa,
assy como <a nos non dignos e diola a ellos>? E aun d’estos

(081) man'
(082) man'; postls. man'; hand man^(?).
3. son los gentiles L: nos somos N: simus E R.
4. tierra de la fe; terra fide E R; tierra L.
6. llamare él: llamare ay él L.
7. como . . . ellos N: como nos dixo L; et forte nos indignos eiecit Deus de
ista domo et dedit earn istis E R.

I 2 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

(oSi)

[i] Rabbi Samuel, etc.

[2] In an epistle or letter translated from Arabic to Romance

that the rabbi Samuel of Israel, a native of the city of Fez, sent to
the teacher Isaac, rabbi of the synagogue of Morocco, etc., both

of whom later became good and faithful Christians.

[082]

[i] Chapter 16

[2] My dear teacher, because we read together and I read [2] Isaiah 30
privately that I am and that we are sons ofjacob the patriarch, I

greatly fear that what was prophesied through the mouth of

Isaiah in chapter 30 will be fulfilled in us: “O Israel, the Lord
will put you to death, and he will call his servants by another
name. ”[3] I fear, sir, that the servants to whom that name will 13] Moses
be given are the Gentiles, as Moses says, “The Gentiles will be

at the head and the nonbelievers at the tail,” where in fact we

have been for more than a thousand years. [4] Even Jeremiah 14] Jeremiah
says about the Gentiles in chapter 6: “The earth must be filled

with faith in God, just as the sea is filled with water.”[5] And [ 5] 3 Kings,
chapter 48
Solomon says about them in his prayer in chapter 48 of the
third book of Kings: [6] “Lord God, when a foreigner comes
from a distant land to your holy house, and calls upon your holy
and most blessed name, then hear him, my Lord, so that all may
learn to fear your name, as do your people of Israel.” [7] There- I7] Moses.
fore, my lord, what reason do we have for praising ourselves Numbers,
chapter 14
and why do we despise the Gentiles, for Solomon made them
participants in the fear of God and of his holy house. Perhaps
God cast us out of his holy house, just as he said. And even
Moses says about the Gentiles in the fourth book of the Laws:

EDITION AND E R AN S I. AT I () N I 2 5
 gentiles dise Moysen en el 1111 ° libro de la Ley: “Esto dise el

Señor: ‘Fenchir se ha toda la tierra de la gloria del Señor’ ”.[H| [8] Psalmo 2
E d’ellos dise David en el psalmo XXI°: “Ante de ti vernán e
convertir se han al Señor todos los fines de la tierra”. [9] Esso [9] Isaie 55°.

mismo di(;:e Isaías en el capítulo 55: [

loj “O Casa sancta, vino la

tu lumbre e la gloria del Señor sobre ti es nas<;ida. [

11 j
Andarán
las gentes en la tu lumbre”. [12] Señor myo, ¿quien son / ij

verso/ los que venieron a la Casa del Señor, sy non las gentes
estrañas que erra van al Señor, adorando los ydolos? [13] E non
solamente las gentes, mas aun los príncipes d’ellos e de los

quales dixo que andarían en la lumbre de la sancta Casa; nos

[14] Isaye 65 andamos errados d’ella ya son más de mili años. 14] Otrosy [
di^'e
capitulo.
este mesmo Isaías en el capítulo LXV: “Cata que la gente, que

non sabías, llamarás, e las nationes, que te non cognos(;:ieron,

vernán a ti”: [15] segund que de fecho pares<;:e, son ya más de

mili años, ca el Christo, que fue embiado, seguía la Ley que nos
fue dada, vino e las gentes, que ley non supieron, a <él> vinieron

[16] Isaie e él les dio ley nueva e pura e sancta. [16] E por esto di<;:e Isayas
capitulo 42.
en el capítulo XLII: “Concordaron las gentes e los rreyes d’el-

[19] las, e aiuntáronse en la Casa del Señor”, e non tiene assy este

[17] Ibidem. passo la nuestra transladatión.fiy] E aun, señor myo, temo que
<de> aquellos fue dicho lo que se lee en este mesmo capítulo,

que di^e: “Adiuntadvos e venid todos los de los gentiles, que

[i 8] Isaye fuestes salvos por Dios”. [18] E d’ellos di<;:e otra ves Isaías en el
capitulo 64.
capítulo LXIIIP: “Buscaron a my, los que <non> preguntavan
Hieremie por my, e falláro<n>me, los que <non> me buscavan”.[i9] E más
capitulo III.
di^e Hieremías en el capítulo III°: “Aiuntarse han todas las

gentes en el nombre del Señor en la Casa sancta; e non andarán

[20] Idem, más en la maldad de sus corazones”. [20] E di<;:e más Hieremías
capitulo 16.
en el capítulo XVI°: “!Ahé, Dios, Señor myo e Dios myo! A ti

vernán todos desde de los postrimeros fines de la tierra e dirán:

‘Non heredaron los nuestros padres, sy non mentira e mal-

[21] [hand] dad’ ”.[21] E aun d’estos mesrnos gentiles di(;^e Sophonías pro-
[21]
Sophonie
capitulo 3.

15. seguía L: segund N. vino e N: vino a L; venit et £ R. a él vinieron

e advinieron L.

16. transladatión: transladitión L. e non . . . transladatión L: om. E R.

17. de aquellos: aquellos L.
18. non preguntavan N: preguntavan L. non me buscavan N: me bus-
cavan L.

I 2 6 HOITION AND THANS I. A r I ON

 “This is what the Lord says: ‘The whole earth must be filled

with the glory of God.’ ” [8] And David says about them in [8] Psalm 21
Psalm 3 1, “All the ends of the earth must come before you and

turn to the Lord. ”[9] Isaiah says the same thing in chapter [9] Isaiah 55

5 5: [10] “O holy house, your light has come and the glory of
God has appeared over you. [11] The Gentiles will walk in
your light.” [12] My dear Sir, who are they who have come to
the House of the Lord, if not the foreign peoples who failed the

Lord by worshipping idols? [13] And not only the Gentiles, but
even their rulers, who he said would walk in the light of the
holy house; and we have been wandering away from it for a

[14] Isaiah, thousand years now. [14] Furthermore, Isaiah says the same
65th chapter thing in chapter 65: “Behold, you will call the Gentiles, whom
you do not know, and the nations, who did not know you, will

come to you.” [15] This is what seems to have happened more

than one thousand years ago when Christ, who was sent ac-

cording to the law that was given to us, went to the Cientiles,

who did not know the law. They came to him and he gave
[16] Isaiah, them a new law that was pure and holy. [16] For this reason,
chapter 42 Isaiah says in chapter 42, “The Gentiles and their kings agreed
and assembled in the house of the Lord”; this passage is differ-

[17] Ibidem ent in our translation. [

1
7] And also, my dear sir, I fear that what
can be read in this same chapter refers to them: “Assemble
yourselves and come, all you Gentiles, who have been saved by
[18] Isaiah, God.”|i8]And again Isaiah says about them in chapter 64,
chapter 64 “Those who were asking for me sought me; and those who
[19] were seeking me found me. ”[19] Furthermore, Jeremiah says
Jeremiah, in chapter 3: “All the Gentiles will assemble in the name of the
chapter 3
Lord in the holy house; and they will no longer follow the

[20] Idem, wickedness of their hearts. ”[20] In addition, Jeremiah says in

chapter 16 chapter 16: “Yaweh, God, my Lord and my God! All will come
to you from the ends of the earth and say, ‘Our fathers have

[21] [hand] inherited only lies and wickedness.’ ”[2 1 ]

And the prophet
[21]
Zephaniah,
chapter 3

rmnoN and iransiation I 2 7

 pheta en el capítulo III: “Otorgado es a las gentes que fablen en
el nombre del Señor e que lo sirvan en ombro uno”, “e que lo

sirva todo ornen en su lugar e todas las yslas de las gentes”.

[ii] Zacharie (22] Esso mismo dixo Zacharías propheta en el capítulo 11 °:

capitulo 2°.
“Alégrate, Casa de Syón, que yo verné a ti e moraré en medio
de ti. En aquel día se allegarán a Dios las gentes en su mu-
chedumbre”. / 14 recto/

[23] Nota. [23] Di(;:e aun este mesmo propheta en el capítulo 8: “Esto [23] Zacharie
8
disc el Señor <Dios> de las huestes: Vemán gentes muchas de .

muchos lugares, e dirá el varón a su vecino: ‘Vamos, e bus-

quemos al Señor en bien’ ”. [24] E, my señor, estas prophetías

complidas son e cómplense oy a los nuestros ojos: [25] ca,

señor, claramente vees como todos los pueblos e todas las len-

guas leen los libros de la ley e de los prophetas e el Psalterio,

desechados ya los ydolos;[2ó] e ninguno d’ellos cree por la doc- [26] Abacuch
trina de Moysén e de Aarón, <ni de ninguno de nuestros pro- 3-

phetas, ni retienen cosa de la fe de sus ydolos, desde aquel

tiempo> que creieron aquel Justo del qual dice el propheta Aba-
cuch en el capítulo 3°: “Saliste, Señor, en salud del tu pueblo

con el tu Christo”.

[083]
[i] Idem rabí Samuel, capítulo 17°.

[2] Temo, mi señor, que Dios ven<;:edor vivificó e dió vida a

estas gentes por la su fe e él nos mató a nos con la incredulidat e

dureza, segund qu’él dise por la boca de Isaías en el capítulo

LXV, onde dise assy: [3] “Esto dise el Señor: porque vos [3] Isaie 65.

llamé, e non me rrespondistes? Los mys siervos comerán, e vos

fambrearedes; catad, que los mys siervos beverán, e vos pere-

sceredes de sed; [4] los mys siervos se alegrarán en alegría de

corazón, e vos seredes confundidos en amargura de vuestro

corazón. [5] E matar te ha Dios, o Israel, e llamará sus siervos
por otro nombre. [6] En el qual nombre bendi<;irá aquel Dios,

que es bendicho sobre la tierra. Amen’ ”.

[7] E nos veemos las

21. a N: que L. ornen L: ombre N. de las gentes N: gentium £ R, de la

tierra L.

22. Alégrate: Allégrate L.

23. Señor Dios N: Dominus Deus E R: Señor L.
25. desechados N: e desechados L. los ydolos L: sus ydoles N; suis idolis

£ R.
26. e ninguno N: en que niguno L. Aarón . . . que N: Aarón que L.

(083) mati'-, postls. man'.

2. Temo, mi: Temóme L. vida: luda L.

I 2 8 EDITION AND TKANSLATION

 Zephaniah says about these same Gentiles in chapter 3, “It is

determined that the Gentiles shall speak in the name of the

Lord and serve him shoulder to shoulder, and that every man in

his place shall serve him, and all the islands of the earth.”

[
22 ] The prophet Zechariah
[22] said the same thing in chapter 2;
Zecariah, “Rejoice, House of Zion, for I will come to you and will live
chapter 2
among you. On that day the multitude of Gentiles will follow

God.”
[23] Note [23] Furthermore, the same prophet says in chapter 8: “This [23I Zecariah
8
is what the Lord of hosts says: Many peoples will come from
many places, and man will say to his neighbor, ‘Let us go and
seek the Lord for our salvation.’ ”[24] And, my dear sir, these

prophecies have been fulfilled and are being fulfilled today

before our eyes. [25] Because, sir, it is apparent that all peoples
of all languages are reading the books of the law and the proph-
ets and the psalms and have rejected their idols. [26] They do [26] Habakkuk
not base their faith on the teachings of Moses and Aaron or any 3

of our prophets, and they rejected their idols when they began
to believe in the Just One, about whom the prophet Habakkuk
says in chapter 3, “You went forth. Lord, for the salvation of
your people with your Christ.”

[o«3]

[i] From Rabbi Samuel, chapter 17

[2] I fear, my lord, that God victorious gave life to these

Gentiles because of their faith and killed us for our disbelief and
intransigence, as he said through the mouth of Isaiah in chapter

65: [3I “This is what the Lord says: ‘Why did you not answer [3I Isaiah 65

me when 1 called? [4] My servants will eat and you will go

hungry; behold, my servants will drink and you will perish

from thirst. My servants will rejoice in the joyfulness of the

heart, and you will be confounded in the bitterness of your

hearts. [5] God will put you to death, O Israel, and he will call

his servants by another name. [6] In that name the God who is

blessed on earth will give his blessings. Amen.’ ” [7] We see the

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I 2 9

 rredeniptioncs d’cste nombre bendicho de Dios sobre la fas de
la tierra e veemos que a nos derramó en captiverio por todo el

mundo e por las quatro partes d’él, ya son más de mili años. [8]

E claramente pares<;e en nos el rrostro de la ira de Dios non para

castigar, mas para destruir, [y] E aqueste es el matamiento, con
el qual amenasó Dios que nos mataría. 10] [
E aquestas gentes, las

quales Dios llama syervos suyos, rre<;:ebieron ya lo que Dios

prometió en la ley ante de la muerte del nuestro primero nom-

[
1
1 ]
Amos bre, segund la orden de las palabras que son dichas por Isaías.

capitulo 6. “E fambre e que nos pades(^emos, non es de pan,

[11] la la sed, [i i] Isaie.

mas es de los cora(;;:ones, ca es sequedad de las nuestras ánimas, et

fambre / 14 persa/ de la palabra de Dios”, segund que dixo el

propheta Amos en el capítulo VI. E tu, señor myo, sabes esta

cosa más larga et claramente que yo.

[084]
[i] Idem rabí Samuel, capítulo 18.

[2] Pavor he yo, señor mío maestro, que aquestas gentes han
[3] Abacuch e ovieron mili años de vida después que fue muerto Israel. [3]
capitulo.
I
Las quales gentes non havían cosa de bien antes que creyesen en
Dios e en su Christo, e ellas nos finieron ser <aquellos pe^es e>

aquellas bestias, de las quales di<;:e el propheta Abacuch que non

han cabdillo. [4] E aquestas gentes, después que fueron alim-

piadas por la fe, han sus ayunos e sus fiestas e sus cerimonias de
la ley nueva e han más todas aquellas cosas que son contenidas
[5] Nota. en la ley vieja, quanto pertenes^e a limpiesa.[5] E vees, señor,

como en todo lenguaje e en todo rincón e en todo lugar e en

Oriente e en Occidente las gentes confiessan el nombre del

[6] Abacuch Señor. [6] E non creyeron en él por Moysén ny por alguno de
capitulo 3.
los prophetas, como quier que sean estudiosos en la ley e en los
libros de los prophetas, mas Dios los llamó por los discípulos del

Justo el qual salió con Dios en salud d’ellos, segund que dise
Dios por la boca del propheta Abacuch. [7] Aquestos discípulos

10. ante L: sed non ante E R.

11. de pan L: pañis aut aque E R. los corazones, ca N: cordiuin atque
animarurn £ R; las oraciones que L.
(084) man'; postls. man'.
2. Israel L: lesus in lerusalem E R.

3 . nos . . . pe9es e: nos finieron ser L; quoniain ipsi forte erant illi pisces et
£ R.
4. e han N: et habent £ R; e aun L.
6 estudiosos N: studiosos L. ** capitulo : capitulo L.
.
3 3

1 3 o fcDiriON AND TRANSLATION

 8

redemption c>f that name that has been blessed by Cíod over the
face of the earth, and we see that he has dispersed us in captivity

throughout the world and its four parts for more than a thou-
sand years. [8] Clearly the face of the wrath of God appears to
us, not for punishment but for destruction. [9] And that is the
slaughter that God threatened. [10] Those Gentiles, whom God
calls his servants, have already received what God promised m
the laws before the death of our first man, according to the

( 1
1 ]
Amos, words spoken by Isaiah, [i i] And the hunger and thirst that we [11] Isaiah
chapter 6 are suffering is not for bread but for prayers, for it is the aridity

in our souls and the hunger for the word of God, as the prophet
Amos said in chapter 6, “And you, my Lord, have understood
this thing for a longer time and more clearly than I.”

[084]

1
1 ]
From Rabbi Samuel, chapter 1

[2] I have a great fear, my teacher, that the Gentiles have had

[ 3] one thousand years of life since the death of Israel. [3] They had
Habakkuk, nothing that was good before they believed in God and in his
first chapter
Christ, and they made us like the fish and creatures without a

ruler, described by the prophet Habakkuk. [4] And the Gen-

tiles, after having been cleansed by faith, observe their fasting
and their feasts and their ceremonies according to the new law,

as well as observing all parts of the old law that pertain to purifi-

[5] Note cation. [5] And you see, sir, how in every language and in every
corner and in every place, both in the east and in the west, the
Gentiles praise the name of the Lord. [6] And they do not be-
Habakkuk, lieve in him on the basis of what Moses or any of the prophets
chapter 3
said, however well versed they may be in the law and the books
of the prophets; for God called them through the disciples of
the Righteous One, who went out with God for their salva-

tion, as God said through the mouth of the prophet Habakkuk.

[7] Those disciples of the Righteous One were our sons and
the

EDI 1 ION AND TRANSI A r ION 1 3 1

 de aqueste Justo fueron ñjos nuestros e de los fijos de Ysrael, los

[8] Psalnio quales en otro nombre son llamados apóstolos.(8] E mucho me

i8.
temo, señor, que aquestos son aquellos <de> los quales dise Dios
por la boca de David en el psalmo XVIII°: [9] “En toda la tierra

salió el sonido d’ellos e en los postrimeros fines de la tierra fue-

ron espar<s>idas sus palabras”. (10) E porque el propheta de- [lol Nota.

muestra que d’estos fabló e non de nos, por tanto di(;:e más
adelante que “non será lengua ny palabra que non oya las vo(;:es

d’ellos”. [ii] Enpero, esto non se puede complir en nuestra

lengua hebráica, ca ni<n>gunas gentes non obedes<;:ieron a nue-
stros padres Moysén, Aarón e a los otros, antes los mataron e

dessecharon de sy. [12] Enpero, las gentes saben oy a Moysén e

a los prophetas e cognoscen a Dios e fa^en la ley nueva, segund

que los apostólos los enseñaron, et cetera.

11. los L: las N

12. los enseñaron L: les enseñaron N.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 8

[8] Psalm 1 sons of Israel, known as apostles. [H]And am very much afraid,
I

sir, that they are the ones of whom God speaks through the
mouth of David in Psalm i8: [9] “Their voice went out to the
entire earth, and their words spread to the farthest ends of the
earth. ”[io] And in order to make clear that he spoke of them [10] Note
and not of us, the prophet goes on to say that “there will be no
language or speech that does not heed their voice.” [11] Now
this cannot be a prophecy about our Hebrew language, for no
Gentiles obeyed our fathers Moses, Aaron, and the others;
rather they killed and rejected them. [12] now
Yet the Gentiles
know about Moses and the prophets; and they know God and
observe the new law, as they were taught by the apostles, etc.

K Din ON AND TRANSLATION 1

3 3
 //5 recto/

[085I

[
I
]
Divi Augustini.

[2] Recordare misericordie tue a<n>tique, qua nos a principio

et cetera. [3] Requirantur capitulo XXVI, S<ol>iloquia.

(
085 ) man^

I
3 4 K D rn O N AND TRANS 1. AT I ON
[0H5]

[i] St. Augustine

[2] Remember the mercy you showed to us, so that from

the beginning, etc. [3] Look for the rest in chapter 26 of Solilo-
quies.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 1

3 5
 /¡3 verso/

[086]

[
I
]
Divi Augustini.

[3] l^nus [2] Soliloquia, capitulo XXVI. [3] Prius quam me formares [2] Augustini
quam me in Utero, novisti me, et ante quam exirem de vulva, quidquid
Soliloquia, 26.
formares,
novisti me.
tibi placuit preordinasti <de> me. [4] Que et qualia sint in libro

tuo scripta de me, in secreto consistorii tui et cetera.

10871

[i] “Prevalebit Dominus adversus eos, et exterminabit [i] Augustini

omnes deos gentium terre; et adorabunt eum, unusquisque de De divinatione

demonum.
loco suo, omnes insule gentium”, aut non credebant ista sibi

futura, qui in templis gentium colebantur. [2] De divinatione

demonum.
[3] Iterum repetit in eodem libro: [4] “Prevalebit”, inquid, [3] Idem.

“Dominus adversus eos, et exterminabit omne<s> deos gentium

terre; et adorabunt eum, unusquisque de loco suo, omnes in-

[5] sule gentium”. [5] Ñeque enim sole insule, sed ita omnes
Universum gentes, ut etiam omnes insule gentium, quandoquidem alibi
orbem et
non insulas nominat, sed universum orbem terrarum dicens:[6] [6] Psalmo 2 1
omnes
insulas “Commemorabuntur et convertentur ad Dominum universi
convertentur fines terre, et adorabunt in conspectu eius universe patrie gen-
ad
tium. [7] Quoniam Domini est regnum, et ipse dominabitur
Dominum.
gentium”.
[8] Iterum in eodem: [9] “Dominus dixit ad me: ‘Filius meus [9] Psalmo 2.

es tu; ego hodie genui te. [10] Postula a me, et dabo tibi gentes
hereditatem tuam et possessionem tuam términos terre’ ”. [i i]

<Ecce unde dictum est et in alio psalmo, quod superius inter-

posui: “Commemorabuntur 6t convertentur ad Dominum
universi fines terre”.>[i2] His atque huiusmodi profeticis docu- [12] Deus
ments predictum ostenditur, quod / 16 recto/ videmus impleri Ysrael non in
ipsa.

(
086 ) man^; postl. [2] matt'; post). [3] man^.

3. preordinasti de Ao: preordinasti L.

(
087 ) man^; postls. [i], [3], [6), [9], [13], [14], man'; postls. [5], [12) mati\
I. futura L: eventura Ad.
5. Ñeque enim L: Ñeque Ad.
6. Commemorabuntur: cunmemorabuntur L. fines: finis L.

9. es L: est con. man.

II. Ecce . . . terre Ad: om. L.
12. coleretur: colleretur L.

I
3 6 EDITION AND TRANSLATION
 [
1
1
St. Augustine

(3] Before [2] Soliloquies, chapter 26.(3] Before you formed me in the (2] Augustine’s
you fomied uterus, you knew me; and before I left the womb, you preor- Soliloquies, 26
me, you
knew me.
dained my life as you pleased. [4] Whatever things are written
about me in your book, in the privacy of your dwelling place,
etc.

[087]

[i] “The Lord will prevail against them, and he will destroy [1] Augustine’s

all the gods of the peoples of the earth; and they will worship On the

Divination of
him, every one from his own place, all the islands of the na-
Demons
tions.” But they who were worshipped in the peoples’ temples

did not believe that this would happen to them. [2] On the Divi-

nation of Demons.

[3] He repeats in the same book: [4] “The Lord will prevail [3] Idem
against them,” he says, “and will destroy all the gods of the

peoples of the earth. They will worship him, every one from

[5] They will his place, all the islands of the nations. ”[5] Not just the islands,
convert the but all the peoples and all the islands of the nations, seeing that
whole earth
elsewhere he does not refer to the islands, but to the whole
and all the
islands to the earth: [6] “All the ends of the earth will remember and turn to [6] Bsalm 21
Lord. the Lord; and all the lands of the peoples will worship before

him. [7] Because the kingdom is the Lord’s, and he will be the

universal sovereign.”

[8] From the same source: (9] “The Lord said to me: ‘You (9] Psalm 2

are my son; today I have begotten you. [10] Ask it of me, and I

will give you the nations as your inheritance and the ends of the
earth as your possession.” [i 1] I cite as an example the passage
from another psalm, which was included above: “All the ends
of the earth will remember and turn to the Lord.”[i2] These (12] God of
we Israel not by
and similar prophetic writings demonstrate what realize has
the one
(people)

EDITION AND TRANSLATION > 3 7

 per Christum tuturum fuissc, ut Dcus Israel, quern unum
verum Deum inte<l>ligimus, non in una ipsa gente, que appel-
lata est Israel, sed in omnibus gentibus coleretur et omnes falsos

déos gentium et a templis eorum et a cordibus cultorum suo-

rum demoliretur.
[i4] Aliter: [13] Iterum repetit in eodem:[i4] “Audite me, qui s<c>itis [13]
iustum. Augustinus ut
iuditium, populus meus, in quorum corde lex mea: opprobria
supra.
hominum nolite metuere et detractione eorum ne superemini,
[
1
4] Isaye 5 1

ne<c> quod vos spernunt magni duxeritis. [15] Sicut enim ve-
stimentum ita per tempus absumentur, et sicut lana a tinea

comedentur; iustitia autem mea in eternum manet’’.

[088]
[i] In libro confessionum 9°.

[2] At ille iu<s>sit Esaiam profetam, credo, quod pre ceteris

evangelii vocationisque gentium sit prenuntiator apercior.

[089]
[i] In eodem, libro 12°.

[2] Tu loquere in corde meo veraciter; solus enim <sic> lo-

queos; [3] et dimi<t>tam eos foris sufflantes in pulverem et ex-

citantes terram in oculos suos et intrem in cubile meum et can-
tem tibi amatoria gemens inenarrabiles gemitus im-
peregnnatione mea et recordans Iherusalem <extento in earn
sursum corde, Ierusalem> patriam meam, lerusalem matrem
meam, teque super earn regnatorem, illustratorem, patrem,
tutorem, maritum, castas et fortes delitias et solidum gaudium
et omnia / 16 verso/ bona ineffabilia, simul omnia, quia unum
summum et verum bonum: [4] et non avertar, donee in eius

pacem, matris carissime, ubi sunt primitie spiritus mei, unde

mihi ista certa sunt, co<l>ligas ¿otum quod sum a dispertione et

14. ncc Ad: ne L.

15. a L: a a con. man

(088) man^
1. confessionum: contfessionum L.

2. pre: pro L. vocationisque: vocationis quam L. prenuntiator: pro-

nuntiator L.
(089) man^
2. enim sic Al Ao: enim L.
3. inenarrabiles: inennarrabiles L. Iherusalem . . . patriam Al Ao:
Iherusalem patnam L.

I
3 « EDITION AND TRANSLATION
 1

been tultilled in Christ: that the God ot Israel, who we know to

be the one true (iod, will be worshipped not just by the one
people that is called Israel but by all people, and that all the false
gods ot the peoples will be destroyed in the temples and in the

hearts of those who worship them.

[14] Or else: [13] He repeats in the same book:[i4] “Hear me, you who [3]
the just one Augustine,
know justice, my people, who have my law in your hearts:
as

above
neither fear the opprobrium of men, nor be overcome by their
[
1
4] Isaiah 5
slander, nor heed their scorn.[i5] For they will be destroyed
and eaten in time like a moth with a wool garment. But my law
will remain throughout eternity.”

[08H]

[ 1 ]
Book 9 of Confessions

[2] I think that he directed me to the prophet Isaiah because

his prophecies about the gospel and the calling of the peoples
are the most explicit.

[089]

[1] Book 12 of the same work

[2] You speak the truth in my heart; you alone speak truly.

[3] I will leave them outside, stirring up dust and throwing dirt

into their eyes, and entermy room and sing love songs to you,
sighing indescribable sighs in my pilgrimage and remembering

Jerusalem, my heart reaching up to her, Jerusalem, my home-

land, Jerusalem, my mother, and you, her ruler, enlightener,

father, protector, husband, remembering the virtuous and in-

tense delight, the genuine joy, and all the ineffable benefits of

the one greatest and true good. [4] I will not be turned away
until you bring together all that I am from dispersion and defor-

mity into the tranquillity of that dearest mother — the birth-

place of the first fruits of my spirit, my certainties — and form

K I) ITI O N AND TRANSIA T O N I I

3 9
 1

dctormitate hac et conformes atque confirmes in eternum,

Deus mens, misericordia mea.

[090]
[2]
[i] In eodem, <libro> 13°.

[2] Idem Item debentur eis tamquam volatilibus propter benedi-

Augustinus. tiones eorum, que multiplicantur super omnem terram, quo-
(2] Ex
Esalmo 18.
niam “in omnem terram exiit sonus eorum’’. [3] Pascuntur
autem his escis qui letantur eis, nec illi letantur eis, quorum
deus venter est. [4] Ñeque enim et in illis, qui prebent ista, ea,

que dant, fructus est, sed quo animo dant.

[09
[3]
1

[i] De doctrina c<h>ristiana, libro 11 °.

[2] Sed quo<d>libet vocentur ab <h>ominibus, sunt tamen si- [2] Augustini

dera, que Deus instituit et ordinavit ut voluit; et est certus

de doctrina
cristiana.
motus illorum, quo témpora disting<u>untur atque variantur.

Quern motum notare, cum quisque nascitur, quo modo se

habeat, facile est per eorum inventas cumscriptasque regulas,

quos sancta Scriptura condempnat dicens: [4] “Si enim tantum

potuerunt scire, <ut> possent extimare seculum, quomodo eius

Dominum non facilius invenerunt?’’.

(090) man^-, postls. matt'.

2. super omnem L: super Al.

(091) man^\ postl. man'.

2. quodlibet Ac: quolibet Ao L.
3. quisque Ac: quisquís L. quos Ac: quod L.

4. scire, ut Ac Ao: scire L.

I
4 o EDITION AND TRANSLATION
 3

and strengthen all that I am throughout eternity, O my God,

my mercy.

[090]

[
I
]
From the same work, book 1

[2] Idem [2] Moreover, these things are due to them, just as to the
Augustine creatures of the sky, because of the blessings upon them, which
[2] From
are increased throughout the earth, for “their voices have gone
Fsalm 18
out to the whole earth.” [3] Those who rejoice in this food are

nourished by it, but the one whose god is his stomach takes no
pleasure in it. [4] For the fruit is not in what they offer, but in
the spirit in which the gift is made.

[091]

[1] On Christian Education, book 2

[2] But whatever they are called by men, they are nonethe- [2] Augustine’s

less stars which God established and arranged as he wished; and On Christian
Education
their motion, which creates seasonal variation, is certain. [3]

When anyone is born, it is easy to observe the position of this

movement using the rules discovered and written by those

condemned by holy Scripture: [4] “If indeed they knew so
much that they could measure the world, why couldn’t they
find its Lord more easily?”

EDITION AND E K ANS I A 1 I ON 1 4 I

 //7 recto/

[092]
|i] In eodcm, libro 3°.

[2] [2] Facile cst, inquam, hoc inte<l>ligere dc ilia domo Israel, [2] Augustini
Secundum de qua dicit Apostolus: [3] “Videte Israel secundum carnem”, De doctrina
Apostolum. cristiana.
quia hec omnia carnalis populus Israel et fecit et passus est. [4]

Alia etiam que secuntur, eidem intelliguntur populo convenire;

[5] Ex [5] sed cum ceperit dicere: “Et sanctificabo nomen meum sanc-
E^echiele 36.
tum illud magnum, quod pollutum est inter nationes, quod
polluistis in medio earuni, et scient gentes quia ego Dominus’’,

iam intemptus debet esse qui legit, quemadmodum speties ex-

cedatur et adiungatur genus. [6] Sequitur enim et dicit: [7] “Et

dum sacrificabor in vobis ante oculos eorum, et accipiam vos de
gentibus et congregabo vos ex omnibus terris et inducam vos in

terram vestram; et aspergam vos aqua munda, et mundabimini

ab omnibus simulacris vestris, et mundabo vos. [8] Et dabo
vobis cor novum et spiritum novum dabo in vos et auferam cor
lapideum de carne vestra et dabo vobis cor carneum; et spiri-

tum meum dabo in vos et faciam, ut in iusticiis meis ambuletis

et indicia mea custodians, et faciatis; [9] et habitabitis in terra,

quam dedi patribus vestris; et eritis mihi in populum, et ego ero

vobis in Deum; et mundabo vos ex omnibus inmundiciis ve-
[10] Ex dictis stris”. [10] Hoc de Novo Testamento esse prophetatum, ad quod [10] Ysaye.
Apostoli ad non solum
pertinet ilia una gens in reliqu<i>is suis, de quibus / //
Romanos 9.
verso/ alibi scriptum est: “Si fuerit numerus filiorum Israel sicut

arena maris, reliquie salve fient”, verum etiam cetere gentes,

que promisse sunt patribus eorum, qui etiam nostri sunt, non
ambigit quisquis intuetur et “lavacrum regenerationis” hie esse
promissum, quod nunc videmus omnibus gentibus redditum.
I

[i i] Et illud quod ait Apostolus, cum Novi Testamenti gratiam

Corintiis
commendaret, ut in comparatione Veteris emineret: “Epistola
111 °.

[M]
Ezechielis
36.

(092) postls. man'.

5. nationes Ad: narrationes Ao L. quia L: quoniam Ad.
6. dicit Ad: dixit L. Et dum L: Dum Ad Ao. sacrificabor Ao: non sa-
cnficabor L, sanctificor Ad. aqua Ad: aque L. mundabimini: mun-
dabimimini L. simulacris Ad: sumulacrum L.

9. mundabo L: mandabo con. man.

II. sed . . . sed Ad: sed Ao L. dictum Ao L: ductum Ad. dixit Ao L: dicit
Ac.

142 H IH T ON AND TRANSI, ATION

 (092]
[i] In the same work, book 3

[
2 ] [2] Clearly this applies to the house of Israel, about which [2] Augustine’s
According to
the Apostle said, [3] “Behold the carnal practices of Israel,” be- On Christian
the Apostle Education
cause the people of Israel did and experienced all these things of

the flesh. [4] What follows can be interpreted as applying to the

[5] From same people: [5] “I will sanctify my great and holy name' which
Ezekiel 36
has been profaned among the nations and which you have pro-
faned in their midst; and the peoples will know that I am the

Lord.” The careful reader will immediately notice that this text

goes beyond the species to include the genus. [6] The passage
continues: [7] “And then I will be sanctified thrc:>ugh you
before their eyes, for I will take you from the peoples and I will

gather you from all parts of the earth and I will lead you into

your land; and I will sprinkle you with purified water and you
will be cleansed from all your idolatrous worship, and I will

cleanse you. [8] I will give you a new heart and I will instill a

new spirit in you. I will take the heart of stone from your body
and I will give you a heart of flesh. I will instill my spirit in you,
and I will cause you to walk in my righteousness and preserve

and obey my laws. [9] You will inhabit the land that I gave to
your fathers; you will be my people and I will be your God.
[10] From And I will cleanse you from all your impurities. ”[ 10] This is a [
10] Isaiah
the Letter of prophecy about the New Testament that applies not only to
the Apostle
to the
those who remain of the people about whom it is written else-

Romans 9 where: “Even if the children of Israel are as numerous as the

sands of the sea, only a few will be saved.” But so will the other
peoples, who were promised to their fathers, who were also

our fathers. No one who thinks about it can have any doubt
that this passage promises the “regenerative baptism” that, as

[ll]2 we see now, is available to all the peoples, [i ij The words in

Corinthians
3

[11] Ezekiel
3f>

LOITION AND IKANSIAIION 1 4 3

 nostra vos estis, scripta non atramcnto, <sed spiritu Dei vivi, non
in tabulis lapideis>, sed in tabulis cordis carnalibus”, bine esse

respicit et perspicit dictum, ubi iste propheta dixit: “Et dabo

vobis cor novum et spiritum novum dabo in vos, et auferam
[i2] Hi cor lapideum de carne vestra, et dabo vobis cor carneum”.[ 1
2]
Corintiis
Cor quippe carneum - unde ait Apostolus: “tabulis cordis car-
III°.
nalibus’’ - a corde lapideo voluit vita sentiente discerni, et per

vitam sentientem significavit intelligentem. [13] Sic fit Israel

spiritualis non unius gentis, sed omnium, que prontisse sunt

patribus eorum in semine, “quod est Christus’’. [14] Hi<c> ergo

Israel spiritualis ab illo Israel carnali, qui est unius gentis, novi-

tate grade, non nobilitate patrie, et mente, non gente distin-

guitur. [15] Sed altitudo prophetica dum de illo vel ad ilium

loquitur, latenter transit ad hunc et, cum iam de isto vel ad

istum loquatur, / ¡8 recto/ adhuc de illo vel ad ilium loqui vide-

tur, non intellectum Scripturarum nobis quasi hostiliter invi-

[i6] dens, sed exercens medicinaliter cor nostrum. [16] Unde et

Ezechielis
illud, quod ait: “Et inducam vos in terram vestram’’ et paulo
36.
post tamquam id ipsum repetens: “Et habitabitis in terra vestra,

qua<m> dedi patribus vestris’’, non carnaliter sicut carnalis Israel,

[17] II sed spiritualiter et spiritualis debemus accipere.fiy] Ecclesia

Thimoteo 1
°.
quippe sine “macula” et “ruga”, ex omnibus gentibus con-
gregara atque in eternum regnatura cum Christo, ipsa est beato-
rum, “terra viventium”, ipsa est intelligenda patribus data,

quando eis certa et inmutabili Dei volumptate promissa est,

quoniam ipsa promissionis vel predestinationis firmitate iam

data est, que danda suo tempore a patribus credita est, sicut de
ipsa gratia, que sanctis datur, scribens ad Thimotheum Apo-
stolus ait: “Non secundum opera nostra, sed secundum suum
propositum et gratiam, que data est nobis in Christo Ihesu ante
sécula eterna, manifestara autem nunc per adventum Salvatoris

nostri”. [18] Datam dixit gratiam, quando non erant adhuc

quibus daretur, quoniam in dispositione ac predestinatione Dei

12. vita sentiente Ad: vitam sentientem Ao L.

15. loquatur Ad: loquitur Ao L. cor nostrum Ao L: nostrum Ad.

16. habitabitis Ao L: habitabitis, inquit Ad. terra vestra Ao L: terra Ad.
17. macula Ad: miracula Ao L. ipsa intelligenda Ao L: terra beato-
. . .

rum, “terra viventium” ipsa intelligenda est Ad. Apostolus: Appostolus L.

18. non Ao L: nec Ad. ac: hac L. factum erat .4d Ao: factum erit L. fiitu-
rum erat Ao L: futurum fuerat Ad. quod dicit Ad: quo esse dixit L, quo. . .

esse dicit Ao.

144 K Dn ONI AND I R A N S I, A 1 1 ON

1
 which the Apostle commended the grace of the New Testa-
ment over the Old Testament — “You are our epistle, written
not with ink but with the spirit of the living God; not on stone
tablets but on the carnal tablets of the heart” — refer to and are
anticipated by the prophet: “I will give you a new heart and I

will instill a new spirit in you; and I will take the heart of stone
[l2] 2 from your body and I will give to you a heart of flesh.”[i2]
Corinthians Clearly, when the Apostle spoke of a carnal heart, “carnal tab-
3
lets of the heart,” he meant to make a distinction between a

heart of stone and sentient life; and by sentient life he meant

intelligent life. [13] Thus the Israel of the spirit is not just one
people, but all the peoples who were promised to their pa-

triarchs through their descendance “which is Christ.” [14] In

this passage, therefore, the Israel of the spirit is made distinct

from the Israel of the flesh, which is one specific people,

through unusual grace and intelligence rather than nobility of

birth. [15] But while the lofty prophetic language speaks on
one level, it secretly shifts to the other, not in a meanspirited

attempt to prevent our understanding of Scripture but to

[i6] Ezekiel achieve a healing effect on our hearts. [16] Thus, we ought to
36 interpret the passage, “and I will lead you into your land,”

which IS repeated slightly later, “and you will inhabit your land,
which I gave to your fathers,” as speaking not about the physi-

[' ?] 2 cal Israel but about the figurative Israel of the spirit. [17] Of
Timothy i
course, the flawless church that is assembled from all the peo-

ples to reign eternally with Christ is itself the land of the living,

the land of the blessed, and should be interpreted as what was

given to the forefathers when it was promised to them by the

certain and immutable will of God. By the strength of that very

promise, what the forefathers believed would be given in their
own time had already been given. The Apostle wrote some-
thing similar to Timothy about the grace that is given to the

KDITION AND TRANSI A I ION I

4 5
 lam factum erat quod suo tempore futurum erat, quod ipse dicit

“manifestatam”. [19] Quamvis hec possint intelligi et de terra

futuri seculi, quando erit “celum novum /18 verso/ et terra

nova”, in qua iniusti habitare non poterunt. (20] Et ideo recte

dicitur piis, quod ipsa sit terra eorum, que ulla ex parte non erit

impiorum, quia et ipsa similiter data est, quando danda firmata

est.

[093]
V
In libro 1
° de concessu evangelistarum, capitulo 27°, 28°,
[1]

«°-
29°, 30°, 31°, 32°, 33 °, 34 °, 35 °, 3 b°, 37 °, 3

[2] In omnibus capitulis predictis multa dixit de ludeis et de

eis, que ventura sunt: de quibus omnibus non scrips! propter
prolixitateni. [3] Aliquid tamen reducam hie ad memoriam.

[i] [double [094]

cross]
[i] India est
[1] In capitulo 29°: [i] Augustinus,
in estremo
Ñeque enim temporibus c<h>ristianis, sed ante tanto pre- in libro de
terre in [2]
concensu
Oriente et dictum est quod per c<h>ristianos impletur.[3] Ipsi ludei qui
evangeli-
Hispania
remanserunt inimici nominis Christi, de quorum etiam futura starum”.
cum
Ethiopia in perfidia in illis propheticis literis taciturn non est, ipsi habent et

Occidente: legunt prophetam dicentem:[4] “Domine Deus mens et [4] Hieremie

inter
refugium meum in die malorum; ad te gentes venient ab ex- 16.
medium est

mare tremo terre, et dicent: ‘Vere mendatia coluerunt patres nostri,

Occeanum. simulacra, et non est illis utilitas’ [5] Ecce nunc fit, ecce sunt

[3] lam Indi gentes, ab extremo terre veniunt ad Christum, ista dicentes et
veniunt et
simulacra frangentes. Et hoc enim magnum est, quod Deus
[6]
evertunt
prestitit E<c>clesie sue ubique di<f>fuse, ut gens ludea mérito
ydola.
debe<l>lata et dispersa per terras, / ig recto/ ne a nobis hec com-
posita putarentur, codices prophetarum nostrorum ubique por-
taret et inimica fidei nostre testis fieret veritatis nostre.

19. terra nova Ad Ao: terrain novam L.

(093) man^
1. 27®; 29° L.
2. eis: ea L.

(094) ntan^; postl. |i: dex| man'\ postls. [1,3: sin| man^\ double cross wíj«'(?);
postls. |4l[i i][i 4) matt'.

4. coluerunt: colluerunt L.

5. Ecce nunc Ae Ao: Ectiam nunc L. ecce sunt Ae Ao: hec sunt L.
6. enim Ae: etiam Ao L.

146 FUI I ION AND TRANSLATION

 saints: “Not according to our works, but according to his pur-
pose and grace, which was given to us through Jesus Christ an
eternity ago, and now has been revealed through the coming of
our Saviour.” [i8] He refers to the grace as given, when as yet

the ones to whom it would be given did not exist, because in

God’s arrangement of events that which would take place in its

own future time had already happened; therefore the Apostle

says it has been “revealed.” [19] Moreover this same expression

may be understood to refer to the earth of future ages, when
there will be “a new heaven and a new earth” in which the

unjust will not be able to live. [20] And therefore it is properly

said to the pious that this land is theirs and the impious will

have no part of it, because the land was given just as it was said.

[093]
[i] From book i of Agreement of the Evangelists, chapters 27,

28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38

[2] In the cited chapters he said many things about the Jews
and about what was going to happen. For the sake of brevity I

have not written everything. [3] I will include something, nev-

ertheless, as a reminder.

[i] [double [094]

cross]
[
1
1
From chapter 29; [i] Augustine,
[i] India lies
from the book
at the What is fulfilled through the Christians was not pre- On the
[2]
extreme east Agreement of
dicted in their time, but long before that. [3] The Jews, who
of the world the Evangelists
and Spain remained enemies of the name of Christ and whose future
with treachery does not go unmentioned in these prophetic writ-
Ethiopia at
ings, have read the prophet who says, [4] “Lord my God and my [4] Jeremiah
the west: the
16
Ocean sea refuge on the day of trouble; the nations will come to you from
lies in the ends of the earth and say, ‘Truly our fathers have wor-
between.
shipped false idols, and they are of no use.’ ” [5] This is what is

[3] The
Indians are
now happening; these nations are coming from the ends of the
coming earth to Christ, saying these very things and destroying their
already and idols. [6] And what God has shown to his worldwide church is
destroying
indeed great. In order that these things are not thought to have
their idols.
been contrived by us, the tribes of Judea, deservedly over-

thrown and dispersed throughout the world, carry everywhere

the codices of our prophets, so that the enemy of the faith be-
comes our witness to our truth. [7] How, therefore, could the

rnrrioN and ik ansi, at ion I

4 7
 [y] Quomodo ergo discipuli Christi docucrunt quod a Christo
non didiccrunt, sicut stulti dcsipiendo iactitant, ut deorum gcn-
tilium et simulacrorum supcrstitio delcrctur? [8] Numquid et

illas prophetias, que nunc leguntur in codicibus inimicorum

Christi, possunt dici ñngisse discipuli Christi? [qj Quis enim
hoc evertit nisi Deus Israel? [lo] Ipsi enini populo dictum est

per divinas voces factas ad Moysem:[ 1

1 j
“Audi Israel, Dominus [i i] Deutero-
n<omi>i 6.
Deus tuus Deus unus est. [12] Non facies tibi idolum ñeque
[11] Levitici
cuiusquam similitudinem, ñeque in celo sursum, ñeque in terra
26.
deorsum”. [13] Ut autem etiam evertat ista, ubi potestatem ac-

ceperit, sic ei precipitur: [14] “Non adorabis déos illorum, sed [14] Exodi 26.

ñeque servies eis; non facies secundum opera ipsorum, sed

deponendo depones et confringendo confringes simulacra
eorum”.

[095]

[•] [1] In capitulo 30°: [2] Quis autem dicat Christum atque
Augustinus christianos non pertinere ad Israel, cum Israel nepos fuit Ha-
ut supra.
brae, cui primo et deinde Ysach filio eius et deinde ipsi Israel
[i] [double
cross] nepoti eius dictum est quod iam commemoravi: [3] “In semine [3] Genesis 26.

tuo benedicentur omnes gentes”? [4] Quod fieri iam videmus

in Christo, cum inde exorta sit ilia virgo, de qua propheta

populi Israel et Dei Israel cecinit dicens:[5] “Ecce, virgo con- [5] Isaye 7.

cipiet et pariet filium et vocabitur nomen eius Emanuel”. [6]

[7] Hyeremie Interpre / ig verso/ tatur enim Emanuel “nobiscum Deus”. [7]
16 .
Deus Israel ergo, qui prohibuit alios deos coli, qui prohibuit

idola fabrican, qui precepit everti, qui per prophetam <pre>dixit

gentes ab extremo terre dicturas: “Vere mendatia coluerunt

patres nostri, simulacra, in quibus non est utilitas”, ipse per
Christi nomen et christianorum fidem istarum omnium super-

7. deorvun: de eorum L.

8. Numquid Ae Ao: Nam quid L. codicibus L; que codicibus corr.

man^. hoc Ao L: hec Ae.

II. tuus .unus L: Deus add. s.l. matt'.
. .

13. etiam: ectiam L. potestatem Ae\ portantem Ao L.

(095) mati^-, postls. man'.

2. Quis L: Quisquís corr. mati^.

4. Quod Ae Ao\ Quid L. fieri L: vider fieri corr. mati^. cecinit: cessinit L.
5 . vocabitur Ao L: vocabunt Ae.
6 . Interpretatur: Interperetatur L. enim Ao L: autem Ae.
7. everti L; averti corr. man^. predixit Ae Ao: dixit L.

1 4 8 tom ON AND TRANSLATION

 disciples of Christ have taught things they did not learn from
Christ, as the foolish maintain in their folly, in order to destroy

superstititious belief in pagan deities and then idols? [8] Could

it be said that the disciples of Christ had invented the prophe-
cies, which now are read in the codices of the enemies of
Christ? [9] Who but the God of Israel has accomplished this

destruction? [10] This very thing was said to the people

through the divine voices heard by Moses; [i i] “Hear, O Israel, [i i] Deutero-
the Lord your God is one God. You shall not make for
nomy 6
[12]
[11] Leviticus
yourself any idol or likeness of anything that is either in the
26
heavens above or on the earth below.” [13] So that he would
destroy these idols when he had the power, he was com-
manded: [14] “You shall not worship their gods, nor shall you [14] Exodus 26
be obedient to them; you shall not follow their practices, but
overthrow them completely and smash their idols.”

[095]

[I] [i] From chapter 30: [2] Who indeed would say that Christ
Augustine, as
and the Christians are not related to Israel, when Israel was the
given above
[i] [double
grandson of Abraham, who first was told, and then his son Isaac

cross] and then his grandson Israel, what I have already mentioned:

[3] “All the people will be blessed through your descendance.” [3] Genesis 26

[4] This is what we now see is happening in Christ, the virgin is

from this lineage, whom the prophet of the people of Israel and
of the god of Israel described;[5] “Behold, a virgin will con- [5] Isaiah 7

ceive and bear a son and his name will be Immanuel.” [6] Im-
[7] Jeremiah manuel means “God with us.” [7] The God of Israel, therefore,
16 who forbade the worship of other gods, who forbade the mak-
ing of idols and ordered that they be destroyed, who predicted

through the prophet that the peoples from the very ends of the
earth would proclaim, “Truly our fathers worshipped false and
useless idols,” this very God through the name of Christ and

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I

4 9
 .

stitionum cversionem iu<s>sit, promisit, ex<h>ibuit. [8] Frustra

ergo miseri, quia blasfemare Christum etiam a diis suis, hoc est

a demonibus, nomen Christi metuentibus prohibiti sunt, vo-

lunt ab eo doctrinam istam facere alienam, qua christiani contra

ydola disputant casque omnes falsas religiones, ubi potucrint,

cradicant.

[096]

[•] [i] In capitulo 31°: [2] lam subditos Christi nomini, sicut
Augustinus, longe ante promisit dicens per prophetam:[3] “Et adorabunt Psalmo 71
[3]
in libro de
concensu
eum omnes reges terre, omnes gentes servient illi”?

evangelis-
[097]
tarum.

[i] In capitulo 34°: [2] “Non sunt loquele ñeque sermones, [2] Psalmo 18.

quorum non audiantur voces eorum; in omnem terram exivit

sonus eorum et in fines orbis terre verba eorum”.

[098]

[i] In capitulo 36°: [2] “Dixit enim Dominus: [3] ‘Dilata [2] Nota: Isaye

locum tabernaculi tui et aulas tuas confige: non est quod parcas; 54-

po<r>rige longius funículos et palos validos constitue. [4] Etiam

atque etiam in dexteram atque in sinistram partem extende,
semen enim tuum hereditabit gentes et civitates, que / 20 recto/

deserte erant, inhabitabis. [5] Non est quod metuas: prevalebis

enim; nec erubescas, quod detestabilis fueris; confusionem

enim in perpetuum oblivisceris, ignomin<i>e viduitatis tue non
eris memor. [6] Quoniam ego sum Dominus, qui fado te, Do-
minus nomen ei; et qui eruit te, ipse Deus Israel, universe terre
vocabitur’

8. a demonibus L: demonibus Ae Ao. eradicant: erradican! L.

(096) postls. matt'.

2. promisit dicens Ae Ao: promissit dicent L.

(097) man^-, posd. matt'.

2. quorum Ae: quaruni Ao L. in omnem Ao L: iam in omnem Ae.
(098) man^' posd. matt^.

3 Dilata: Dilacta
. L.

4. Etiam . . . etiam: Ecdam . . . eedam L. extende Ae: extendem Ao L.

6. universe Ae Ao: universi L.

I
5 o LDITION AND TRANSLATION
 the faith ot the Christians ordered, promised, and caused the
destruction ot these false beliefs. [8] Therefore the wretched
ones, forbidden to blaspheme Christ even by their own gods,
demons fearing the name of Christ, maintain in vain that the

doctrine by which Christians attack idols and destroy false reli-

gions wherever they can is foreign to him.

[096]

[1] [ 1 ]
In chapter 31: [2] Now subject to the name of Christ, just
Augustine,
as he promised long ago through the prophet: [3] “And all the [3] Psalm 71
from the
rulers of the earth will worship him; all the peoples will serve
book
Aj^reement of him.”
the Euanj^elists

[i] From chapter 34: [2] There is neither speech nor lan- [2] Psalm 18
guage in which their voices are not heard; their voice has gone
out to the whole land and their words to the ends of the earth.

[098]

[i] From chapter 36: [2] The Lord said, [3] “Extend the site [2] Note:
Isaiah 54
of your tabernacle and consolidate your courts: there is no rea-

son to hold back; stretch your cords and place strong stakes. [4]

Extend to the right and to the left; your descendants will inherit

the peoples and you will inhabit the desolate cities. (5] There is

nothing to fear; you will prevail. Do not be ashamed because

you were loathsome. Your confusion will fade; you will have
no memory of your shameful bereavement. [6] Because I am
the Lord your creator, his name is the Lord. And the God of
Israel who rescued you will be called the God of the whole
earth.”

LI) IT ION AND TRANSI. A no N > 5 I

 [o99l
[i] In libro 2°, capitulo 77°, de conce<s>su evangelistarum.

(2] Idem [2] Quod ergo Matheus ait: “Et predicabitur hoc evan- [2] Mathei 24
Augustinus. testimonium omnibus gen- [2] Marci 13.
gelium regni in universo orbe in

tibus; et tunc veniet consumado”, et Marcus eodem ordine ita

commemorat: “In omnes gentes primum oportet predican

evangelium”. [3] Non dixit: “Et tunc veniet consumado”, sed
hoc significat quod ait “primum”, id est et “in omnes gentes
oportet predicará evangelium”, <quia illi de fine inter-

rogaverunt, cum ergo dicit: “primum oportet in omnes gentes

predicad evangelium”>. [4] Significar utique “primum” an-
tequam veniat consumado. [5] Item quod Matheus ait: “Cum [5] Mathei 24
ergo videritis abhominationem desolationis, que dicta <est> a

Daniele propheta, stantem in loco sancto, qui legit inte<l>ligat”,

hoc Marcus dicit ita: “Cum autem videritis abhominationem

desolationis stantem, ubi non debet, qui legit inte<l>ligat”. [6] In

qua mutatione verbi exposuit tamquam sententiam; ideo

quippe “ubi non debet”, quia in loco sancto non debet. [7] [7] Luce 21.

Lucas autem non ait: “Cum autem videritis abhominationem

desolationis, stantem in loco sancto”, aut “ubi non debet”, sed
ait: / 20 verso/ “Cum autem videritis circumdari ab exercitu
Iherusalem, tunc scitote quia a<p>propinquabit desolado eius”.

[8] Tunc erit ergo abhominatio desolationis in loco sancto. [9]

Qu<o>d Matheus autem ait: “Tunc qui in ludea sunt, fugiant ad

montes; et, qui in tecto, non descendat tollere aliquid de domo
sua; et, qui in agro, non revertatur tollere tunicam suam”, toti-

dem pene verbis hec etiam Marcus commemorat. [10] Lucas

autem: “Tunc, qui in ludea sunt”, inquid, “fugiant in montes”.
[i i] Hec sicut illi duo, cetera vero aliter. [12] Sequitur enim et
dicit: “Et, qui in medio eius, discedant; et, qui in regionibus,
«

non intrent in earn. [13] Quia dies ultionis hi sunt, ut implean-

tur omnia, que scripta sunt”.

(
099 ) man^\ postls. man'.
2. et Marcus Ao L: etiam Marcus Ae.
3. evangelium evangelium Ae Ao\ evangelium L.
. . .

5. dicta est Ae: dicta Ao L. dicit Ae Ao: dixit L.

6. tamquam Ao L: eandem Ae. quippe: cuippe L. debet, quia L: debet,

sed ait, quia con. man^. in loco: in m loco L.

8. abhominatio: abhomination L.
9. hec Ao L: hoc Ae. etiam: ectiam L.
12. dicit Ae Ao: dixit L.

1 5 2 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 1

[099]

[1] From book 2, chapter 77 oí Aj^reement of the Eihwj^clists

[2] Idem [2] Matthew says: “And this gospel of the kingdom will be [2] Matthew
Augustine preached throughout the world in witness to 24
all the people; and
then the end will come.” Mark gives a similar account: “First it [2] Mark 13

is necessary that the gospel be preached to all the people.” [3]

He did not say, “and then the end will come,” but that is what
he meant, because he said “first,” referring to “it is necessary
that the gospel be preached to all the people.” [4] In any case,

“first” means “before the coming of the end. ”[5] Moreover, [5) Matthew
Matthew states: “When you see the abomination of desolation 24

which the prophet Daniel described set up in the holy place, let

the reader understand.” Mark said it in the following way:

“When you see the abomination of desolation set up where it

should not be, let the reader understand.” [6] With this change
of wording he expresses the same meaning; that is, “where it

should not be” refers to the holy place. [7] Luke says neither, [7] Luke 2

“When you see the abomination of desolation set up in the

holy place,” nor “where it should not,” but the following:

“When you see Jerusalem surrounded by an army, then know
that its desolation is at hand.” [8] At that time, the abomination
of desolation will be in the holy place. What Matthew
says
— “Then let those who
[9]

are in Judea flee to the mountains;

and let no one on his housetop go down to take anything from

his house; and let no one in the field turn back to get his

cloak” — is said by Mark in almost the same words. [10] Luke

writes, “Then let those who are in Judea flee to the moun-
tains.” [i i] This is similar to what the others wrote, but what
follows is different. [12] He continues: “And let those within

the city depart; and let no one who is in the provinces enter the

city. [13] For these are the days of vengeance, fulfilling all that

has been written.”

FDITION AND TRANSLATION I

5 3
 [lOO]

[i] In libro 3°, capitulo 25°.

[2] Idem (2) Post illam quippe exprob<r>ationcm secutus ait idem
Augustinus. Marcus: [3] “Et dixit eis: ‘Euntes in mundum universum predi-
[3] Marci 16.
cate evangelium omni creature. [4] Qui crediderit et baptizatus

fuerit, salvus erit; qui vero non crediderit, condempnabitur’ ”.

[5] Hoc ergo predicaturi, quoniam qui non crediderit con-

dempnabitur.

(lOO) postls. man'.

I
5 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION
 [100]

[1] From book 3, chapter 25

[2] Idem [2] After that reprimand, Mark contmues:[3] “And he said
Augustine to them, ‘Go out to the entire world and preach the gospel to
[3] Mark 16
every creature. [4] Whoever believes and is baptized will be
saved; whoever does not believe will be condemned.’ ’’
[5] It

was going to be preached that whoever does not believe will be

condemned.

l-DITION AND TRANSI. A riON I

5 5
 l2\ recto/

[101]
[i] In evangelio secundum Marcum, capitulo 16.

[2] “Euntes in mundum universum predicate evangelium [2] Marci 16.

Omni creature”. Et cetera ut supra.

[102]

[1] Mathei capitulo 24. v

[2] “Et predicabitur hoc evangelium regni in universo orbe [2] Mathei 24.

in testimonium omnibus gentibus”, et cetera.

[3] Glosa scilicet; [4] “Et predicabitur evangelium regni”, [3I Nicolaus

evangelium Christi, quod introducir ad regnum celeste et

de Lyra.
idest

cetera. [5] “In universo mundo”, quod enim ante destruc-

tionem civitatis per Tytum et Vespasianum in tribus partibus

orbis, scilicet Asia, Africa et Europa, predicatum sit evangelium

Christi, patet sic: vivente enim Petro, fides predicara est in Italia

et cetera. [6] Que requirantur, si placet.

[103]
[i] Sequitur in eadem Glosa.

[2] Nota. [2] “In testimonium omnibus gentibus”, quasi dicat: [3] ad
hoc predicanda est fides in universo orbe, ut testimonium
Christi audiretur in omni gente, secundum quod dictum fuit

apostolis Actuum primo: [4] “Eritis mihi testes in lerusalem et [4] Actuum 1
°.

ludea et Samaria et usque ad ultimum terre”.

[104]
[i] Item sequitur.

[2] [hand] [2] Considerandum autem, quod alia est predicado evangelii [2] Nicolaus
futura in omnibus gentibus quantum ad efficatiam, sic quod de Lyra.

omnes gentes recipient fidem Christi: et hoc erit in consuma-

tione seculi.

(
101 ) man'; postl. man'.

(
102 ) man'; postls. man'.
1. capitulo 24: 24 capitulo L.

(103) man'; postls. man'.

(104) man'; postl. man'; hand man^(?).
2. autem add. s.l. man'.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [1]

[101]
[2]
From the Gospel according to Mark, chapter 16

“Go out into the entire world and preach the gospel to [2] Mark 16

every creature.” And so on, as above.

[102]

[i] Matthew, chapter 24

[2] “And this gospel of the kingdom will be preached [2] Matthew
throughout the whole world in witness to all the people,” etc. 24

[3] Commentary: [4] “And this gospel of the kingdom will [3] Nicholas of
be preached,” refers to the gospel of Christ which leads to the Lyra

heavenly kingdom, etc. [5] “Throughout the whole world,”

because it is well known that before the destruction of the city

by Titus and Vespasian, the gospel of Christ was preached in

three areas of the world, namely, Asia, Africa, and Europe; dur-

ing the lifetime of Peter, the faith was preached in Italy, etc. [6]

Investigate these things more fully, if you wish.

[4]

[103]
[i] Continuation of the same commentary.

[2] Note [2] “In witness to all the people,” as if to say that [3] for this

purpose the faith should be preached throughout the entire

world, in order that the testimony of Christ be heard directly
by everyone, as was said to the apostles in chapter one of Acts:
“You will be my witnesses in Jerusalem and Judea and Sa- [4] Acts 1

maria and even to the ends of the earth.”

[104]
[i] Continuation of the same.

[2] [hand] [2] It should be taken into consideration, however, that in a [2] Nicholas of
Lyra
second universal preaching of the gospel, all people will receive
the faith of Christ. This will occur at the end of time.

KDITION AND TRANSLATION 1 5 7

 [105I

[
I
]
Nota.

[
2] Nota. [2] Quoniam oritur questio, quo modo prcdicatum fuerit [
2 ] El Tostado.

cvangelium Christi per totum orbem, vel quo modo manct

adhuc predicandum, requiratur el Tostado super Matheum,
capitulo XXIIII®, questione XLV<I>I-, per totum et cetera.

(105) man'-, postls. man'.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 (i05l

[
I
]
Note

]
Note [2] Because a question has arisen about how the gospel of [2] El Tostado
Christ has been preached and continues to be preached
throughout the world, question 46 of chapter 24 of El Tos-
tado’s commentary on Matthew should be consulted in its en-
tirety.

F I) I T I 0 N AND 1 RA N S I A 1 I ON 5 y
 .

/2\ verso!

(106]
[i] Mathei capitulo 28.

[2] [hand] [2] Data est mihi omnis potestas in celo et in terra. [3] Euntes
ergo docete omnes gentes, baptizantes eos in nomine Patris et

Filii et Spiritus sancti, docentes eos servare omnia, quecumque

mandavi vobis.

[107]

[ 1 ]
Psalmo 7 1

[2] “Et dominabitur a mari usque ad mare et a flumine usque

ad términos orbis terrarum”. [3] Glosa: Idest super totam ter-

ram mari circumdatam. [4] Licet enim Oceanus sit unum mare,
tamen secundum diversas sui partes varié nominatur: utpote

mare Oriéntale a parte orientis <et Occidental a parte occiden-

tis> et eodem modo a parte austri et aquilonis. [5] In omnibus
enim istis terris aliqui receperunt fidem Christi per predica-
tionem apostolorum, aliorumque discipulorum, secundum
quod dictum fuit supra psalmo XVIII, exponendo illud: “In
omnem terram exivit sonus eorum” et cetera. [6] “Et a flu-

mine”, scilicet paradisi terrestris, “usque ad términos orbis ter-

rarum”, idest usque ad términos orbis constituti circa terram

per circuitum. [7] Et isti termini protenduntur usque ad ul-
timum celum, et tantum protenditur potestas Christi. [8]

Propter quod dicit Matheus ultimo: “Data est mihi omnis

potestas in celo et in terra”, et cetera ut supra.

(106) man'- hand

(107) man'
4. Oceanus: Occeanus L. orientis et . . . occidentis B: onentis L.

I 6 o EDITION AND TRAN S I, AT I ON

 1

[106]

[i] Matthew, chapter 28

[2] [hand] [2] All authority in heaven and on earth has been given to
me. [3] Go therefore and teach all the peoples, baptizing them
in the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit,
teaching them to observe all my commandments to you.

[107]

[
1
1
Psalm 7

[2] “And he will have dominion from sea to sea and from
the river to the ends of the earth.” [3] Commentary: That is to

say, over the whole earth, surrounded by sea. [4] The ocean can
be considered to be a single sea, whose several parts have differ-

ent names. Thus the Eastern sea takes its name from the eastern

part of the ocean, the Western sea from the western part, and
similarly for the southern and northern parts. [5] In all of these
lands some people have received the faith in Christ through the

preaching of the apostles and the other disciples, just as was said

above in the commentary on psalm 1 8: “Their voices went out

to the whole earth,” etc. [6] “And from the river,” namely of

earthly paradise, “to the ends of the earth,” that is, to the

boundaries of the world. [7] And these boundaries are extended

to the highest heaven, for this will be the extent of the power of
Christ. [8] Because of this, Matthew said in his last chapter: “All

power in heaven and on earth has been given to me,” and so

forth, as given above.

EDITION AND TKANSl A I ION I 6 I

 1 .

/z2 recto/

[io8l

[1] Item Augustinus, in libro dc divinatione demonum.

[2] Istc ergo Deus, quern nemo, ut dixi, illorum ausus est

negare verum Deum, illos falsos esse deos et omnino deseren-

dos eorumque templa et simulacra et sacra evertenda per suos
vates, hoc est prophetas, aperta denuntiatione predixit, aperta
potestate precepit, aperta veritate complevit. Et cetera. Sequi-

tur.

[3] Attende [3] Quod autem ipsum essent culture gentes exterminatis
diligenter.
diis falsis, quos antea colebant, a prophetis eius esse predictum
[3] [hand]
paulo ante commemoravi et nunc repetoifq] “Prevalebit”, in- [4] Sophonie.

quit, “Deus adversus eos et exterminabit omnes deos gentium

terre; et adorabunt eum, unusquisque de loco suo, omnes in-
sule gentium”. [5] Ñeque sole insule, sed ita omnes gentes, ut

etiam omnes insule gentium, quandoquidem alibi non insulas

nominat, sed universum orbem terrarum dicens; [6] “Com-

memorabuntur et convertentur ad Dominum universi fines

terre, et adorabunt in conspectu eius universe patrie gentium.

[7] Nota. Quoniam Domini est regnum, et ipse dominabitur gentium”.

[7] Et cetera que sunt notatione digna. Sequitur.

[8] His atque huius modi propheticis documentis predictum

ostenditur, quod videmus impleri per Christum, futurum
fuisse, ut Deus Israel, quern unum verum Deum intelligimus,

non in una ipsa gente, que a<p>pellata est Israel, sed in omnibus
gentibus coleretur et omnes falsos deos gentium et a templis

eorum et a cordibus cultorum suorum denioliretur. Et cetera.

[9] Necesse est ergo, ut impleantur omnia hec. [lo] Et cetera

que secuntur usque in fmem.

[
1
1
Hec Augustinus ut supra. Ubi per totum ipsum libellum
singula clarius declarantur, que ego dimitto requirenda causa
brevitatis.

(lOH) man'; postls. man'; hand man^Q).

2. sacra L\ sacras corr. man'
4. Deus L: Dominus Ad Ao.
8. His Ad Ao'. Hiis L. Deus Ad Acr. Deurn L. unum . . . intelligimus Ad
Ao: unum Deum verum mtelligunt L.

I 6 2 KOI II ON ANO TRANSLATION

 [108]
[i] Furthermore, Augustine from On the Divination of Demons

[2] Therefore, this God, who, as I have said, no one dared to

deny to be the true God, foretold with clarity through the

prophets, predicted with unveiled power, and accomplished in

certain reality that their gods were false gods and should be
entirely abandoned and that their temples and idols and holy
objects should be overthrown, etc. And what follows.

[3] Observe [3] I stated just now that it was predicted in the same way by
carefully.
his prophets that the Gentiles, after having driven out the false
l3] [hand]
gods whom they had previously worshipped, would be en-
lightened; and I now repeat: [4] “God will prevail against [4] Zephaniah
them,” he says, “and will drive out all the gods of the nations

of the world; and all the islands of the peoples will worship him,

each from his own place.” [5] Not only the islands, but indeed
all the peoples, and even all the islands of the peoples, seeing

that elsewhere he does not speak of islands but of the whole

earth: [6] “All the ends of the earth will remember and will turn
to God, and all the nations of the Gentiles will worship in his

presence. For the kingdom belongs to the Lord, and he will

[7] Note rule the peoples. ”[7] What follows is worth noting.
[8] With these and similar prophecies it is shown that what
we know to have been fulfilled by Christ had been predicted:

that the God of Israel, who we know to be the one true God,
will be worshipped not only by the one nation that is called

Israel, but by all the peoples, and that he will throw out the false

gods of the Gentiles from their temples and from the hearts of
their worshippers. Etc.

[9] It is necessary that all these things be fulfilled. [

10] And so
on to the end.

[i i] Augustine wrote this as well as what is given above. In

his little book he gives clearer arguments, but for the sake of

brevity I have not included the entire texts.

rmriON and iransiaiion ' 3

 /22 verso/ - ¡2} verso/

/24 recto/

[i09]

[i] Petrus de Ailiaco cardinalis,

in libro de legibus et seeds, capitulo 4°.

[2] Quinto, ponit doctor iste quod de destructione legis Ma-

chumeti certitudinaliter loquuntur astronomi.[3] Nam secun- [3]

dum quod Albumazar dicit, lex illa non potest durare ultra sex-
Albumanzar.

centos nonaginta tres annos. Sed tantum ipsa durabit nisi

propter aliquam causam incidentem a<b>brevietur tempus
secundum quod prius ta<c>tum est, que a<b>breviatio potest fieri

maior vel minor ex causis diversis. [4] Et, ut iste doctor dicit,

tune, quando hec scripsit, iam erat annus Arabum sexcen-

tesirnus sexagesimus quintus a tempore Machometi, et ideo
concludebat quod cito destrueretur, et quod istud erat magnum
solatium christianis. [5] Unde laudandus erat Deus, qui philoso-
phis dedit taleni lucem sapientie, per quam lex veritatis confir-

matur et roboratur, et per quam percipi<m>us inimicos fidei de-

struí debere.[6] Et pro concordia <h>uius sententie inducit [6] Apocalypsis
13-
Scripturam a Apocalipsi, que dicit quod numerus bestie est sex-

centum LXIII, qui numerus est minor predicto per XXX

annos. [7] Sed in multis locis subticet aliquod de numero com-
pleto, nam hie est mos Scripture, ut dicit Beda: et hoc forsan
voluit Deus quod non exprimeretur totaliter, sed aliqualiter
o<c>cultaretur, sicut et cetera que / 24 verso/ in Apocalipsi scri-

[8]Nota de buntur.[8] Quia forte ante illud tempus ultimum quod huic
consuma- secte, secundum eius causam principalem, determinat Albuma-
tione legis
zar, continget quod Saraceni destruentur aut per Tártaros aut
Machometi.
per Christianos, sicut iam tunc maxima pars Sarracenorum de-

(109) nian^; postls. man'.

2. Machumeti L: Machometi PI. certitudinaliter: certidinaliter matP, tu

s.l. man', loquuntur: locuntur L.

3. dicit Pi. dixit L. incidentem: insidentem L. tactum PI: statum matP,
tatum con. man.
4. sexcentesimus: sexsentesimus L.
5. percipimus: percipius PI L.
6. a Apocalipsi L: Apocalipsis PI.
7. forsan: tbrsam L. exprimeretur L: expnmaretur cerr. s.l. man'.
8. quod fuit Pi. quos fuit L.

I 6 4 EDITION AND TRAN S 1. AT I ON

 [109]
[i] Cardinal Pierre d’Ailly, from the book on laws and sects,

chapter 4

[2] In the fifth place, this learned writer discusses what the
astronomers say with certainty about the destruction of Mo-
hammedan domination. [3] For according to Albumazar, that [3] Albumazar
domination cannot last more than 693 years. But it will last that

long unless for some unexpected reason the duration is short-

ened by some amount, depending on several factors. [4] As this

learned writer says, when he wrote these things it was the Ara-
bic year 665 reckoned from the time of Mohammed; therefore,
he concluded that the law of Mohammed would soon be de-
stroyed, a great consolation to the Christians. [5] Thus God
should be praised for giving to philosophers the illumination of
knowledge through which the law of truth is confirmed and
strengthened and through which we perceive that the enemies
of the faith must be destroyed. [6] As confirmation of his opin- [6] Apocalypse
ion, he cited the Apocalypse, which gives the number of the 13

beast as 663, thirty years less than the previously mentioned

number. God often conceals some part of the complete
[7] But
number, a common practice in the Scriptures, as Bede wrote;
and perhaps God wished that this not be expressed completely,
but remain hidden, like other things written in the Apocalypse.

[8] Note [8] For it could happen that before the year determined by
about the Albumazar, the Saracens are destroyed either by the Tartars or
destruction
the Christians, because by then a majority of the Saracens had
of the law of
Mohammed already been destroyed by the Tartars, as well as Baghdad, the

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I 6 5

 1

structa erat per Tártaros, et caput regni quod tuit Baldach, et

C'aliph qui fuit sicut papa eorum. [9] Sed his non obstantibus,

licet iam postea tempus magnum lapsum sit, tamen experientia

docet quod nondum secta illa perditionis destructa est: [
10] sed

pro hoc dolor sepe et multum contra christianos invalescit,

unde patet quod in hac opinione fragilis est et exigua seu in-
valida certitudo. [i i] Sexto, dicit iste doctor quod quia credi-
mus quod post legem Mac<h>ometi nulla secta veniet nisi lex

Antic<h>risti, et astronomi similiter in hoc concordant, quod

erit aliquis potens qui legem fedam et magicam constituet post
Machumetum, que omnes alias suspendit, ideo multum e<s>set

utile E<c>clesie Dei considerare de tempore istius legis, an cito

veniet post destructionem legis Machometi, an multum longe.

[12] Ethycus [12] Et Ethicus philosophus dicit in sua Cosmographia, quod

phylosophus. gens que fuit clausa inter portas Caspias irruet in mundum et
obviabit Antic<h>risto et eum vocabit / 2^ recto/ Deum deorum.
[13] lam vero, ut dicit: Tartarí qui fuerunt intra portas illas inde
exierunt. [14] Nam porte ille fracte sunt, sicut retulerunt aliqui

christiani, qui per medium earum transierunt. [15] Hoc ergo

inducit quasi signum proximi adventus Antic<h>risti, unde con-
cludendo dicit: [16] Scio quod si E<c>clesia vellet revolvere tex-

tum sacrum et prophetias sacras <atque prophetias> Sibi<l>le et

Merlini, Aquile et loachim et multorum aliorum, insuper <h>i-

storias et libros philosophorum, atque iuberet considerari vias

astronomie, inveniretur su<f>ficiens suspicio vel magis certitudo

de tempore Antic<h>risti.[i7] Sed his videtur obviare dictum [17] Actuum 1 .

Christi: “Non est vestrum nosse témpora vel momenta, que [17] Mathei
24.
Pater posuit, in sua potestate”, et illud: “De die autem ilia et

hora nemo scit’’ et cetera. [18] Quid autem super his dicendum
sit, non est presentis operis di<f>finire, sed de hac materia trac-
tavi in quodam sermone de adventu Domini super verbo: “Sci-
tote quoniam prope est regnum Dei”.

10. pro hoc L: proch PI. certitudo: sertitudo L.

11. Machumetum L: Machometum PI.

12. Ethicus PI: Etichus L. eum vocabit PI: convocabit L.

13. intra L: infra PL
16. textum: testum L. sacras . . . Sibille PI: sacras Sibile L. considerari
PI: consideravi L. vel magis L: vel magis suspitio vel am. matP. certitudo
L: sertitudo con. s.l. man'.
17. nosse: nosce L.

166 E on ION AND TRANSI A riON

i
 capital ot their kingdom, and the caliph, who was a sort ot pope
tor them. [9] But these things not withstanding, and granted
that a great amount of time has elapsed since then, we can ob-
serve, nevertheless, that the perditions religion has not yet been
destroyed. [10] Instead, the suffering of the Christians grows
more and more intense, throwing into question the validity of
the argument. [11] In the sixth place, this learned writer says

that because we believe that after Muslim domination no other

religion will come except the rule of the Antichrist, and be-

cause the astronomers agree on this point, after Mohammed

some powerful person will establish a vile religion based on
magic that will replace all others. Therefore it would be ex-
tremely useful for the Church of God to consider when this
rule will occur, whether directly after the destruction of Mus-
[i2] Ethicus lim domination or much later. [12] Ethicus the philosopher says
the
in his Cosmography that a people who had been enclosed within
philosopher
the Caspian gates will break out into the world to meet with
the Antichrist, whom they will call their God. [13] Indeed, as

he says, the Tartars who were behind the gates have gone out
from there. [14] Those doors have been broken, as reported by
some Christians who passed through them. [15] Thus Ethicus
reasons that this is a sign of the proximity of the coming of the
Antichrist and draws the necessary conclusion: [16] I know that

if the Church would read again the sacred text and sacred
prophecies and the prophecies of the Sibyl, and of Merlin,
Aquila, Joachim, and many others, in addition to histories and
philosophical writings, and if it would decide to consider the

results of astronomy, a good idea, perhaps even certain knowl-

edge, of the time of the coming of Antichrist would result. (17] [17] Acts I

But the words of Christ seems to indicate the contrary: “It is [

1
7] Matthew
24
not for you to know the time or the moment that the Father

has determined through his own power”; and “No one knows
the day and the hour,” etc.[iS] It is not the purpose of the
present work to establish the truth of these matters, which I

have discussed in a discourse on the coming of the Lord, with

reference to the text, “Know that the kingdom of God is near.”

F. 1) rr I O N AND r RA N S 1 AT I ON 1 6 7
 [no]
[1] In Vigintiloquium, in verbo XI°.

[2] Augustinus, <vigesimo> secundo De civitate Dei, ubi ait

quod sexti mi<l>lenarii annorum mundi posteri<or>a spatia suo

tempore volvebantur: [3] ubi incidenter notandum est quod

Augustinus ibidem non assertive, ut quidam crediderunt, sed
solum recitative ¡2^ verso/ ponit illam opinionem que dicebat,

quod primevam creationem ideo distinxit Deus per sex dies, ut

significaret quod omnia, que per totam durationem seculi huius

facere disposuerat, in sex annorum millenariis adimpleret. [4]

Hanc siquidem opinionem in pluribus locis et spetialiter, ut

supra dictum est, in fine libri De civitate Dei assertive refellit;

aliam quoque in titulo <p>salmi sexti, illorum videlicet qui ad-

ventum Domini ad iuditium post septem milia annorum ab

Adam futurum crediderunt, ut septem milia annorum tam-
quam septem dies transeant, deinde illud tempus tamquam dies

[5] Mathei octava adveniat.[s] De talibus autem coniecturis quid catholice

24. tenendum sit, dudum satis probabiliter, explicavi in quodam
sermone de adventu Domini super verbo : “Scitote quoniam
prope est regnum Dei”. [6] Sed his omissis ad propositum
redeamus.

[ill]

[i] In Elucidario a<stronomice> c<oncordie> c<um> t<h>eologia,

in verbo X°.

[2] A creatione Ade usque ad Christum, secundum Alphon-

sum, sunt anni quinqué milia tercentum quadraginta tres et dies

CCCVIII.

(1 man\
10) man^-, postl.
I. Vigintiloquium: XXloquium L. vigésimo secundo: secundo Pi' L.
3. assertive: acertive L. ponit Pi': ponite L. creationem Pi': creationum
L
4. assertive: acertive L. psalmi Pi': salmi L.

5. coniecturis: congecturis L.

6. redeamus: rediamus L.

(111) matP
1. astronomice . . . theologia; a.c.c. teología L.

2. anni; annos L. tres: tnbus L.

I 6 8 K I) I r I ON AND r RA N S L A I 1 ON
 llio]

[i] From the l^i(iinti¡oqHÍiwi, section 11

[2] Augustine, in book twenty-two of City of God, says that

the hnal years of the sixth millenium ot the world will occur in

his era. [3] Incidentally, it should be noted that Augustine does

not support, as some have believed, but only reports the opin-

ion that God divided the creation into six days to signify that he

would fulfill within six millenia all that he had determined to

do throughout time. [4] Augustine refutes this opinion in sev-
eral places and, in particular, as stated above, at the end of City

of God. Also, in his commentary on Psalm 6, he rejects the

belief that the Lord will come in judgment 7,000 years after

Adam, so that 7,000 years will go by just as seven days, followed

[5] Matthew by the eighth day of judgment. [5] Not long ago I explained
24 which ones of these conjectures are acceptable from an ortho-
dox point of view in a discourse on the coming of the Lord,

starting from the text, “Know that the kingdom of God is

near.” [6] But let us set aside these matters and return to the

subject.

[ml
[i] From Elucidario astronomice concordie cum teolo^ia section 10

[2] From the creation of Adam to Christ, according to Al-

fonso, there are 5,343 years and 308 days.

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I 6 9

 1

[i 12)

[
I
]
In libro de concordia a<stronomicc> v<critatis> et

n<arrationis> <h>istori<c>c, <capitulo> 57.

[2] Post prcdi<c>tas decein revolutiones Saturni secute sunt

/2Ó recto/ alie decem et complete anno Christi i 1
89 vel circiter,

circa quod tempus Innocentius tertius, niultis bonis operibus

gloriosos, digne cathedram Petri tenebat, cuius tempore a Fran-
chis et Venetis capta est Constantinopolis: [3] similiter in-

numerabilis Sarracinorum multitudo, contra <H>ispanos ve-

niens, ad patriam suam confusa redit. [4] His diebus Livonia pro
magna parte conversa est ad fidem. [5] Anno vero pontificatus
sui 17° Rome celebratum est consilium generale pro residuo
Terre Sánete, ubi etiam pro statu universalis E<c>clesie multa
utilia statuta fuerunt; ubi etiam abbatis loachin libellum, quem
contra magistrum Petrum Lumbardi composuit, dampnavit,
insuper etiam Almaricum cum sua herética doctrina: [6] non
tamen doctrina dicti abbatis loachin dampnata est, qui in Ca-
labria floruit pluresque libros utiles scripsit, quia regibus et prin-
cipibus requirentibus ab ipso de peregrinatione, quam faciebant

in Terram Sanctam, predixit, quod parum proficerent, eo quod

nondum tempus proficiendi advenisset. [7] Hoc tempore im-
perabat Federicos primus, qui largos, strenuus et facundos in
omnibus fuit gloriosos.

|i 131

[i] In libro de c<oncordia> a<stronomice> v<eritatis> et

n<arrationis> h<istorice>, capitulo 61.

[2] Sed quia de advento Antechristi locuti sumos, / 26 verso/

sciendum est quod Methodius mártir, de quo in libro illu-

(
112 ) mati^
1. astronomice capitulo 57: a. v. et n. istone 57
. . . L.

2. complete Pe: cornplecto L.

3. Sarracinorum L: Sarracenorum Pe. Hispanos Pe: Ispanos L.
4. Livonia L: Livonias con. man.
5. consilium: cumsilium L. etiam pro: ectiam pro L. Lumbardi L:
Lombardi Pe. insuper etiam Pe: insuper ectiam L.
(113) matP
1. concordia . . . historice: c. a. v. et n. h. L.
2. Antechristi L: Antichristi Pe. Hieronimus Pe: Geronimus L. con-
sumatione L: consiimmatione Pe. revelatione accepisse Pe: relatione
accepise L.

170 HDiriON ANO TK ANSI A TION

á
[112]

[
1
1
From the book Dc concordia astronomicc vcritatis ct narrationii

histotie, chapter 57

[2] After the previously mentioned ten revolutions of Saturn

another ten followed and were completed in the year of Christ
1 1
89 or thereabouts. At about that time Innocent III, famed for

his many good deeds, was the worthy occupant of the chair of
Peter. In his time Constantinople was captured by the French
and the Venetians; [3] also an innumerable multitude of Sarac-
ens, coming against the Spanish, returned home in disarray. [4]

At the same time Livonia was almost entirely converted to the

faith. [5] In the seventeenth year of Innocent Ill’s pontificate a

general council was held in Rome on behalf of what remained

of the Holy Land, resulting in many decrees of use to the Uni-
versal Church. Also the Abbot Joachim’s book, written in op-
position to Master Peter Lombard, was condemned, as was Al-
maricus and his heretical doctrine. [6] However, the teachings

of Abbot Joachim (who was famous in Calabria and wrote

many useful books) were not condemned, because he had pre-
dicted to the kings and princes who questioned him about their
journey to the Holy Land that they would have little success, as

the time for positive progress had not yet come. [7] Frederick I

was ruling then; generous, vigorous, and eloquent, he was glo-

rious in every way.

Iu3l
[ 1 1
From the book De concordia astronomicc vcritatis et

narrationis historic, chapter 61

[2] But because we have spoken about the coming of the

Antichrist, we should mention that Methodius the Martyr,

EDITION AND TRANSI A I ION I

7 I
 str<i>um virorum meminit Hieronimus, de principio et con-
sumatione scculi multa scripsit quc divina re<ve>ladone ac-
ccpi<s>sc dicitur, inter que aliqua commemorat, que erunt pre-
ambula Antichristi, quorum primum est ilia dissentio, de qua in
secunda ad Thessalonicenses epistola dicit Apostolus: “Nisi
venerit dissentio primum” et cetera. [3] Sed de hac iam aliquid
breviter tetigimus. [4] Secundum preambulum est, quod pos<t>-

quam absorta fuerint plurima regna, que adversus regnum

Romanorum conflixerant, consurgent pro illis adversu^ Roma-
num imperium filii Israel, filii Agar, de quibus Daniel predixit:
[5] et hoc erit in séptimo millenario annorum mundi, eo quod
a<p>propinquabit consumatio seculi et non erit longitudo am-
plius temporis. [6] Hie tamen attende quod, sicut dicit <H>y-
storia scolastica, Methodius post 200 annos ab Adam ciliades,

idest etates seculi, per annorum millenaria annotavit. [7] Ter-

tium preambulum est, quod terram promissionis propter pec-
cata inhabitantium in ea obtinebunt filii Ysmael, idest Sar-

raceni, que deberet esse terra christianorum. / 2j recto/ [8] Et

hec evenient propter iniquitates varias, specialiter propter pec-
cata sodomie, multaque mala enumerat, que super diversis re-
gnis et regionibus ventura predixit. [9] Et adhuc applicat illud
Apostoli: “Nisi venerit dissentio primum” et cetera, dicens

quod dissentio est disciplina vel correptio, qua corripie<n>tur

universi habitatores terre, de qua diffuse prosequitur. [10]

Quartum preambulum est, quod <in> predicto tempore dissen-

tionis, id est discipline et correptionis, minuetur spiritus perfec-

torum, et multi abnegabunt veram fidem, etiam sine aliqua vi,

tormentis aut flagellis, et associabuntur transgressoribus, sicut

de his predixit Apostolus, [ii] Et hec omnia fient, ut per

tribulationes probentur et manifestentur electi. [12] Quintum

preambulum est, quod post tribulationem, que fiet a filiis Ys-
mael, ipsi iocundantes in victoriis eorum gloriantesque, quia
desolaverunt Persidam et Romaniam, Ciliciam quoque et Sy-
riam, Capadociam et Ysauriam, Africam quoque vel Siciliam,
et eos, qui inhabitant proxime Romam et insulas, et bla-

sfemantes dicent: nequáquam habebunt christiani ereptionem

5. consumatio L: consummatio Pc.

6 . Hystoria Pc: Ystona L. post: per L Pc.

8. enumerat: ennumerat L.
10 in predicto
. Pc: predicto L.
12. Ciliciam: Ciciliam L; Siciliam Pc. Siciliam: Ciciliam L Pc.

i 7 2 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

whom Jerome mentioned in his book about famous men,
wrote many things, which are said to have come to him
through divine revelation, about the beginning and end of his-
tory. Among these he records some events that would precede
the coming of the Antichrist; the first is the discord that the
Apostle wrote about in the second epistle to the Thessalonians:
“Unless discord comes first,” etc. [3] But we have already dis-

cussed this briefly. [4] The second precursory event will hap-
pen, after the subjugation of many kingdoms to Roman rule,

when the sons of Israel rise up against Roman authority, the

sons of Hagar, prophesied by Daniel. This will occur during the

seventh millenium of the world, for the end of the age will be
drawing near and time will be running out. [6] But Me-
thodius’s methodology, reported in the Historia scolastica, must
be taken into account, for he counted the chiliads, that is, the

age of the world in thousands of years, starting from 200 years

after Adam. [7] The third precursory event will be the capture

of the promised land, which should be Christian, by the sons of

Ishmael, that is, the Saracens, because of the sins of its inhabi-
tants.

[8] These things will result from various iniquities, especially

the sin of sodomy. He enumerates many evils that would occur

in different kingdoms and regions. [9] Moreover, he cites the

Apostle: “Unless discord comes first,” etc., saying that discord

is the warning, a reproval to all of the inhabitants of the earth;

he writes at length on this topic. [10] The fourth precursor is

that during this time of discord, that is, of warning and re-
proval, the courage of the perfect ones will weaken and many
will deny the true faith, even without being tortured or
whipped, and will join the transgressors, just as the Apostle pre-

dicted they would, [i i] And all these things will take place in

order that the chosen ones be revealed through the test of trib-
ulation. [12J The fifth precursor is that after causing pain, the

sons of Ishmael will celebrate their victories and boast about the
destruction of Persia and Romania, Cilicia and Syria, Cappado-
cia and Isauria, Africa and also Sicily, and the inhabitants of the

F O IT O N
I AND 1 RA N S I A F I ON J
7 3
 de manibus nostris. [13] Tune súbito ex<s>urget super eos tribu-

latio et exiliet rex Grecorum, sive Romanoruni, in furore

magno a mari Ethiopie super habitantes terram promissionis et

erit rex Romanorum imponens / 2j verso/ iugum super eos sep-
ties tantum, quantum erat iugum eorum super terram. (14]

Sextum preambulum erit quod, postquam indignado et furor

regis í^omanorum exarserit super eos, qui abnegaverunt Chri-

stum, erit pax et tranquillitas magna super terram, qualis non-
dum est facta, sed ñeque est similis ulla, eo quod novissima est

<et> in fine seculorum. [15] Et hec est illa quam Apostolus ex-
posuit, quia “cum dixerint: ‘pax et securitas’, tune eis super-

veniet súbito interims”, de qua Christus loquitur in Evangelio.

[16] Septimum preambulum erit, quod post illam pacem tune

reserabuntur porte Aquilonis et egredientur virtutes gentium
illarum, quas conclusit intus Alexander, et concutietur omnis
terra a conspectu earum et variis crudelitatibus corrumpetur et

contammabitur ab eis. [17] Post ebdomadam vero temporis,

quando comprehenderint eivitatem loppem, mittet Dominus
unum ex principibus militie sue, et percutiet eos in uno
momento temporis. [18] Octavum preambulum erit, quod
postea descendet rex Ronianomm et morabitur in Hierusalem
septimana temporis et dimidia, quod est 10 anni et dimidius, et
tune apparebit filius perditionis.

13. exsurget: exurget L Pe. eos: ees L.

14. similis: simillis L. est et in Pr. est in L.

15. quam Apostolus L: quam ñeque est simillis Apostolus con.

niati^. loquitur: liquitur L.

17. mittet: mittetur L Pe.

18. dimidius Pr. dimiduus matP, dimidiuss con. man.

I
7 4 KIHTION AND TRAN S I, AT I ON
arca around Rome and the islands; they will blaspheme, “By
no means will the Christians seize anything from our hands.”
[13] Suddenly a tribulation will fall upon them and the king of
the Greeks or ot the Romans will come forth in fury from the
Ethiopian Sea and descend upon the inhabitants of the prom-
ised land; the king of the Romans will place a yoke upon them
seven times as heavy as was their yoke upon the earth. [ 14] The
sixth precursor will follow the explosion of indignation and
rage brought by the king of the Romans to those who deny
Christ; then there will be great peace and tranquillity upon the

earth, unlike any other, the ultimate peace marking the end of
the world. [
1
5] This is the peace explained by the Apostle: “For

when they say ‘peace and security,’ then suddenly the destruc-
tion will overcome them”; Christ also spoke about this in the

Gospel. [16] The seventh precursory event will follow this

peace, when the gates of the north open and the people who
were held back by Alexander go out in full strength. The entire

earth will tremble at the sight of them, corrupted by their nu-

merous cruelties and contaminated by their presence. [17] But

in seven days, when they capture the city of Joppa, the Lord
will send one of the princes of his army and he will bring them
down in an instant. [18] As the eighth precursory event, the
king of the Romans will go down to Jerusalem and remain
there one and one-half weeks, corresponding to ten and one-
half years, and then the son of perdition will appear.

rm rioN and transí a tion 1 7 5

 /zS recto/ - /z8 verso/

/zg recto/

[•14]
[i] Isaie <capitulo> XI.

[
2 ] [hand] [2] In die ilia radix lesse, qui stat in signum populorum,
ipsum gentes deprecabuntur, et erit sepulchrum eii\s glorio-

sum. [3I Et erit in die ilia: adiitiet Dominus secundo manum

suam ad possidendum residuum populi sui, quod relinquetur ab
Assyriis et ab Egypto et a Phetros et ab Ethiopia et ab Ennam et

a Sennaar et ab Emath et ab insulis maris; [4] et levabit Dominus

signum in nationes et congregabit prófugos Israel.

[115]
[i] Isaie <capitulo> 14.

[2] Et quid respondebitur nuntiis gentis? “Quia Dominus

fundavit Syon, et in ipso sperabunt pauperes populi eius”.

[116]

[i] Isaie <capitulo> XIX°.

[2] In die ilia erit altare Domini in medio terre Egipti, et

titulus Domini iuxta terminum eius. [3] Et erit in signum et <in>

testimonium Domino exercituum in terra Egypti. Et cetera.

(114) man'', hand man^{?).

3 . Assyriis L: Assyni con. man'. Ennam L: Aelam V.

4. levabit . . . signum L: levabit signum V.

(115) matt'
(116) matt'

3 . in testimonium V: testimonium L.

I
7 6 EDITION AND TRANSLAIION
 [2]
[114]
[i] Isaiah 1

[3]

[2] [hand] On that day the root ofjesse, who is a sign to the people;
the nations will beseech him, and his sepulchre will be glorious.

And on that day God will extend his hand a second time to
recover his remaining people from the Assyrians and from
Egypt, Pathros, Ethiopia, Elam, Shinar, Hamath and from the

islands of the sea; [4] and God will raise a banner for the nations
and will assemble the exiles of Israel.

[115]

[1] Isaiah 14

What answer will be given

[2] to the envoys of the nations?
That God has founded Zion, and the impoverished of his peo-

ple will trust in her.

|ii6|

[1] Isaiah 19

[2] On that day there will be an altar of the Lord in the

middle of the land of Egypt, and a sign of the Lord at its border.

[3I And it will be a sign and a witness to the Lord of hosts in the
land of Egypt. Etc.

F.DITION AND TRANSLATION I

7 7
 l" 7 l

[
I
]
Isaie <capitulo> 25.

[2) Et fatiet Doniinus cxcrcituum <omnibus populis> in

monte hoc convivium pinguium, convivium vindcmic, et

cetera. [3] Et precipitabit in monte isto fatiem vinculi colligati

super omnes populos et telam, quam orditus est super omnes
nationes. Et cetera. [4] Et dicet in die ilia: et cetera. [5] “Et
exultabimus et letabimur in salutari eius. [6] Quia requiescet
manus Domini in monte isto”. Et cetera per totum.

(117) man'
2. exercituum . . . populis V: exercituum L.
3. colligati L: colligate con. s.l. man', telam: tellam L.

4 dicet
. V: dicent L.

5 . Et exultabimus L: Exultabimus V.

1 7X EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT I ON

1' «vi

[ 1
]
Isaiah 25

[2] On this mountain the Lord of hosts will make for all the
peoples a feast of fatty meats, a feast of wines, etc. [3] And on
this mountain he will destroy the image of chains restraining
the peoples and the web spun over all of the nations. Etc. [4]

And they will say on that day, etc. [5] Let us rejoice and be
joyful in his salvation. [6] For the hand of God will rest on this

mountain. And so on, to the end.

1; D rn O N AND r RA N S I A r I ON I
7 9
 /29 uerso/

|m81
[i] Isaie <capitulo> 27.

[2] Et erit: in die ilia clangetur in tuba magna; et venient, qui

perditi fuerant de terra Assyriorum et qui eiecti erant in terra

Egypti, et adorabunt Dominum in monte sancto in lerusalem.

[119]

[1] Isaie <capitulo> 28.

[2] Consumationem enim et abbreviationem audivi a Do-

mino, Deo exercituum, super universam terram.

[120]
[i] Isaie <capitulo> 30.

[2] Bead omnes, qui expectant eum. [3] Populus enim Syon
habitabit in lerusalem, et cetera. [4] Ecce nomen Domini venit
de lo<n>ginquo, et cetera.

[121]
[i] Isaie <capitulo> 35.

[2] Letabitur deserta et invia, et cetera. [3] Ipsi videbunt glo-

rian! Domini et decorem Dei nostri. Et cetera. [4] Et am-
bulabunt, qui liberad fuerint, et redempti a Domino conver-
tentur. [5] Et venient in Syon cum laude, et letitia sempiterna

super caput eorum: et cetera.

[122]

[i] Isaie <capitulo> 40.

[2] Consolamini, consolamini popule meus, dicit Deus

vester. Et cetera. [3] Et revelabitur gloria Domini, et videbit

omnis caro pariter quod os Domini locutum est. Et cetera.

(118) man'
2 . Et erit add. ad mar^. man', in terra Egypti V: de terra Egypti L.

(119) man'
(120) man'
(121) man'
(122) man'

I 8 o KDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [
1 . 8]

[i] Isaiah 27

And on that day a great trumpet will sound; and they will
[2]

come, those who had been lost, from the land of the Assyrians
and those who had been exiled in the land of Egypt; and they
will worship the Lord on the holy mountain in Jerusalem.

('yl
[i] Isaiah 28

[2] For I have heard from the Lord God of hosts a decree of
destruction and retrenchment for the entire world.

[120]

[i] Isaiah 30

[2] Blessed are all who trust in him. The people of Zion
[3]

will live in Jerusalem, etc. [4] Behold, the name of the Lord
comes from afar, etc.

[121]
[i] Isaiah 35

[2] The deserted and distant regions will rejoice, etc. [3]

They will see the glory of the Lord and the beauty of our God,
etc. [4] And those who have been liberated will go, and the
ones redeemed by the Lord will return. [5] And they will come
to Zion with praise, and everlasting joy will be upon their
heads, etc.

[122]

[1] Isaiah 40

[2] Be comforted, be comforted, my people, says your Lord,

etc. [3] And the glory of the Lord will be revealed, and all flesh

. together will see that the mouth of the Lord has spoken. Etc.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION I 8 I

 [4] Super montcm excelsum asccnde, tu, qui evangelizas
Syon; exalta in fortitudine vocem tuani, qui evangelizas lerusa-
lein; et cetera.

[5] Oinnes gentes, quasi non sint, sic sunt coram eo, et quasi
nihilum et inane repútate sunt ei. Et cetera per totum capitu-
lum.

I 8 2 EDITION AND TRANSI ATION

 [4] Ascend the holy mountain, you, who bring good tidings
to Zion; lift up your voice in strength, you, who bring good
tidings to Jerusalem; etc.

[5] All the peoples are nonexistent before him; they are

nothing to him and considered worthless. And so on, through-

out the chapter.

EDITION AND IRANSIAIION I «3

 /ío recto/

[í^3l
ji] hayas, capitulo 22°.

[2] Et erit in die illa: vocabo scrvum meum Elyachim filium

Helchie et induam ilium tunica tua et cingulo tuo confortabo

eum et potestatem tuam dabo in manu eius; et erit quasi pater

habitantibus lerusalem et domui luda. (3] Et dabo clavem

domus David super humerum eius; et aperiet, et non erit qui

claudat; et claudet, et non erit qui aperiat. [4] Et figarn ilium

paxillum in loco fideli, et erit in solium glorie domui patris sui.

[5] Et suspendent super eum omnem gloriam domus patris eius,

vasorum diversa genera, omne vas parvulum, a vasis craterarum

usque ad omne vas musicorum. [6] In die illa, dicit Dominus

exercituum, auferetur paxillus, qui fixus fuerat in loco fideli, et

frangetur et cadet; et peribit, quod pependerat in eo, quare Do-

minus locutus est. Et cetera.

(124]
[i] Isaie <capitulo> 55.

[2] Omnes sitientes, venite ad aquas; et, qui non habetis ar-

gentum, properate, emite et comedite, et cetera. [3] Inclinate

aurem vestram et venite ad me; audite, et vivet anima vestra, et

feriam vobiscum pactum sempiternum, misericordias David

Fideles. [4] Ecce testem populis dedi eum, ducem ac precep-
[5] [hand] torem gentibus.[5] Ecce gentem, quam nesciebas, vocabis, et

gentes, que non cognoverunt te, ad te current, propter Domi-

num Deum tuum et Sanctum Israel, qui glorificavit te. Et cete-
ra.

[6] Et erit Dominus nominatus in signum eternum, quod

I

non auferetur.

(123) man'
5. suspendent V: suspendarn L. a V\ et L.

6. quare L; quia V.
(124) man'; hand man^(?).
2. emite V: edite L.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 l'23l

[ 1 ]
Isaiah 22

[2] On that day that I will call my servant Eliakirn, the son of
Hilkiah, and I will wrap him in your robe and I will arm him
with your swordbelt and I will place your power in his hands.

And he will be a father to the inhabitants of Jerusalem and to

the house ofjudah. And will place on his shoulders the key
[3] I

to the house of David. What he opens, no one will close; and

what he closes, no one will open. [4] And will fasten him like I

a well-secured peg, and he will assume the throne of glory in

the house of his father. [5] And they will hang upon him all the

glory of his father’s house, various implements, every utensil,

from bowls to musical instruments. [6] On that day, says the

Lord of hosts, the well-secured peg will be withdrawn and bro-

ken and will fall; and that which had hung upon it will be
destroyed, for the Lord has spoken. Etc.

[124]

[1] Isaiah 55

[2] You who thirst, come to the waters; you who have no
money, make haste to purchase and eat, etc. [3] Lend an ear and

come to me; listen, and your soul will live. I will make an
eternal pact with you, the unfailing compassion of David. (4]

Behold, I gave him as a witness to the peoples, a leader and

[5] [hand] teacher of the nations. [5] Behold, you will call the peoples

whom I did not know, and the nations who did not know you
will run to you for the sake of the Lord, your God, for the sake
of the Holy One of Israel, who glorified you. Etc.

[6] And the Lord will be made known through an eternal

sign that never disappears.

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION I s 5

 /}0 veno/

I'^sl

[
I
]
I)e pretérito

[2] Ysaias, capitulo 24°.

[3] Hi levabunt vocem suam atque laudabunt; cum

glorificatus fuerit Dominus, hinnient de mari. [4) Propter hoc
in doctrinis glorifícate Dominum, in insulis marl's nomen
Domini Dei Israel. [5] A finibus terre laudes audivimus gloriam
iusti.
[2] [6] <Et dixi>: “Secretum <meum> mihi, secretum <meum>
mihi”.
[3]

[126]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 41°.

[2] Alicer; Taceant ad me insule, et gentes mutent fortitudinem;

laceant.
accedant et tunc loquantur, simul ad indicium propinquemus.
Quis suscitavit ab oriente iustum, vocavit eum ut sequeretur

se? Dabit in conspectu eius gentes et reges obtinebit, dabit quasi

pulverem gladio eius, sicut stipulam vento raptam arcui eius. [4]

Persequetur eos, transibit in pace; semita in pedibus eius non

apparebit. [5] Quis hoc operatus est et fecit, vocans genera-
tiones ab exordio? Ego Dominus, primus et novissimus ego
sum. [6] Viderunt insule et timuerunt, extrema terre ob-
stupuerunt, a<p>propinquaverunt et accesserunt.

('27)
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 42°.

[2] Ecce servus mens, suscipiam eum; electus mens, com-

placuit sibi in illo anima mea; dedi spiritum
I
meum super eum,
indicium gentibus proferet. [3] Non clamabit nec accipiet per-

il 25) man^
1. preterite; pertento L.

5. audivimus V: vidimus L.
6. Et . mihi V: Secretum
. . mihi, secretum mihi L.

(126) post!, man'.

2. propinquemus V: propmquamus L.

5. hoc L: hec V.

(127) man^-, post), man'.

3. nec accipiet L: ñeque accipiet V.

186 K I) I I I O N AND r RA N S I A r I ON
 1
' 25 ]

[ I J
Concerning what has already taken place

[2] Isaiah, chapter 24

[3] They will raise their voices and give praise; when the
Lord is glorified, they will shout from the sea. [4] Therefore
glorify the Lord by teaching in the islands of the sea the name of
the Lord God of Israel. [5] From the ends of the earth we have
heard of the glory of the righteous one. [6] And I said; “My
secret is for myself; my secret is for myself”

|]26|
[i] Isaiah, chapter 41

[2] [2] Let the islands be silent before me and the peoples renew
Alternatively:
their strength; let them approach and then let them speak. To-
Let them
prostrate
gether let us draw near to judgment. [3] Who encouraged the
themselves. righteous one from the east; who called him to follow? He will

place the tribes in his power and subdue the rulers; he will

reduce them to dust with his sword, to windblown chaff with

his bow. [4] He will pursue them and move on in peace; no
trace of the path will appear on his feet. [5] Who has labored to
do this, calling the generations from the beginning? I am the

Lord; I am the first and the last. [6] The islands saw and were
afraid; the ends of the earth were silent. They approach and
draw near.

[127]

[
I
]
Isaiah, chapter 42

[2] my servant, will sustain him; my soul takes plea-

Behold I

sure in him, my chosen one. have put my spirit upon him; he I

will extend justice to the peoples. [3] He will not cry out or

LDITION ANO I RA N S 1. AT I ON I 87
 .

sonam, nec audictur / j; m\o/ vox eius foris. [4) Calanium

quassatum non conterct et linum fumigans non cxtinguet; in

vcritate educct iuditium. (5] Non erit tristis ñeque turbulentus,

donee ponat in terra iuditium; et legem eius insule expec-
tabunt.

[6] Idem [6] “Ego, Dominus, vocavi te in iustitia et a<p>prehendi

ibidem.
manum tuam; et servavi te et dedi te in fedus populi, in lucem
gentium, ut aperires oculos cecorum et educeres de conclu-
domo carceris sedentes in tenebris, [7] Ego,
sione vinctum, de
Dominus: hoc est nomen meum; gloriam meam alteri non
dabo et laudem meam scul<p>tilibus. [8] Que prima fuerunt,
ecce venerunt; nova quoque ego annuntio: antequam oriantur,
audita vobis faciam”. [9] Cantate Domino canticum novum,
laus eius ab extremis terre; qui descenditis in mare et plenitudo
eius, insule et habitatores earum. [10] Levetur desertum et civi-

tates eius. In domibus habitabit Cedar, [i i] Laúdate habitatores

Petre, de verdee montium clamabunt. [12] Ponent Domino
gloriam et laudem eius in insulis nuntiabunt. [13] Dominus
sicut fortis egredietur, sicut vir preliator suscitabit zelum;
vociferabit<ur> et clamabit, super inimicos suos confortabitur.

[14] “Tacui semper, silui, patiens fui; sicut parturiens loquar,

dissipabo et a<b>sorbebo simul. [15] Desertos faciam montes et

colles et omne germen eorum exsi<c>cabo; ponam flumina in

insulas et stagna arefaciam. [16] Educam cecos in viam, quam
nesciunt, et in semitis, quas ignoraverunt, ambulare eos faciam;

ponam tenebras coram eis in lucem et prava in recta. [17] Hec

verba feci eis et non dereliqui eos”.

4.-5. Calamum . . . expectabunt L: add. ad niar^., in ras. man'

4. linum V: lignum L. in veritate V: in ventatem L.

7. gloriam meam L: meam add. s.l. man'.

11. Laúdate: Laudata L.

12. laudem L: laudes con. man'.

13. vociferabitur V: vociferabit L.

14. sicut L: si corr. s.l. man', parturiens: pertunens L. loquar L: add. s.l.

man', dissipabo: discipabo L.

15. Desertos L: Deserto con. man^.

16. Educam V: Et ducam L. faciam: ficiam L.
17. dereliqui: derelinqui L.

I 8 8 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 welcome anyone, nor will his voice be heard abroad. [4] He
will not break the weakened reed, and he will not extinguish
the smoking wick; he will faithfully bring forth justice. [5] He
will be neither sad nor troubled until he establishes justice on
earth, and the islands will await his law.

[6] Idem [6] I, the Lord, have called you in justice and have taken
ibidem hold of your hand. have protected you and given you
I as a

covenant of the people to enlighten the Gentiles, so that you

may open the eyes of the blind and bring forth the fettered one
from his enclosure, the ones living in darkness from their place
of incarceration. [7] I am the Lord; this is my name. I will not
give my glory to another nor my praise to graven images. [8]

Behold, the first things have come to be and I proclaim new

things; before they begin, I will make them known to you. [9]

Sing new song to the Lord. Sing

a his praise from the ends of
the earth, you who sink into the sea and his plenitude, the

islands and their inhabitants. [io| Let the desert and its cities be
liberated. Kedar will inhabit its villages, [i i] Give praise, inhab-
itants of Petra; from the top of the mountains they will cry out.

[12] They will give glory to the Lord and praise him in the

islands. [13] The Lord will go forth in strength; as a warrior he

will inspire great zeal. He will shout and cry out; he will be
strengthened against his enemies. [14] I have been ever silent; I

have said nothing and I have been patient. Now I will shout

like a woman in labor; I will destroy and devour at one time.

[15] I will lay waste the mountains and hills and dry up the
vegetation. I will turn rivers into islands and dry up their pools.
[16] I will lead the blind into a road that they do not know, and
I will guide them along unfamiliar paths. I will turn the dark-

ness in front of them into light and straighten the way. [17] I

have said this to them, and I have not forsaken them.

EDITION AND TRANSIA MON I X y

 /jí verso/

[128)

[1] Ysaias, capitulo 43.

[2] Et nunc hec dicit Dominus, creans te, lacob, et formans

te, Israel; “Noli timere, quia redemi te et vocavi te nomine tuo;

meus es tu. [3] Cum transieris per aquas, tecum ero, et flumina
non operient te; cum ambulaveris in igne, non combureris, et
flamma non ardebit in te, quia ego Dominus Deus tuus, Sanctus

Israel, salvator tuus: dedi propitiationem tuam Egyptum,

Ethiopiam et Saba pro te. [4] Ex quo honorabilis factus es in
oculis meis et gloriosus, ego dilexi te et dabo homines pro te et

populos pro anima tua. [5] Noli timere, quia ego tecum sum; ab
oriente adducam semen tuum et ab occidente congregabo te.

[6] Dicam aquiloni: ‘Da’ et austro: ‘Noli prohibere; affer filios

meos de longinquo et filias meas ab extremis terre. [7] Et

omnes, qui invocant nomen meum’ ’’
et cetera.

[129]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 44.

[2] Et nunc audi, lacob serve meus, et Israel, quem elegi. [3]

Hec dicit Dominus, faciens et formans te ab útero, auxiliator

tuus; “Noli timere, serve meus lacob et rectissime, quem elegi.

[4] E<f>fundam enim aquas super sicientem et fluenta super ari-

dam; e<f>fundam spiritum meum super semen tuum et benedic-

tionem meam super stirpem tuam’’ et cetera.

[5] Ibidem. [5] Laúdate, celi, quoniam misericordiam fecit Dominus;

iubilate, extrema terre, /j2 recto/ resonate, montes, lauda-
tionem, saltus et omne lignum eius, quoniam redemit Dominus
lacob et Israel gloriabitur. Et cetera. [6] “Convertens sapientes
retrorsum, et scientiam eorum stultam facie<n>s, suscitans ver-
bum servi sui et consilium nuntiorum suorum complens.

(128)
2. es L: est con. man.

3. combureris: comburetis L.

4. Ex V: Et L.

7. omnes . . . invocant L: omnem, qui invocat V.

(129) man^\ postls. man'-, hand man^{?).
I. 44 L: 43 con. man^.

5. onme L: omnem con. man. redemit V: redimit L.

190 EDI ION AND TRANSLATION

I
 |,281

1
1
]
Isaiah, chapter 43.

[2] But this is what the Lord says, who created you, Jacob,
who formed you, Israel: Fear not, for I have redeemed you and
have called you by your name; you are mine. [3] When you
cross the waters, I will be with you and the floods will not
overwhelm you. When you walk in the fire, you will not be
consumed and the flame will not burn you. For I am the Lord

your God, the Holy One of Israel, your saviour. I gave Egypt as

your propitiation; Ethiopia and Saba in exchange for you. [4]

Because you were honorable in my eyes and glorious, I loved

you and will give men in exchange for you and peoples in

exchange for your soul. [5] Fear not, for I am with you; from
the east I will lead forth your offspring and from the west I will

gather you together. [6] I will say to the north, “Yield,” and to
the south, “Do not hold back; bring my sons from afar and my
daughters from the ends of the earth. [7] All who invoke my
name,” etc.

[129]
[
i] Isaiah, chapter 44

[2] And now listen, Jacob my servant, and Israel, whom I

have chosen. [3] This is what the Lord says, who made you and
formed you from the womb, your helper: Fear not, Jacob my
most just servant, whom I have chosen. [4] I will pour water on
the thirsty land and streams on the dry ground. I will pour my
spirit upon your offspring and my blessing on your lineage, etc.

[5] Ibidem [5] Give praise,O heavens, because the Lord has been mer-
ciful. Rejoice, O ends of the earth; resound with praise, O
mountains, O forests and every tree therein, for the Lord has
redeemed Jacob, and Israel will be glorified. Etc. [6] I am the

Lord who turns back wise men and makes their knowledge
foolish, who supports the word of his servant and fulfills the

bUniON AND IRANSIAIION I9I

 [7] Qui dico Iherusalem: ‘Habitabcris’, et civitatibus lude:
‘Edificabimi<ni>’, et deserta eius suscitabo; [8] qui dico pro-

[9] [hand] fundo: ‘Desolare, et flumina tua arefaciam’;[9] qui dico Ciro: [9] Nota.

‘Pastor meus es et omnem voluntatem meam complebis’; [loj

qui dico Iherusalem: ‘Edificaberis’, et templo: ‘Fundaberis’

[>3o]

[i] Ysaias, capitulo 45.

[2] Hec dicit Dominus christo meo Ciro: “Cuius a<p>-

prehendi dexteram, ut subiiciam ante faciam eius gentes et

dorsa regum vertam et aperiam coram eo ianuas; et porte non

claudentur. [3] Ego ante te ibo et gloriosos terre humiliabo;
portas ereas conteram et vectes ferreos confringam. [4] Et dabo
tibi thesauros absconditos et archana secretorum, ut scias quia
ego Dominus, qui voco nomen tuum, Deus Israel. [5] Propter
servum meum lacob et Israel electum meum, et vocavi te no-
mine tuo; a<s>similavi te, et non cognovisti me. [6] Ego Domi-
nus, et non est amplius; extra me non est Deus. [7] Accinxi te,

et non cognovisti me, ut sciant hi qui ab ortu soils et qui ab

o<c>cidente quoniam absque me non est Deus” et cetera.

7. suscitabo L: scu suscitabo con.

(130)
2. vertam V: vertant L.

3. ereas: hereas L.

7. Accinxi: Asinxi L.

I
9 2 KOITION AND TRANSLATION
 purpose of his messengers. [7] I am the one who says to Jerusa-

lem, “You will be inhabited,” and to the cities ofJudah, “You

will be built”; and I will raise up their ruins. [8] I am the one
who says to the depths, “Be forsaken and I will dry up your
[y] [hand] rivers,” [9I who says to Cyrus, “You are my shepherd and will [9] Note
accomplish all that I wish.”[io] am I the one who says to Jeru-

salem, “You will be rebuilt,” and to the temple, “You will be

established.”

I130I
[i] Isaiah, chapter 45

[
2] The Lord says these things to Cyrus, my anointed one,
whose right hand I have grasped in order to subdue the people
before him and bend the backs of kings, to open doors before
him; and the gates will not be closed. [3] I will go before you
and I will humble the vainglorious; I will break into pieces the

bronze doors and crush the iron bolts. [4] I will give to you
hidden treasures and the riches concealed within the Ark, so
that you may know that I am the Lord who calls your name,
the God of Israel. [5] For the sake of my servant Jacob and my
chosen Israel, I called you by your name. I designated you, and
you did not know me. [6] I am the Lord, and there is no other;

there is no God beside me. [7] I have made you ready, although
you did not know me, so that all people from the rising of the
sun to its setting will know that there is no God other than
me,” etc.

EDITION AND rUANSI. ATION I

9 3
 / rcrso/

[131]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 46.

[2] “Consilium mcum stabit et omnis voluntas mea fiet”. [3]

Vocans ab oriente iustum et de terra longinqua virum volunta-

tis mee; et locutus sum et a<d>ducam illud, creavi et faciam
illud. [4] Audite me, duro corde, qui longe estis a iustitia. [5]

Prope feci iustitiam meam, et non elongabitur; et salus me<a>

non morabitur: dabo in Syon salutem et in Israel gloriam

meam.

[132]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 49.

[2] Audite, insule, et a<t>tendite, populi de longe: Dominus

ab Utero vocavit me, de ventre matris mee recordatus est no-
minis mei; [3] et posuit os meum quasi gladium acutum, in

umbra manus sue protexit me et posuit me sicut sagi<t>tam elec-

tam, in faretra sua abs<c>ondit me et dixit mihi: “Servus mens es
tu, Israel, quia in te glorificabor”. [4] Et ego dixi, et cetera.

[5] Et glorificatus sum in oculis Domini, et Deus mens factus

est fortitudo mea. [6] Et dixit: “Parum est ut sis mihi servus ad
suscitandas tribus lacob et feces Israel convertendas: dedi enim
te in lucem gentium, ut sis salus mea usque ad extremum terre”

et cetera.

[133]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 51.

[2] Audite me, qui sequimini quod iustum est et queritis /jj
recto/ Dominum; a<t>tendite a,d petram, unde excisi estis, et ad

(
131 ) man^
2. omnis V: omnes L.
3. iustum L: avem con. s.l. man'.
4. corde V: cordis L.

5. et non L; non V. elongabitur: alongabitur L.

( 132 ) man^
6. sis mihi V: seis mihi L. dedi L: dedit con. man', enim L: orn. V. te in
add. s.l. man'.

( 133 ) man^

I
9 4 EDITION AND TRANS LA II ON
i«3i|
[i] Isaiah, chapter 46

[2] My counsel shall stand and all my purposes will be ac-

complished. [3] From the east I call the just man, and from a

distant land, a man of my will. I have spoken and I will bring it

about; I have created it and I will do it. [4] Hear me, you stub-
born-hearted, you who are far from righteousness. [5] I have
brought my justice close at hand, and it will not be withdrawn;
my salvation will not be delayed. I will grant my salvation to

Zion and my glory to Israel.

[132]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 49

[2] Listen, you islands; and hear this, you distant peoples.

The Lord me from the womb; from my mother’s belly

called

he has remembered my name. [3] He made my mouth like a

sharp sword; in the shadow of his hand he protected me and
made me like a chosen arrow. He hid me in his quiver and said
to me, “You are my servant, Israel, in whom will be glori- I

fied.” [4] And have said, etc.

I

[5] have been honored in the eyes of the Lord, and my

I

God has become my strength. [6] And he said, “It is not

enough for you to be my servant in restoring the tribes ofjacob
and converting the dregs of Israel; I have given you as a light for

the people, so that you may bring my salvation to the ends of

the earth,” etc.

[H3]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 5

[2] Hear me, you who pursue righteousness and seek the
Lord; consider the rock from which you were cut and the

rnrrioN ano transí at ion 1 y .S

 cavernam laci, de qua precisi estis. (3) A<t>tenditc ad Abraani

patrem vcstrum ct ad Sarram, quc pcperit vos; quia unum

vocavi eum et bcncdixi ci ct multiplicavi cum. [4] Consolabitur
ergo Dominus Syon et cons<ol>abitur omnes ruinas cius; et

ponet desertum cius quasi delitias ct solitudinem eius quasi

<h>ortum Domini. [5] Gaudium et letitia invenietur in ea,
gratiarum actio ct vox laudis. [6] A<t>tendite ad me, popule
meus, et, tribus mea, me audite, quia lex a me exiet, et

iudicium meum in lucem populorum requiescet. [7] Prope cst

iustus meus, egressus est salvator meus, et brachia mea populos

iudicabunt; me insule expectabunt et brachium meum su-

stinebunt. [8] Lévate in celum oculos vestros et videte sub terra

deorsum, quia celi sicut fumus liquescent, et terra sicut ve-

stimentum atteretur, et <h>abitatores eius sicut hec interibunt.

[9] Salus autem mea in sempiternum erit, et iustitia <mea> non

deficiet. [10] Audite me, qui s<c>itis iustum, populus meus, lex
mea in corde eorum; nolite timere obprobrium hominum ct

blasfemias eorum ne metuatis. [i i] Sicut enim vestimentum sic

comedet eos vermis, et sicut lanam sic devorabit eos tinea; salus
autem mea in sempiternum erit, et iustitia mea / verso/ in

generationes generationum. [12] Consurge, consurge, induere

fortitudinem, brachium Domini; consurge sicut in diebus an-
tiquis, in generationibus seculorum. [13] Numquid non tu per-
cu<s>sisti superbum, vulnerasti draconem? [14] Numquid non
tu persi<c>casti mare, aquam abissi vehementis, qui posuisti pro-
fundum maris viam, ut transirent liberad? [15] Et nunc qui re-
dempti sunt a Domino revertentur et venient in Syon lau-
dantes; et letitia sempiterna super capita eorum, gaudium et

letitiam tenebunt; fugiet dolor et gemitus. [16] Ego, ego ipse

consolabor vos. [17] Quis tu, ut timeas ab homine mortali et a
filii<s> hominis, qui quasi femim ita arescet? [18] Et oblitus es

Domini factoris tui, qui tetendit celos et fundavit terram; et

cetera.

2. laci: lacii L.

4. consolabitur omnes V: consabitur omnes L.

5. letitia: letitiam L.

6. popule V: populus L.

8. liquescent: liquiescent L. sicut hec L: sicut et hec corr. man.

9. iustitia mea V: iustitia L.

12. Consurge, Consurge: Cumsurge, Cumsurge L.

I
9 6 KDITION AND TRANSLATION
grotto from which you were hewn. Consider Abraham your
father and Sarah, who bore you; for I called him when he was
but one and blessed him and caused him to multiply. [4] For the
Lord will comfort Zion and he will comfort her ruins. He will

make her desert into an oasis and her wilderness into the garden
of the Lord. [5] Joy and gladness will be found in her, the giving

of thanks and the voice of praise. [6] Listen to me, my people,

and hear me, my nation, for the law will go out from me; and
my justice will be reestablished in the light of the people. [7]

My just one is near; my saviour has gone out. My arms will

judge the peoples; the islands will await me and will welcome
my force. [8] Lift your eyes to the heavens and look down to

the earth, for the heavens will vanish like smoke and the earth
will wear out like a garment. Its inhabitants will die accord-

ingly. [9] My my justice will not

salvation will be eternal, and
weaken. [10] Hear me, you who know what is just, my people,
my law in your heart. Do not fear the opprobrium of men nor
be dismayed at their blasphemy. [11] For the moth will eat

them like a garment, and the worm will devour them like
wool. My salvation is eternal, and my justice will last from gen-
eration to generation. [12] Arise, arise, take strength, arm of the
Lord; arise as in days gone by, in the generations of long ago.

[13]Was it who pounded the arrogant one, who

not you
wounded the dragon? [14J Was it not you who dried up the

sea, the waters of the great deep, who created a road in the
depths of the sea, so that the liberated might cross over? [15]

And now those who have been redeemed by the Lord will turn
back and will come to Zion singing praise. Eternal joy will be
upon their heads; they will have gladness and joy. Sorrow and
sighing will disappear. [i6] I, I myself will comfort you. [17]

Who are you to fear mortal man and the sons of man, who will
wither like grass? [18] You have forgotten the Lord your
maker, who laid out the heavens and established the earth, etc.

hDITION AND TRANSI A riON I

y 7
 [19I l^osui verba mea in ore tuo et in umbra manus mee
protexi te, ut plantes celos et fundes terrain et dicas ad Syon;

“Populus metis es tu”. [20] Elevare, elevare, consurge, Iherusa-

lem, que bibisti de manu Domini calicem iré eius; usque ad
fundum calicis soporis bibisti et potasti usque ad feces. [2 1 ]
Non
est qui sustentet earn ex omnibus filiis, quos genuit; et non est

qui a<p>prehendat manum eius ex omnibus filiis, quos enutrivit.

Et cetera.

(22] “Ecce tuli de manu tua calicem soporis, fundum calicis

indignationis mee; non adiicies, ut /j4 recto/ bibas ilium ultra.

[23] Et ponam ilium in manu eorum qui te humiliaverunt” et

cetera.

I' 34 l

[i] Ysaias, capitulo 52°.

[2] Consurge, consurge, induere fortitudine tua, Syon; in-

duere vestimentis glorie tue, Iherusalem, civitas sancta, quia

non adiiciet ultra, ut pertranseat per te incircumeisus et inmun-

dus. [3] Excutere de pulvere, consurge, sede, Iherusalem; solve

vincula colli tui, captiva filia Syon. [4] Quia hec dicit Dominus:
“Gratis venundati estis et sine argento redimemini”. Et cetera.

[5] Quam pulcri super montes pedes a<n>nuntia<n>tis et

predica<n>tis pacem, a<n>nuntia<n>tis bonum, predica<n>tis salu-

tem, dicentis Syon: “Regnabit Deus tuus!”. [6] Vox speculato-

rum tuorum: levaverunt voceni, simul laudabunt, quia oculo
ad oculum videbunt, cum converterit Dominus Syon. [7] Cán-
dete et laúdate simul, deserta Iherusalem, quia consolatus est

[8] Nota. Dominus populum suum, redemit Hierusalem.[8] Paravit Do-

minus brachium sanctum suum in oculis omnium gentium; et

videbunt omnes fines terre salutare Dei nostri. [9] Recedite,

recedite, exite inde, pollutum nolite tangere; exite de medio
eius, mundamini, qui fertis vasa Domini. [10] Qu<on>i<am> non
in tumultu exibitis, nec in fuga properabitis; precedet enim vos

19. protexi: protexit L.

(134) man^; postl. man'.
2. sancta L: sancti V. incircumeisus L: in incircumeisus corr. man. et add.
s.l. man'.

3. Excutere: Escuttere L.

5. Regnabit: Kagnabit L.

10 . Quoniam V: Qui L.

I
y 8 KDITION AND I R A N S I. AT I ON
 1 19] I my words in your mouth and protected you m the
placed
shadow of my hand, so that you would form the heavens and
establish the earth and say to Zion, “You are my people.” [20]

Arise, arise, stand up, Jerusalem, you who have drunk from the

hand of the Lord the cup of his wrath; you who have drunk to
the bottom of the cup of apathy and have even drained the
dregs. [21] Of all the sons she bore there is none to guide her;

and from all the sons that were reared, there was none to take

her by the hand. Etc. [22] Behold, I have taken from your hand
the cup of apathy, the depths of the cup of my indignation; you
will no longer drink from it. [23] I will place it in the hands of
those who have humbled you,” etc.

[134]

[
I
]
Isaiah, chapter 52

[2] Arise, arise, clothe yourself with your strength, Zion; put
on your garments of glory, Jerusalem, holy city, for the uncir-

cumcised and the unclean will not pass through you again. [3]

Shake off your dust, get up, seat yourself, Jerusalem; undo the

chains around your neck, captive daughter of Zion. [4] For this

is what the Lord says: You were sold for nothing and you will

be redeemed without money. Etc. [5] How beautiful upon the

mountains are the who makes known and an-

feet of the one
nounces peace, who makes known the good and announces
salvation, saying to Zion, “Your God will reign!” [6] The

voice of your watchmen: they have raised their voices, likewise

they will give praise, for they will see eye to eye when the Lord

has converted Zion, [yj Rejoice and give praise at the same
time, desert of Jerusalem, for the Lord has comforted his peo-

[8] Note ple; he has redeemed Jerusalem. [8] The Lord has made ready
his holy arm before the eyes of all the people; all the ends of the

earth will see the salvation of our God. [9] Withdraw, with-
draw, leave this place; do not touch an unclean thing. Go out
from the midst of her; cleanse yourselves, you who bear the
' vessels of the Lord. [10] For you will not go out in confusion,

KDITION AND TKAN S 1 AT 1 () N 1

y y
 Dominus, et congregabit vos Deus Israel, [ii] Ecce intelliget

/ ^ verso/ servus meus; cxaltabitur et elevabitur et sublimis erit

valde. [
12] Sic<ut> opstupuerunt super te multi, sic inglorius erit

inter viros aspectus eius et forma eius inter filios hominum. [13]

Iste asperget gentes multas. [14] Super ipsum continebunt reges

os suum, quia, quibus non est narratum, de eo viderunt et, qui

non audierunt, contemplati sunt.

[135]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 57°.

[2] Et omnes eos auferet ventus, toilet aura. [3] Qui autem
fiduciam habet mei hereditabit terram et possidebit montem
sanctum meum.

[13b]

[i] Ysaias, capituio 59°.

[2] Insulis vicem re<d>det. [3] Et timebunt qui a<b> Oc-

cidente, nomen Domini, et qui ab ortu solis, gloriam eius, cum
venerit quasi fluvius violentus, quern spiritus Domini cogit. [4]

Et venerit Syon redemptor, et cetera.

[í37]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 60.

[2] [double [2] Surge, illuniinare, Iherusalem, quia venit lumen tuum, et
cross] [hand]
gloria Domini super te orta est. [3] Quia ecce tenebre operie<n>t

terram et caligo populos; super te autem orietur Dominus, et

gloria eius in te videbitur. [4] Et ambulabunt gentes in lumine

tuo, et reges in splendore ortus tui. [5] Leva in circuitu oculos
tuos et vide; omnes isti congregad sunt, venerunt tibi; filii tui

de longe venient, Qy recto/ et filie tue de latere surgent. [6]

Tunc videbis et afflues, et mirabitur et dilatabitur cor tuum,

quando conversa fuerit ad te multitudo maris, fortitudo gen-

12. Sicut V: Sic L.

(135) man^
(136) man^
1. 59® L; 61° corr. mati^.

2. vicem V\ dicens L.

3. fluvius L: fluvis corr. man^.

(137) man^\ cross hand matP{l); post). man^(?).

4. ambulabunt: ambulambunt L.
6. multitudo maris V: fortitudo mans L.

200 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 nor move quickly in flight; the Lord will precede you, and the
God of Israel will gather you together, [i i] Behold, my servant
will understand. He will be exalted and elevated; he will

achieve great heights. 12] Just as many were astonished at you,

[

so will his appearance be inglorious among men and his form

among the sons of men. [13] This one will touch many people.
[14] Kings will be closemouthed about him, for they have seen
what has not been told them and they have understood what
they have not heard.

[135]

[1] Isaiah, chapter 57

[2] And the wind will carry off all of them; a breath will
blow them away. [3] Whosoever has faith in me will inherit the

earth and will possess my holy mountain.

I
>36]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 59

[2] He will make amends to the islands. [3] The ones from
the west will fear the name of the Lord and the ones from the

rising of the sun, his glory, for he will come like a rushing river
compelled by the Lord’s strength. [4] He will come as redeemer
to Zion, etc.

[137]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 60

[z] [double [2] Arise, shine, Jerusalem, for your light is coming, and the
cross] [hand]
glory of the Lord has risen upon you. [3] For behold, darkness
will cover the earth and obscurity the people; but the Lord will
rise over you, and his glory will be seen upon you. [4] The
people will walk in your light, and the kings in the splendor of
your rising. [5] Lift your eyes and look about you. All these
have gathered together; they have come to you. Your sons will

come from afar, and your daughters will arise from the flanks.
*
[6] Then you will see and hasten, and your heart will marvel

EDITION AND TRANSI A TION 2 O I

 tium vencrit tibi; [7] inundatio camcllorum opcriet te, (7] Aquí es

Colocuti.
dromcdarii Madiam ct Epha; omncs de Sabba vcnient, aurum
ct thus deferentes et laudem Domino a<n>nuntiantes. [8] Omne
pecus Cedar congregabitur tibi, arietes Nabaiot ministrabunt
tibi; offerentur super placabili altari meo, et domum maiestatis

mee glorificabo. [9] Qui sunt isti, qui ut nubes volant et quasi

columbe ad fenestras suas? [10] Me enim insule expectant, et

naves maris in principio, ut a<d>ducam filios tuos de longe, ar-

gentum eorum et aurum cum eis, nomini Domini Dei tui et

Sancto Israel, quia glorificavit te. [i i] Et edificabunt filii pere-

grinorum muros tuos, et reges eorum ministrabunt tibi; in in-

dignatione enim mea percu<s>si te, et in reconciliatione mea

misertus sum tui. [12] Et aperientur porte tue iugiter, die ac
nocte non cl<a>udentur, ut afferatur ad te fortitudo gentium, et

reges earum a<d>ducantur. [13] Gens enim et regnum, quod

non servierit tibi, peribit, et gente<s> solitudine vastabuntur.

[14] Gloria Libani ad te veniet, abies et buxus et pinus simul, ad

ornandum locum sanctificationis mee; et locum pedum meo-
rum glorificabo. [15] Et venient ad te curvi filii eorum, qui
humiliaverunt te, et /j5 perso/ adorabunt vestigia pedum tuo-
rum omnes, qui detrahebant tibi, et vocabunt te Civitatem
Domini, Syon Sancti Israel. [16] Pro eo quod fuisti derelicta et

odio habita, et non erat qui per te transiret, ponam te in super-

biam seculorum, gaudium in generatione<m> et generationem;

[17] et suges lac gentium et mamilla regum lactaberis et scies

quia ego Dominus salvans te, et redempto<r> tuus fortis lacob.

[
1
8] Pro ere afferam aurum et pro ferro alTeram argentum et pro
lignis es et pro lapidibus ferrum; et ponam visitationem tuam
pacem et prepósitos tuos iustitiam. [19] Non audietur ultra
iniquitas in terra tua, vastitas et cont<r>icio in terminis tuis; et

o<c>cupabit Salus muros tuos et portas tuas Laudado. [20] Non

erit tibi amplius sol ad lucendum per diem, nec splendor lune
illuminabit te, sed erit tibi Dominus in lucem sempiterna<m>, et

Deus tuus in gloriam tuam. [21] Non occidet ultra sol tuus, et

7. inundatio: innundatio L.

8. placabili: platabili L.
11. reconciliatione: reconsiliatione L. mea V: tua L.

12. earum V: eorum L.

14. abies: habies L.

16. eo add. s.l. man. ponam V: ponant L. in generationem V\ in genera-
tione L.

202 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 and swell with joy when the strength of the sea has turned to

you, when the power of the people has come to you. [7] A I7] Here is

multitude ot camels will cover your land, dromedaries from Colocuti.

Midian and Ephah; all those from Sheba will come, bringing
gold and frankincense and proclaiming the glory of the Lord.

[8] All the flocks of Kedar will be gathered to you; the rams of
Nebaioth will serve you. They will be oflered on my altar of
expiation, and I will glorify the house of my majesty. [9] Who
are these, who like clouds and doves fly toward your windows?
[10] For the islands await me, the ships of the sea first, so that I

may bring your sons from afar, their silver and gold with them,
in the name of the Lord, your God, the Holy One of Israel,

because he has glorified you. [ii] The sons of strangers will

erect your walls, and their kings will minister to you, for in my
indignation I struck you and in my reconciliation I have had
mercy on you. [12] And your gates will be permanently open;
day and night they will not be closed so that the power of the
people may be brought to you and their kings be drawn to-
gether. [13] The nation and the kingdom that will not serve

you will perish, and the peoples will be laid to waste in destitu-
tion. [14] The glory of Lebanon will come to you, the fir, the

boxwood, and the pine, to beautify my temple; and I will glo-

rify the place of my feet. [15] The sons of the ones who hum-
bled you will come, bending low to you; and all who dis-

paraged you will worship the traces of your feet and will call

you the city of the Lord, Zion of the Holy One of Israel. [16]

Although you have been forsaken and hated, with no one pass-

ing through, I will make you majestic forever, a joy throughout

the ages. [17] You will suck the milk of the people and be
nursed at the breasts of kings; and you will know that I, the

Lord, am your saviour and your redemptor, the mighty one of

Jacob. [18] Instead of bronze I will bring gold and instead of

iron I will bring silver; instead of wood, bronze, and instead of
stones, iron. I will make peace your governor and justice your
•
ruler. [19] Injustice will no longer be heard in your land, nor
devastation and grief within your borders; salvation will occupy
your walls and praise, your gates. [20] The sun will no longer be
your light by day, nor will the brilliance of the moon illuminate

you; but the Lord will be your eternal light and your God your
glory. [2 1 ]
Your sun will not set again, and your moon will not

KDITION AND TRANSI A 1 ION 2 O 3

 luna tua non minuetur, quia Oominus erit tibi in lucem sempi-
ternam, et complebuntur dies luctus tui. [22] Populus autem
tuus omncs iusti; in perpetuum <h>ereditabunt terra<m>, germen
plantationis mee, opus manus mee ad glorificandum. [23]

Minimus erit in mille, et parvulus in gentem fortissimam. [24]

Ego Dominus in tempore eius súbito faciam istud.

23. erit in L: ent ille con. iti ras. man^.

204 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

wane, for the Lord will be your eternal light and the days of
your sorrow will be ended. [22] All of your people will be
righteous; they will possess the land forever; they are seedlings

I have planted, the work of my hands for my glorification. [23]

The smallest one will become a thousand; the least, the most

powerful nation. [24] I am the Lord; when the time comes, I

will do this swiftly.

EDITION AND TRAN S L A E I ON 2 O 5

 j

/?6 recto/

í' 38 ]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 62°.

[2] Propter Syon non tacebo et propter lerusalem non

quiescam, doñee egrediatur ut splendor iustus eius, et salvator

eius ut lampas accendatur. [3] Et videbunt <gentes> iusturn

tuum, et cuncti reges inclitum tuum; et vocabitur tibí nomen
novum, quod os Domini nominavit. [4] Et eris corona^glorie in

manu Domini et diadema regni in manu Dei tui. [5] Non voca-
beris ultra Derelicta, et terra tua non vocabitur amplius
Desolata; sed vocaberis Voluntas mea in ea, et terra tua In-

habitata, quia co<m>placuit Domino in te, et terra tua in-

habitabitur. [6] Habitabit enim iuvenis cum virgine, et habita-

bunt in te filii tui; et gaudebit sponsus super sponsam, et

gaudebit super te Deus tuus. [7] Super muros tuos Iherusalem
constitui custodes; tota die et tota nocte, in perpetuum non
tacebunt. [8] Qui remi<ni>scimini Domini, ne taceatis et ne
detis silentium ei, doñee stabiliat et doñee ponat Iherusalem in

terra. [9] luravit Dominus in dextera sua et brachio fortitudinis

sue: “Si dedero triticum tuum ultra cibum inimicis tuis, et si

biberint filii alieni vinum tuum, in quo laborasti. [10] Quia, qui
congregabunt illud, ecc<e> edent et laudabunt Dominum; et,

qui comportant, illud bibent in atriis sanctis meis. [i i] Transite,

transite per portas, prepárate viam populo. Planum facite iter et

eligite lapides et elevate signum ad populos”. [12] Ecce Domi-

nus / 6 verso/ auditum fecit in extremis terre: “Dicite filie

Syon: Ecce salvator tuus venit, ecce merces eius cum eo et opus
eius coram illo. [13] Et vocabunt eos Populus sanctus, Re-
dempti a Domino; tu autem vocaberis Quesita, Civitas et non
derelicta”.

(13S) mati^

3. videbunt gentes V: videbunt L. cuncti reges L: cunecti eius reges con.

man.
9. tuis L: suis tuis con. man.
10. ecce edent: eccedent L, ecce comedent V.

11. facite: ficite L.

13. Quesita: Quisitas L.

206 FDITION AND TRANSLATION

1>3H|

[
I
]
Isaiah, chapter 62

[2] For Zion’s sake I will not keep silent, and for Jerusalem’s

sake I will not rest until her justice shines out in splendor, her
salvation like blazing lamps. [3] The peoples will see your jus-
tice, and all the kings, your glory. You will be called by a new
name, which the mouth of the Lord will annouce. (4] And you
will be a crown of glory in the hand of the Lord and a royal

diadem in the hand of your God. [5] You will no longer be

called Forsaken, nor will your land be called Desolate; but you
will be called My Desire is in Ffer, and your land. Inhabited, for

the Lord delights in you and your land will be populated. [6] As
the young man dwells with the virgin, so your children will

dwell with you; and as the bridegroom rejoices over his bride,

so will your God rejoice over you. [7] I have placed watchmen
on your walls, Jerusalem; they will never be silent, day or night.

[8] You who remember the Lord, do not be silent and do not
give him rest until he establishes and places Jerusalem on earth.

(9] The Lord has sworn by his right hand and by the arm of his
strength: Never will I give your wheat as food to your enemies

nor will the sons of foreigners drink your wine for which have
you labored. [10] who harvest the wheat will eat it
For those
and praise the Lord; and those who gather the grapes will drink
the wine in my sanctified courts, [i i] Go through, go through
the gates; prepare the way for the people. Make the road clear

and put the stones aside; raise the banner for the nations. [12]

Behold, the Lord has proclaimed to the ends of the earth: Say to
the daughter of Zion, “Behold, your saviour is coming; be-
hold, his reward is with him and his achievement before him.’’
[13] And they will call them the holy people, redeemed by the
Lord; you will be called Sought After, a city not forsaken.

hOlTION AND TRANSI A I ION 207

 I1391
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 63°.

[2] Quis est iste, qui vcnit de Edom, tinctis vestibus de

Bosra? Istc formosus in stola sua, gradiens in multitudine for-
titudinis sue. Et cetera.

[140]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 65.

[2] Quesierunt me, qui ante non inte<r>rogabant, in-

venerunt, qui non quesierunt me. [3] Dixi: “Ecce ego, ecc<e>
ego!” a<d> gentem, que nesciebat me et que non invocabat
nomen meum. [4] Expandi manus meas tota die ad populum
incredulum, qui graditur in via non bona post cogitationes suas;

populus,
[5] [7] qui ad iracundiam provocat me ante faciem meam
semper, qu<i> immola<n>t in <h>ortis et sacrificant super lat<er>es,

qui habitant in sepulcris et in delubris idolorum dormiunt, qui

comedunt carnem sui<l>lam et ius prophanum in vasis eorum,
[6] <qui dicunt>: “Recede a me! Non a<p>propinques mihi, quia

inmundus es”. Et cetera.

Quia oblivioni tradite sunt angustie priores 737 recto/ et

quia abscondite sunt ab oculis nostris. [8] Ecce enim creo celos
novos et terram novam, et non erunt in memoria priora et non
ascendent super cor. [9] Sed gaudebitis et exultabitis usque in

sempiternum in his, que ego creo, quia ecce ego creo Iherusa-
lem exultationem et populum eius gaudium. [10] Et exultabo
in Iherusalem et gaudebo in populo meo, et non audietur in ea

ultra vox fletus et vox clamoris. [i i] Non erit ibi amplius infans
dierum et senex, qui non inpleat dies suos. [12] Quoniam puer
centum annorum morietur; et peccator centum annorum
maledictus erit. [13] Et ediftcabunt domos et habitabunt et
plantabunt vineas et comedent fructus earum. [14] Non edi-

(
139 ) man^
2. fortitudinis V\ fortitudine L.

(
140 ) mati^
3. ego . . . gentem V: go agentem L.

4. cogitationes L: g cogitationes con. man', suas L: tuas con. man.

5. qui immolant V: quimmolat L. lateres V: lates L.

6. qui . . . Recede V: Recede L. appropinques V: apropmqua L.

7. priores; prions L.

10. fletus V: feletus L.

12. peccator: pencatoro L.

208 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[139]

[ 1 ]
Isaiah, chapter 63

[2] Who who comes from Edom, wearing dyed gar-

is this,

ments from Bozrah? He who is handsome in his gown, march-

ing in the greatness of his strength. Etc.

[140]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 65

[2] The ones who did not ask for me before have searched
for me; they who did not seek me have found me. [3] I said,

“Behold me, behold me!’’ to the people who did not know
me, who did not call my name. [4] During the whole day I

extended my hands to an unbelieving people traveling an false

road of their own choosing; [5] to a people who endlessly pro-

voke me to anger, who make burnt offerings in gardens and

sacrifice on brick altars, who live in sepulchres and sleep in the

temples of idols, who eat swine’s flesh and unclean broth in

their receptacles; [6] who say, “Go away from me! Do not

come near me, for you are unclean.’’ Etc.

[7] For the former anguish is forgotten and hidden from our
eyes. [8] Behold, I am creating new heavens and anew earth;
the former things will not be remembered and will not come to
mind. [9] You will be glad and rejoice forever in the things
which I create, for behold, I create Jerusalem to be a delight and
her people a joy. [10] I will rejoice in Jerusalem and delight in
my people; the sound of weeping will no longer be heard
within her, nor the cry of distress, [i i] Neither the infant who
lives only a few days nor the old man who fails to live out his

days will exist, [12] for the child will die at the age of one

hundred and the hundred-year-old sinner will be accursed. [13]

They will build houses and live in them and plant vineyards and

eat the fruit. [14] They will not build and another inhabit; they

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 209

 ñcabunt, et alius habitabit, non plantabunt, et alius comedet:
secundum enim dies ligni erunt dies populi mei, et opera
manuum eorum inveterabunt. [
15 I
Electi mei non laborabunt
frustra ñeque generabunt in conturbatione, quia semen bene-
dictorum <Domini> est, et nepotes <eorum> cum eis. Eritque:

antequam clament, ego exaudiam. Et cetera.

[141]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 66.
\

[
2] Ego autem opera eorum et cogitationes eorum venio, ut

congregem cum omnibus gentibus et linguis; et venient et

videbunt gloriam meam. [ 3 ]

Et ponam / verso/ in eis signum
et mittam ex eis, qui salvad fuerint, ad gentes in mare, in
Africam, in Lydiam, tenentes sagittam, in Italian! et Grecian!,

ad insulas longe, ad eos, qui non audierunt de me et <non> vide-

runt glorian! meam, et annuntiabunt gloriam meam gentibus;

l4l et adducent omnes fratres vestros de cunctis gentibus

donum Domino, in equis et in quadrigis et in lecticis et in mulis

et in carrucis,montem sanctum meum Iherusalem, dicit

ad
Dominus: quomodo si inferant filii Israel munus in vase mundo
<in> domum Domini. [ 5] Et assumam ex eis in sacerdotes et
Levitas, dicit Dominus. 6 Quia [ ]
sicut celi novi et terra nova,
que ego fació stare coram me, dicit dominus Deus, sic stabit

semen vestrum et nomen vestrum. [ 7 ] Et erit: mensis ex mense,

sabbatum ex sabbato veniet omnis caro, ut adoret coram facie

mea, dicit Dominus. [

8] Et egredientur e<t> videbunt cadavera
virorum, qui prevaricad sunt in me; vermis eorum non morie-
tur, et ignis eorum non extinguetur, et erunt usque ad satieta-
tem visionis omni carni.

15. Domini est 1^: est L. eorum cum V: cum L.

(141) man^
3. et non viderunt V: et viderunt L.

4. in domum V\ domum L.

5. assumam: assummam L.

6. Quia V: Quasi L.
7. mea V: meam L.

2 I o EDITION AND TKAN S I. AT I ON

will not plant and another eat. The days of my people will be
like the days of a tree, and the works of their hands will endure.

[15) My chosen ones will not labor in vain nor bring forth
children in disquietude, for they are the seed of the blessed
Lord and their posterity with them. And it will happen that

before they call, I will answer. Etc.

[141]
[
i] Isaiah, chapter 66

[2] I come to bring together their works and their thoughts

with all peoples and tongues; and they will come and see my
glory. (3] I will place a sign among them; and I will send some
who have been saved to the peoples of the sea, to Africa and
Lydia, to the oneswho draw the bow; to the distant islands, to
those who have not heard me and have not seen my glory.
They will declare my glory to the peoples. [4] They will bring
all your brothers from all the peoples to the house of the Lord,

on horseback, in chariots, in litters, on muleback, and in

coaches to my holy mountain of Jerusalem, says the Lord, just

as the Israelites bring a gift in a clean container into the house of

the Lord. [5] And I will accept some of them as priests and
Levites, says the Lord. [6] For like the new heaven and new
earth, which I make to endure before me, says the lord God, so

will your seed and your name endure. [7] And it will happen
that from month to month, from sabbath to sabbath, all human
flesh will come to worship before me, says the Lord. [S] And

they will go out and see the dead bodies of the men who have
persecuted me. Their worm will not die nor will their funeral
pyre burn out; they will forever be a loathsome sight to all of
humanity.

F mT I O N ANO I RA N S 1 A I I ON 2 I I
 }

[142]
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 2°.

[3] 2 Transite ad insulas Cethin et videte et in Cedar mittite et

[

considerate vehementer et videte, si factum est huiuscemodi:

si mutavit gens deos suos, et certe ipsi non sunt dii.

( 142 ) man^
Cethin: (^ethin L. videte ... in L; videte si fatum est et in con. man^. Ce-
dar: Qedar L. videte, si L: videte, et recordare si con. matP. certe: <;:erte L.

2 I 2 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[
142 ]
[i] Jeremiah, chapter 2

[2] Go across to the islands of Kittim and look around; send

to Kedar and observe carefully. See if something like this has

happened: [3] a people has taken different gods, who are cer-

tainly false.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 2 1

3
 /jS recto/

l' 43 l

[i] Hieremias, capitulo 3°.

[2] Convertimini, filii, revertentes, dicit Dominus, quia ego

vir vester; et assumam vos unum de civitate et duos de cogna-
tione et introducam vos in Syon; [3) et dabo vobis pastores
iuxta cor meum, et pascent vos scientia et doctrina. [4]
V
Cumque multiplicad fuerit<is> et creveritis in terra in diebus
illis, ait Dominus, non dice<n>t ultra: “Archa testamenti
Domini”, ñeque ascendet super cor, ñeque recordabuntur il-

lius, nec visitabitur, nec fiet ultra. [5] In tempore illo vocabunt
Iherusalem Solium Domini, et congregabuntur ad earn omnes
gentes in nomine Domini in Iherusalem; et non ambulabunt
post pravitatem cordis sui pessimi. In diebus illis ibit domus
luda ad domum Israel, et cetera.

[• 44 ]
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 4°.

[2] A<n>nuntiate in luda et in Iherusalem auditum facite;

loquimini et canite tuba in terra, clamate fortiter et dicite:

“Congreg<a>mini, et ingrediamur civitates munitas”. [3] Levate
signum in Syon, et cetera.

[4] Ecce auditum est in Iherusalem: “Custodes venire de

terra longinqua et dare super civitates luda vocem suam;” et

cetera.

(
143 )
2. assumam: assummam L.

3. scientia: scientio L.
4. fiieritis V: fuent L. creveritis L: crevent corr. dicent V: dicet
L. ascendet V: ascendit L.

( 144 ) ntatt^

2. ingrediamur V: egrediamur L.

2 I
4 Horn ON AND TRANSI. A TION
l«43]

[
I
]
Jeremiah, chapter 3

[2] Return, O children, go back, says the Lord, tor I am

your husband. I will take you, one from the city and two from
the family, and bring you to Zion; [3] and I will give you shep-
herds after my own heart who will cultivate you with knowl-
edge and education. [4] In those days, when you have multi-
plied and increased on the face of the earth, says the Lord, no
one will ever again say, “Ark of the Covenant of the Lord.” It

will never come to mind not will they remember it; it will not
be seen nor made again. [5] At that time they will call Jerusalem
the throne of the Lord, and all the people will be will gathered

together there in Jerusalem because of the Lord; and they will

not follow the inner tendencies of their most evil hearts. In

those days the house of Judah will join the house of Israel, etc.

[»44]

[ 1 J
Jeremiah, chapter 4

[2] Announce it in Judah and make it known in Jerusalem;

speak and make the trumpet sound in the land. Shout and say,

“Gather together, and let us enter the fortified cities.” [3] Raise

the banner in Zion, etc.

[4] Behold, this has been heard in Jerusalem, “Guardians are

coming from a distant land, and they will raise their voices

against the cities of Judah.” Etc.

EDITION AND TRANSI A riON 2 I

5
 (• 45 l

[i] Hicrcmias, capitulo lo.

[2] Argentum involutum de Tarsis afTertur, et aurum de /

verso/ Ophyr, opus artificis et manus erarii, hiacintus et purpura

indumentum eorum.

I1461
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 16°,

[2] Propterea ecce dies veniunt, dicit Dominus, et non dice-

tur ultra: “Vivit Dominus, qui eduxit filios Israel de terra

Egypti!”, [3] sed: “Vivit Dominus, qui eduxit filios Israel de

terra aquilonis et de universis terris” et cetera.

[4] Ad te gentes venient ab extremis terre.

[47]
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 23°.

[2] Non formidabunt ultra et non pavebunt, et nullus quere-

tur ex numero, dicit Dominus. [3] Ecce dies veniunt, dicit Do-
minus, et suscitabo David germen iustum; et regnabit rex et

sapiens erit et faciet indicium et iustitiam in terra. [4] In diebus

illis salvabitur luda, et Israel habitabit conñdenter; et hoc est

nomen, quod vocabunt eum: Dominus iustus noster. [5]

Propter hoc ecce dies veniunt, dicit Dominus, et non dicent

ultra: “Vivit Dominus, qui eduxit filios Israel de terra Egypti!”,

[6] sed: “Vivit Dominus, qui eduxit et adduxit semen domus

Israel de terra aquilonis et de cunctis terris!, ad quas eieceram
eos illuc; et habitabunt in terra sua”. Et cetera.

[7] Numquid non celum et terram ego impleo? dicit Domi-

nus.

(145) man^-
2. Ophyr L: Ofa del. rnatt^, Ophaz con. s.l. matt', artificis: artificiis L. hia-
cintus: ihancintus con. man^.

(146) man^
2. veniunt V\ vement L.

(147) mati^
6. terra sua V: terram suam L.
7. non V\ nunc L.

2 I 6 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[ 145 ]

[ijjeremiah, chapter lo

[2] Silver in ingots will be brought from Tarshish, and gold

from Ophir, the work of the artisan, the handicraft of the cop-
persmith, covered with violet and purple.

[146]
[ijjeremiah, chapter 16

[2] Therefore behold, the days will come, says the Lord,
when it will no longer be said, “The Lord lives, who led the

children of Israel out of the land of Egypt,” [3] but, “The Lord
lives, who led the children of Israel out of the land of the north
and out of all the lands,” etc. [4] The people will come to you
from the ends of the earth.

[147]

[1] Jeremiah, chapter 23

[2] They will fear no more and they will not tremble, and no
one from among their number will be searched for, says the

Lord. [3] Behold, the days are coming, says the Lord, when I

will raise up David as a just offspring; and the king will reign

and be wise and will bring about equity and justice on earth. [4]

In those days Judah will be saved, and Israel will live without
fear; and this is the name that they will call him: the Lord, our
Just One. [5] Therefore behold, the days are coming, says the
Lord, and they will no longer say, “The Lord lives, who led the

children of Israel out of the land of Egypt” [6] but, “The Lord
lives, who led out and brought here the seed of the house of
Israel from the land of the north and from all the lands from

which I had cast them forth; and they will live in their own
land.” Etc.

[7] Am I not filling heaven and earth? says the Lord.

EDITION AND TKANSLATION 2 I

7
 /j9 recto/

lH»\
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 30°.

[2] Et crit; in die ilia, ait Doniinus excrcit<u>um, co<n>tcram

iugum eius de eolio tuo ct vincula eius dirumpam; et non
dominabuntur ei amplius alieni, [3] sed servient Domino Deo
suo et David regi suo, quern suscitabo eis. [4] Tu ergo ne

timeas, serve meus lacob, ait Dominus, ñeque paveas, Israel,

quia ecce ego salvabo te de terra longinqua et semen tuum de

terra captivitatis eorum et cetera.

[149]
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 31°.

[2] “Surgite, ct ascendamus in Syon ad Dominum Deum

nostrum”. [3] Quia hec dicit Dominus: Exultate in leticia,

lacob, et hi<n>nite contra caput gentium; personate et canite et

dicite: “Salva, Domine, populum tuum, reliquias Israel”. [4]

Ecce ego a<d>ducam eos de terra aquilonis et congregabo cos ab

extremis terre; et cetera.

[5] In fletu venient, et in misericordia reducam eos et ad-

ducam eos per torrentes aquarum in via recta et cetera.

[6] Audite verbum Domini, gentes, et annuntiate in insulis,

que procul sunt, et dicite: “Qui dispersit Israel, congregabit

eum et custodiet cum sicut pastor gregem suum”. [7] Redemit

enim Dominus lacob et liberavit eum de manu potentioris. [8]

Et venient et laudabunt in monte Syon ct cetera.

[150]
[i] Hieremias, capitulo 33°.
I

[2] Ecce dies veniunt, dicit Dominus, et suscitabo / jg verso/

verbum bonum, quod locutus sum ad domum Israel et ad

(
148 ) man^
4. ego add. s.l. man'.

(
149 ) man^
5. adducam V: educam L
7. Redemit: Keddimet L. liberavit V\ liberabit L.

(
150 ) man^
2. veniunt V: venient L.

2 I S EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[14H]

[i] Jeremiah, chapter 30

[2] And it will happen on that day, says the Lord of hosts,

that I will wrest their yoke from your neck and I will break
their chains; and strangers will no longer rule over him, [3] but

will serve the Lord, their God, and David, their king, whom 1

will raise up for them. [4] Therefore fear not, my servant Jacob,
says the Lord, nor feel terror, Israel, for behold I will rescue you
from a distant land and your descendants from the land of their
captivity, etc.

[149]

[
I
]
Jeremiah, chapter 3 i

[2] Rise, let us go up to Zion to the Lord, our God. [3] For
this is what the Lord says: Exult in gladness, Jacob, and rejoice
before the leader of the people; shout and sing and say, “Lord,
save your people, the residuum of Israel.” [4] Behold, I will

lead them from the northern land and 1 will gather them from
the ends of the earth, etc.

[5] They will come in tears, and 1 will escort them with
compassion and guide them to the right path through torrents
of water, etc.

[6] Hear the word of the Lord, all you people, and announce
it in the distant islands, saying: “He who dispersed Israel will

assemble it and will watch over it just as the shepherd watches

over his flock.” [7] For the Lord will redeem Jacob and free
him from stronger hands. [8] And they will come and give

praise on Mount Zion, etc.

[150]
[i] Jeremiah, chapter 33

[2] Behold, the days are coming, says the Lord, when 1 will

make good the word which 1 gave to the house of Israel and to

KDITION AND IRANSIATION 2 I

9
 1

domum luda. [3] In diebus illis et in tempore illo germinare

faciam David germen iustitie, et faciet te iudic<i>um et iustitiam

m terra. [4] In diebus illis salvabitur luda, et Israel habitabit

confidenter; et hoc est nomen, quod vocabunt eum: Doniinus

lustus noster. Et cetera.

[5] Et factum est verbum Domini ad leremiam dicens: [6]

“Hec dicit Dominus: Si irritum potest fieri pactum meum cum

die et pactum meum cum nocte, ut non sit dies et nox in tem-
pore suo, [7] et pactum meum irritum esse poterit cum David

servo meo, ut non sit ex eo filius, qui regnet in trono eius, et

levite et sacerdotes ministri mei. [8] Sicut enumeran non po<s>-

sunt stelle celi et metiri arene maris, sic multiplicabo semen

David servi mei et levitas ministros meos”. [9] Et factum est

verbum Domini ad leremiam et cetera. [10] “Si pactum meum

inter diem et noctem et leges celo et terre non posui, [i i] equi-
dem et semen lacob et David servi mei proiciam, ut non as-
sumam de semine eius principes seminis Habraam, Ysac et
lacob; reducam /40 recto/ enim conversionem eorum et

miserebor eis”.

['51]
[i] Barut, capitulo 4°.

[2] A<d>duxit enim super illos gentem de longinquo, gentem

inprobam et alterius lingue, qui non sunt reveriti senem, ñeque
puerorum miserti sunt et cetera.

[3] Emisi enim vos cum luctu et ploratu; reducet autem vos
mihi Dominus cum gaudio et iocunditate in sempiternum. [4]

Sicut enim viderunt vicine Syon captivitatem vestram a Deo,

sic videbunt et in celeritate salutem vestram a Deo, que super-
veniet vobis cum honore magno et splendore eterno. Et cetera.

[5] Circumspice, Iherusalem, ad orientem, et vide iocun-

ditatem a Deo tibi venientem. [6] Ecce enim veniunt filii tui,

quos dimisisti dispersos, veniunt co<l>lecti ab oriente usque ad

occidentem in verbo Sancti, gaudentes in honorem Dei.

3. illis et L: illis salvabitur luda et con. iudicium V: iudicum L.

6. dicit V\ dixit L.

7. esse V: ecce L.

8. Sicut: Sucut L. metiri: mitin L. arene L; con. matt.

II. assumam: assummam L.

(
151 ) man^

4. celeritate: scelentate L. a Deo in Deo L.

220 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

the house ot Judah. [3] In those days and at that time I will

make David sprout like a seedling ofjustice, and he will impart

equity and justice on earth. [4] In those days Judah will be

saved, and Israel will live securely; and this is the name we will

call him: The Lord our Just One. Etc.

[5] And the word of the Lord came to Jeremiah; [6] this is

what the Lord says; If my covenant with the day can be broken
and my covenant with the night, so that day and night do not
occur in their proper time, [7] then so can my covenant with
David my servant be broken, so that he shall not have a son to

reign on his throne, as well as my covenant with the Levitical

priests, my ministers. [8] I will make the descendants of David

my servants and the Levites my ministers as countless as the stars

of the heavens and as measureless as the sands of the sea. [9] And
the word of the Lord came to Jeremiah, etc. [10] If I have not
established my covenant between the day and the night or the
fixed laws for heaven and earth, [i i] then surely I will forsake

the offspring of Jacob and of David my servant, not choosing

one on his sons to rule over the descendants of Abraham, Isaac,

and Jacob; for I will direct their return and have mercy on
them.

[151]
[i] Baruch, chapter 4

[2] He brought a people from afar against them, a wicked

people speaking another tongue, who had no respect for age or
pity on the young, etc.

(3] I sent you out wailing in sorrow, but the Lord will bring
you back to me full of joy and eternal delight. [4] Just as the

neighbors of Zion witnessed your captivity through the work

of God, soon they will see your salvation by God, which will

come upon you with great honor and eternal splendor. Etc.

[5] Jerusalem, turn your eyes to the east and see the joy from
God which is coming to you. [6] Behold, your children are
coming, whom you dismissed and dispersed; they are coming
together from east to west because of the word of the Holy
One, rejoicing in the honor of God.

HD IT ON AND TRANSI ATION

I 2 2 I
 1

[• 52 ]

[2) [i] Barut, capitulo 5°.

[3] Exuc te, Iherusalem, stola luctus ct vcxationis tue, <et>

indue te decore et honore, que a Deo tibi est, sempiterna gloria.

Circumdabit te Deus diployde iustitie et imponet mitram
capiti tuo honoris Eterni. [4] Deus enim ostendet splendorem
suum in te, qui sub celo est. [5] Nominabitur enim tibi / 40

verso/ nomen tuum a Deo in sempiternum; Pax iusticie et

Honor pietatis. [6] Ex<s>urge, lerusalem, et sta in excelso et cir-

cumspice ad orientem et vide collectos filios tuos ab oriente

sole usque ad occidentem in verbo Sancti, gaudentes Dei

memoria. [7] Exierunt enim abs te pedibus ducti ab inimicis;
adducet autem illos Dominus ad te portatos in honorem sicut

filios regni; [8] constituit enim Deus humiliare omnem mon-

tem excelsum et rupes perennes et convalles replere in equalita-
tem terre, ut ambulet Israel diligenter in honorem Dei. [9]

Obumbraverunt
[2] autem omne lignum suavitatis Israel
silve et

mandato Dei. [10] Adducet enim Deus Israel cum iocunditate

in lumine maiestatis sue, cum misericordia et iusticia, que est ex

ipso.

[> 53 ]
[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 3°.

Non enim ad populum profundi sermonis et ignote

lingue tu mitteris, ad domum Israel; [3] ñeque ad populos mul-
tos profundi sermonis et ignote lingue, quorum non possis

audire sermones; et, si ad illos mi<t>teris, ipsi audirent te.

[154]

[1] Ezechiel, capitulo 27°.

I

[2] Insule multe negociado manus tue et cetera.

[3] Venditores Saba et Rema, ipsi negociatores /41 recto/ tui.

(
152 ) man^
2. et indue V: indue L.
6. lerusalem V: Israel L.
7. adducet V: adducent L.
(
153 )
2. proñmdi L: profundis corr. man.
3. profundi V: profundis L.

(
154 ) man^

222 rOITION AND TRANSI AT ION

(•52]

[
1
1
Baruch, chapter 5

[2] Jerusalem, remove your robe of mourning and afflication

and clothe yourself in the beauty and the honor that you have
through the work of God, eternal glory. [3] God will wrap you
in a mantle of justice and will place on your head the miter of
eternal honor. [4] God will show his splendor through you to
everything that exists below the heavens. [5] You will be given
this name forevermore by God: peace of justice and honor of
piety. [6] Arise, Jerusalem, and stand on high. Look to the east

and see your children gathered together from rising to setting

sun because of the word of the Holy One, rejoicing in the

memory of God. [7] They left you on foot, led by enemies; but
the Lord will lead them back to you borne in honor as children
of the kingdom, [8] for God has decided to level every high

mountain and fixed boulder and fill the valleys to the earth’s

level, so that the children of Israel can walk without obstruction

into the glory of God. [9] At God’s command the forests and all

the fragrant trees have spread their shade over Israel. [10] God
will guide Israel in joy through the light of his majesty with the
mercy and justice that come from him.

[53l
[i] Ezekiel, chapter 3

[2] You are not sent to a people of an obscure language and

an unknown tongue, but to the house of Israel; [3] nor are you
sent to many peoples of an obscure language and an unknown

tongue, whose words you cannot understand. However, if you

were sent to such people, they would listen to you.

[154]

[
I
]
Ezekiel, chapter 27

[2] The commerce of many island was in your hands, etc.

[3] The tradesmen of Sheba and Ramah did business with

b Dn ON I AND THAN S 1 AT I ON 2 2 3
 }

cum universis primis aromatibus et lapide precioso et auro,

quod proposuerunt in mercato tuo. Et cetera.

[4] Universi habitatores insularum obstupuerunt super te, et

reges earum omnes tempestare percussi mutaverunt vultus; et

[1]
cetera.

[155]
Ezechiel, capitulo 28°.

[2] Idcirco ecce ego a<d>ducam super te alienos t-obustis-

simos gentium et cetera.

[3] “Quando congregavero domum Israel de populis, in

quibus dispersi sunt, sanctificabor in eis coram gentibus” et

cetera.

[156]
[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 32°.

[2] Omnes hi incircumcisi interfectique gladio.

[157]
[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 34.

[2] Ego autem Dominus ero eis in Deum, et servus mens

David princeps in medio eorum. Et cetera.

[158]
[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 35°.

[2] Letante universa terra, in solitudine<m> te redigam et

cetera.

[159]
[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 36.

[2] Cum sanctificatus fuero in vobis coram eis. [3] Tollam

quippe VOS de gentibus et congregabo vos de universis terris et

a<d>ducam vos in terram vestram; / 41 verso/ [4] et e<f>fundam

(
155 ) ntatt^

(
156 ) man^
( 157 ) mart^
2. princeps V: pnncipes L.
( 158 ) man^
2. solitudinem V: solitudine L.

(
159 ) man^
3. universis V: viniversis L.

224 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

you, having all the best perfumes and precious stones and gold,

which they set out in your marketplace. Etc.

[4] All the inhabitants of the islands are stupefied before you,

and all their kings are shocked by the tempest, their faces regis-

tering great emotion, etc.

[155]
[i] Ezekiel, chapter 28

[2] Therefore behold, I will bring strangers against you, the

strongest people, etc.

[3] When I have gathered up the house of Israel from the

populations among which it was dispersed, I will be sanctified
through it before the people, etc.

[i] Ezekiel, chapter 32

|2| All of them uncircumcised and slain by the sword.

[157]
[i] Ezekiel, chapter 34

[2] I, the Lord, will be their God; and my servant David, will

be prince among them. Etc.

[158]

[1] Ezekiel, chapter 35

[2) While the whole earth rejoices, I will make you into a

wasteland.

[159]
[i] Ezekiel, chapter 36

[2] When am sanctified through you before

I them. [3] I will

take you from the peoples and gather you from the whole earth

and lead you into your land. [4] I will pour clean water over

KDITION AND TRANS I. A r 1 ON 225

 super vos aquam mundam, et mundabimini ab omnibus in-

quinamentis vestris, ct ab umversis ydolis vestris mundabo vos.

[5] Et dabo vobis cor novum ct spiritum novum ponam in
medio vestri ct auferam cor lapideum de carne vestra et dabo
vobis cor carneum; [6] et spiritum meum ponam in medio ve-
stri ct faciam, ut in preceptis meis ambuletis et indicia mea cu-
stodians et operemini. [7] Et habita<bi>tis in terra, quam dedi
patribus vestris, et eritis mihi in populum, et ego cro vobis in

Deum. [8j Et salvabo vos ex universis inquinamentis vestris et

cetera.

[9] Non propter vos ego faciam, ait Dominus Deus, notum
sit vobis et cetera.

[10] In die, qua mundavero vos ex omnibus iniquitatibus

vestris et <in>habitari fecero urbes et <in>stauravcro ruinosa, [i i]

et terra deserta fuerit exculta, que quondam erat desolata in

oculis omnis viatoris, [12] dicent: “Terra ilia inculta facta est ut

<h>ortus voluptatis” et cetera.

[13] Multiplicabo eos sicut gregem hominum, [14] ut gre-

gem sanctum, ut gregem Iherusalem in solemnitatibus eius; sic

erunt civitates deserte plene gregibus hominum et cetera.

1 1 60]
[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 37.

[2] Ecce ego assumam filios Israel de medio nationum, / ^2

recto/ ad quas abierunt, et congregabo eos undique et a<d>-

ducam eos ad humum suam [3] et faciam cos gentem unam in

terra, in montibus Israel; et rex unus erit omnibus imperans, et

non erunt ultra due gentes nec dividentur amplius in duo

regna. Et cetera.

[4] Et erunt mihi populus, et ego ero eis Deus. [5] Et servus
mens David rex super eos, et pastor unus erit omnium eorum;
in iudiciis meis ambulabunt et mandata mea custodient et fa-

cient ea. [6] Et habitabunt super terrain, quam dedi servo meo
lacob, in qua habitaverunt patres vestri; et habitabunt super

earn, ipsi et filii eorum et filii filiorum eorum usque in sem-

10. inhabitari V\ habitan L. instauravero V: stauravero L.

11. exculta . . . quondam V: esculta, qua condam L.

(
160 ) man^
2. assumam: assummam L. abierunt: habierunt L.

3. due L: duos corr. s.l. man.

4. populus L: in populus corr. matt.

226 El) rn ON AND IRANSI, ATION

you, and you will be cleansed of all your filth; 1 will cleanse you
from all your idols. [5)1 will give you a new heart and I will put

a new spirit among you; and I will take out the heart of stone
from your body and give you a heart of flesh. [6] I will place my
spirit among you and cause you to follow my commands and
protect and observe my laws. [7] You will inhabit the earth

which I gave to your fathers, and you will be my people, and I

will be your God. [8] I will save you from all your uncleanness,
etc.

[9] Let it be known to you that I will not act for your sake,
[11]
says the Lord God, etc.

[10] On the day that I have cleansed you of all your filth and
have caused the cities to be inhabited and have rebuilt the ruins,

on the day that the desolate terrain, which had seemed a

wasteland to all who passed by has been cultivated, [12] they

will say, “That uncultivated land has become a garden of de-
lights,” etc.

[13] I will increase them as a flock of men, [14] a holy flock,

the flock of Jerusalem during her solemnities; and so the de-

serted cities will be filled with flocks of men, etc.

[160]

[i] Ezekiel, chapter 37

[2] Behold, I will select the children of Israel from among

the nations to which they are going, and I will gather them
from all directions and bring them to their land. [3) I will make
them a single united people in their land, the mountains of
Israel. One king will rule them all; they will never again be two
peoples or be divided into two kingdoms. Etc.

[4] They will be my people, and I will be their Cíod. [5] My

servant David will be their king, the one pastor for all of them;
they will follow my laws and protect and observe my com-
mandments. [6] They will inhabit the land that I gave to my
servant Jacob, the land where their fathers lived. They them-
selves will live there and their children and the children of their

EDITION AND E RA N S I A E I ON 227

 1

piternum, ct David servus mens princeps eorum in perpetuum.

[7] Et percuciam illis fedus pacis, pactum sempiternum crit cis,

ct t'undabo eos et multiplicabo; ct dabo sanctificationcm meam

in medio eorum in perpetuum, [8] et erit tabcrnaculum meum
in cis, et ero eis Deus, et ipsi erunt mihi populus; [9] et scient

gentes quia ego Dominus

[1]
sanctificator Israel, cum fuerit sanc-

tificatio mea in medio eorum im-perpetuum.

[2]

|i6i|

Ezechiel, capitulo 38°.

In novissimo annorum venies ad terram, que reversa est a

<g>l<ad>io, ct congregata est de populis multis ad montes Israel et

cetera.

[162]

[i] Ezechiel, capitulo 39°.

[2] Nunc reducam captivitatem lacob et miserebor omnis

7^2 verso/ domus Israel et cetera.

[3] Et reduxero eos de populis et congregavero de terris

inimicorum suorum et sanctificatus fuero in eis in oculis gen-

tium plurimarum et cetera.

l'63l
[i] Daniel, capitulo 8°.

[2] Ecce autem <h>ircus caprarum veniebat ab occidente

super faciem tocius terre et <non> tangebat terram; et cetera.

[3] “Intellige, fili hominis, quoniam in tempore finis com-

plebitur visio”. Et cetera.

1164]
[i] Daniel, capitulo 1
1°.

[2] De [2] Et convertet faciem suam ad insulas et capiet multas et

adventu cessare faciet principem opprobrii sui et cetera.
Antichristi.

(161) man^
2. a gladio V\ alio L.

(162) man^
(163) matt^
2. et non tangebat V: et tangebat L.

3. fili: filii L.

(164) man^; postl. nian^.

2. convertet V: convertat L. opprobrii sui L: opprobnum eius sui corr.

man^.

228 EDITION AND TRANSI. ATION

 children for all eternity, and David iny servant will be their
leader for ever. [7] I will make a treaty of peace with them; I

will have an eternal covenant with them. I will establish and

increase them, and I will place my sanctuary in their midst for
ever. [8] My tabernacle will be with them; I will be their God,
and they will be my people. [9] The peoples will know that I

am the Lord, the sanctifier of Israel, for my sanctuary will be in

their midst for ever.
[2]

[161]

[i] Ezekiel, chapter 38

In the final year you will come to the land that has been
returned by means of the sword and has been created out of
many peoples upon the mountains of Israel, etc.

[162]

[i] Ezekiel, chapter 39

[2] Now I will end the captivity of Jacob and have pity on
the entire house of Israel, etc.

[3] I will have brought them back from among the peoples
and gathered them from the lands of their enemies, and I will

be sanctified among them in the sight of many peoples.

[i] Daniel, chapter 8

[2] Behold, a male goat was coming from the west across the
face of the entire earth without touching the ground, etc. [3]

Understand, son of man, that in the final days the vision will be
fulfilled. Etc.

[164]

[
I
]
Daniel, chapter 1

[2] [2J He will turn his face toward the islands and seize many of
Concerning them; he will force a commander to cease his insolent conduct.
the coming
of the
Antichrist

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 229

 [i] Daniel, capitulo 12°.

(^] [2] In tempore autem illo consurget Michael, princeps ma-

Capitulum gnus, qui stat pro filiis populi tui et cetera.
istiid est de
consuma-
cione seculi
[i] Osee, capitulo 2 °.

[2] Et erit numerus filiorum Israel quasi arena maris, que sine
V
mensura est et non numerabitur. [3] Et erit in loco, ubi dicetur
eis: “Non populus meus vos”, dicetur eis: “Filii Dei viventis”.
Et cetera.

[167]
[i] Osee, capitulo 3°.

(165) Wíjfd; postl.

2. **¡stud: istum L.

(166) man^
(167)

230 KDITION AND TRAN S 1. AT I ON

 [ih5l

[
I
]
Daniel, chapter 1

[2] This [2] At that time Michael will rise up, a great leader who
chapter deals defends the children of your people, etc.
with the end
of the world. 1
1 66]

[1] Hosea, chapter i

[2] The children of Israel will be as numerous as the sands of

the sea, neither measurable nor countable. [3] And instead of

saying to them, “You are not my people,” it will be said to

them, “You are the children of the living God.” Etc.

I1671
Hosea, chapter 3

KDITION AND I KANSl A ION

l 2 3 I
 recto/
[2]

“Dies inultos c<x>spcctabis me; non fornicaberis et non cris

cum viro, sed et ego e<x>spectabo te”. [3] Quia dies inultos

sedebunt filii Israel sine rege et sine principe et sine sacrificio et

sine altari et sine ephot et sine thcraphim. [4] Et post bee rever-
tentur filii Israel et querent Dominum Deum suum et David
regem suum et pavebunt ad Dominum et ad bonum cius in
novissimo dierum.
(16«)

[
I
]
lohel, capitulo 2°.

[2] Cántate tuba in Syon, ululate in monte sancto meo, et

cetera.

[3] Similis ei non fuit a principio, et post eum non erit usque
in annos generationis et generationis. Et cetera.

[4] “Faciem eius contra marc oriéntale, et extremum eius

usque ad mare novissimum; et ascendet fetor eius, et ascendet

putredo eius, quia superbe egit”. [5] Noli timere, terra; exulta

et letare, quoniam magnificavit Dominus, ut faceret. [6] Nolite

time<re>, animalia regionis, quia germinaverunt speciosa

dcserti, quia lignum attulit fructum suum, ficus et vinea dede-

runt virtutem suam. / verso/

[7] Et, filie Syon, exultate et letamini in Domino Deo ve-

stro, quia dedit vobis doctorem iustitie et descendere faciet ad
VOS imbrem matutinum et scrotinum sicut in principio. [8] Et
implebunt<ur> aree frumento, et redundabunt torcularia vino et

oleo; [9] et reddam vobis annos, quos comedit locusta, brucus

et rubigo et eruca, fortitudo mea magna, quam misi in vos. [10]

Et comedetis vescentes et saturabimini et laudabitis nomen

Domini Dei vestri, qui fecit mirabilia vobiscum; et non con-
fundetur populus mens in sempiternum. [i i] Et scietis quia in

2. eris cum viro L: eris viro V.

(
168 ) man^
2. ululate: ullulate L.

4. Faciem V: Fatiam L.
5. letare: lectare L.
6. regionis: regioionis L. vinea: vineam L.

7. imbrem: inbrem L.

8. implebuntur V: implebunt L. aree L: aeree con. man.

II. confiindetur V: confundentur L.

2 3 2 ED n ION AND TRANSLATION

 [z] You will wait for me for many days; you will not be
unfaithful or lie with a man, and I will wait for you as well. [3]

For the children of Israel will remain for many days without a

king or a leader, without sacrificial offerings or an altar, without

ephod and theraphim. [4] And after this the children of Israel

will turn back and seek the Lord their God and David their

king. In the final days they will be terrified of the Lord and of
his goodness.

[I68|

[i] Joel, chapter 2

[2] Sound the trumpet in Zion; cry out from my holy

mountain, etc.

[3] There has been nothing like him since the beginning of

time, nor will there ever be from generation to generation

throughout time. Etc.

[4] His face turned toward the eastern sea and his backside
toward the farthest sea; his stench will rise and his putridity, for

he has acted arrogantly. [5] Fear not, O land; rejoice and be

happy, for the Lord has arranged to do great things. [6] Fear
not, animals of the region, for the beauty of the desert is in

bloom. The tree has borne its fruit; the fig tree and the vine

have produced their yield.

[7] Children of Zion, rejoice and be happy in the Lord, your

God, for he has given to you a teacher of justice and he will
cause the early and the late rains to fall upon you, just as in the

beginning. [8] The threshing floors will be covered with wheat,

and the presses will overflow with wine and oil. [9] I will re-

store to you the years that the locust destroyed — the grasshop-

per, the blight, and the caterpillar — my mighty host which I

sent against you. [10] And taking food, you will eat and be
satisfied; you will praise the name of the Lord, your God, who
has performed wonders with you. My people will not be trou-
bled for the rest of time, [i i] And you will know that I am in

KDITION AND TRANSI A I ION ^ 3 3

 medio Israel ego sum, et ego Dominus Deus vester, et non est

amplius; et non confundetur populus meus in eternum.

[169]

[ 1 ]
lohel, capitulo 2°.

[2] Et erit post hec: effundam spiritum meum super omnem

carnem, et prophetabunt filii vestri et filie vestre, senes vestri

somnia somniabunt, et iuvenes vestri visiones videbunt; [3] sed

et super servos meos et ancillas in diebus illis effundam spiritum

meum. [4] Et dabo prodigia in celo et in terra, sanguinem et

ignem et vaporem fumi; sol convertetur in tenebras et luna in

sanguinem, antequam veniat dies Domini mag<n>us / 44 recto/ et

horribilis. [5] Et erit: omnis, qui invocaverit nomen Domini,

salvus erit, quia in monte Syon et in lerusalem erit salvado,

sicut dixit Dominus, et in residuis, quos Dominus vocaverit.

[6] Quia ecce in diebus illis et in tempore illo, cum conver- [6] Capitulo
3°
tero captivitatem luda et lerusalem, congregabo omnes gentes
et deducam eas in valle lasaphat et disceptabo cum eis ibi super
populo meo et <h>ereditate mea Israel, quos disperserunt in na-

tionibus, et terram meam diviserunt. [7] Et super populum

meum miserunt sortem; et posuerunt puerum in prostibulo et

puellam vendiderunt pro vino, ut biberent. [8] Verum quid

michi et vobis, Tyrus et Sydon et omnis terminus Pale-
stinorum? Numquid ulcionem vos reddetis michi? Et <si> ulci-

scimini VOS contra me, cito velociter reddam vicissitudinem

vobis super caput vestrum. [9] Argentum enim meum et aurum
tulistis et desiderab<il>ia mea et pulche<r>rima intulistis in delu-

bra vestra. [10] Et filios luda et filios Iherusalem vendidistis filiis

Grecorum, ut longe faceretis eos de finibus suis. [11] Ecce ego

suscitabo eos de loco, in quo vendidistis eos, et convertam re-

tributionem vestram in caput vestrum. [12] Et vendam filios

vestros et filias vestras in manibus filiorum luda; et venun-

dabunt verso/ eos Sabéis, genti longinque, quia Dominus

(169) postl. man^.

I. 2° L; 3° con. man'.

4. prodigia: protigia L.

5. erit: omnis: ent del. man. invocaverit I'': invocaverint L.

7. prostibulo L: prostnbulo aw. matt.

8. Numquid V: Nuni quidetn L. si ulciscimini V: ulcissimini L. caput:

capud L.

II. Ecce: Etce L. caput: capud L.

12. longinque, quia V: longinque, et quia L.

2 3 4 EDITION AND TRA NS AT ON

I, I
the midst ot you; I am the Lord your God, and there is no
other. My people will not be troubled tor the rest of time.

[169]

[1] Joel, chapter 2

[2] And it willcome to pass that after this I will pour my

spirit over all human flesh. Your sons and daughters will
prophesy; your elders will have dreams, and your youth will see
visions. [3] In those days I will even pour my spirit over my
servants and maidservants. [4] I will produce portents in the sky

and on earth, blood, and fire, and clouds of smoke. The sun
will be turned to darkness and the moon to blood, before the

arrival of the great and terrible day of the Lord. (5] And it will

come to pass that all who invoke the name of the Lord will be
saved, for there will be salvation on Mount Zion and in Jerusa-

lem, just as the Lord has said. And among the survivors will be
those whom the Lord will call.

[6] For behold, in those days and at that time, when I have [6] Chapter 3

reversed the captivity of Judah and Jerusalem, I will gather all

the people and lead them into the valley ofjehoshaphat, where
I will discuss with them my people and my heritage Israel,

whom they have dispersed among the peoples, and they have

divided my land. [7] They have cast lots for my people; they
have put the boy in a brothel and have sold the girl for wine to

drink. [8] But what are you to me. Tyre and Sidon and all the

regions of Philistia? Will you take revenge on me? And if you

do take revenge on me, I will immediately give you repayment
on your head. [9] You took my silver and gold, and you placed
in your temples my most desirable and beautiful things. [10]

You sold the children ofjudah and the children ofjerusalem to

the children of the Greeks, so that they would be far away from
your lands, fi 1] Behold, I will take them up from the place to

which you sold them, and I will turn their retribution upon
your head. [12]! will sell your sons and your daughters into the

rni rioN and i hansi aiion 2 3 .S

 locLitus cst. [13I Clamatc hoc in gentibus, sanctificatc helium,

suscítate robustos; ascendant, accedant omnes viri bellatores.

(14) Concidite aratra vestra in gladios et ligones vestros in lan-

ceas; infirmus dicat: “Quia ego fords sum”. [15] Erumpite et

venite, omnes gentes de circuitu, et congregamini ibi! 0<c>-

cumbere faciet Dominus robustos tuos! [16] Consurgant et
ascendant gentes in vallem losaphat, quia ibi sedebo, ut

iudicem omnes gentes in circuitu. (17] Mittite fakes, quoniam

maturavit messis; venite et descendite, quia plenum est; torcular:

exub<e>rant torcularia, quia multiplicata est malicia eorum. [

1
8]

Populi, populi in valle Concisionis, <quia> iuxta est dies

Domini, in valle Concisionis. [19] Sol et luna obtenebrati sunt,

et stelle retraxerunt splendorem suum. [20] Et Dominus de

Syon rugiet et de Iherusalem dabit vocem suam; et movebun-
tur celi et terra, et Dominus spes populi sui et fortitudo filiorum
Israel. [21] Et scietis quia ego Dominus Deus vester habitans in

Syon in monte sancto meo; et erit Iherusalem sancta, et alieni

non transibunt per earn amplius. [22] Et erit in die ilia: stillabunt

montes dulcedinem, et colles fluent lacte; et per omnes rivos

luda ibunt aque, 745 recto/ et fons de domo Domini egredietur

et irrigabit torrentem spinarum. [23] Egyptus in desolatione
erit, et Idumea in desertum perditionis, pro eo quod inique
egerint in filios luda et e<f>funderint sanguinem innocentem in
terra sua. [24] Et ludea in eternum habitabitur, et Iherusalem in
generatione<m> et generationem; [25] mundabo sanguinem
et

eorum, quern non mundaveram; et Dominus commorabitur in

Syon. Et cetera.

14. aratra L: atatra corr. s.l. man'.

18. valle: valli L. quia iuxta V: iusta L.

19. splendorem L: esplendoren! corr. man.

21. habitans: habitens L. Iherusalem: in iherusalem corr. man.
24. in generationem V: in generatione L.

25. quern V: quos L.

236 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

i
hands of the children of Judah; and they will sell them to the

Sabeans, a distant people, for the Lord has spoken. [13] IVo-
claim this among the peoples. Sanctify war; rally the strong

men. Let all brave men rise up and approach. [ 14] Convert your
plows into swords and your hoes into lances; let the weak one
say, “I am strong.” [15] Go out, all you peoples from the sur-

rounding areas; come and gather here! The Lord will bring

your strong men to their knees! [16] Let the people rise and go
up into the valley of Jehoshaphat, for there I will sit in judg-
ment on all peoples from the surrounding areas. [
1
7] Drop your
sickles, for the harvest has ripened; come and go down, for the
wine press is full: the wine presses grow full, for their wicked-
ness is great. [
1
8] People, people in the valley of destruction,
the day of the Lord is near in the valley of destruction. [ 19] The
sun and the moon have been darkened, and the stars have with-
drawn their light. [20] The Lord of Zion will call out and put
forth his voice from Jerusalem; the heavens and earth will be
moved, and the Lord will be the hope of his people and the
strength of the children of Israel. [21] And you will know that

I am the Lord your God living on Zion, my holy mountain.

Jerusalem will be holy, and strangers will not pass through
again. [22] It will happen on that day that the mountains will

drip sweet wine and the hills will flow with milk. Water will
flow through all the streams of Judah, and a spring will come
forth from the house of the Lord to irrigate the river of thorns.

[23] Egypt will be in desolation, and Edom will become a des-

ert of perdition, for they have dealt unfairly with the children of
Judah and have shed innocent blood in their land. [24] But
Judah will be inhabitated for ever, and Jerusalem throughout all

time. [25] I will purify their blood, which I had not cleansed;
and the Lord will dwell in Zion. Etc.

riMTION AND TRANSI A riON 2 3 7

 (i 70]

[
I
]
Amos, capitulo 9°.

[2] Vide [2] “In die illa suscitabo tabernaculum David, quod cccidit,
Glosa.
et r<e>edificabo aperturas murorum eius; et ea, que corruerant,
I2I [double
instaurado et r<e>edificabo eum sicut in diebus antiquis, [3J ut
crossl
possideant reliquias Idumee et omnes nationes, eo quod in-

vocatum sit nomen meum super eos, dicit Dominus faciens

hec. [4] Ecce dies veniunt, dicit Dominus, et comprehendet

arator messorem et calcator uve mittentem semen; et stillabunt

montes dulcedinem, et omnes colles culti erunt. [5] Et conver-

tam captivitatem populi mei Israel; et edificabunt civitates
desertas et inhabitabunt et plantabunt vineas et bibent vinum
earum et facient <h>ortos et comedent fructus eorum. [6] Et
plantado eos super humum suam, et non evellam eos ultra de
terra sua, quam dedi eis”, dicit Dominus Deus tuus.

(170) ntatf postl. nm}^\ cross w<jh'(?).

-,

2. ea V: earn L.
4. veniunt V: venient L. messorem L: mesorem con. man^. uve mitten-
tem: ube mintentem L.

238 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 (170]

1
1
]
Amos, chapter 9

[2] Refer to [2] “On that day I will raise up the tabernacle of David,
the which has fallen; and I will repair the breaches in its walls. I will
Gommcutar)'
[double
set up what had fallen down and rebuild it just as it was in the
[2)
cross] days of old [3] so that they possess the remains of Edom and all

nations, for they bear my name,” the Lord says, doing these
things. [4] “Behold, the days are coming,” says the Lord,

“when the plowman will overtake the reaper and the grape-
treader, the sower. The mountains will drip sweet wine and all

the hills will be tilled. [5] I will reverse the captivity of my

people of Israel, and they will rebuild and inhabit the deserted
cities and plant vineyards and drink their wine and grow gar-
dens and eat their produce. [6] I will plant them in their land,

which I gave to them, and never again pluck them out of it,”
says the Lord, your God.

E n I r 1 O N AND I KA N S L A 1 1 ON 2 3 9
 /45 I'crso/

l'7il
[i] Abdies, capitulo i°.

[2] Quomodo enim bibisti super montem sanctum meum,

bibent omnes gentes iugiter; et bibent et absorbebunt et erunt
quasi non sint. [3] Et in monte Syon erit salvado, et erit sanctus;

et possidebit domus lacob eos, qui possederant. [4] Et erit

domus lacob ignis et domus Iosep<h> fla<m>ma et domus Esau

stipula; et succendentur in eis, et devorabunt eos, et non erunt
reliquie domus Esau, quia I^ominus locutus est. [5] Et heredita-
bunt hi, qui ad austrum sunt, montem Esau, et qui in campe-
stribus Philistiim; et possidebunt regionem Efraim et regionem
Samarie, et Beniamin possidebit Galad; [6] et transmigrado
exercitus huius filiorum Israel omnia loca Cananeorum usque
ad Sareptam; et transmigrado Iherusalem, que in Bosforo est,

possidebit civitates austri. [7] Et ascendent salvatores <in> mon-

tem Syon indicare montem Esau, et erit Domino regnum.

I1721
[i] Micheas, capitulo 4°.

[2] Et erit in novissimo dierum: erit mons domus Domini

preparatus in verdee montium et sublimis super colles; et fluent
ad eum populi. [3] Et properabunt gentes multe et dicent: “Ve-
nite, ascendamus ad montem Domini et ad domum /^6 recto/

Dei lacob, et docebit nos de viis suis, et ibimus in semitis eius”;

quia de Syon egredietur lex, et verbum Domini de Iherusalem.
[4] Et iudicabit inter populos inultos et corripiet gentes fortes
usque in longinquum; et concide<n>t gladios suos in vomeres et

(171)
2. bibisti L: vivisti corr. s.l. mau^.

3. possidebit: pisidebit L. possederant V'\ possederent L.

4. succendentur V\ suscendit L. reliquie L: reliquia corr. tnau^.

5. qui ad V: quia ad L. Philistiim: Fhilistimii L.

6. exercitus V\ excelsitus L.

7. salvatores V'\ salvatoris L. in montem V\ montem L.

(172) nwn^
1. Micheas L: Michias corr. nuvi'.

2. mons V: mons, mons L.

4. concident V: concidet L. et hastas: s etastas L. ligones V\ legiones

L. discent . . . belligerare V: dicent ultra belligerate L.

240 EDITION AND I R ANSI AT ION

l«7i]

[
1
]
Obadiah, chapter i

[2] Just as you have drunk upon my holy mountain, all the
peoples will drink continually; they will drink and swallow and
act as if they were not. [3] Salvation will be on the mountain of
Zion, and it will be holy; the house of Jacob will possess those
who had possessed it. [4] The house of Jacob will be the fire;

the house of Joseph, the flame; and the house of Esau, the

straw. A fire will breakout and devour them; and nothing will
remain of the house of Esau, for the Lord has spoken. [5] The
ones to the south will inherit the mountain of Esau, and those
in the plains, the land of Philistines. They will possess the land

of Ephraim and the land of Samaria, and Benjamin will possess

Gilead. [6] The exiles among the children of the nation of Israel
will possess all of Canaan as far as Sarepta; and the exiles of
Jerusalem who are in Bosphorus, the cities of the south. [7]

Saviours will go up on the Mount Zion to pass judgment on

Mount Esau, and the kingdom will be the Lord’s.

[172J

[
I
]
Micah, chapter 4

[2] During the final days the mountain of the Lord’s house
will be established at the summit, high above the hills; and the
peoples will proceed to it.
[3] Many nations will come in haste

and say, “Come, let us go up to the mountain of the Lord and

to the house of the God ofjacob, and he will teach us about his
ways and we will follow his path,” for the law will go out from
Zion and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem. [4] He will

impart justice to many peoples and reproach the strong, even in

liDlTION AND I RANSl ATION 2 4

 <h>astas suas in ligones; non sumct gens adversum gentem
gladiuin, et non discent ultra belligerare”. [5] Et sedebit vir

subtus vineain suam et subtus ficurn suam, et non erit quid

deterreat; quia os Domini exercituum locutum est. [6] Quia
omnes populi ambulabunt unusquisque in nomine dei sui; nos
autem ambulabimus in nomine Dei nostri in eternum et ultra.

(7] “In die ilia, dicit Dominus, congregabo claudicantem, et

earn, quam eieceram, co<l>ligam et, <quam> atflixeram, con-

solabo; [8] et ponam claudicantem in reliquias et earn, que
laboraverat, in gentem robustam”. [9] Et regnabit Dominus
super eos in monte Syon ex hoc nunc et usque in eternum. [10]

Et tu, turris gregis, nebulosa filia Syon, usque ad te veniet et

veniet potestas prima, regnum filie Iherusalem. [ii] <Nunc

quare merore contraheris?> Numquid rex non est tibi, aut con-
siliarius tuus periit, quia comprehendit te dolor sicut parturien-

tem? [12] Dole et satage, filia Syon, quasi parturiens; quia nunc
egrederis de civitate et habitabis in regione et venies usque ad

Babilonem; ibi liberaberis, / 46 uerso/ ibi redimet te Dominus de

manu inimicorum tuorum. [13] Et nunc congregate sunt super
te gentes multe, que dicunt: “Lapidetur, et aspiciat in Syon
oculus noster”. [14] Ipsi autem non cognoverunt cogitationes
Domini et non intellexerunt consilium eius, quia congregavit

eos quasi fenum aree. [15] Surge e<t> tritura, filia Syon, quia
cornu tuum ponam ferreum et ungulas tuas ponam ereas, et
conminues populos multos et interficies Domino rapiñas
eorum et fortitudinem eorum Domino universe terre. [16]
Nunc vastaberis, filia latronis! Obsidionem posuerunt super
nos; in virga percucient maxillam iudicis Israel.

7. congregabo: congregaba L. eieceram: egesseram L. quam afflix-

eram V: afligeram L.

9. monte V: montem L.

10. et veniet V: et veniat L.

11. Nunc . . . Numquid V: Numquid L.

12. te add. s.l. man^.

13. aspiciat V: aspiciet L. oculus: occulus L.
15. filia V\ filie L.
16. vastaberis: vastavens L.

242 FI) in ON AND FRANS FAT ION

distant places. They will convert their swords to plows and
their spears to hoes; people will no longer take up their swords
against each other or learn to wage war. [5] Man will sit under
his vine and under his fig tree, and there will be nothing to fear,

for the Lord ot Hosts has spoken. [6] Each and every one will

walk in the name of his god; but we will walk in the name of
our God to the end of time and beyond. [7] “On that day,” says

the Lord, “I will gather up the lame and the outcast, and I will

comfort her whom I had injured; [8] and I shall make of the
lame the survivors and a strong people of the one who had
suffered.” And the Lord will
[9] reign over them from Mount
Zion from now until eternity. [10] And you, tower of the
flock, misty turret of the daughter of Zion, it will come even to
you; the supreme power, the kingdom, will come to the
daughter of Jerusalem, [ii] Why are you drawn together in

grief? Have you no king, or has your counselor died, so that a

pain like childbirth has seized you? [12] Grieve and suffer,
daughter of Zion, like a woman in childbirth; for now you will

leave the city and live in the country and come to Babylon.

There you will be freed; there the Lord will redeem you from
the hands of your enemies. [13] Now many peoples have gath-
ered together against you, saying, “Let her be stoned and let

our eye look upon Zion.” [14] But they did not know the
thoughts of the Lord and have not understood his plans, for he
has assembled them like hay on the threshing room floor. [15]

Rise and thresh, daughter of Zion, for I will make your horn
iron and your hooves brass; and you will crush many peoples
and destroy their pillage for the Lord’s sake and their strength
for the Lord of the entire earth. [16] Now you will be laid

waste, daughter of the thief! They have laid seige against us;

they will strike the cheek of the judge of Israel with a rod.

F Dili ON AND TRANSI AT ION 2 4 3

 1

|I7J|
[i] Michcas, capitulo 5°.

[2] Et tu, Bethlcm Eph<r>ata, parvulus es in milibus luda; ex

te mihi egredietur, qui sit dominator in Israel, et cetera.

[• 74 ]

[i] Micheas, capitulo 6°.

[2] “Numquid dabo primogenitum meurn pro scelere meo,

fructum ventris <rnei> pro peccato anime mee?”. [3] Indicabo
tibi, o homo, quid sit bonum, et quid Dominus requirat a te.

(
173 ) nian^
2. Bethlem Ephrata V: liethelem Ephata L.
(
174 ) matt^
2. fiructum . . . mei V: et fructum ventns L.
3. a te: ad te L.

244 EDITION AND I RA N S I. A1 I (Í N

á
[ 173 ]
[i] Micah, chapter 5

[2] And you, O Bethlehem Ephrathah, are small among the

thousands from Judah; the one who rules in Israel will leave

you and come to me, etc.

[174]

[1] Micah, chapter 6

[2] Will I give my firstborn for my wickedness, the fruit of

my stomach for the sin of my soul? [3] I will show you, O man,
what is good and what the Lord asks of you.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 2 4 5

 /^7 recto/

l'75l
[i] Sophonias, capitulo 2°.

(2] Horribilis Dominus super cos, ct a<t>tenuabit omnes deos

terre; ct adorabunt cum, viri dc loco suo, omnes insule gen-
tium. [3] “Sed et VOS, Ethiopcs, interfecti gladio meo eritis”. Et

cetera.

[176]
[i] Sophonias, capitulo 3°.

[2] Ve provocatrix et redempta, civitas columba! [3) Non

audivit vocem, et <non> suscepit disciplinam; in Domino non
est confisa, ad Deum suum non a<p>propinquavit. [4] Principes

eius in medio cius quasi leones rugientes; indices eius lupi ve-

spere, non relinquebant in mane. [5] Prophete eius vesani, viri

infideles; sacerdotes eius polluerunt sanctum, iniuste egerunt

contra legem. [6] Dominus iustus in medio eius non faciet

iniquitatem; mane, mane indicium suum dabit, in lucc<m>, et

non abscondetur; nescivit autem iniq<u>us confusionem. [7]

“Disperdidi gentes, et dissipati sunt anguli earum; desertas feci

vias corum, duni non est qui transeat; desolate sunt civitates
eorum, non remanente viro ñeque ullo habitatore. [8] Dixi:

A<t>tamen timebis me, suscipies disciplinam! [9] Et non peribit

habitaculum eius, propter omnia in quibus visitavi earn. [10]

Verumtamen diluculo surgentes corrupuerunt omnes cogita-
tiones suas. [i i] Quaproptcr expecta me, dicit Dominus, in die

resu<r>rexionis mee in futurum; quia indicium meum, ut con-

gregem gentes / verso/ et co<l>ligam regna, et e<f>fundam

super eos indignationem mcam, omnem iram furoris mei; in

igne enim zeli mei devorabitur omnis terra. [12] Quia tunc
re<d>dam populis labium electum, ut invocent omnes nomen

(175)
(176) man^
3. non suscepit V\ suscepit L. confisa: confissa L.
6. iustus P: intus L. lucem V': luce L.
7. dissipati: discipati L.
8. timebis me: videbis con. man.^. suscipies V\ suscipiens L.
11. resurrexionis: resurexionis corr. man.^. congregem I': congregent
L. zeli V\ celi L.

12. nomen L: in nomine V.

246 KDiriON AND TRANSI ATI ON

[• 75 ]

[i] Zephaniah, chapter 2

[2] The Lord will be terrible against them and will humble
all the gods of the earth; and they will worship him from their

place, all the islands of the peoples. [3] But even you, Ethiopi-
ans, will be destroyed by my sword. Etc.

[176]

[1] Zephaniah, chapter 3

[2] Woe to the provocative and redeemed city, the dove! [3]

She did not hear the voice and did not accept instruction. She
did not trust in the Lord; she did not approach her God. [4] Her
leaders were like roaring lions in her midst; her judges, wolves
of the evening, were leaving nothing for the next day. [5] Her
prophets were senseless men without faith; her priests have pol-
luted the sanctuary, acting unjustly against the law. [6] The just
Lord in her midst will not act sinfully; in the morning, in the

morning he will bring his judgment into the light and it will

not be obscured. But the evil one has not known shame. [7] I

have destroyed the peoples, and their towers have been broken
up. I have left their roads deserted; no one travels them now.
Their cities are desolate; there is not a man remaining, not a

single inhabitant. [8] I said: But still you will fear me; you will

accept instruction! (9] But her dwelling-place will not perish,

thanks to everything by means of which I have seen it. [10]

Nevertheless, they have been eager to corrupt all their projects.

[
1
1 ]
Because of this, expect me, says the Lord, on the day of my
resurrection; for my decision is to gather together the peoples

and assemble the kingdoms and pour my indignation over

them, the whole wrath of my fury. The entire earth will be

devoured by the fire of my zeal. [12] For then I will give back

!•; I) I r I O N AND T R A N S I A I I 0N 247

 Domini et serviant ei <h>umero uno. [ 13] Ultra flumina Ethio-

pic. Hide su<p>plices mei, filii dispersorum meorum deferent

nuinus mihi. ( 14] In die ilia non confunderis super cunctis adin-

ventionibus tuis, quibus prevaricata es in me; quia tunc auferam

de medio tui magmloq<u>os superbie tue, et non adicies exaltari

amplius in monte sancto meo. [15] Et derelinquam in medio tui

populum pauperem et egenum”. [16] Et sperabunt in nomine

Domini reliquie Israel. [17] Non facient iniquitatem nec lo-
quentur mendacium; et non invenietur in ore eoruqi lingua
dolosa, quoniam ipsi pascentur et accubabunt, et non erit qui

exte<r>reat. [18] Lauda, filia Syon; iubila, Israel! [19) Letare et

exulta in omni corde, filia Iherusalem! [20] Abstulit Dominus

indicium tuum, avertit inimicos tuos; rex Israel Dominus in

medio tui, non timebis malum ultra. [21] In die ilia dicetur

Iherusalem; “Noli timere, Sion; non di<s>solvantur manus tue!

[22] Dominus Deus tuus in medio tui, fortis ipse salvabit; gau-
debit super te in leticia, silebit in dilectione tua; et exultabit

super te in laude”. [23] “Nugas, qui a lege /4s recto/ recesserant,

congregabo, quia ex te erant, ut non ultra habeas super eis op-

probrium. [24] Ecce ego interficiam omnes, qui afflixerunt te

in tempore illo; et salvabo claudicantem et earn, que eiecta fue-

rat, congregabo; et ponam eos in laudem et in nomen in omni
terra confusionis eorum, in tempore illo, quo a<d>ducam vos, et

in tempore, quo congregabo vos. [25] Dabo enim vos in

nomen et in laudem omnibus populis terre, cum co<n>vertero
captivitatem vestram coram oculis vestris”, dicit Dominus.

[177]

[1] Zacharias, capitulo primo.

[2] Et dixit ad me ángelus qui loquebatur in me: “Clama

dicens: Hec dicit Dominus exercituum: Zelatus sum Iherusa-
lem et Syon zelo magno, [3] et ira magna ego irascor super

gentes opulentas, quia ego iratus sum parum, ipsi vero adi<u>-

14. superbie V: super superbie L.

16. reliquie V: reliquia L.
17. facient V: faciant L.
19. filia: filie L.

22. et exultabit L: exultabit V.

23. lege: lige L.

24. afflixerunt: atfligerunt L.

(
177 )
2. Zelatus: Zellatus L.

3. adiuverunt V: adiverunt L.

2 4 S 1 1) in ON AND IHANSI. AIION

to the people the chosen word, so that all will invoke the name
of the Lord and serve him shoulder to shoulder. [13] From
beyond the river of Ethiopia my suppliants, the children of my
dispersion, will offer tribute to me. [14] On that day you will

not feel shame for all the evil conduct by which you have
sinned against me, for then I will remove from among you
those who glorify your arrogance and you will no longer be
exalted on my holy mountain. [15] I will abandon in your
midst a poor and destitute people. [16] And they will place their
hope in the name of the Lord of the survivors of Israel. [17]

They will not do evil nor speak lies nor will a deceitful tongue
be found in their mouths, for they will be fed and will lie

nearby and will not have cause for fear. [

1
8] Give praise, daugh-
ter of Zion; sound abroad, Israel! (19] Be glad and rejoice with

all your heart, daughter of Jerusalem! [20] The Lord has

removed your sentence; he has turned away your enemies. The

king of Israel, the Lord, is among you; you will never again fear
evil. [21] On that day Jerusalem will be told: Fear not, Zion; do
not let your hands be weakened! [22] The Lord, your strong
God, is with you; he will grant salvation. He will rejoice in you
exuberantly; he will be silent in his love. He will delight in you
with songs of praise. [23] Because they belonged to you, I will

gather together the worthless ones who have strayed from the
law, so that you will never again be disgraced by them. [24]

Behold, I will destroy all who at that time afflicted you; and I

will save the lame and gather up the outcast. At the time I lead

you and gather you together, 1 will make them respected and
give them authority throughout the land of their ruin. [25] I

will give you in authority and respect to all the peoples of the

earth when I remove your captivity before your very eyes, says

the Lord.

[177]
[i] Zechariah, chapter i

[2] The angel that was speaking through me said to me: Cry
out, saying, thus speaks the Lord of Hosts: I love Jerusalem and

Zion passionately; [3] and I am furious with the wealthy peo-

K D I I 1 O N AND I K A N S 1 AT I ON 249
 vcrunt in malum. (4] Propterca hcc dicit Dominus: Revenar ad
Iherusalem in misericordiis. [5] Et domus mea edificabitur in

ea, ait Dominus exercituum, et perpendiculum extendetur

super Iherusalem. [6] Ad<h>uc clama dicens: Hec dicit Dominus
exercituum; Ad<h>uc affluent civitates mee bonis, et con-
solabitur adhuc <dominus Sion et eliget adhuo Iherusalem.” Et
cetera.

[17S]

[i] Zacharias, capitulo 2°.

[2] Et levavi oculos meos et vidi; et ecce vir, /4s verso/ et in

manu eius funiculus mensorum. [3] Et dixi: ‘‘Quo tu vadis?”.

[4] Et dixit ad me: ‘‘Ut metiar Iherusalem et videam, quanta sit

longitudo eius et quanta latitudo eius”. [5] Et ecce ángelus, qui

loquebatur in me, egrediebatur, et alius ángelus egrediebatur in
occursum eius; [6] et dixit ad eum: ‘‘Cur<re>, loquere ad pue-
rum istum dicens: Absque muro habitabitur Iherusalem pre
multitudine hominum et iumentorum in medio eius. [7] Et ego
ero ei, ait Dominus, murus ignis in circuitu et in gloria ero in

medio eius. [8] O, o, o! Fugite de terra aquilonis, dicit Domi-

nus, quoniam in quatuor ventos celi dispersi vos, dicit Domi-
nus. [9] O, Syon, fuge, que habitas apud filiam Babilonis! [10]

Quia hec dicit Dominus exercituum, post gloriam misit me ad

gentes, que spoliaverunt vos: Qui enim tetigerit vos, tangit

pupillam oculi mei. [11] Quia ecce ego levo manum meam
super eos, et erunt prede <h>is qui serviebant sibi; et cognoscetis
quia Dominus exercituum misit <me>. [12] Lauda et letare, filia

Syon, quia ecce ego venio et habitabo in medio tui, ait Domi-
nus. [13] Et a<p>plicabuntur gentes multe ad Dominum in die

ilia et erunt mihi in populum. [14] Et habitabo in medio tui, et

scies quia Dominus exercituum misit me ad te. [15] Et pos-

6. adhuc . . . Iherusalem V\ aduch Iherusalem L.

(
178 ) man^
2. mensorum: menssorum L.
4. videam V: ludeam L. quanta: quantas L. longitudo . . . eius L:

latitudo eius et quanta longitudo eius h'.

6. Curre V: Cur L.

10. spoliaverunt: expoliaverunt L.

11. prede his qui V: predeis que L. misit me I': niisit L.

12. filia: filie L.

250 EDITION AND TRANSI, A no N

pics, tor I was somewhat angered and they, truly, have col-
laborated with evil. [4] Therefore, the Lord says; I will return to

Jerusalem with mercy. [5] And my house will be erected there,

says the Lord of Hosts, and an uncompromising equity will be

extended throughout Jerusalem. [6] Moreover, cry out, saying

that thus speaks the Lord of Hosts. My cities will yet abound in
good things, and the Lord will comfort Zion and choose Jeru-
salem. Etc.

[178]

[1] Zechariah, chapter 2

[2] I raised my eyes and saw; behold, there was a man with a

surveyor’s line in his hand. [3] I said, “Where are you going?”
[4] And he said to me, “To survey Jerusalem in order to deter-
mine its length and width.” [5] And behold, an angel who was
speaking through me went forth and another angel went forth
to meet him; [6] and the one said to the other, “Run, speak to

this young man, saying that Jerusalem will be inhabited without

walls by the multitude of men and beasts of burden in its

midst.” [7] And the Lord says, I will be a wall of fire encircling
Jerusalem, and I will be in glory within. [8] O, o, o! Flee from
the northern land, says the Lord, because I have scattered you
to the four winds of heaven, says the Lord. [9] O, Zion, flee,

you who live with the daughter of Babylon! [loj The Lord of
Hosts says these things: After the glory, he sent me to the peo-
ple who have robbed you. The one who touches you touches
the pupil of my eye. [11] Behold, I raise my hand over them,
and they will be prey to those who served them. And you will

know that the Lord of Hosts sent me. [12] Give praise and
rejoice, daughter of Zion, for behold, I am coming and will I

live in your midst, says the Lord. [13] Many peoples will be
joined to the Lord on that day, and they will be my people. [14]

I will live in your midst, and you will know that the Lord of
Hosts sent me to you. [15] The Lord will possess Judah, his

EDITION AND E KA N S I. A r I () N ¿ .S
I
 sidcbit Dom<in>us Iuda<m> partem suam in terra sanctificata /^g

recto/ et eliget adhuc Iherusalem. [i6] Sileat omnis caro a facie

Domini, quia consu<r>rexit de habitáculo sancto suo”.

[• 79 ]

[i] Zacharias, capitulo 8°.

[2] Et factum est verbum Domini exercituum dicens: [3]

“Hec dicit Dominus exercituum; Zelatus sum Syon zelo

magno et indignatione magna zelatus sum earn. [4] ,^Hec dicit

Dominus exercituum: Reversus sum ad Syon et habitabo in
medio Iherusalem; et vocabitur Iherusalem civitas Veritatis, et
mons Domini exercituum mons Sanctificatus. [5] Hec dicit
Dominus exercituum; Ad<h>uc habitabunt senes et anus im-
plateis Iherusalem et viri baculus in manu eius pre multitudine

dierum [6] et platee civitatis complebuntur infantibus et puellis

ludentibus im-plateis eius. [7] Hec dicit Dominus exercituum;

Si videbitur di<f>ficile in oculis reliquiarum populi <h>uius in
diebus illis, numquid in oculis meis di<f>ficile erit?, dicit Domi-
nus exercituum. [8] Hec dicit Dominus exercituum: Ecce sal-

vabo populum meum de terra orientis et de terra o<c>casus solis:

[9] et a<d>ducam eos, et habitabunt in medio Iherusalem; et

erunt mihi in populum, et ego ero eis in Deum in veritate et in

iustitia. [10] Hec dicit Dominus exercituum: ‘Confortentur

manus vestre, qui auditis in his diebus sermones istos per os
prophetarum / ^g verso/ in die, quo fundata est domus Domini
exercituum, ut templum edificaretur. [ii] Siquidem ante dies

illos merces hominum non erat, nec merces iumentorum erat,

ñeque introeunti ñeque exeunti erat pax pre tribulatione; et

dimisi omnes homines, unumquemque contra proximum

suum. [12] Nunc autem non iuxta dies priores ego faciam

reliquiis populi <h>uius, dicit Dominus exercituum; [13] sed

semen pacis erit: vinea dabit fructum suum, et terra dabit ger-

men suum, et celi dabunt rorem suum, et possidere faciam reli-

quias populi <h>uius universa hec. [14] Et erit; sicut eratis male-

15. dominus ludam V\ domus luda L. partem: partes L.

16. Sileat: Silleat L.

(
179 )
3. Zelatus sum: Zellatus sum L. magna zelatus: magna zellatus L.

5. viri 1^; vidi L.

6. puellis: puelle L.
7. oculis: occulis L.
12. iuxta: lusta L.

252 EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT I ON

territory' in the sanctified land, and he will yet choose Jerusa-

lem. [i6] Let all mankind be silent in the presence ot the Lord,
tor he has risen up from his holy residence.

(• 79 ]

(ij Zechariah, chapter 8

[2] The word of the Lord of Hosts was heard, saying: [3]

Thus speaks the Lord of Hosts: I feel great love for Zion and I

feel for it a great indignation. [4] Thus says the Lord of Hosts: I

have returned to Zion and I will live within Jerusalem; and

Jerusalem will be called the City of Truth, and the mountain of
the Lord of Hosts, the Sanctified Mountain. [5] Thus speaks the
Lord of Hosts: Old men and women will yet inhabit the streets
ofjerusalem, each man carrying a staff on account of his age; [6]
and the streets of the city will be filled with infants and chil-
dren, playing in its streets. [7] Thus speaks the Lord of Hosts: If

on those days it seems difficult in the eyes of the survivors, will

it be difficult in my eyes? says the Lord of Hosts. [8] Thus speaks
the Lord of Hosts: Behold, will save my people from the
I

eastern land and from the land of the setting sun; [9] and I will

lead them, and they will live within Jerusalem. They will be my
people, and I will be their God in truth and injustice. [
10] Thus
speaks the Lord of Hosts: Let your hands become powerful,
you who hear during these days those words through the
mouths of the prophets on the day that the house of the Lord of
Hosts was founded so that the temple might be built, [ii]

Before those days there was no recompense for men or for

beasts of burden, nor, on account of the tribulation, was there
safety for those coming and going; and I let loose each man
against his neighbor. [12] But now I will not deal with the
residuum of this people as I did in the past, says the Lord of

Hosts, [13] for I will be the cause of peace. The vine will give its

fruit; the earth will yield her produce; the heavens will drop

their dew; and I will give to the residuum of this people the
possession of all these things. [14] It will happen that just as you

hPITION AND IRANSLAIION ¿ 5 3

 di<c>tio in gentibus, domus luda et domus Israel, sic salvabo vos,

et eritis bcnedictio. (15] Nolite timere; confortentur manus

vestre. [16] Quia bee dicit Dominus exercituum; Sicut

cogitavi, ut affligerem vos, cum ad iracundiam provocassent

patres vestri me, dicit Dominus, [17] et non sum misertus, sic

conversus cogitavi in diebus istis, ut benefaciam domui luda et

Iherusalem: nolite timere. [iH] Hec sunt ergo verba, que fa-
ci<e>tis: Loquimini veritatem unusquisque cum proximo suo,

veritatem et iudicium pacis iudicate in portis vestris, et unus-

quisque malum contra amicum suum ne cogitetis in cordibus

vestris et iuramentum mendax ne diligatis: omnia enim hec

sunt que odi”, dicit Dominus. [19] Et /^o recto/ factum est ver-
bum Domini exercituum ad me dicens: [20] “Hec dicit Domi-
nus exercituum: leiunium quarti et ieiunium quinti et ieiu-

nium septimi et ieiunium decimi erit domui lude in gaudium et

letitiam et in solemni<ta>tes preclaras; veritatem tantum et

pacem diligite. [21] Hec dicit Dominus exercituum: Usquequo
venient populi et habitent in civitatibus multis, [22] et vadant
habitatores unus ad alt<er>um dicentes: ‘Eamus, et deprecemur
faciem Domini et queramus Dominum exercituum; vadam
etiam ego’. [23] Et venient populi multi et gentes robuste ad
querendum Dominum exercituum in Iherusalem et deprecan-

dam faciem Domini. [24] Hec dicit Dominus exercituum: In

diebus illis, in quibus a<p>prehendent decern homines ex omni-

bus linguis gentium, et a<p>prehendent fimbriam viri iudei di-
centes: ‘Ibimus vobiscum’

[i8o|

[i] Zacharias, capitulo 9°.

[2] Onus verbi Domini in terra Hadrach et Damasci requiei

eius, quia Dominus est oculus hominis et omnium tribuum Is-
rael. [3] Emath quoque in terminis eius et Tyrus et Sydon, as-

sumpserunt quippe sibi sapientiam valde. [4] Et edificavit Tyrus

munitionem suam et coacervavit argentum quasi humum et

17. sum V\ sunt L. benefaciam V': benefaciem L.

18. facietis V: facitis L.

20. septimi V: septimum L. solemnitates V: soleninites L. tantum V:

tamen L.

22. alterum V: altum L.

23. robuste: robusti L.
(
180 ) matt^

2 5 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

were a malediction among the peoples, O house of Judah and
house ot Israel, so I will save you and you will be a benediction.

[15] Fear not; let your hands become powerful. [i6| Thus
speaks the Lord of Hosts: just as I planned to punish you when
your fathers provoked me to anger, says the Lord, [17] and I

had no mercy, so I have changed my mind and planned on this

day to do good deeds for the houses of Judah and Jerusalem.

Fear not. [18] These, then, are the pronouncements which you
will follow: Let every one of you speak the truth to his neigh-

bor; adjudicate truth and conciliatory judgments within your

gates. Let no one of you devise in your heart evil against your
neighbour. Do not respect a false oath, for all these are the

things that I hate, says the Lord. [19] And the word of the Lord
was heard, saying to me: [20] Thus speaks the Lord of Hosts:

The fasts of the fourth, fifth, seventh, and tenth months will

become to the house of Judah times of joy and exuberance,

illustrious rites; love only truth and peace. [21] Thus speaks the
Lord of Hosts: Until the time when the people come and live

in many cities, [22] and the inhabitants go about, saying to one

another, “Let us go and pray for the appearance of the Lord and
seek the Lord of Hosts; I will go also.” [23] Many people and
powerful groups will come seeking the Lord of Hosts in Jerusa-

lem and praying for the appearance of the Lord. [24] Thus
speaks the Lord of Hosts: In those days they will choose ten
men from among all the languages of the nations and they will
grasp the hem of the robe of a Jew, saying, “We will go with

you.”

[180]

1 1] Zechariah, chapter 9

[2] The weight of the word of the Lord is on the land of

Hadrach, and in Damascus, the weight of his repose, for the

Lord is the eye of man and of all the tribes of Israel. [3) Hamath,
Tyre, and Sidon are also in his territory, for they have truly
received knowledge. [4] And Tyre erected its fortification and

HD III ON AND TRANSI ATION ^ 5 .S

 aurum ut lutum platcarum. [5] Eccc Dominus possidebit earn et

pcrcutiet in mari fortitudinem eius; ct ergo igni devorabitur. [6]

Videbit Ascalon et timebit, / ^0 verso/ et Gaza et dolebit nimis,

et Accaron, quoniam confusa est spes eius; et peribit rex de

Gaza, et Ascalon non habitabitur. [7] Et sedebit separator in

Azoto, et disperdam superbiam Filistinorum. [8] Et auferani
sanguinem eius de ore eius et abhominationes eius et de medio
dentium eius, et relinquetur etiam ipse Deo nostro, et erit quasi

dux in luda, et Acoron quasi lebuseus. [9] Et cirCumdabo

domum meam ex iis qui militant mihi euntes et revertentes; et
non transibit super eos ultra exactor, quia nunc vidi in oculis
meis. [10] Exulta satis, filia Syon; iubila, filia Iherusalem. [11]
Ecce rex tuus veniet tibi iustus et salvator ipse, pauper et ascen-

dens super asinam et super pullum filium asine. [12] Et disper-

dam quadrigam ex Efraim et equum de Iherusalem; e<t> di<s>-

sipabitur arcus belli, et loquetur pacem gentibus. [13] Et

potestas eius a mari usque ad mare et a fluminibus usque ad fines
terre. [14] Tu quoque: in sanguine testamenti tui emisisti vinc-

tos tuos de lacu, in quo non est aqua. [15] Convertimini ad

munitionem, vincti spei; hodie quoque annuntians: Duplicia
re<d>dam tibi. [16] Quoniam extendi mihi ludam quasi archum,

implevi Efraym; et suscitabo filios tuos, Syon, super filios tuos,

Grecia, et ponam te quasi Qi recto/ gladium <fortium>. [17] Et

Dominus Deus super eos videbitur, et exibit ut fulgur iaculum
eius; et Dominus Deus in tuba canet et vade<t> in turbine austri.
[18] Dominus exercituum proteget eos; et devorabunt et subii-
cient lapidibus funde; et bibentes inebriabunt<ur> quasi a vino et

replebuntur ut fíale et quasi cornua altaris. [19] Et salvabit eos

Dominus Deus eorum in die ilia ut gregem populi sui, quia
lapides sancti elevabuntur super terram eius. [20] Quid enim

5. percutiet V\ percucient L. ergo L: hec V.

6. rex V: res L.

7. superbiam; super super con. man.

8. auferam: autferam L.
9. iis L: his V. exactor: exaltor con. man.
12. et dissipabitur V: edisipabitur L.

13. fines V: tinis L.

15. annuntians: anuntiens L.

16. gladium fortium V: gladium L.
17. vadet V\ vade L.
18. inebriabuntur V: inebriabunt L.

256 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

accumulated silver as if it were earth and gold as if it were mud
from the streets. [5] Behold, the Lord will possess her and strike

at her strength in the sea, and she will be devoured by fire. [6]

Ashkelon will witness this and be afraid; Gaza as well will feel
great pain, and Ekron, for her hope is evanescent. The king of
Gaza will die, and Ashkelon will not be inhabited. [7] A stran-

ger will rule in Ashdod, and I will destroy the pride of the
Philistines. [8] I will take away the blood from his mouth and
the curses from between his teeth, and he too will be left to our
God. He will be like the leader of Judah and Ekron, like the

Jebusite. [9] And 1 will surround my house with those who

serve me in war, coming and going; no oppressor will overrun
them again, for now I have seen with my own eyes. [10] Re-
joice greatly, daughter of Zion; jump for joy, daughter ofjeru-
salem. [11] Behold, your king will come to you, the just one,
the saviour. He is poor, riding an ass and a colt, the foal of an

ass. [12] I will destroy the chariot from Ephraim and the horse
from Jerusalem; the warrior’s bow will be broken, and 1 will

speak of peace to the peoples. [13] His power will extend from
sea to sea and from the rivers to the ends of the earth. [14J You
also, because of the blood of your covenant you sent your pris-
oners out of the dry lake. [15] Return to the stronghold, pris-
oners of hope; today I declare that I will restore to you double.
[16] For I have bent Judah to me like a bow, and 1 have placed
Ephraim within it. I will stir up your children, Zion, against

your children, Greece; and I will make you a strong man’s

sword. [17] The Lord God will be seen over them, and his

arrow will go forth like lightning; the Lord God will sound the
trumpet and march forward in the southern whirlwind. [18]

The Lord of Hosts will protect them; they will conquer and
destroy with slingstones. Drinking, they will become ine-

briated as if with wine and will be filled like bowls, like the
horns of the altar. [19] And their Lord God will save them on
that day, the flock of his people, for holy stones will be raised
up over his land. [20] What could his goodness and beauty be.

i; n I r I o N and r ra ns i a i i on 2 5 7
 1

bonuni cst eius et quid pulcrum eius, nisi frumcntum clec-

torum ct viiiLim germinans virgines!

[iHi]

[i] Zacharias, capitulo 1

1°.

[2] “Si bonum est in oculis vestris, afferte mercedem meam

et, si non, quiescite”. [3] Et a<p>pcnderunt mercedem meam
triginta argénteos. [4] Et dixit Dominus ad me: “Proice illud ad
statuanum, decorum precium, quo a<p>preciatus sum'ab eis”.

[5] Et tuli triginta argénteos et proieci illos in domo Domini ad

statuarium. Et cetera.

[182]
[i] Zacharias, capitulo 13°.

[2] In die ilia erit fons patens domui David et habitantibus

Iherusalem in ablutionem peccatoris et menstruate. [3] Et erit

in die ilia, dicit Dominus /31 verso/ exercituum, disperdam

nomina idolorum de terra, et non memorabuntur ultra; et

pseudoprophetas et spiritum inmundum auferam de terra. [4]

Et erit: cum prophetaverit quispiam ultra, dicent ei pater eius et

mater eius, qui genuerunt eum: “Non vives, quia mendatium

locutus es in nomine Domini”; et configent eum pater eius et

mater eius, genitores eius, cum prophetaverit. [5] Et erit: in die

ilia confundentur prophete, unusquisque ex visione sua, cum

prophetaverit; nec operientur pallio saccino, ut mentiantur, [6]

sed dicet: “Non sum propheta; homo agricola ego sum, quo-
niam Adam exemplum meum ab adolescentia mea”. [7] Et
dicetur ei: “Quid sunt plage iste in medio manuum tuarum?”.

[8] Et dicet: “His plagatus sum in domo eorum, qui diligebant

me”. [9] Framea, suscitare super pastorem meum et super

virum co<h>erentem mihi, dicit Dominus exercituum. [10] Per-
cute pastorem, et dispergentur oves, et convertam manum
meam ad párvulos, [i i] Et erunt in omni terra, dicit Dominus:

(
181 ) man^

3. appenderunt V\ aprenderunt L.
5. tuli triginta V: tulit tringinta L. proieci progressi L in domo L: in

domum V.

(
182 ) man^
3. pseudoprophetas: speudoprophetas L.

5. mentiantur: inentiamtur L.
8. dicet V: dicent L.

2 5 S tun ION AND TRANSI AT ION

 1

except the grain of the chosen ones and the wine that produces
virgins!

[181]

[i] Zechariah, chapter 1

[2] If it is good in your eyes, bring my recompense, and if

not be silent. [3] And they payed out thirty pieces of silver as
my wages. [4] The Lord said to me, “Throw that into the statu-
ary, that magnificent sum, which they have established as my
value.” [5] And I took the thirty pieces of silver and threw
them into the statuary in the Lord’s house. Etc.

[182]

[1] Zecariah, chapter 13

[2] On that day the house of David and the inhabitants of

Jerusalem will have the use of a fountain for the cleansing of
sinners and of unclean women. [3] And on that day, says the

Lord of Hosts, I will obliterate the names of the idols of the

earth, and they will not be thought of again. I will carry off the

false prophets and the unclean And

spirit from the earth. [4]

when any man prophesies again, his father and mother who
brought him into the world will say to him, “You will not live,
for you have spoken a lie in the name of the Lord”; and his

father and mother, his parents, will render him powerless,

when he prophesies. [5] And on that day every prophet will
become confused when he prophesies, each by his own pro-
phetic vision; he will not put on a cloak of sackcloth in order to
deceive, [6] but will say, “I am not a prophet; I am a farmer, for

I have followed the example of Adam since my childhood.” [7]

He will be asked, “What are these wounds on the palms of your

hands?” [8] He will reply, “With these I was wounded in the

house of the ones who loved me.” [9) Awake, O sword, against
my shepherd and against the man who stands next to me, says

the Lord of Hosts. [10] Stnke the shepherd, and the sheep will

be scattered; and I will turn my hand to the little ones. [

1
1 ]

They will be spread throughout the entire earth, says the Lord;

LOn iON AND TRANSI ATION 2 5 9

 partes due in ea dispergentur et deficient, et <tercia pars relin-

quetur in ea; [12] et ducam> terciam partem per ignem et uram

eos, sicut uritur argentum, et probabo eos, sicut probatur
aurum: ipse vocabit nomen meum, et ego exaudiam eum. [13]

Et dicam; Populus mens es, et ipse dicet: “Dominus Deus

mens”. Et cetera.

II — 12. tercia . . . terciam V: terciam L.

12. uram: urram L.

260 to III ON AND TRANSLATION

two-thirds of them will die, but one-third will remain. [12] I

will lead the third part through fire and refine them as silver is

refined and test them as gold is tested; this one will call my
name and I will hear him clearly. [13] I will say, “You are my
people,” and he will say, “The Lord, my God.” Etc.

KDITION AND TRANS 1, A 1 1 ON 2 6 1

 /^2 recto/

(i «3 ]

[i] Zacharias, capitulo 14°.

[2] Ecce venient dics Domini, dicit Dorninus, et dividentur

spolia tua in medio tui, [3] et congregado omnes gentes ad
Iherusalem in prelium, et capietur civitas, et vastabuntur
domus, et mulieres violabuntur; et egredietur media pars civita-
tis in captivitatem, et reliquum populi non auferetur ex urbe.

[4] Et egredietur Dorninus et preliabitur contra gentes illas,

sicut preliatus est in die certaminis. [5] Et stabunt pedes eius in

die illa super montem Olivarum, qui est contra Iherusalem ad

orienten!; et scindetur mons Olivarum ex media parte sui ad

orienten! et ad occidentem, prerupto grandi valde, et separabi-

tur medium montis ad aquilonem et medium eius ad meridiem.

[6] Et fugietis ad vallen! montium eorum, quoniam coniun-

getur vallis montium usque ad proximum; et fugietis, sicut fu-

gistis a facie terremotus in diebus Osie regis luda, et veniet Do-

minus Deus meus, omnesque sancti cum eo. [7] Et erit: in die

illa non erit lux, sed frigus et gelu; [8] et erit dies una, que nota
est Domino, non dies ñeque nox; et in tempore vesperi erit lux.

[9] Et erit: in die illa exibunt aque vive de Iherusalem, medium

earum ad mare oriéntale, et medium earum ad mare novis-
simum: in estate et <in> hyeme erunt. [10] Et erit Dorninus rex

super omnem terram: / ^2 verso/ in die illa erit Dorninus unus,

et erit nomen eius unum. [i i] Et revertetur omnis terra usque
ad desertum, de colle Remmon ad austrum Iherusalem, et exal-
tabitur et habitabit in loco suo, a porta Beniamin usque ad
locum porte Prioris, et usque ad portan! Angulorum, et a turre

Ananehel usque ad torculada regis. [12] Et habitabunt in ea, et

(
183 ) matt^
2. Ecce . . . Domini V\ Ecce dies Domini veniunt L: dicit Dorninus, et
L: et V.

3. in prelium V: et prelium L.
4. preliabitur V: prevalebitur L.

5. aquilonem: equilonem L.

8. et in; supra et ent in corr. man.^.

9. et . . . hyeme l
':
et yemme L.

II. habitabit V: habitabitur L.

262 EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT ON I

l'«3l
[i] Zccariah, chapter 14

[2] Behold, the days are coming, says the Lord, when your
spoils will be divided among you, [3] and I will bring all the
people together in Jerusalem for battle, and the city will be
captured, the houses plundered, and the women raped. Half of

the citizens will go forth into captivity, but the remainder will

not leave. [4] The Lord will go forth to fight against those na-

tions, as he fought on the day of the battle. [5] His feet will

stand that day on the Mount of Olives, which lies before Jeru-
salem to the east; and the Mount of Olives will be divided in

half from east to west by a very wide valley, so that the two
separate halves of the mountain lie one to the east, one to the

west. [6] And you will flee to the valley of these mountains,
because this mountain valley will be joined to the next one;
you will flee just as you fled during the earthquake in the days
of Uzziah, king of Judah. And the Lord, my God, will come
with all of the holy ones. [7] On that day there will be no light,

but cold and frost. [8] There will be one continuous day,
known to the Lord, not day and night; and there will be light in

the evening. [9] On that day living waters will flow out of
Jerusalem, half to the eastern sea and half to the last sea; it will

continue throughout summer and winter. [10] And the Lord

will be the ruler of the whole earth; on that day the Lord will be
one and his name will be one. And the whole earth will
[11]

become desert, from the hills to Rimmon, south of Jerusalem;

but Jerusalem will be protected and will remain on its site, from
the gate of Benjamin to the place of the former gate and to the

gate of the corner, and from the tower of Hananel to the king’s

wine presses. [12] And they will live there, for there will be no

EDITION AND TRANSI ATION 263

 }

anathema non erit amplius; sed sedebit Iherusalem secura. [13]

Et hec erit plaga, qua percutiet Dominus omnes gentes, que
pugnaverunt adversus Iherusalem; tabescet caro un<i>uscuius-
que stantis super pedes suos, et oculi eius contabescent m
foraminibus suis, et lingua eorum contabescet in ore suo. [14]

In die ilia erit tumultus Domini magnus in eis, et apprehendet

vir manum proximi sui <et conseretur manus eius super manum
proximi sui>. [15] Sed et ludas pugnabit adversus Iherusalem, et

congregabuntur divide omnium gentium in circuitu, aurum et

argentum et vestes multe satis. [16] Et sic erit ruina equi et muli

et camelli et asini et omnium iumentorum, que fuerint in castris

illi<s>, sicut ruina hec. [17] Et omnes, qui reliqui fuerint de uni-
versis gentibus, que venerunt contra Iherusalem, ascendent ab
anno in annum, ut adorent Regem, Dominum exercituum, et

celebrent festivitatem Tabernaculorum. [18] Et erit; qui non

ascenderint recto/ de familiis terre ad Iherusalem, ut adorent
Regem, Dominum exercituum, non erit super eos imber. [19]
Quod et si familia Egipti non ascenderit et non venerit, nec

super eos erit; sed erit ruina, qua percutiet Dominus omnes
gentes, que non ascenderint ad celebrandam festivitatem
Tabernaculorum. [20] Hoc erit peccatum Egypti, et hoc pec-
catum omnium gentium, que non ascenderint ad celebrandam
festivitatem Tabernaculorum. [21] In die ilia erit quod super
frenum equi est; “Sanctum Domino”; et erunt lebetes in domo
Domini quasi phiale coram altari. [22] Et erit omnis lebes in

Iherusalem et in luda sanctificatus Domino exercituum; et ve-

nient omnes immolantes et sument ex eis et coquent in eis, et

non erit mercator ultra in domo Domini exercituum in die illo.

Et cetera.

14. sui . . . sui V: sui L.

18. ascenderint L: ascendent V. adorent L: adoret V.

19. qua V: que L.

22. sument: suniment L.

264 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

more curse, and Jerusalem will remain safe. [13] This will be
the plague with which the Lord will strike all the peoples who
fought against Jerusalem: their flesh will rot away while they are

still standing, and their eyes will rot m their sockets, and their

tongues will rot in their mouths. [14] On that day a great panic
from the Lord will come upon them, so that each man will take

hold of his neighbor’s hand; and his hand will be joined to his

neighbor’s hand. [15] And even Judah will wage war against

Jerusalem, and the wealth of all the neighboring peoples will be

assembled, gold and silver and garments in great abundance.

[16] A similar catastrophe will fall upon the horses and mules

and camels and asses and all beasts of burden that are in those

camps. [17] Then every one who survives from all the peoples

who have come against Jerusalem will go year after year to

worship the king, the Lord of Hosts, and to celebrate the feast

of the Tabernacles. [18] And any of the families of the earth

who do not go to Jerusalem to worship the King, the Lord of

Hosts, will be without rain. [19] For if the family of Egypt does

not come, it will not have rain but the plague with which the
Lord afflicts all peoples who do not go to celebrate the feast of
the Tabernacles. [20] This will be the punishment ofEgypt and
of all the peoples who do not go to celebrate the feast of the
Tabernacles. [21] On that day “Holy to the Lord’’ will be in-

scribed on the bridles of the horses, and the pots in the house of
the Lord will be like bowls before the altar. [22] And every
cauldron in Jerusalem and in Judah will be sacred to the Lord of
Hosts, and who come to sacrifice will select from among
all

them and cook in them. And on this day there will no longer be
merchants in the house of the Lord of Hosts. Etc.

K D in O N AND r R AN S 1 A I I ON 265
 [ 1 ]
Es temperancia, tiento e manera

que todos contino devenios tener

en nunca temptar, dezir ni hazer

cosa que deva no ser hazedera.

[2] Es esta la larga e estrecha carrera

a do de contino virtud es hallada,

sin ser cometida ni ser salteada

del vicio ni del quedarle dentera.

(184) man^
1. nunca L: nunqua J. temptar L: tentar J. deva L: deve J.
2. quedarle J: quedalle L.
[184]

[i] Temperance is the caution

that we should always maintain,

never attempting to say or do

anything that should not be done.

It is the long and narrow road

where virtue is always found,

where we are not enslaved or assaulted

by vice or jealousy.

K nn ON
I ANO r RA NSLA r 1 ON 267
 verso/

l'«5l

[i] “Quare fremuerunt gentes”, et cetera. [2] Dicunt Hebrei

moderni quod David fecit hunc psalmum laudando Deum de
victoria habita de Philisteis, qui ascenderunt.

(185) man^

268 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

|i85l

[i
]
“Why did people clamor,” etc. [2] Modern Hebrews say

that David wrote this psalm to praise God for the victory

achieved over the Philistines, who had risen up.

K D in O N AND r R A N S I A 1 I ON 269
 /^4 recto/

/34 oerso/

1
1 «6] [2]

[i] De presentí et futuro.

[3]

Ysaias, capitulo 2°.

[3] Cura Et erit in novissimis diebus preparatus mons'' domus

prophete est
Domini in verdee montium, et elevabitur super colles; et fluent
de vocatione
gentium et
ad eum omnes gentes. [4] Et ibunt populi multi et dicent: “Ve-

de adventu nite, ascendamus ad montem Domini, ad domum Dei lacob, et

Christi. docebit nos vias suas, et ambulabimus in semitis eius”; quia de
[3] leremias
Sion exibit lex, et verbum Domini de Iherusalem.
in suo
prologo.
(1871
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 5°.

[2] Et elevabit signum in nationibus procul; et sibilabit ad

eum de finibus terre; et ecce festinus velociter veniet.

|188|
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 6°.

[2] Et dixit: “Donee desolentur civitates absque habitatore,

et domus sine homine, et terra relinquetur deserta”. [3] Et
longe faciet Dominus homines, et multiplicabitur que derelicta

fuerat in medio terre; [4] et ad<h>uc in ea decimatio, et conver-

tetur et erit in ostensionem sicut terebintos et sicut quercos,

que expandir ramos suos. [5] Semen sanctum erit id quod ste-

terit in ea.

(1H6) ntan^\ postls. niati'.

3. elevabitur: ellevabitur L.
4. ascendamus L: et ascendamus V. ad domum L: et ad domum V.

(
187 )
2. ad eum V: ad Deum L.

(
188 ) mau^

270 EDIT ION AND TRANSI. ATION

A
 [
I
]
On the present and the future

[2] Isaiah, chapter 2

[3] The^ [3] During the final days, the mountain of the house of the
prophet’s Lord will be established as the highest of the mountains and will
concern is
be elevated above the hills; and all of the people will flow to
the calling of
the peoples it.
[4] Many peoples will come and say, “Come, let us go up to
and the the mountain of the Lord, to the house of the God ofjacob; he
coming of
will teach us his ways, and we will walk in his paths.” For the
Christ.
Jeremiah law will go out from Zion and the word of the Lord from
[3]
in his Jerusalem.
prologue
[i«7]

[i] Isaiah, chapter 5

[2] He will raise the banner among the distant nations, and
they will call to him from the ends of the earth; behold, he will

come swiftly.

(188]

[1] Isaiah, chapter 6

[2] Then he said, “Until the cities are devastated and unin-
habited, the houses are empty, and the earth is left desolate.” [3]

The Lord will move men far away and the desolate places

throughout the earth will be increased; [4] and although a mere

tenth part of it remains, this will be transformed and stretched
forth, like a turpentine tree or an oak tree, extending its

branches. [5] What remains of it will be the holy seed.

i; 1) I T 1 O N AND T R A N S I A 1 I ON 2 7 1
 [iH 9 ]

[2] [i] Ysaias, capitulo 8°.

Congrcgamini, populi, et vincimini; et audite, universe

procul terre.

[190]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 12°.

[2] Notas facite in populis adinventiones eius; mementote

/55 recto/ quoniam excelsum est nomen eius. [3] Cantate Do-
mino, quoniam magmfice fecit; a<n>nuntiate hoc in universa

terra. [4] Exulta et lauda, habitado Sion, quia magnus in medio

[3]
tui Sanctus Israel.

[191]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 18°.

[2]Ve terre cymbalo alarum, que est trans flumen Ethiopie!

Qui mittit in mare legatos, et in vasis papyri super aquas:
“Ite, angeli veloces, ad gentem convulsam et dilaceratam, ad
populum terribilem, post quern non est alius, ad gentem ex-
<s>pectantem et conculcatam, cuius diripuerunt flumina terram
eius, montem nominis Domini exercituum, montem
ad
Syon”. [4] Omnes habitatores orbis qui moramini in terra, cum
elevatum fuerit signum in montibus, videbitis et clangorem
tube audietis. [5] Quia hec dicit Dominus ad me: “Ego quie-
scam et considerabo in loco meo, sicut meridiana lux clara est et

sicut nubes roris in die messis”. [6] Ante messem enim totus

effloruit et inmatura perfectio germinabit, et precidentur

ramusculi eius falcibus et, que derelicta fuerint, abscindentur

<et> excutientur; [7] et relinquentur simul avibus montium et

(
189 ) matt^
2. vincimini V: vimcemini L.

(
190 ) ntatt^

2. Notas facite V: Notans ficite L.

(
191 )

2 cymbalo: cinbalo L.
.

3. papyri: papani L. diripuerunt V: dirupuerunt L. eius . . . Syon L:

eius V.

5. Ego quiescam L: Quiescam V.

6. Ante V: Autem L. germinabit V: germinavit L. ramusculi . . . fal-

cibus V: ramniusculi eius falsibus L. et excutientur V\ excutientur L.

272 EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT I ÜN

1
1
89)

[
I
]
Isaiah, chapter 8

[2] Gather together, O peoples, and be overcome; and lis-

ten, all you far otf lands.

[190]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 12

[2] Make his marvels known to the people; remember that

his name is exalted. [3] Sing to the Lord, for he has performed
magnificently; make this known to the whole earth. [4] Re-
joice and give praise, O inhabitant of Zion, for the Holy One
of Israel is great among you.

[191]

[1] Isaiah, chapter 18

[2] Woe to the land, to the whirring of wings, across the

Ethiopian river! [3] Who sends ambassadors by sea, in vessels of
papyrus upon the waters: “Go, swift angels, to the shattered
and torn folk, to the terrible people, after whom there will not

be another, to the expectant and despised, whose land the rivers

have torn apart, to the mountain of the name of the Lord of

Hosts, Mount Zion.” [4] All you inhabitants of the world who
linger on the earth, you will see when the signal is raised upon
the mountain, and you will hear the sound of the trumpet. [5]

This is what the Lord said to me: I will rest and meditate in my
place, as the midday light is bright and the clouds of dew on the
day of harvest. [6] Before the harvest, everything has bloomed
and sprouted ahead of time, and their branches will be cut with
a pruning knife, and those that have been abandoned will be
uprooted and thrown away; [7] and they will be left together to

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 2 7 3

 bestiis tcrre; ct estate perpetua erunt super eum volucres, et

omnes bestie terre super ilium hyemabunt. [8] In tempore illo

deferetur munus Domino exercituum a populo divulso et

dilacerato, a populo terribili, post quern non fuit alius, a gente

ex<s>pectante et conculcata, cuius diripuerunt flumina terram

eius, ad locum nominis Domini exercituum, montem Syon.

274 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

the birds ot the mountain and to the beasts of the earth; and the
birds will be above them in the eternal summer, and all the

beasts ot the earth will spend the winter over them. [8] At that

time an offering will be brought to the Lord of Hosts by the

shattered and torn folk, by the ternble people after whom there
will not be another, by the expectant and despised, whose land
the rivers have torn apart, to the place of the name of the Lord
of Hosts, Mount Zion.

H 1)111 ON AND IRANSl. ATION 2 7 5

 /S5 verso/

[192]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 26°.

[2] In die ilia cantabitur canticum istud in terra luda: “Urbs

fortitudinis nostre <Syon>; salvator ponetur in ea murus et an-
temurale. [3] Aperite portas, et ingrediatur gens iusta, custo-
diens veritatem. [4] Vetus error abiit; servabis pacem: pacem,
quia in te speravimus”.

[193]
[i] Ysaias, capitulo 33°.

[2] “Audite, qui longe estis, que fecerim, et cognoscite,

vicini, fortitudinem meam”. [3] Conte<r>riti sunt in Syon pec-

catores, possedit timor ipocritas.

[4] Regem in decore <suo> videbunt oculi eius, cement ter-

ram de longe.
[5] Respice Syon civitatem solempnitatis nostre! Oculi tui

videbunt Iherusalem, habitationem opulentam, tabernaculum

quod nequáquam transferri poterit; nec auferentur clavi eius in

sempiternum, et cetera.

(
192 ) mati^
1. 26: 25 s.l. con. man.
2. nostre Syon V\ nostre L. salvator: supra et salvator corr. man.
3. ingrediatur V: ingredietur L.

(
193 ) man^
3. timor L: tremor V.
4. decore suo V: decore L.
5. Iherusalem V\ in Iherusalem L.

276 EDITION AND IRANSLAIION

A
[192]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 26

[2] On that day this song will be sung in the land of Judah;
“The city of our strength is Zion; the saviour will place around
her a wall and outworks. [3] Open the gates, and the just people

will enter, protecting the truth. [4] The former uncertainty has
vanished. You will keep the peace; peace, for we have trusted
in you.

[03]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 33

You who are far away, hear what

[2] I will do; and know,
you who are near, my strength. [3] The sinners in Zion have
been frightened; the hypocrites felt terror.

[4] His eyes will see the king in his beauty; they will see the
land from afar.

[5] Look, Zion, at the city of your solemnity! Your eyes will
see Jerusalem, the opulent dwelling, the tabernacle that cannot

be moved by any means; nor will its nails be removed through-

out eternity, etc.

EDITION AND 1 RA N S I. AT I ON 277

 /^b recto/

\"m\
[ij Primo Paralipomcnon, capitulo 17°.

[2]“Nunc itaquc, sic loqucris ad servum meum David: Hec

dicit Dominus exercituum: Ego tuli te, cum in pascuis seque-
reris gregem, ut esses dux populi mei Israel; [3] et fui tecum,
quocumque perrexisti, et interfeci omnes inimicos tuos coram
te fecique tibi nomen quasi unius magnorum, qui celebrantur

in terra. [4] Et dedi locum populo meo Israel: plantabitur et

habitabit in eo, et ultra non conmovebitur, nec filii iniquitatis

atterent eos sicut a principio ex diebus, quibus dedi indices

populo meo Israel et humiliavi universo<s> inimicos tuos. [5]

A<n>nuntio ergo tibi quod edificaturus sit tibi Dominus

domum. [6] Cumque impleveris dies tuos, ut vadas ad patres
tuos, suscitabo semen tuum post te, quod erit de filiis tuis, et

stabiliam regnum eius. [7] Ipse edificabit mihi domum, et fir-

mabo solium eius usque in eternum. [8] Ego ero ei in patrem, et

ipse erit mihi in filium; et misericordiam meam non auferam ab

eo, sicut abstuli ab eo, qui ante te fuit. [9] Et statuam eum in

domo mea et in regno meo usque in sempiternum, et tronus

eius erit firmissimus in perpetuum”. [10] luxta omnia verba hec
et iuxta universam visionem istam, sic locutus est Natam ad
David. Et cetera.

(
194 ) man^
I. Paralipomenon: Paralipomenum L.

3. perrexisti: peresisti L.
6. impleveris V\ implebens L.
10. Iuxta omnia: lusta omnia L. et iuxta: et lusta L.

278 F D rr O N
I AND T H A N S I. A T I ON
i>94]
[i] I Chronicles, chapter 17

[2] Now, therefore, you will speak in this way to my servant

David. This is what the Lord of Hosts says; I took you, al-

though you were a shepherd following your flock, in order to

make you the leader of my people, Israel; [3) and I was with
you, wherever you went. I killed in your presence all your
enemies, and I put your name on an equal status with the great
ones that are celebrated on earth. [4] I gave a place to my peo-
ple Israel: it will be cultivated and they will inhabit it; it will

never again be disturbed, nor will the children of iniquity de-

stroy my people as in the past, in the days in which I gave
judges to my people Israel and humbled all their enemies. [5]

Moreover, I declare to you that the Lord will build you a

house. [6] When you have fulfilled your days and are going to
your fathers, I will raise up your oflspring after you, one of your
children, and establish his kingdom. [7] He will build a house
for me, and I will support his throne eternally. [8] I will be a

father to him, and he will be a son to me; I will not withdraw

my mercy from him as I did from the one who who came
before you. [9] I will establish him in my house and in my
kingdom forever, and his throne will be the most secure for-
ever. [10] In accord with these words and with this entire vi-

sion, thus spoke Nathan and David. Etc.

hOlTION AND TRANSI A I ION 279

 1

/3í> verso/

[> 95 l
(2]
[i] 1
° Paralipomenon, capitulo 23°.

Requiem dedit Dominus Deus Israel populo suo et habi-

tatio<n>em Iherusalem usque in eternum; [3] nec erit officii

Levitarum, ut ultra portent tabernaculum et omnia vasa eius ad

ministrandum. Et cetera.

[196]
[i] 1
° Paralipomenon, capitulo 28°.

[2] Convocavit igitur David omnes principes Israel, et cete-

[5]
ra.

[6]
[3] “Cogitavi ut edificaren! domum, in qua requiesc<er>et
archa federis Domini” et cetera.

[4] “Salamon filius tuus edificabit domum meam et atria

mea; ipsum enim mihi <elegi> in filium, et ego ero ei in patrem.

Et firmabo regnum eius usque in eternum, si perseveraverit

facere precepta mea et iudicia, sicut et <h>odie”. Et cetera.

Si quesieris eum, invenies; si autem dereliqueris eum,
proiciet te in eternum. Et cetera.

[197]
[i] 1
° Paralipomenon, capitulo 29°.

[2] Tria milia talenti auri de auro Ophir et cetera.

[3] Scio, Deus meus, quod probes corda et simplicitatem

diligas et cetera.

(
195 ) man^
3. tabernaculum: tarbernaculum L.

(
196 ) man^
3. requiesceret V: requiescet L.

4. edificabit V: edificavit L. mihi elegi V\ mihi L.

6. dereliqueris: derelinquens L.

( 197 ) man^

280 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[• 95 ]
[2]
[i] I Chronicles, chapter 23

The Lord God of Israel gave peace to his people and a

dwelling place in Jerusalem for all eternity; [3] it will no longer

be the duty of the Levites to carry the tabernacle and all of its

necessary utensils. Etc.

[196]
[i] 1 Chronicles, chapter 28

[2] David called together all the princes of Israel, etc.

[3] I have planned to build a house in which the Ark of the

Covenant of the Lord will rest, etc.

[4] Solomon your son will build my house and my courts; I

chose him as my son, and I will be his father. [5] I will establish

his kingdom forever, as long as he perseveres in following my

precepts and my judgments, just as today. Etc.

[6] If you seek him, you will find him; if you abandon him,
he will cast you out forever. Etc.

[197]
[i] I Chronicles, chapter 29

[2] Three thousand talents of gold from the gold of Ophir,

etc.

[3] I know, my God, that you test the heart and love sim-

plicity.

EDITION AND TRANSI A I ION 2 S I

 [198]

1
1
1
2° Paralipomcnon, capitulo 6°.

[2] Nunc ergo, Domine, Deus Israel, imple servo tuo patri

meo /57 recto/ David, quecumque locutus es dicens: [3] “Non

deficiet ex te vir coram me, qui sedeat super tronum Israel, ita

tamen si custodierint filii tui vias suas et ambulaverint in lege

mea, sicut et tu ambulasti coram me”. Et cetera.

U99]
[i] 2° Paralipomenon, capitulo 7°.
[3]

[2] Apparuit autem ei Dominus nocte et ait: “Audivi ora-

tionem tuam et elegi locum istum mihi in domum sacrificii”.

Et cetera.
“Tu quoque, si ambulaveris coram me, sicut ambulavit
David pater tuus, et feceris iuxta omnia, que precepi tibi, et

iustitias meas iudiciaque servaveris, [4] suscitabo tronum regni

tui, sicut pollicitus sum David patri tuo dicens: ‘Non auferetur
de stirpe tua vir, qui sit princeps in Israel’. [5] Si autem a<d>versi

fueritis et <de>reliqueritis iustitias meas et precepta mea, que

proposui vobis, et abeuntes servieritis diis alienis et adoraveritis

eos, [6] evellam vos de terra mea, quam dedi vobis, et domum
banc, qua<m> edificavi nomini meo, proiciam a facie mea et

tradam earn in parabolam et in exemplum cunctis populis. [7]

Et domus ista erit in proverbium universis transeuntibus et di-

cent stupentes: ‘Quare fecit Dominus sic terre huic et domui

/57 verso/ huic?’. [8] Respondebuntque: ‘Quia dereliquerunt
Dominum, Deuni patrum suorum, qui eduxit eos de terra
Egipti, et a<p>prehenderunt deos alienos et adoraverunt eos et

coluerunt, idcirco venerunt super eos universa hec mala’ ”.

(
198 ) man^
1. 2° . . . 6°; supra Paralipomenon, capitulo 6°, libro 2 ° corr. man.
2. imple V\ inples L.
3. suas V: meas L.
(
199 ) man^
3. David: add. s. 1 . man^.

4. qui sit V: qui non sit L.

5. dereliqueritis V: reliquentis L.

6. hanc, quam I': hanc, qua L. edificavi L: sanctificavi D

8. dereliquerunt: derelinquerunt L. idcirco: iccirco L.

282 EDITION AND TRAN S 1, AT I ON

[19H]

[
I
]
2 Chronicles, chapter 6

[2] Therefore, Lord, God of Israel, fulfill now through your

servant, my father David, all that you had promised, saying: [3]

In my presence a man to sit on the throne of Israel who is

descended from you will not be lacking, as long as your chil-

dren respect my ways and follow my laws, as you have followed

them in my presence. Etc.

[• 99 ]

[1] 2 Chronicles, chapter 7

[2] Then God appeared to him in the night and said, “I have
heard your prayer and I have chosen for myself this place as a

house of sacrifice.” Etc.

[3] You also, if you walk before me, as did David your fa-
ther, and if you do all the things that I have taught you and
preserve my precepts and commandments, [4] I will establish

the throne of your kingdom, just as I promised David your

father, saying, “A man to rule Israel will not fail to be found
-among your offspring.” [5] If, however, you turn away and
abandon my precepts and commandments, which I have pro-
posed to you, and go to serve strange gods and worship them,
[6] I will uproot you from my land, which I gave to you; and I

will remove from my sight this house, which I built in my

name, and deliver it as a symbol and an example to all the peo-

ples. [7] This house will be a proverb for all who pass by, who
will say in astonishment, ‘‘Why did the Lord do these things to

this land and this house?” [8] And they will answer: ‘‘Because

they abandoned the Lord, the God of their fathers, who led

them out of Egypt; and they took strange gods and worshipped

them and protected them. Therefore all these evils fell upon
them.”

EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT I ON 3

 [200]

[i] 2 Paralipomenon, capitulo 8°.

[2] Omnia quecumque voluit, fecit rex Salamon atque di-

sposuit, edificavit in Iherusalem et in Libano et in universa terra

et cetera.

[3] Tunc abiit Salomon in Asiongaber et in Hailath ad oram

maris Rubri, que est in terra Edom. [4] Misit ergo ei Hiram per
manus servorum suorum naves et nautas gnaros maris; et abie-
runt cum servis Salomonis in Ophir tuleruntque irtde qua-
dri<n>genta quinquaginta talenta auri et a<t>tulerunt ad regem
Salomonem.

(
200 ) man^
2. voluit . . Salamon L\ voluit Salomon V.
.

4. ergo L: autem V. Hiram; supra Hiram Hiram corr. man. gnaros: supra et

gnaros corr. man.

284 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[200]

[i] 2 Chronicles, chapter 8

[2] King Solomon planned and accomplished whatever he

wished to build in Jerusalem, in Lebanon, and throughout the
entire land, etc.

[3] Then Solomon went to Eziongeber and to Eloth, at the

mouth of the Red Sea in the land of Edom. [4] Therefore,

Hiram sent to him in the care of his servants ships and sailors

having knowledge of the ocean. They went with the servants

of Solomon to Ophir and took from there a sum of four hun-
dred fifty gold talents and brought it to King Solomon.

KDi riON AND TRANSI ATION 285

 1

/^S recto/

[201]
Item 1
° Paralipomenon, capitulo 16.
[1]

[2] In illo die, fecit David principem ad confitendum Do-

mino Asaph et fratres eius: [3] “Confitemini Domino, et invó-
cate nomen eius, notas facite in populis adinventiones eius”. Et
cetera. Ul‘ ‘Cantate Domino, omnis terra, annuntiate ex die in
diem salutare eius. [5] Narrate in gentibus gloriam erus, et in

cunctis populis mirabilia eius. [6] Quia magnus Dominus et

laudabilis niniis et horribilis super omnes deos; [7] omnes enim

dii populorum ydola, Dominus autem celos fecit. [8] Confessio
et magnificentia coram eo, fortitudo et gaudium in loco eius.

[9] Afferte Domino, familie populorum, afferte Domino glo-

riam et imperium; [10] date gloriam Domino nomini eius, lé-

vate sacrifitium et venite in conspectu eius et adórate Domi-

num in decore sancto. [ii] Commoveatur a fade eius omnis
terra; ipse enim fundavit orbem immobilem. [12] Letentur celi,

et exultet terra, et dicant in nationibus: ‘Dominus regnavit!’.

[13] Tonet mare et plenitudo eius, exultent agri et omnia, que

in eis sunt. [14] Tunc laudabunt ligna saltus coram Domino,
quia venit iudicare terram. [15] Confitemini Domino, quo-
niam bonus, quoniam in eternum misericordia eius. [16] Et di-
cite: ‘Salva nos, Deus salvator noster, et congrega nos et erue de

gentibus, ut confiteamur nomini sancto tuo et exultemus in

carminibus tuis. [17] Benedictos Dominus, Deus Israel, ab

eterno usque in eternum’ ”. [18] Et dicat omnis populus:
‘‘Amen!” et ‘‘Hymnum Deo!”.

[202]

[1] Dopo el peccato delli primi parent! cadendo Thomo de

male en pegio, perdete la simiglian(;:a de Dio et, como dice el
psalmista, prese similitudine de bestia.

(201) man'
5. et in L: in V.

7. enim V: etenim L.
1 8. Deo L: Domino V.

(
202 ) man*'

I. Dopo: doDopo L. prese: prese prese L.

286 EDITION AND TRANSI. AT ION

(201]
[i] Also from i Chronicles, chapter i6

[2] On that day David designated Asaph as the first, with his

brothers, to praise the Lord: [3] F^raise God and call his name;
make his marvels known to the people. Etc. [4] Sing to the
Lord, all the earth. Make his salvation known from day to day.

[5] Describe his glory to the peoples, his marvels to each and
every person. [6] For the Lord is great and greatly to be praised,

more terrible than any god. [7] All the peoples’ gods are idols;

the Lord, however, made the heavens. [8] Praise and magnifi-
cence are before him; strength and joy in his place. [9] Bring to
the Lord, families of the peoples, bring to the Lord glory and

power. [10] Give glory to the Lord in his name. Lift up offer-

ings and come before him. Worship the Lord in his holy

beauty. [11] Let the whole earth be shaken in his sight, for he

founded the immovable earth. [12] Let the heavens rejoice and
the earth exalt; let them say to the nations, “The Lord has

reigned!” [13] The sea and all its inhabitants will thunder out;

the fields and all that is within them will exalt. [14] Then the

trees of the forest will give praise before the Lord, before he has
come to judge the earth. [15] Praise the Lord for he is good and
his mercy is eternal. [
1
6] And say, “Save us, O God our saviour;
gather us together and uproot us from the people so that we
may praise your holy name and sing your songs of exultation.

[
1
7] Blessed is the Lord, God of Israel, from now and for ever.”
1
1
8] Let all the people say amen and recite a hymn to God.

[202]

[
I
]
After the sin of the first parents, man, falling from bad to

worse, lost the resemblance to God and, as the psalmist says,

took on the likeness of a beast.

rOITION AND TRANSI AT ION 2S7

 /^S persa/

[i] Memorare. [ 1 ]
Memorare con grand tiento,

o hombre qualquier que seas,

tener siempre en pensamiento

a Dios e su ma<n>damiento,

si con él reynar deseas.

Para mientes que proveas,

pues nescessario es morir,

qu’en el tiempo del partyr

el camino llano veas.

[2] Nopissima [2] Nopissima proveyeron

siempre los sanctos varones:

del mundo se suspendieron,

a Christo siempre sirvieron

sufriendo tribulationes.

Dexando las afectiones

carnales de vanidad,

déveste con humildad

refrenar de tus passiones.

(203) niatt^; postls.

288 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[i] Remember [•203]

[ 1 ]
Remember carefully,

whoever you may be,

to hold God and his commandments

always in your thoughts,

if you wish to rule with him.

Prepare your mind,

for it is necessary to die,

so that at the time of parting

you see the way clearly.

[
2 ] The final [2] The holy men were always
days
preparing for the final days;

they separated themselves from the world,

and served Christ unceasingly,

suffering tribulations,

avoiding vain carnality.

You must humbly

control your passions.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 2X9

 /j¡9 recto/

/59 verso/

[204I

[1] Séneca in VII° tragetide Medee in choro: “Audax

nimium”.

[2] Venient annis

sécula seris, quibus Occeanus

vincula rerum laxet, et ingens

patear te<l>lus Tiphisque novos

detegat orbes, nec sit terris

ultima Tille.

[205]

[i] Vernán los tardos años del mundo, ciertos tiempos en los
quales el mar Oc(;:éano afloxerá los atamentos de las cosas e se

abrirá una grande tierra; [2] e um nuebo marinero como aquel

que fue guya de Jasón, que obe nombre Tiphi, descobrirá
nuebo mundo e entonces non será la ysla Tille la postrera de las

tierras.

[206]

[i] El año 1494 estando yo en la isla Saona, que es al cabo

oriental de la ysla Española, obo eclipsis de la luna a 14 de Se-
«

tiembre, e se falló que había diferen<;:ia de alí al cabo de S. Vi-

cente en Portugal (;:inco oras e más de media.

(204) man^
2. Venient L: Veniunt S. tellus: tdus L. Tille L: Tile T, Thylae S.
(205) mati^
(206) man^

290 H Dn oN
1 AND I R A N S L A r I oN

k
[
204 ]

[i] Seneca, book 7 of the tragedy of Medea, from the chorus

“Audax nimium”

[2] During the last years of the world,

the time will come in which Oceanus

will loosen the bounds, and a huge landmass
will appear; Tiphys will discover new worlds,

and Thule will no longer be the most remote land.

[205]

[i] During the last years of the world, the time will come in

which the Ocean sea will loosen the bounds and a large land-

mass will appear. [2] A new sailor like the one named Tiphys,
who was the guide of Jason, will discover a new world, and
then Thule will no longer be the most remote land.

[206]

[1] On September 14 of the year 1494, while 1 was on the

island Saona, which is at the eastern tip of Hispaniola, an eclipse

of the moon took place; we found a difference of more than

five and one-half hours from where we were to the Cape of St.
Vincent in Portugal.

h 1) I T I O N AND T K A N S I A r 1 ON 2 9 1
 [
207 ]

[i] Juebes, 29 de Febrero de 1504, estando yo en las Yndias

en la ysla de Janahica, en el poerto que se diz de S. Gloria, que
es casi en el medio de la ysla, de la parte septentrional, obo
eclipsis de la luna; [2] e porque el comien(;:o fue primero que el

sol se pusiese, non pude notar salvo el término de quando la

luna acabó de bolver en su claridad. [3] E esto fue muy cer-

tificado: dos oras y media pasadas de la noche, (j:inco afnpolletas

muy ciertas.

[4] La diferen<;:ia del medio de la ysla de Janahica en las

Yndias con la ysla de Cális en España es siete oras e quynze

minutos, de manera que en Cális se puso el sol primero que en
Janahica con siete oras e quynze minutos de ora. [5] Vide Al-
manach.
[6] En el poerto de S. Gloria en Janahica se al^a el polo diez
e ocho grados, estando las guardas en el bra^o.

(
207 ) matí^

292 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[
207 ]

[i] Thursday, February 29, 1504, while I was in the Indies

on the island ofjamaica in the port called Santa Gloria, which is

almost in the center of the island in the northern part, there was
an eclipse of the moon. [2] Because it began before the sun had
set, I was able only to make note of the time when the moon
had returned to its brightness. [3] This was accurately regis-
tered: two and one-half hours after sunset, that is, exactly five

hourglasses.

[4] The difference from the middle of the island ofjamaica

in the Indies to the island of Calis in Spain is seven hours and
fifteen minutes, so that in Calis the sun sets earlier than in
Jamaica by seven hours and fifteen minutes. [5] Refer to the
Almanac.
[6] In the port of Santa Gloria in Jamaica the polestar rises

eighteen degrees when the guards are in the arm.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 2 9 3

 /bo recto/

[208]

[1] Luce <capitulo> primo.

[2] “Ecce enim ex hoc beatam me dicent omnes genera-

dones” .
[3] Glosa: Id est ludei et gentiles. [4] Ex omnibus
generationibus aliqui sunt conversi ad fidem, qui confitentur

[ 5] Nota in istam virginem beatam. [5] Hoc etiam patet in Saracenis; unde
Alchorano. in Alcorano Machometi dicitur: [6] “De Maria virgine dixe-

runt angeli: O Maria, Deus annuntiat tibi verbum ex ipso, et

erit nomen eius lesus, filius Marie”. [7] Et alibi, in eodem libro,

dixerunt angeli: [8] ‘‘O Maria, Deus utique elegit te, purificavit

te, et elegit te clarani super mulieres seculorum” et cetera.

[209]
[i] Mathei <capitulo> 8.

[2] ‘‘Dico autem vobis quod multi ab oriente et occidente

venient et recumbent cum Abraam et Isaac et lacob in regno
celorum”.

[3] Glosa: Quia multi tudo gentilium in diversis partibus

orbis existentium per predicationem apostolorum conversa est

ad fidem.

[210]
[i] Mathei <capitulo> 11 °.

[2] ‘‘Ecce Magi ab oriente venerunt Hierosolimam dicentes:

[3] ‘Ubi est qui natus est rex ludeorum? Vidimus enim stellam

eius in oriente et venimus adorare eum’ ”.

[4] Glosa: Per hoc figurabatur quod fides Christi erat a gen-
ti<li>bus devote recipienda et cetera. [5] Quia magi, qui gentiles

erant, ipsum Christum devote quesierunt et inventum adorave-

runt et cetera.

[6] Unde et in hymno canitur: [7] ‘‘Sic magi ab ortu solis per
stelle inditium portantes tipum gentium primi offerunt mu-
ñera”.

(208) man'', postl. man'.

8. purificavit L: et purificavit B.
(209) man'
(210) man'
4. hoc L: hoc et B. gentilibus 6 gentibus
: L.

294 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [
208 ]
[2]
I
]
Luke, chapter i
[3] [

Behold, henceforth all generations will call me blessed.

Commentary: That is, Jews and Gentiles. [4] People from all

generations have been converted to the faith and acknowledge

[5] Note in that this virgin is blessed. [5] This is clear even among the Sarac-
the Koran
ens, the Koran of Mohammed contains the following: [6]

About the Virgin Mary, the angels have said, “O Mary, God
makes known to you the Word proceeding from himself, and
his name will be Jesus, the son of Mary.” [7] And in another
place in the same book, the angels said: [8] “O Mary, God
chose you, purified you, and designated you to be the most
renowned among women throughout the ages.” Etc.

[209]
[i] Matthew, chapter 8

[2] 1 tell you that many from the east and from the west will

come and will recline with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob in the

kingdom of heaven.
[3] Commentary: For a multitude of people living in differ-
ent parts of the world has been converted to the faith through
the preaching of the apostles.

[210]

[1] Matthew, chapter 2

[2] men have come from the east to Jerusalem,

Behold, wise
saying: [3] Where is he who was born the king of the Jews? For

we saw his star in the east and we have come to worship him.
[4] Commentary: The significance of this passage is that the

faith of Christ had to be received with devotion by the Gen-

tiles, etc. [5] For the wise men, who were Gentiles, sought this

Christ devoutly and when they found him, worshipped him,

etc.

[6] For this reason, the following words are sung in a hymn:
[7] Thus, guided by the star, the wise men from the east, sym-
bolizing the Gentiles, were the first to offer gifts.

r 1)111 ON AND TRANSI A r ION 2 9 5

 1

/6o I'crso/

[21 I
]

ji] lohannis <capitulo> lo.

[2] “Ego sum pastor bonus: et cognosco oves meas, et co-

gnoscunt me mee”. Et cetera. [3] “Et alias oves babeo, que non
sunt ex hoc ovili, et illas oportet me adducere, et vocem meam
audient et fiet unum ovile et unus pastor”.

[4] Glosa Nicolay et cetera.

[5] Et ne crederetur quod solum pro ludeis deberet mori,

propter hoc quod dicitur Mathei 15: [6] “Non sum missus nisi

ad oves, que perierunt, domus Israel”. [7] Ideo hoc removet,

dicens: “Et alias oves habeo, que non sunt ex hoc ovili”, idest

de synagoga ludeorum, sed de populo gentili. [8] “Et illas

oportet me adducere”: quod factum est per predicationem

apostolorum, ut habetur Actuum XIII°, Christo principaliter

operante in eorum predicatione, secundum quod dicitur Marci

ultimo: [9] “Illi autem profecti predicaverunt ubique, Domino
cooperante” et cetera. [10] “Et vocem meam audient”: quia
ludeis repellentibus fidem Christi, gentiles earn devote recepe-

runt ad predicationem apostolorum, secundum quod habetur

Actuum XIII°, ubi dicitur quod Paulus et Barnabas dixerunt
ludeis: [ii] “Vobis oportebat primum loqui verbum Dei; sed
quoniam repellitis illud et indignos vos iudicatis vite eterne,
ecce convertimur ad gentes. [12] Sic enim nobis precepit Do-
minus”. [13] Et sequitur: “Audientes ergo gentes gavise sunt et

glorificabant verbum Domini”. [14] “Et fiet unum ovile”, idest

una Ecclesia ex ludeis et gentilibus collecta et cetera.

[212]
[i] Gregorius.

[2] Quia non solum ludeam, sed etiam gentilitatem redi-

mere venerat, adiungit: [3] “Et alias oves habeo, que non sunt
ex hoc ovili”.

(
211 ) man^
8. oportet: opportet L.

(212) man’

296 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[211]

[
I
]
John, chapter lo

[2] I am the good shepherd; know my sheep, and they

I

know me. Etc. [3] I have other sheep who are not from this fold
and I must bring them, and they will hear my voice and there
will be one fold and one shepherd.

[4] Commentary of Nicholas, etc.

[5] It should not be believed on the basis of Matthew 1 5 that

he had to die only for the Jews; [6] “I have been sent only to the
lost sheep of the house of Israel.” [7] For he changes the word-
ing, saying, “I have other lambs who are not from this fold,”

that is, not from the synagogue of the Jews, but from the Gen-
tiles. [8] “And I must bring them”: This was accomplished by
the apostles’ preaching, described in Acts 13. Christ was the
principal agent of this evangalization, as written in the last

chapter of Mark, [9] “They went forth and preached every-

where with the assistance of the Lord,” etc. [10] “And they will
hear my voice”: For when the Jews rejected the faith of Christ,

the Gentiles received it devoutly through the preaching of the

apostles, as described in Acts 13, where it is recorded that Paul
and Barnabas said to the Jews: [11] “It was necessary first to

speak the word of God to you; but because you reject it and
judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life, behold, we turn to

the Gentiles. [12] This is what the Lord commands us to do.”

[13] It continues: “Hearing it, the Gentiles rejoiced and glori-

fied the word of the Lord.” ( 14] “And there will be one fold,”

that is, one church made up of Jews and Gentiles, etc.

[212]

[1] Gregory

[2] Because he had come to redeem not only Judea, but also

the gentile family, he added, [3] “I have other sheep who are

not from this fold.”

KUniON AND TRANSI, A 1 ION 297

 |2i3l

1
1
]
Augustinus, I)c verbo Domini.

[2] Loquebatur enim primo ovili dc genere carnis Israel. [3]

Erant autem alii de genere fidei ipsius Israel, extra erant adhuc,
in gentibus erant, predestinad, nondum congregad. [4] “Non
ergo sunt de hoc ovili”; quia non sunt de genere carnis Israel;

sed erunt de hoc ovili; [5] nam sequitur : “et illos oportet me
adducere”.

(213) man'
2. ovili As: de ovili L.

3. extra L: et extra As Ap.

4—5. Non . . . adducere L: Hos noverat qui predestinaverat: noverat qui
redimere sanguine suo fuso venerat. Videbat eos, nondum videntes eum: nove-
rat eos, nunduni credentes in eum. “Habeo” inquit, “alias oves, que non sunt
de hoc ovili: quia non sunt de genere carnis Israel, sed tamen non erunt extra
ovile, quia oportet me eas adducere, ut sit unus grex et unus pastor” As Au.

298 HD in ON AND TRANSLATION

1^13]
[i] Augustine, Concerning the word of the Lund

[2] He spoke first of the sheepfold of the carnal lineage of

Israel. [3] There were others of the lineage of the faith of Israel,
outside of the fold among the Gentiles, predestined but not yet

gathered. [4] “Thus they are not from this sheepfold’’; for they
are not from the carnal lineage of Israel, but they will belong to
the fold, [5] for it continues, “and I must bring them.’’

HDITION AND TRANSLATION 2 9 9

 /6i recto/

[1]

[214]
[2]
Chrisostomus.

Ostendit utrosque dispersos et pastores non habentes. [3]

Sequitur: “Et vocem meam audient”, ac si dicant: [4] Quid

miramini, si hii me sunt secuturi et vocem meam audituri,

quando alios videbitis me sequentes et vocem meam audientes?

[5] Deinde et futuram eorum prenuntiat unionem, unde subdit:

[6] “Et fiet unum ovile et unus pastor”.

[215]
[i] Item Gregorius, in homeliis.

[2] Quasi ex duobus gregibus unum ovile efiTicit<ur>, quia

ludaicum et gentilem populum in sua fide coniungit.

[216]
[i] Augustinus, libro 18 De civitate Dei, capitulo 33.

[2] Hyeremias propheta de maioribus est, sicut Ysayas et

cetera.

[3] De vocatione gentium, que fuerat futura et earn nunc

impletam cernimus, sic locutus est: [4] “Domine Deus mens et

refugium meum in die malorum, ad te gentes venient ab ex-

tremo terre et dicent: [5] ‘Vere mendatia coluerunt patres nostri
simulacra, non est in eis utilitas’ ”. [6] Quia vero non erant
agnituri ludei, a quibus eum occidi oportebat, sic idem pro-
pheta significat: [7] “Grave cor per omnia; et homo est, et quis

cognoscet eum?”. [8] Huius est etiam illud quod m libro 17

posui de Testamento novo, cuius est mediator Christus. [9] Ipse

quippe Hieremias ait: [10] “Ecce dies veniunt, dicit Dominus,

et consumado super domum' lacob testamentum novum”, et

(214) man^
(215) man'
2. Quasi ex L: Quasi enini ex M.
efficitur M: efficit L.

(216) man'

3 . vocatíone gentium L: vocatione autem gentium Aa, vocatione enim

gentium Ab.
4. Domine Aa Ah: Dominus L.

5. non L: et non Aa Ah.

8. Huius Aa Ah: Huiusmodi L. posui: possui L. de Testamento novo
Aa Ah: Testamentum novum L.

300 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[
214 ]
[2]
[i] Chrysostom

He points out others, dispersed without shepherds. [3] It

continues, “And they will hear my voice,” as if to say, [4] why

are you me and hear
surprised that they will follow me, when
you see others following me and hearing my voice? [5] Then he
foretells their union: [6] “And there will be one fold and one
shepherd.”

[215]
[i] Also Gregory, from the Homilies

[2] From two flocks, so to speak, one sheepfold is made; for

he unites the Jews and Gentiles in his faith.

[216]

[i] Augustine, book 18 of City of God, chapter 33

[2] Jeremiah is a major prophet, along with Isaiah, etc.

[3] Concerning the calling of the Gentiles, which was to

take place in the future and which now we see accomplished,

he said, [4] “O Lord, my God and my refuge on the day of

troubles, the Gentiles will come to you from the ends of the
earth and will say, [5] ‘Truly our fathers worshipped false idols;

there is no benefit to be gained from them.’ ” [6] For, to be

sure, the Jews, who were willing to kill him, were not about to
acknowledge him, as the same prophet points out: [7] “The
heart is heavy in all things, for he is man and who will recognize

him?” [8] This agrees with what I wrote in book 17 about the

New Testament, whose mediator is Christ, [y] For the same

Jeremiah says, [10] “Behold the days are coming, says the Lord,

when I will grant a new testament to the house of Jacob,” and

EDITION AND TKANSLATION 3 O I

 cetera, que ibi leguntur. [ii] Sophonie autem prophete, qui
cum Hieremia prophetabat, hec predicta de Christo interim
ponam; [12] “Expecta me, dicit Dominus, in die resurrectioms

mee in futurum; quia iuditiium meum, ut congregem gentes et

colligam regna”. [13] Et iterum; “Horribilis”, inquit, “Domi-

nus super eos, et exterminabit omnes deos terre; et adorabit

eum vir de loco suo, omnes insule gentium”. [14] Et paulo post
“
item inquit: [15] ‘Transvertam in populos linguam et proge-
nies eius, / 6 i verso/ ut invocent omnes nomen Domini
V
et serv-

iant ei sub uno iugo. [16] A finibus fluminurn Ethyopie afferent

hostias mihi. [17] In illo die non confunderis ex omnibus adin-
ventionibus tuis, quas impie egisti in me; quia tunc auferam abs
te pravitates iniurie tue, et iam non adiities, ut magnificeris

super montem sanctum meum. [18] Et subrelinquam in te

populum mansuetum et humilem’. [19] Et verebuntur a no-

mine Domini, qui reliqui fuerunt in Israel”. [20] Hee sunt reli-
quie, de quibus alibi prophetatur, quod Apostolus etiam com-
memorat: [21] “Si fuerit numerus filiorum Israel sicut arena
maris, reliquie salve fient”. [22] Hec quippe in Christum illius

gentis reliquie crediderint.

[217]
[i] Nota.

[2] [hand] [2] De convocatione et conversione omnium gentium

quantum et quam dare et aperte locutus fuerit apostolus Paulus
in omnibus epistolis suis, si scire placuerit, legantur et relegan-

tur eedem epistole eius a principio usque ad finem: [3] et ab

eodem apostolo Paulo, predicatore gentium, evidentissime
edocebitur, quomodo Dominus noster Yhesus Christus venit
in mundum pro conversione et salute earum et cetera, ut in

precedentibus prelibatum est ,et cetera.

14. item L: tunc Aa Ab. Transvertam . . . populos Aa Ah: Fervertam in

populis L.
15. uno iugo: lugo uno tramp, man'.
16. hostias: h add. s.l. man'.
21. arena: harena L.

(217) man'-, hand man^{?).

2. eius add. s.l. L.

3. conversione et add. s.l. L.

302 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 the rest of what is read there, [i i
j
Meanwhile, I will give these

predictions about Christ made by the prophet Zephaniah, who

“
prophesied with Jeremiah: [12] ‘Wait for me,’ says the Lord,
‘on the future day of my resurrection; for my decision is to

assemble the people and gather together the kingdoms.’ ” [13]

And again: “The Lord will be terrifying against them,’’ he says,

“and he will destroy all the gods of the earth; each man will

worship him from his own place, all the islands of the peoples.’’

[14] Shortly after this, he says: [15] “I will transform the lan-
guage of the people and their descendants, so that all will in-

voke the name of the Lord and serve him under one yoke. [16]

From the regions of the rivers of Ethiopia they will bring offer-

ings to me. [17] On that day you will not be ashamed of your
impious conduct toward me; for I will remove the burden of

your lawlessness, and you will no longer be exalted on my holy

mountain. [18] And I will leave you a docile and humble peo-
ple.’’ [19] And those who remained of Israel will fear the name
of the Lord. [20] These are the remaining ones about whom it

is prophesied elsewhere, as the Apostle notes, [21] “Even if the

children of Israel are as numerous as the sands of the sea, only a

remaining few will be saved.’’ [22] Of course, these people will

believe in Christ.

[217]

[1] Note

[2] [hand] [2] In order to find out how much and how clearly the apos-

tle Paul spoke about the calling and the conversion of all the

peoples, his letters should be read and reread from beginning to

end. [3] This same apostle Paul, preacher to the peoples, shows
clearly how our Lord Jesus Christ came into the world for the

sake of their conversion and salvation, etc., as previously dis-

cussed, etc.

tm i lON AND TRANSI A ION 1 303

 [4] Id ipsum dico de libro, qui intitulatur: Actus Apo-
stolorum, in quo similiter per totum tractatur de convocatione
et conversione filiorum Israel, etomnium gentium et cetera.
[5] Hoc annotavi in rei memoriam et quia longum esset
omnia in hoc presenti tractatu transcribere et cetera.

[6] Sequitur.

304 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [4] The same holds tor the book entitled Acts of the Apos-
tles, which contains a similar discussion of the calling and the

conversion of the children of Israel and of all peoples, etc.

[5] I wrote this down as a reminder, because it would be too

lengthy to transcribe all of it in this present treatise, etc.

[6] And so on.

Horn ON AND TRANSI. ATI ON 3 o 5

 /Ó2 recto/

[218]

[
I
]
Ex homelia bead Augustini super evangelium secundum
Matheum:
“Egressus lesus secessit in partes Tiri et Sidonis” et cetera.

[2] “Mulier ista Cananea erat ex gentibus”. Et cetera. [3]

Tims et Sidon non erant civitates populi Israel, sed gentium;

quamvis vicine illi populo. Et cetera, que secuntur. [4] Ex

quibus oritur questio: Unde nos ad ovile Christi de gentibus
venimus, si non est missus nisi ad oves que periem<n>t domus
Israel? Et cetera. [5] Sequitur post multa: Ad gentes enim ipse

non ivit, sed discípulos misit. [6] Et illic impletum est quod
[7I Ihand] propheta dixit: “Populus, quem non cognovi, servivit mihi”.
[7] quam alta,
Videte quam evidens, quam expressa prophetia:
“Populus quem non cognovi”, meam
id est, cui presentiam

non exhibui, “servivit mihi”. [8] Quomodo? Sequitur: “Ob

auditu auris obedivit mihi”: hoc est, non videndo, sed au-

diendo credidemnt. [9] Ideo gentium maior est laus. [10] lili

enim videmnt, et occiderunt: gentes audierunt, et credidemnt.

Ad gentes autem vocandas et congregandas, ut impleretur
[i i]

quod modo cantavimus: “Congrega nos de gentibus, ut con-

fiteamur nomini tuo et gloriemur in laude tua”, ille Paulus
apostolus missus est. [12] Minimus ille factus niagnus, non per
se, sed per eum quem persequebatur, missus est ad gentes, ex
latrone pastor, ex lupo ovis. [13] Missus est ad gentes ille

apostolus minimus, et multum laboravit in gentibus, et per eum

gentes credidemnt, sicut testes sunt eius epistole. [14] Sequitur.

[15] Habes hoc et in evangelio sacratissime figuratum, et

cetera, ubi scilicet agitur de suscitatione filie archisinagogi et

curatione mulieris fluxum sanguinis patientis. [16] Quamm filia

archisinagogi illa significabat populum ludeomm, propter
quem venerat Christus, qui dixit: “Non sum missus nisi ad

(
218 ) man'-, hand ntan^(?).

2. Mulier . . . gentibus L: Chananea ista mulier . . . sed erat ex gentibus Ap

As.

4. Ex . . . questio L: Hic verborum istorum ontur questio Ap As.

8. Ob L: In Ap As. obedivit L: obaudivit Ap As.
9. maior est laus L: maior laus Ap As.
12. gentes Ap As: generationes L.

13. per L: per per con. man. sicut testes sunt L: testes sunt Ap As.

306 EDITION AND TRANSLAIION

li
 [218]

I
i] From Saint Augustine’s homily on the Gospel according
to Saint Matthew: “Jesus left and withdrew to the districts of
Tyre and Sidon,’’ etc.

[2] The Caananite woman was a Gentile, etc. [3] Tyre and
Sidon were not cities of the people of Israel but of the Gentiles,
although they were neighbors of that people, etc., as follows.

[4] Which gives rise to the following question: How have we,
who are Gentiles, come into the sheepfold of Christ, if he was
sent only to the lost sheep of the house of Israel? Etc. [5] It

continues much later: He did not go to the Gentiles himself,

but sent his disciples. [6] That fulfilled what the prophet said:

[7] [hand] “A people whom do not know have served me. ’’[7] Notice
I

how profound, how evident, how clear is the prophecy, “A

peoplewhom do not know,’’ that
I is, to whom I have not
shown my presence, “have served me.’’ [8] How? It continues:
“On the evidence of their ears, they obeyed me.’’ That is, not
seeing, but hearing, they believed. [9] Thus the Gentiles are

more worthy of praise. [10] The others saw him and killed him;
the Gentiles heard him and believed him. [i i] For indeed, the
apostle Paul was sent to call and to gather the Gentiles in fulfill-

ment of what we just repeated: “Gather us from the Gentiles to

praise your name and take pride in your glory.’’ [12] He, the
least of the apostles, became great. Paul was sent to the Gen-
tiles, not for his own sake, but for the sake of the one he was
persecuting. The thief had become the shepherd; the wolf, the

sheep. [13] The least of the apostles was sent to the Cientiles and
worked diligently among them; through him, they came to

believe, according to the testimony of his epistles. [14] It con-

tinues.

[15] You have this symbolically in the gospel, etc., namely,

in the descriptions of the resurrection of the daughter of the
leader of the synagogue and the healing of the hemorrhaging
woman. [16] Here, the daughter of the leader of the synagogue

KDITION AND TRANSI AT ION 307

 oves, que perierunt domus Israel”. [17] Illa vero mulier que
fluxum sanguinis patiebatur, Ecelesiam ñgurabat ex gentibus,
ad quam per presentiam corporis Christus non erat missus. [
1
8]

Et reliqua per totum, que ornnia multum faciunt ad proposi-

tum, et ideo, si placet, tota ipsa homelia conscribatur de verbo

ad verbum.

17. presentían! Ap As: penitentiam L.

308 EDIIION AND TRANSLATION

signifies the Jewish people, on whose account Christ had come,
as he said, “I was sent only to the lost sheep of the house of
Israel.” [17] The hemorrhaging woman signifies the church of
the Gentiles, to whom Christ had not been sent as a physical

presence. [iH] And so on, throughout the remainder of this

text, which is very relevant. For that reason, if you wish, the
entire homily can be written out word for word.

LDITION AND I RA N S L A T lO N 309

 1

/Ó2 verso/

(219I
[i] “Quare fremuerunt gentes” et cetera.

[2] Dicunt moderni Hebrey quod David fecit hunc psal-

mum laudando Deum de victoria habita de Philisteis, qui

ascenderunt ad pugnandum contra eum, quando audierunt

eum fuisse inunctum publice super totum Israel, up habetur
Regum 2°, capitulo 5. [3] Et licet intellectui ab ipsis tradito in
multis consonet littera, tamen non videtur tenenda duabus de
causis: [4] prima, quia littera in pluribus discordat; [5] secunda,
quia apostolus Paulus ad Hebreos primo per illud, quod dicitur

in hoc psalmo, probat Christum esse maiorem angelis dicens:

‘‘Ad quem enim angelorum aliquando dixit: ‘Filius meus es tu;

ego hodie genui te’ ”? [6] Probado autem non valet ex sensu

mistico, sed tantum ex litterali, secundum quod dicit Augu-

stinus contra Vincentium Donatistam. [7] Et ideo secundum
Apostolum, qui scivit Testamentum <vetus per eruditionem>

Gamalielis, et perfectius per illuminationem Spiritus Sancti

oportet dicere quod iste psalmus inte<l>ligitur ad litteram de

Christo. [8] Item Actus 4° apostoli, post receptionem Spiritus
sancti, hunc psalmum a<l>Iegaverunt, tamquam de Christo dic-
tum, ut pate<bi>t in suo loco. [9] Item ra<b>bi Salomon in pri<n>-

cipio glose huius psalmi dicit sic: ‘‘Magistri nostri exposuerunt

hunc psalmum de rege Messia, per quem inte<l>ligitur Christus
in lege et prophetis promissus”; unde subdit: ‘‘Sed ad intellec-

tum psalmi planum, id est litteralem, et propter responsionem

ad heréticos exponitur de David”. [10] Ex hoc dicto ra<b>bi
Salomon tria habemus: unum est quod doctores Hebreorum
antiqui intellexerunt hunc psalmum de Christo ad litteram;

(219) ntatt^

2. Dicunt . . . Hebrey L; Dicunt autem Hebrei moderni B. 5; 9 L.

3. Et licet ... de causis L: Et licet autem intellectui predicto in multis

consonet littera, tamen non videtur mihi ad presens tenenda B.

4. prima L: pnmo B. discordat L: discordat, ut videbitur B.

5. secunda L: secundo B. apostolus Paulus L: apostolus B.

6. autem B: enim L.
7. Testamentum . . . eruditionem B: Testamentum L. oportet: oppor-
tet L.

8. patebit B: patet L.

9. glose huius B; huius glose L.

10. secundum B; secunda L. posteriores: postenons L.

310 EDITION AND TRANSI A TIO N

M
[219]
[i] “Why did the people clamor,” etc.

[2] The modern Hebrews say that David wrote this psalm to
praise God for the victory over the Philistines, who had come
to fight against him when they heard that he had been publicly
annointed to rule all of Israel, as given in 2 Kings, chapter 5. [3]

Although the literal sense frequently agrees with their interpre-

tation, nevertheless there seem to be two reasons for not sup-

porting it. [4] First, the literal sense more often disagrees. Sec-
ond, as is described in this psalm, the apostle Paul in the first

chapter of the epistle to the Hebrews proved that Christ was

the greatest angel, saying, “To which of the angels did he ever

say, ‘You are my son; today I have begotten you’?” [6] In fact,

this proof is not valid in the mystical sense, but in the literal, as

Augustine argues against Vincent the Donatist. [7] Therefore,

in agreement with the Apostle, who learned the Old Testa-
ment through the erudition of Gamaliel and, more perfectly,

through the illumination of the Holy Spirit, it is fitting to say

that this psalm refers to Christ in the literal sense. [8] Again, in
Acts 4, the apostles, after receiving the Holy Spirit, cited this

psalm as a reference to Christ, as is clear from the passage. [9]

Further, Rabbi Solomon, at the beginning of his commentary

on this psalm, writes, “Our teachers explained this psalm as a

reference to the ruler Messiah, who is understood as Christ,

promised in the law and the prophets.” Whereupon he adds,

“But for the simple interpretation of the psalm, that is the lit-

eral, and for the purpose of responding to the heretics, it was

explained as a reference to David.” [lo] From the writings of

KDinON AND I RANSl ATION 3 1 I

secundum cst quod propter responsionem ad heréticos ra<b>bi

Salomon et alii posteriores doctores Hebreorum exposuerunt

hunc psalmum de David. [
i 1
1
Vocat autem heréticos conversos
de ludaysmo ad fidem catholicam, qui contra alios permanentes
in perfidia <iudaica> arguebant de hoc psalmo. [12] Non potest

autem argumentum fieri nisi ex sensu litterali, ut supra dictum

cst, et sic patet secundum homines littcratos de iudaysmo con-
versos quod psalmus iste intclligitur de Christo ad litteram. [13]

Sic igitur duo predicta in verbo rabbi Salomonis inclusa vera

sunt, sed tertium quod ibi includitur videtur omnino confic-

tum, scilicet quod psalmus iste ad litteram exponcndus sit de
David: [14] adtamen, quia confitetur quod antiqui doctores
Hebreorum hunc psalmum exposuerunt de Christo.

11. conversos: converssos L. perfidia iudaica B: perfidia L.

12. conversos: con\erssos L.

14. adtamen L: tamen B.

Rabbi Salomon we can draw three conclusions. First, the an-
cient teachers of the Hebrews interpreted this psalm as a literal

reference to Christ. Second, because of a need to respond to

the heretics. Rabbi Salomon and other later teachers of the
Hebrews interpreted this psalm as a reference to David, [ii]
Nevertheless, he calls heretics those who converted from Juda-
ism to the Catholic faith and who used this psalm to argue
against others remaining in Jewish perfidy. [12] The only possi-

ble argument proceeds from the literal interpretation, as stated

above; and thus it is clear that, in agreement with the learned

men who converted from Judaism, this psalm refers literally to

Christ. [13] Thus, the two previous affirmations contained in

the wntings of Rabbi Salomon, are certain. But the third that

he includes seems to be a complete fabrication, namely, that

this psalm should be literally interpreted as a reference to David.

[14] But yet, he acknowledges that the ancient teachers of the

Hebrews explicated this psalm as a reference to Christ.

EDITION AND TRANSI AT ION 3 I

3
 1

recto/ - /66 verso/

/6j recto/

(220]
[ij Gozos del nasdmiento de santjuan Babtista.

[2] Gozos den más regozijo

este día que otros días,

que <h>oy nasció el muy sancto hijo

de Ysabel y Zacharías.

[3] Gozóse el Verbo divino,

quando su primo saltava

en el vientre viejo digno,

que su madre visitava.

[4] E tú. Virgen, qu’estarías

al parto de tal sobrino,

gozo sin tiento ny tino

rescibe con Zacharías.

(
220 ) man^
1. de . .Babtista L: de señor santjuan
. Bautista J.
2. hoy J: oy L. nasció L: nació J.
3. digno L: dino j.
4. qu’estarias L: que estarías J. rescibe L: recibe J.

3 1 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[220]
[i] Couplets in praise of the birth of St. John the Baptist

[2] Let songs of praise create more joy

on this day than on other days,

for on this day was born the very holy son

of Elizabeth and Zechariah.

[3] The divine Word rejoiced

when his cousin leaped

in the worthy and aged womb

of the woman his mother visited.

[4] And you, O Virgin, who would be present

at the birth of such a nephew,

receive with Zechariah

an unbounded and carefree joy.

EDITION AND TK ANSI- AT ION 3 > 5

 1

/Ó7 t'crío/

|22I|
[2]
[i] De futuro. In novissimis.
[3]

Hicremias, capitulo 25°.

Verbum, quod factum est ad Geremiam de omni populo,

et reliqua totius ipsius capituli.
V

[222]

[1] Ex epístola legatorum Genuensium ad reges Hyspanie

habita Barchinonie anno 1492.

[
2] Abbas [2] Nec indigne aut sine ratione assevero vobis, regibus am-
loachim. plissimis, maiora servan, quandoquidem legimus predixisse
loachinum abbatem Calabrum ex Hyspania futurum qui arcem
Syon sit reparaturus.

( 221 ) matí^
(222) niati^; postl. man'.
2. assevero: asservero L.

316 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 [1]
[221]
[2]
Concerning the future. On the last days.

[3]

Jeremiah, chapter 25

The word that was given to Jeremiah concerning all peo-

ple; and the rest of this chapter in its entirety.

[222]

[1] From the letter of the Genoese envoys to the rulers of

Spain who were received in Barcelona in 1492

[2]Abbot [2] With respect and good cause, I state, most magnificent
Joachim rulers, that greater things are in store for you, for we read that

Joachim, abbot of Calabria, predicted that someone from Spain

would recover the wealth of Zion.

EDITION AND TRAN S 1, AT I ON 3 I

7
 1

/6¿? recto/ - //ó verso/

/77 rfcfo/

[
2^3 ]

[
I
]
Qual sea la causa de tanto destierro por mili prolongado e más de
quinie<n>tos,

[2] los padres que fueron

[3] pastores que fueron los tiempos passados.

(223)

3 I 8 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[
223 ]

[1] Whatever was the cause of such a long exile, lasting over fifteen

hundred years,

[2] the fathers who went

[3] were shepherds in times past.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 3 • 9

 //Z I'crso/

[224]
[i] Tharsis [i] Tharsis in sacra Scriptura sepius reperitur et alibi et cetera. [i] Nota.
interpretatur
explorado
Genesis, <capitulo> 10° et 1
° Paralipomenon, <capitulo>
gaudii. [2]

[i] De hoc primo.

nomine
Tharsis [3] He sunt generationes filiorum Noe, et cetera. [4] Porro
notandum filii Gomer, et cetera. [5] Filii autem lavan: Helysa et Tharsis,
est quod.
Cethin et E^odani.

[6] Glosa: “Et Tharsis a quo descenderunt Cilices, unde et [6] Tharsis tria

significar.
civitas metropolis eorum vocata est Tharsis; unde natus fuit

Paulus apostolus, ut habetur in Actibus apostolorum XXI [8] Nota. Ex

predictis
<capitulo>”. [7] Sequitur in textu continuatim:[8] “Ah his divise
apparet:
sunt insule gentium in regionibus suis, unusquisque secundum
pnmo, quod
linguam suam et familias suas in nationibus suis”. Tharsis est
nomen
[225] proprium viri;

[i] Libro 11 ° Paralipomenon, <capitulo> 20. secundo,

nomen
[2] Post hec iniit amicitias losaphath rex luda cum Ocozia civitatis in

provincia
rege Israel, cuius opera fuerunt impiissima, et particeps fuit, ut
Cilitie; tertio,
faceret naves, que irent in Tharsis, feceruntque classem in nomen insule,
Asyongaber. [3] Prophetavit autem Heliezer filius Dodam de ut etiam

Maresa ad losaphath dicens: “Quia habuisti fedus cum Ocozia, smgilatim in

subsequentibus
percussit Dominus opera tua”. [4] Contriteque sunt naves nec
patebit.
potuerunt ire in Tharsis. [2] Nota quod
Tharsis est
[226] insula.

[i] III° Regum, <capitulo> 10.

[2] Non erat argentum, hec alicuius pretii putabatur in

diebus Salomonis,[3] quia classis regis per mare cum classe [3] Tharsis

Hyram insula.
semel per tres annos ibat in Tharsis deferens inde aurum
et argentum et dentes elephantorum et simias et pavos.

(224) WíJtt'; postls. man'.

(225) man'; postl. man'.
(226) man'; postl. man'.

320 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[i] Tarshish [224] [
I
]
Note
signifies
[1] Tarshish is very often found in holy Scripture and
“exploration
elsewhere, etc.
of joy.”
[I]

Concerning Genesis, chapter 10 and Chronicles, chapter

[2] 1 i

this name
“Tarshish,” This is the generation of the children of Noah, etc. [4]
[3J
this should
Again, in turn, the sons of Corner, etc. [5] And the children of
be noted.
Javan: Elishah and Tarshish, Kittim and Dodanim.
[6] Commentary: And Tarshish from whom the Cilicians [6] Tarshish
has three
are descended, so their metropolitan city was called Tarshish.
meanings.
The apostle Paul was born there, as recorded in Acts of the
Apostles, chapter 21. [7] It continues in the text that follows [8] Note.
immediately. [8] Their descendants populated the islands of the From what has
been said, it
Gentiles in various regions, each one defined by its own lan-
follows: first,

guage, with its own families in its own nations. that Tarshish is

a man’s proper
[225] name; second,
[1] 2 Chronicles, chapter 20 that it is the
name of a city

After this Jehoshaphat the king of Judah entered into in the

[2]
province of
friendly relations with Ahaziah the king of Israel, whose behav-
Cilicia; third,
ior was extremely wicked. He joined Ahaziah in building ships that It is the
to go to Tarshish, and they built the fleet in Eziongeber. [3] name of an
island, as will
Then Eliezer, the son ofDodavahu ofMareshah, prophesied to
be evident
Jehoshaphat, saying, “Because you made an alliance with Aha-
from what
ziah, the Lord has destroyed what you have made.” [4] And the follows

ships were wrecked and were not able to go to Tarshish. immediately.

[2] Note that

[226] Tarshish is an
island.
[1] 3 Kings, chapter 10

[2] There was not any silver, which at the time of Solomon

was thought to be of no value. [3] The king’s fleet along with (3] The island

Hiram once every three of Tarshish

the fleet of sailed to Tarshish years,

carrying oflf gold and silver, tusks of elephants, apes, and pea-
cocks.

EDITION AND TRA NS I. AT ON

I
3 2 I
 1

[227]
[2]
[i] Hyercmias, <capitulo> lo.

[3]
Argentum involutum dc Tharsis aflfcrtur, et aurum de
Ophyr, opus artifids et manus erarii, et cetera.

[hand] [3] Glosa: “Argentum involutum”: In hebreo habetur ar- [3I Tharsis
insula et
gentum ductile; /jS recto/ “de Tharsis affertur”, quia ibi in-
cetera.
venitur argentum ductilius; “et aurum de Ophyr”: tertio

Regum, <capitulo> nono, nominator locus iste Ophir et ibi in-

venitur aurum valde bonum, ut ex sequenti textu et glosa datur

intelligi, et cetera.

[228]

[i] III® Regum, <capitulo> 9.

[2] Classem quoque fecit Salomon in Asiongaber, que est [2] Nota.

iuxta Haylam in littore maris Rubri in terra Ydumee. [3] Mis-

itque Hyram in classe ilia servos suos viros náuticos et gnaros
maris cum servis Salomonis.[4l Qui, cum venissent in Ophir, [4] Tharsis

sumptum inde aurum quadringentorum viginti talentorum insula, que

etiam dicitur
detulerunt ad regem Salomonem.
Ophyr, in qua
[5] Glosa: “Qui cum venissent in Ophyr”: nomen est pro- sunt minere

vintie in India, in qua sunt montes habentes mineras auri, sed a aun, et cetera.

[5] Nota.
leonibus et bestiis sevissimis habitantur, propter quod nullus ibi

audet accedere, nisi navi stante prope littus ad refugium, [6] et

tunc naute explorantes horam, qua dicte bestie se elongant,

súbito exeunt et terram effossam unguibus leonum in navem
proiitiunt et recedunt; [7] que terra postea in fornacem proiici-

tur et quod est ibi impuritatis consumitur et amovetur virtute

ignis et remanet aurum purum.

[229]
I

[i] II Paralipomenon, <capitulo> 9.

[2] Argentum enim in diebus illis pro nihilo reputabatur.[3] [3] Tharsis
insula.
Siquidem naves regis ibant in Tharsis cum servis Hyram; semel

(227) man'-, postl. man'-, hand man^{?).

2. Ophyr L: Ophaz V.
3. de Ophyr L: de Offaz B.

(228) man'-, postls. man'.

3. Misitque: Missitque L.

(229) man'-, postl. man'.

322 KDITION AND TRAN S 1. AT ON

I
 [
227 ]

[i] Jeremiah, chapter lo

[2] Hammered silver is brought from Tarshish and gold

from Ophir, the work of the artisan and the handicraft of the
goldsmith, etc.

[3] [hand] [3] Commentary: “Hammered silver” in Hebrew means [3] The island

ductile silver. “Is brought from Tarshish,” because silver that is

of Tarshish,
etc.
more ductile is found there. “And gold from Ophir”: In 3

Kings, chapter 9, this place is called Ophir; and silver of very

high quality is found there, as is clear from the text that follows

immediately and the commentary, etc.

[228]

[i] 3 Kings, chapter 9

[2] Solomon also built a fleet in Eziongeber, which is near [2] Note
Eloth on the shore of the Red Sea in the land of Edom. [3] In

that fleet Hiram sent his servants, sailors who had knowledge of
the sea, along with the servants of Solomon. [4] When they had [4] The island

arrived in Ophir, they carried off from there gold in the value of Tarshish,
which IS also
of four hundred and twenty talents for King Solomon.
called Ophir,
[5] Commentary: “When they had arrived in Ophir”: This where there
is the name of a province in India in which there are gold mines are gold
mines, etc.
inhabited by lions and the most savage beasts. For this reason,
[5] Note
no one dares to approach these mines unless his ship is holding
close to the shoreline as a refuge. [6] Then the sailors, estimat-

ing the hour at which these beasts withdraw, rapidly disembark

and throw the soil dug up by the claws of the lions into their

ship and depart. [7] Later this soil is put into a furnace, so that

the impurities are consumed and removed by fire and pure gold
remains.

[229]

[1] 2 Chronicles, chapter 9

[2] At that time silver was thought to have little value. [3] In [3] The island

fact, the king’s ships went to Tarshish with the servants of of Tarshish

rniTION AND TRANSLATION 3 2 3

 1

in annis tribus ct defcrebant indc aurum et argentum et cbur et

simias ct pavos.

[¿30]
[2]

[i] ludith, <capitulo> 2.

Cumque pertransisset fines Assyriorum, venit ad magnos [

2 ] Tharsis
civitas Cilitie
montes Ange, qui sunt a sinistro Cilitie. Et cetera. [3] Preda-
vitque omnes filios Tharsis et filios Hysmael, qui erant contra
fatiem deserti, et cetera.

1^31

[1] Psalmo 47.

[2] In spiritu vehementi conteres naves Tharsis. [2] Tharsis

civitas Cilitie
[3] Glosa: Herodes enim audiens quod magi rediissent in

terram suam per mare in navibus Tharsis, iratus eas su<c>cendit

et cetera.

3. deferebant: defferebant L.

(230) man'-, postl. man'.

(231) man'-, postl. man'.

3 2 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

Hiram once every three years and brought back from there

gold and silver, ivory, apes, and peacocks.

[1]

[230]
[2]
Judith, chapter 2

When he had passed through the lands of the Assyrians, [2] Tarshish a

he came to the great mountains of Ange, which lie to the left of city of Cilicia

Cilicia, etc. [3] He stole from all the children of Tarshish and

the children of Ishmael, who lived on the verge of the desert,

etc.

[231]

[
I
]
Psalm 47

[2] With a violent wind you will shatter the ships of Tar- [2] Tarshish a

shish.
city of Cilicia

[3] Commentary: Herod, hearing that the Magi had re-

turned to their own country in the ships of Tarshish, became

angry and set the ships on fire, etc.

KDITION AND TRAN S 1, A F I () N 3 2 5

 .

/jS veno/

[^ 32 )

(
I ]
Psalnio 7 1

[2] Reges Tharsis et insule muñera ofFerent, reges Arabum [2] Tharsis
civitas vel in-
et Sabba dona adducent.
sula et cetera.
(3] Glosa: Hoc exponitur a quibusdam de regibus, qui vene-

rant adorare Christum, qui erat de illis partibus. [4] Potest etiam

exponi de pluribus partibus vel nationibus, que hie nominan-

tur, quarum reges et principes fidem Christi acceperunt et ce-

tera.

[233]
[i] lone capitulo I.

[2] Et surrexit lonas, ut fugeret in Tharsis a fade Domini; et [2] Tharsis

civitas Cilitie.
descendit <in> loppen et invenit navem euntem in Tharsis et

dedit naulum eius et descendit in earn, ut iret cum eis in Tharsis

a fade Domini.
[3] Glosa: Tharsis civitas est Cilitie, de qua Paulus fuit oriun-

dus: Actuum XXI <capitulo>. [4] “Et descendit in lopen”, por-

tus est in ludea super mare Mediterraneum.

[234]
[i] Actuum <capitulo> 21 et 22.

[2] Ego homo sum quidem ludeus a Tharso Cilitie, non [2] Tharsis sive

ignote civitatis municeps. Tharsum

civitas Cilitie.

[235]
[i] Alphonsus a Palencia in Vocabulario.

[2] Tharsum Perseus edificavit. [3] In ea civitate Paulus fuit [3] Tharsum
civitas Cilitie.
ortus.[4] Tharsis filius lavan, a quo Cilices originem habuere,
[4] Tharsis
unde metropolis civitas eorum dicitur Tharsis, que inter-
nomen
proprium viri.

[4] Tharsis
civitas metro-
polis.

(232) man'', post!, man'.

(233) man'', postl. man'.
2. in loppen V: loppen L.
(234) man'', postl. man'.
(235) man'', postls. man'.

326 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 1

(232]

[ 1 ]
Psalm 7

[2] The kings ofTarshish and of the islands will offer tribute; [2I Tarshish a

the kings of Arabia and of Seba will bring gifts.

city or an
island, etc.
[3] Commentary: This text is interpreted by some as a refer-

ence to the kings who had come to worship Christ, who was
from that region. [4] It can also be expounded as a reference to
[1]
the many regions or nations, which are named here, whose
kings and princes accepted the Christian faith, etc.

[233]
Jonah, chapter i

[2] And Jonah arose to flee to Tarshish, away from the pres- [2] Tarshish a

He went down city of Cilicia

ence of the Lord. to Joppa and found a ship

going to Tarshish; he paid the fare and went on board to go

with them to Tarshish, away from the presence of the Lord.

[3] Commentary: Tarshish is the city in Cilicia that Paul

came from: Acts, chapter 21. [4] “He went down to Joppa,” a

port in Judea on the Mediterranean Sea.

[234]
[i] Acts, chapters 21 and 22

(2] I am in truth a Jewish man from Tarshish in Cilicia, a [2] Tarshish or

Tarsus a city of
resident of a city that is not unknown.
Cilicia

[235]

[
I
]
Alfonso de Palencia in the Vocabulanum

[2] Perseus built Tarsus. [3] Paul came from that city. [4] Tar- [3] Tarsus a

shish was the son ofjavan, whose descendants are the Cilicians.
city of Cilicia
[4] Tarshish a
For this reason their capital city is called Tarshish, which means man’s proper
name
[4] Tarshish a
capital city

EDITION AND TRAN S I. AT I ON 3 27

 pretatLir explorado gaudii. [5] Scribitur cum aspiratione, Thar-
sis: hcbrcLim est.[d] Tharsis: mare vel pelagus. [6] Tharsis

Tharsis in Ezechiel et Daniele: ab Aquila interpretatur

mare vel
[7]
pelagus.
crisolitus, a Symaco yacinthus <interpretatur>; unde quidam Tharsis
[7]
male putaverunt Tharsis Tharsum esse civitatem. [8] Nam et lapis crisolitus

inter alios lapides, qui in ornatu summi sacerdotis erant, eius- vel iacinthus.

dem lapidis nomen inseritur.

[9] Tharsis quoque quedam Indie regio nuncupatur et ipsum [9I Tharsis
regio Indie et
mare, quia colorem supradictorum lapidum imitatur..
ipsum mare et
cetera.

7. interpretatur; unde A: unde L. Tharsis: add. r s.l. man'.

328 KDITION AND TRANSLATION

“exploration ofjoy.” [5] “Tarshish” is written with an aspirate;
it is a Hebrew word.fh] Tarshish is the sea, or the open sea. [6] Tarshish

Tarshish in Ezekiel and Daniel: was the sea or the

[7] It translated by
open sea
Aquila as “topaz” and by Symachus as “hyacinth.” As a result,
[7I Tarshish
some have thought incorrectly that Tarshish was the city of topaz or
Tarsus. In fact, the name of this very stone is included hyacinth
[8]

among the other ornaments of the high priest.

[9] A certain region of India is also called Tarshish, as well as [9] Tarshish a

its sea, which imitates the color of the abovementioned stones. region of
India, as well
as its sea, etc.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 3 2 9

 //p recto/

//9 verso/

[I] [1] Dc insula Ophyr in qua habetur multum aurum, et cete-

Auctoritates.
ra; que insula comprobatur esse Tharsis, ut in superioribus alle-

gationibus.

[237]
[i] III° Regum, <capitulo> 9.

[2] Perfectumque est templum. [3] Classem quoque fecit rex

Salomon in Asyongaber, que est iuxta Haylam in littore maris

Rubri in terra Idumea. [4] Hyram in classe ilia servos

Misitque
suos viros náuticos et gnaros maris cum servis Salomonis. [5]

Qui, cum venissent in Offir, sumptum inde aurum quadringen-

torum viginti talentorum, detulerunt ad regem Salomonem. Et

cetera.

[6] In Glossa Nicolai dicitur quomodo colligebatur aurum.

I238I
[i] IIP Regum, <capitulo> 10.

[2] Sed et classis Hyram, que portabat aurum de Ophyr, at-

tulit ex Ophyr ligna thina multa nimis et gemmas pretiosas.

[239]
[i] IIP Regum, <capitulo> 22.

[2] Rex vero losaphat fecerat classes in mari, que navigarent

in Ophyr propter aurum; et cetera.

(236) matt'; postl. man'.

I. que . . . allegationibus add. man'.

(237) man'
(238) man'
(239) man'

3 3 o E I) rr I O N AND r RA NSI A r I ON
[I] [^3^>]
Auctoritates

[
I
]
Concerning the island of Ophir in which there is much
gold, etc.; this island is shown to be Tarshish, as previously
alleged.

|237l

[ 1 ] 3 Kings, chapter 9

[2] The temple was completed. [3] King Solomon also built

a fleet in Eziongeber, which is near Eloth on the shore of the

Red Sea in the land of Edom. [4] Hiram sent in that fleet his

servants, sailors who had knowledge of the sea, along with Sol-
omon’s servants. [5] When they had arrived in Ophir, they
carried off from there gold in the value of four hundred twenty
talents, which they brought to King Solomon. Etc.

[6] How the gold was gathered is described in Nicholas’s

commentary.

(23S]

[i] 3 Kings, chapter 10

[2] But Hiram’s fleet, which was transporting gold from

Ophir, also brought a large quantity of larch wood and precious
stones.

[239]

[
I
] 3 Kings, chapter 22

[2] King Jehoshaphat had constructed ships to sail to Ophir

for gold, etc.

K nn ON1 AND I RA NS I A r 1 ON 3 3 1
 [
240 ]

[i] Hieremic capitulo lo.

[2] Argentum involutum de Tharsis affertur, et aurum de

Ophyr, opus artificis ct manus erarii, et cetera.

[241]

[1] David. 1 ° Paralypomenon, <capitulo> 29.

[2] Et super hec omnia, que obtuli in donium Dei mei, de

peculio /80 recto/ meo aurum et argentum do in temblum Dei
mei, exceptis his, que preparavi in edem sanctam: [3] tria milia

talenta <auri> de auro Ophyr et cetera.

[242]
[i] 11 ° Paralypomenon, <capitulo> 8.

[2] Misit ergo ei Hyram per manus servorum suorum naves

et nautas gnaros maris; et abierunt cum servis Salomonis in

Ophyr tuleruntque inde quadringenta quinquaginta talenta auri

et attulerunt ad regem Salomonem.

[M3]
[i] 11 ° Paralipomenon, <capitulo> 9.

[2] Sed et serví Hyram cum servis Salomonis attulerunt

aurum de Ophyr et ligna thina et gemmas pretiosissimas; et

cetera.

(240) man'
2. Ophyr L: Op haz V.

(241) man'
2. omnia, que L: que V. talenta auri V: talenta L.

(242) man'
2. ergo L: autem V. quinquaginta V: quinqué L.

(243) man'

3 3 2 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

[
240 ]

[ijjeremiah, chapter lo

[2] Hammercred silver was brought from Tarshish and gold

from Ophir, the work of the artisan and the handicraft of the
goldsmith, etc.

[241]
[i] David. I Chronicles, chapter 29

[2] And in addition to all that I have brought into the house
of my God, I give from my personal wealth gold and silver for
the temple of my God beyond those things that I have prepared
for the holy shrine: [3] three thousand gold talents from the
gold of Ophir, etc.

[242]

[
I
]
2 Chronicles, chapter 8

[2] Therefore Hiram sent to him, by means of his servants,

ships and sailors who had knowledge of the sea; and they went
with Solomon’s servants to Ophir and brought back from there
gold in the amount of four hundred fifty talents and gave it to

King Solomon.

[243]
[i] 2 Chronicles, chapter 9

[2] But Hiram’s servants, along with Solomon’s, also

brought back from Ophir gold, larch wood, and precious

stones, etc.

run ION AND TRANSLATION 3 3 3

 1

/So verso/

/Si recto/

[244]

[1] De insula Cethyn, quam dicunt esse Tharsis et Ophyr,

scriptum est.

[245]
[i] Isaye <capitulo> 23.

[2] Ululate, naves maris, quia vastata est domus unde venire
consueverant; de terra Cethyn revelatum est eis. [3] Tácete, qui
habitatis in insula; et cetera. [4] In Cethyn consurgens trans-

freta: et cetera.

[246]
[i] Hieremie <capitulo> 2.

[3]
[2] Transite ad insulas Cethyn et videte et in Cedar mittite et

considerate vehementer et videte si factum est huiusmodi: [3] si

mutavit gens deos suos, et certe ipsi non sunt dii.

[247]
[i] Genesis <capitulo> 10 et primo Paralipomenon 1 °.

[2] Filii autem lavam: Elysa et Tharsis, Cethyn et Dodani.

Ah his divise sunt insule gentium et cetera.

(244) man'
1. quam . Ophyr : add. in marj^. man.'.

(245) man'
2. Ululate: Diluíate L.

(246) man'
(247) man'

3 3 4 H Dili ON AND TRANSLATION

[
244 ]

[1] The following has been written about the island of Kit-

tim, which is said to be Tarshish and Ophir.

[245]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 23

[2] Cry out, O ships of the sea, for the haven from which
they used to come has been destroyed; from the land of Kittim

this has been revealed to them. [3] Be still, you who inhabit the
island; etc. [4] Arise and cross the sea to Kittim; etc.

[246]

[1] Jeremiah, chapter 2

[2] Go across to the islands of Kittim and look around; go

over to Kedar and look closely. See if anything like this has

happened: [3] a people have taken different gods, who are cer-

tainly false.

[247]
[i] Genesis, chapter 10, and i Chronicles, chapter i

[2] The children of Javan: Elishah and Tarshish, Kittim and

Dodanim. [3] The islands of the nations have been separated by

them, etc.

EDITION AND I KA NS I AT I ON 3 3 5
 .

/8i verso/

/S2 recto/

(248]

[1] Hec de insulis maris scripta sunt in sacra Scriptura

[249]
[i] Genesis, <capitulo> 10.

[2] “Ab his”, scilicet lavam, Helysa, et Tharsis, Cethyn et

Dodani, filiorum Corner, filii lapheth, filii Noe, “divise sunt

insule gentium in regionibus suis, unusquisque secundum lin-

guam suam et familias suas in nationibus suis”.

[250]
[i] Hester, <capitulo> 10.

[2] Rex vero Assuerus omnem terrain et cunetas maris in-

sulas fecit tributarias.

[251]

[
I
]
Psalmo 7 1

(2] Reges Tharsis et insule muñera offerent, reges Arabum

et Sabba dona adducent.

[252]
[i] Psalmo 96.

[2] Dominus regnavit! Exultet terra, letentur insule multe.

I2531
[i] Ecclesiastici <capitulo> 47.

[2] Ad insulas longe divulgatum est nomen tuum, et dilectus

es in pace tua.

(
248 ) matt

(
249 ) man
(
250 ) man
(
251 ) man

( 252 ) man
( 253 ) man

3 3 6 EDITION AND TK ANSI AT ION

 1

[248]
[i] The following things have been written about the islands
of the sea in sacred Scripture

[249]
[i] Genesis, chapter 10

[2] “By them,” namely, by the children of Javan — Elishah,

Tarshish, Kittim, and Dodanim — and by the children of

Corner, the son ofjapeth, Noah’s son, “the islands of the na-
tions have been separated into various regions, each one de-
fined by its own language, with its own families in its own
nations.”

[250]
[i] Esther, chapter 10

[2] King Ahasuerus made all the earth along with the islands

of the sea subject to tribute.

[251]

[ 1 ]
Psalm 7

[2] The kings of Tarshish and of the islands will offer tribute;
the kings of Arabia and of Seba will bring gifts.

[252]

[
I
]
Psalm 96

[2] The Lord has reigned! Let the earth exult; let the multi-

tude of islands rejoice.

[253]
[i] Ecclesiastes, chapter 47

[2] From the distant islands your name has been announced,
and you have been loved in your peace.

KDITION AND I RANSl ATION 3 3 7

 .

1
^ 54 ]

[
I
]
Isayc <capitulo> 1 1

[2] Et erit in die ilia; adiiciet Dominus secundo manum

suam ad possidendum residuum populi sui, quod relinquetur ab
Assiriis et ab Egypto et a Fhetros et ab Ethiopia et ab Elam et a
Senaar et ab Emath et ab insulis maris; et cetera.

[255]
^
[i] Isaye <capitulo> 24.

[2] In doctrinis glorifícate Dominum, in insulis maris nomen

<Domini>, Dei Israel. Et cetera.

(254) wíjh'
(255) man'
2. nomen Domini V: nomen L.

3 3 H EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 1

[^ 54 ]

[i] Isaiah, chapter 1

[2] It will happen on that day that the Lord will extend his

hand a second time to gather up the remainder of his people

from Assyria, Egypt, Pathros, Ethiopia, Elam, Shinar, Hamath,
and from the islands of the sea; etc.

[255]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 24

[2] Glorify the Lord through teaching; in the islands of the

sea the name of the Lord, the God of Israel. Etc.

KOrriON AND TRANSIA riON 3 3 9

 1

/82 rerso/

[i] Isaye <capitulo> 41.

[2] Taceant ad me insulc, et gentes mutent fortitudinem et

cetera. [3] Viderunt insule et timuerunt, et cetera.

U571
[1] Isaye <capitulo> 42.

[
2 ] [hand] [2] In veritate educet iuditium. [3] Non erit tnstis ñeque
turbulentus, donee ponat in terra iuditium; et legem eius insule

ex<s>pectabunt.

[258]
[i] Isaye <capitulo> 49.

[2] Audite, insule, et attendite, populi de longe; et cetera.

[259]
[i] Isaye <capitulo> 51.

[2] Me insule ex<s>pectabunt et brachium meum su-

stinebunt.

[260]

[i] Isaye <capitulo> 60.

[2] Nota. [2] Me enim insule ex<s>pectant, et naves maris in principio,

ut adducam filios tuos de longe.

[261]

[i] Isaye <capitulo> 66.

[2] Nota. [2] Ponam in eis signum etmiittam ex eis, qui salvad fuerint,
ad gentes in mare, m Affricam, in Lydiam, ten<d>entes sagittam,
in Italiam, et Gretiam, ad insulas longe, ad eos, qui non audie-
runt de me et non viderunt gloriam meam.

(256) man'
(257) man'; hand man^{?).
2. educet V\ adducet L.
(258) man'
(259) man'
(260) man'; postl. man'.
(261) man'; postl. man'.
2 . tendentes V: tenentes L.

340 EDITION AND TKANSI.ATION

i
 1

[256]
[i] Isaiah, chapter 41

[2] Let the islands be silent before me, and let the people
renew their strength, etc. [3] The islands have seen and have
feared, etc.

[257]

[1] Isaiah, chapter 42

[2] [hand] [2] He will establish justice based on truth. [3] He will be
neither sad nor troubled until he has established justice on
earth; the islands will await his law.

[258]

[1] Isaiah, chapter 49

[2] Listen, islands; and pay attention, distant peoples; etc.

[259]

[
1
1
Isaiah, chapter 5

[2] The islands will await me and hope for my power.

[260]

[1] Isaiah, chapter 60

[2] Note [2] The islands wait for me, the ships of the sea first, to bring

together your children from afar.

[261]

[i] Isaiah, chapter 66

[2] Note [2] I will place a sign among them; and I will send ones who
have been saved to the ocean peoples in Africa, in Lydia, the

ones with arrows, in Italy and Greece; to the distant islands, to

those who have not heard of me and have not seen my glory.

EDITION AND I RA N S I. AT ON
I
3 4 I
 [
262 )

[i] Hiercmic <capitulo> 2.

[2] Transite ad insulas Cethyn et videte et cetera.

[i] Hieremie <capitulo> 25.

[2] Et accepi calicem de manu Domini et propinavi cunctis

gentibus, ad quas misit me Dominus, lerusalem et cetera. [3] Et
regibus terre insularum, qui sunt trans mare; et cetera.

[264]
[i] Hieremie <capitulo> 31.

[2] Audite verbum Domini, gentes, et annuntiate in insulis,

que procul sunt.

[265]
[i] Hieremie <capitulo> 47.

[2] Depopulatus est enim Dominus Palestinos, reliquias in-

sule Capadotie.

(262) man'
(263) man'
I. -3. Hieremie . . . mare; et cetera: add. in marg. man'.
(264) man'
(265) man'

3 4 2 KDITKJN AND TRAN S 1. AT I ON

[2Ó2]

[
I
]
Jeremiah, chapter 2

[2] Go across to the islands ofKittim and look around, etc.

[
I
]
Jeremiah, chapter 25

[2] I received the chalice from the hands of the Lord, and I

drank a toast to all the peoples to whom God has sent me,
Jerusalem, etc. [3] And to the kings of the land of the islands,

who are across the sea; etc.

[264]

[
I
]
Jeremiah, chapter 3 i

[2] Hear the word of the Lord, O nations, and proclaim it in

the distant islands.

[265]

[
I
]
Jeremiah, chapter 47

[2] The Lord has devastated the Philistines, the survivors of

the island of Cappadocia.

1; 1) I r I O N AND TRA NS 1 AT I ON 3 4 3
 recto/

[266]
[i] Ezechiel, <capitulo> 26.

[2] Commovcbuntur insulc et desccndent de sedibus suis

omnes principes mans.

[267]
[i] Ezechiel, <capitulo> 27.

[2] Pretoriola de insulis Italie. Et cetera. [3] lacynthus et pur-

pura de insulis Helisa et cetera. [4] Insule multe negotiatio

manus tue: et cetera.

[268]
[i] Danielis <capitulo> 1 1.

[2] Et convertet fatiem suam ad insulas et capiet multas.

[269]
[i] 1 ° Machabeorum, <capitulo> 6.

[2] Et de insulis maritimis venerunt ad eum exercitus con-

ductitii.

[270]
[i] 1
° Machabeorum, <capitulo> 14.

[2] Et cum Omni gloria sua accepit loppen in portum et fecit

introitum in insulis maris.

[27 i
]

[1] 1
° Machabeorum, <capitulo> 15.

[2] Et misit rex Anthiocus filius Demetrii epistolas ab insulis

I

maris.

(266) man'
(267) man'
2. Pretoriola V: Pretenda L.

(268) man'
(269) man'
2. conducticii V: conducticius L.

(270) man'
(271) man'

3 4 4 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 1

[
266 ]

[i] Ezekiel, chapter 26

[2] The islands will shake, and all the princes of the ocean

will descend from their thrones.

[267]
[i] Ezekiel, chapter 27

[2] Boxes from the islands of Italy, etc. [3] Hyacinth and
purple from the islands of Elishah, etc. [4] Many islands are

engaged in trade with you, etc.

[268]
[i] Daniel, chapter 1

[2] He will turn his face toward the islands and take many of
them.

[269]

[1] I Machabees, chapter 6

[2] From the islands the mercenary armies came to him.

[270]
[i] I Machabees, chapter 14

[2] With all his glory he took Joppa as a harbor and created
an entrance to the islands of the sea.

[271]
[i] I Machabees, chapter 15

[2] King Antiocus, the son of Demetrius, sent letters from

the islands of the sea.

K 1) I T I O N AND r RA N S I A 1 I ON 3 4
 .

[
272 ]

[
I
]
Apocalypsis <capitulo> i

[2] Fui in insula, que appcllatur Pathmos, propter verbum

Dei.

[273]
[i] Apocalypsis <capitulo> 6.

[2] Omnis mons et insule de locis suis mote sunt.

[274]
[i] Apocalypsis <capitulo> 16.

[2] Et omnis insula fugit, et montes non sunt invent!. Et

cetera.

U75l

[i] Multa alia omittimus conscribenda de insulis maris, cre-

dentes hec pauca sufficere ad propositum nostrum et cetera.

Deo gratias. Amen.

(272) man'
2. Fui P: Fuit L.

(273) man'
(274) man'
(275) man'
I. omittimus: ommittinius L.

3 4 6 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

1^72]

(
1 ]
Apocalypse, chapter i

[2] Because of the word of the Lord, I was on the island that

is called Patmos.

[273]
[i] Apocalypse, chapter 6

[2] Every mountain and island has been moved from its

place.

[274]
[i] Apocalypse, chapter 16

[2] Every island fled, and the mountains were not found.
Etc.

[275]

[1] We have omitted writing many things about the islands

of the sea, believing that these few things will be suflicient for
our purpose. Thanks be to God. Amen.

i; Dll ION AND TKANSI ATION 3 4 7

 verso/

[
I
]
don Asentio p°. oooooo p°.

[2] donjuán Martínez p°. oooooo p°.

[3] un monachado Todos Sanctos.

[4] cinco missas la Griega.

[5] un monachado por el donado. ^

[6] un monachado de la Cartuja por un frayle oooooo p°.

[7] agendas 00000000006000000000060000000.

[8] Guadalupe 00000000006000000.

[9] frayle de Aniago 000 p°.

(
276 ) ntan^ (?)

348 EDITION AND TRANSI. ATION

[
276 ]

[1] Don Asentio, p. oooooo p.

[2] Donjuán Martínez, p. oooooo p.

[3] One monchado for All Saints.

[4] Five services of the mass “la Griega.”

[5] One monchado for the lay brother.

[6] One monchado of the Carthusian for a monk, six pese-

tas.

[7] Agendas 00000000006000000000060000000.

[8] Guadalupe, 00000000006000000.

[9] Brother de Aniago, 000 p.

EDIIION AND TRANSI AT ION 3 4 9

 . . .

/S4 recto/

ooooooooooooooooo

|i77l

[
i] Aniago.

/S4 verso/

I27SI

[i] Jesus cum Maria sint nobis in via.

(279)

[) (2]

loel, capitulo 2. Paralipomenon, capitulo 20.

loel, capitulo 3. Paralipomenon, capitulo 21.

Amos, capitulo 9. Esdre capitulo i

Abdia<s>, capitulo i. Esdre capitulo 3.

Micheas, capitulo 4. Esdre capitulo 4.

Micheas, capitulo 5.

Micheas, capitulo 6. Psalterium, capitulo 4.

Naum, capitulo, i Psalterium, capitulo 8.

Abacuc, capitulo i. Psalterium, capitulo 9.

Sophonias, capitulo 2. Psalterium, capitulo 18.

Sophonias, capitulo 3. Psalterium, capitulo 19.

Zacharias, capitulo i. Psalterium, capitulo 2 1

Zacharias, capitulo 2. Psalterium, capitulo 23.

Zacharias, capitulo 3. Psalterium, capitulo 56.

Zacharias, capitulo 6. Psalterium, capitulo 68.

Zacharias, capitulo 8. Psalterium, capitulo 69.

Zacharias, capitulo 9. Psalterium, capitulo 71.

Zacharias, capitulo 1 1. Psalterium, capitulo 73.

(
277 ) man^
(
278 ) man^
(
279 ) man^

3 5 o EDITION AND TRANSLATION

 1 81

[^ 77 ]

[
1
]
Amago.

|
27 «|

[i] May Jesús and Mary go with us.

1
^ 79 ]

1'] [2]

Joel, chapter 2 Chronicles, chapter 20

Joel, chapter 3 Chronicles, chapter 21

Amos, chapter 9 Ezra, chapter 1

Obadiah, chapter i Ezra, chapter 3

Micah, chapter 4 Ezra, chapter 4

Micah, chapter 5

Micah, chapter 6 Psalms, chapter 4

Nahum, chapter i Psalms, chapter 8

Habakkuk, chapter i Psalms, chapter 9

Zephaniah, chapter 2 Psalms, chapter 1

Zephaniah, chapter 3 Psalms, chapter 19

Zechariah, chapter i Psalms, chapter 2

Zechariah, chapter 2 Psalms, chapter 23

Zechariah, chapter 3 Psalms, chapter 56

Zechariah, chapter 6 Psalms, chapter 68

Zechariah, chapter 8 Psalms, chapter 73

Zechariah, chapter 9 Psalms, chapter 71

Zehariah, chapter 1 Psalms, chapter 73

Zechariah, chapter 13 Psalms, chapter 77

i; 1)11 ION AND IK ANSI ATI ON 3 5 I

 1 .

Zacharias, capitulo 13. Psalterium, capitulo 77.

Zacharias, capitulo 14. Psalterium, capitulo 83.

Pnmo Paralipomcnon, capitulo Psalterium, capitulo 88.

1 .

Paralipomenon, capitulo 15. Psalterium, capitulo 98.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 16. Psalterium, capitulo 91

Paralipomenon, capitulo 17. Psalterium, capitulo 93.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 21. Psalterium, capitulo 94.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 22. Psalterium, capitulo 96.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 27. Psalterium, capitulo 105.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 28. Psalterium, capitulo 109.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 29. Psalterium, capitulo lio.

Secundo Paralipomenon, Psalterium, capitulo III.

capitulo I.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 2. Psalterium, capitulo 112.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 5. Psalterium, capitulo 1

1
3.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 6. Psalterium, capitulo 114.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 7. Psalterium, capitulo 1

1
5.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 8. Psalterium, capitulo 116.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 9. Psalterium, capitulo 117.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 16. Psalterium, capitulo 1 1 8.

Paralipomenon, capitulo 18. Psalterium, capitulo 1

19

[3]

Psalterium, capitulo 120.

Psalterium, capitulo 121.,

Psalterium, capitulo 122.

Psalterium, capitulo 123.

Psalterium, capitulo 124.

Psalterium, capitulo 126.

Psalterium, capitulo 10 <***>.

Sapientia, capitulo 6.

352 EDITION AND TRANSLATION

I
 11 1 1

Zechariah, chapter 14 Psalms, chapter «3

1 Chronicles, chapter 1 Psalms, chapter 88

Chronicles, chapter 1 5 Psalms, chapter 98

Chronicles, chapter 16 Psalms, chapter 9

Chronicles, chapter 17 Psalms, chapter 93

Chronicles, chapter 21 Psalms, chapter 94

Chronicles, chapter 22 Psalms, chapter 96

Chronicles, chapter 27 Psalms, chapter 105

Chronicles, chapter 28 Psalms, chapter 109

Chronicles, chapter 29 Psalms, chapter 1 10

2 Chronicles, chapter i Psalms, chapter 1 1

Chronicles, chapter 2 Psalms, chapter 1 12

Chronicles, chapter 5 Psalms, chapter 113

Chronicles, chapter 6 Psalms, chapter 1 14

Chronicles, chapter 7 Psalms, chapter i «5

Chronicles, chapter 8 Psalms, chapter 1 16

Chronicles, chapter 9 Psalms, chapter 1

17

Chronicles, chapter 16 Psalms, chapter 118

Chronicles, chapter 18 Psalms, chapter 1

19

[3]

Psalms, chapter 120

Psalms, chapter 12

Psalms, chapter 122

Psalms, chapter 123

Psalms, chapter 124

Psalms, chapter 126

Psalms, chapter 10 <***>.

Wisdom, chapter 6

KDi riON AND TRANSI A riON 3 5 3

 1

|28o|

[
I
]
Memorare con grand tiento,

o hombre qualquier que seas,

tener siempre en pensamiento

a Dios e su mandamiento,

si con él reynar deseas.

Para mientes que proveas,

pues nescessario es morir,

que en el tiempo del partir

el camino en llano veas.

[2] Novissima proveyeron

siempre los sanctos varones:

del mundo se suspendieron,

a Christo siempre sirvieron

sufriendo tribulationes

Dexando las affectiones

camales de vanidad

déveste con humildad

refrenar de tus passiones.

[3] Tua con consideran^a

deves muy mucho mirar,

e en qué fin van a parar

los malos e su pujan(;:a

e la bienaventuran(;:a

que los justos alcan(;:aron,

I

que a Dios e a Sézar pagaron

su deuda en ygual balanza.

(
280 ) man^
1. en llano: ellano L.
2. déveste: deves tu L.

3. alcan9aron: alcancaron L.

354 EDITION AND I RA N S L A E I ON

Á
[28o]

[
I
)
Remember carefully,

whoever you may be,

to hold God and his commandments

always in your thoughts,

if you wish to rule with him.

Prepare your mind,

for it is necessary to die,

so that at the time of parting

you see the way clearly.

[2] The holy men were always

preparing for the final days;

they separated themselves from the world

and served Christ unceasingly,

suffering tribulations,

avoiding vain carnality.

You must humbly

control your passions.

[3] You should consider

your life carefully,

and the fate of evil men

and their power,
and the blessedness
that comes to the righteous,

who paid what was due to God and to Caesar

in proper measure.

EDITION AND TRANSLATION 3 5 .S

 [4] Et tú deves resurtir

tu pensami<ento> en e<l> cielo,

e de las cosas del suelo

con grand prudentia huyr;

e non quieras consentir

ser del vicio subjuzgado,

siempre seas avisado

a sabelle ressistir.

[5] Ih eternum gozarán

los que lo bueno abra(^:aron,

e asiniesmo llorarán,

porque continuo arderán,

los que la malicia amaron;

e pues siempre se agradaron

del mundo y de sus cudicias,

de las eternas dividas

para siempre se privaron.

[6] Non peccabis, si el dolor

de los que mueren pensares,

e la fatiga e terror

que padesce el pecador

contigo bien contemplares,

e si bien considerares

la pacientia que terná

el justo quando verá

que sale de tantos males.

4. resurtir: resortirte L. sabelle: sabella L.

5. gozarán: gozarám L.

6. males: malos L.

3 5 6 KDITION AND TRANS 1, AT I ON

[4] And you should direct

your thoughts to heaven,

prudently avoiding earthly things;

avoid being ruled by vice,

and always take care

to resist it.

[5] The righteous ones

will experience eternal joy,

just as the ones who loved malice

will weep as they burn forever;

because they always took pleasure

in the world and its vanities,

they deprived themselves

of eternal delight.

[6] You will not sin, if you reflect

on the pain of those who die,

and if you see in yourself

the hardship and terror

that the sinner suffers,

and if you realize

the relief of the just one,

when he sees that he has avoided

great suffering.

UDITION AND TRANSLATION 3 .s 7

COMMENTARY
 COMMENTARY

[001]

The first page of the manuscript is considerably damaged and, as far as possible,

Diego Alejandro de Gálvez’s transcription (1766) has been used to fill the lacunae.

8. The reference is to Biblia sacra (. .

.) cum postillis Nicolai de Lyra, printed in numerous
editions between 1481 and 1497 (GW 4286-4294).

[002]

6. Cf Acts 3,21.
8. With reference to the lacunae, Gálvez writes, “dos términos.”

[004]

I. Angelus de Clavasio, Summa angelica de casibus conscientiae. Venice, Paganinus de

Paganinis, 7.VÍ.1499 (GW 1945), fols. 158 verso b-i59 recto a: s.v. “expositio.”

[005]

1. Cf Johannes Gerson, De sensu litterali Sacrae Scripturae, in Opera Omnia, I: Stras-

bourg, Johann Priiss, 1488 (GW 10714) (Cf Oeuvres completes, Volume III: La oeuvre
maj^isfrale. Introduction, texte et notes par Palémon Glorieux. Paris etc., Desclee Sc C.,

1962, pp. 333-340). It is also possible that the passage is taken from Johannes Balbus,

Catholicon. Venice, Hermann Liechtenstein, 25. xi. 1487 (GW 3193): s.v. “allegoria.”

[006]

1. Cf Guillelmus Durandus, Rationale divinorum officiorum. Venice, Georgius Walch,

17.V.1482 (GW 9124), fol. iiii recto a. The corresponding passage of the prohemium has

been readjusted here.

 y

[007]

This text has not been found in any of the hymn collections or indexes.

[008]

2. John 15, 15.

3. Ps. 21, 17.

3. Cf Aurelius Augustinus, Sermones. Basel, Johann Amerbach, 1494-1495 (GW

2920): De verbis apostoli, XX: “De psalmo nonagésimo quinto.
s. Et qua ratione dictum
sit: ‘Miserebor cui misertus fuero’ etc. Quodque ratio illius non sit scrutanda”; and De
sanctis: “De Sancto Thoma. In festo Sancti Thome apostoli de eo quod scriptum est in

evangelio secundum lohannem”. Cf Aurelii Augustini Sermones de Vetere Testamento

[...], rec. Cyrillus Lambot (CCSL XLI). Turnhout, Brepols, 1961, pp. 361—366:
“Sermo de Psalmo XCV et de verbis Apostoli: ‘Cui vult miseretur et quern vult ob-
durat, dicis itaque mihi’ et cetera’’.

[009]

1. Cf Isidorus Hispalensis, Etymolo^iae. De summo bono. Venice, Petrus Loslein, 1483

(H *^9272 =*9279): XXV, “De septem regulis’’.

2. Ps. 21, 17.

[010]

1. Cf Biblia sacra (. .
.) cum postillis Nicolai de Lyra. Venice, Paganinus de Paganinis,
18.iv.1495 (GW 4283): III, fol. 890 verso b.

2. I Cor. 10, II.

4. I Chron. 22, 10.

Cf 2 Kings 7, 14.

7. Cf Heb. 1,5.

[on]

18. Cf Manzano Manzano, 1964.

25. Matt. 1 1, 25.

Matt. 21, 15-16.

26. Cf Ps. 8, 3.

John 1,1.
28. Cf Valerius Maximus, Factorum et dictorum memorabilium libri I— IV. Pisa, Giardini
Editori, 1986, p. 34 (I: 6,5).

29. The marginal note is copied from fol. 59 verso (204.1; 205.1).

362 COM M N
F. r ARY

i
30. Cf. Sancti Aurelii Auifustini Dc civitate Dei lihri XI-XXIl, ed. Bernardus Oombart
and Alphonsus Kalb (CCSL XLVIII). Turnhout, Brepols, 1955, bk. XXII, chap.
XXX, p. 866. Cf. infra (1 10).

31. Alphonsi, Regis Castellac Tabulae astronomicae: cf infra (1 1 i).

34. Cf Matt. 24.

38. Matt. 1 1 , 25.

41. Cf infra (125— 141).

43. Cf Matt. 14, 28-31.

44. Cf Matt. 17, 19.

45. St. Catherine of Alexandria (martyred in 307 or 310).

46. Taken after six months of siege on 2 January 1492.
52. In the left margin, two capital letters (A, B) indicate that this paragraph and the
one that follows should be interchanged. Cf infra (222).

53. Cf infra (i 12-1 13).

[012]

I. Ps. 2, 6-8.

|oi3l

1. Ps. 5, 8.

[014]

I. Ps. 8, 2.

[015]

I. Ps. 9, 6. 12. 14-16. 18. 20-21. 37.

[016]

I. Ps. 17, 44-45-50.

0

[017]

1. Ps. 18, 2-5.

[018]

1. Ps. 19, 2-3.

COM MKN1 ARY 3 6 3

 loi9l

I. Ps. 21, 2S-29.

[020]

I. Ps. 23, I.

[021]

I. Ps. 25, 8.

[022]

I. Ps. 26, 4.

[023]

I. Ps. 28, 9.10.

[024]

I. Ps. 32, 5.8.

[025]

I. Ps. 42, 3 -

[026]

I. Ps. 45, II.

[027]

I. Ps. 46, 2-4.9.

[028]

I. Ps. 47, 2-3.9.1 1-12.13

[029]

I. Ps. 49, 1-2.

364 COMMENTARY
 1

lo3o]

I . Ps. 50, 20.

(031

I. Ps. 56, 10-12.

[032]

I. Ps. 58, 6.9. 14.

[033]

1. Ps. 64, 2-3. 5-6.

[034]

1. Ex libro /Psalmorum is a running title on fol. 8 verso and 9 recto.

2. Ps. 65, 1-2.4.7.8.13-14.

[035]

I. Ps. 66, 4-5.

[036]

I. Ps. 67, 30.

[037]

I. Ps. 68, 10.36.

I0381

1. Ps. 71, 1 0-1 1.17. 1

9.

[039]

I. Ps. 73, 2.7.12.

CO MMKNTARY 3 ^ 5
 [040]

I. Ps. 75, 2-3.

[041]

1. Ps. 78, 1.

[042]

I. Ps. 81, 8.

[043]

I. Ps. 83, 2-3. 7-8.

[044]

I. Ps. 85, 8-10.

[045]

I. Ps. 86, 1-3.

[046]

I. Ps. 88, 2.6.20.21.

[0471

I. Ps. 91, 2.14-16.

[048]

I. Ps. 92, 1.5.

[049]

I. Ps. 95, 1. 3-5. 7-10.

366 COMMENTARY
 .

lo.so]

1 . Ps. ij6, 1 .6-S.

(051]

I . Ps. 97, 2.

[052]

I. Ps. 98, 1-2.9.

I053)

I . Ps. 99, 1

[054]

I. Ps. lOI, 14. 16-17.22.

I°S5|

1. Ps. 104, 1.7.

[056]

I. Ps. 105, 1.47.

[057]

1. Ps. 107, 4-8.

[058]

1. Ps. 112, 2-4.

[059]

1. Ps. 1 13, 1-5.

COMMENIARY 367
 [060]

1. Ps. 1
15, 16-19.

[061]

1. Ps. I 16, 1-2.

[062]

1. Ps. 121, 1-2.

[063]

1. Ps. 125, 1-2.

[064]

1. Ps. 127, 1.5-6.

I065I

1. Ps. 128, 4-5.

[066]

1. Ps. 131, 1.6-7.12-13.

[067]

1. Ps. 133, 1-3.

[068]

1. Ps. 134, 1-2.21.

[069]

1. Ps. 135, 1.2.3.

[070]

1. Ps. 137, 1-2.4.

368 COMM KNr ARY

 (07 1
]

1. Fs. 144, 10-13.

[072]

I. Ps. 145, 1-2. 10.

[073]

I. Ps. 147, 12.

[074]

1. Ps. 148, 1.11-13.

[075]

1. Ps. 149, 1.2.

[076]

I. Ps. 150, 6.

[077]

1. Eccles. 36, 14-19.

[078]

Lines of verse probably added by Ferdinand Columbus on the lower half of the
page, which had been left blank.

Cf infra (184; 203; 220; 280).

[079]

I. Isidori Hispalensis Episcopi Etymolo^iarum siue Ori^inum libri XX, edidit Wallace

Martin Lindsay. Oxford, E Typographeo Clarendoniano, 191 1: lib. 7, cap. VIII, 33-
36. Cf Isidorus Hispalensis, Etymoloj^iae. De summo bono: fol. 36 verso a-36 verso b. In

the transcription of the manuscript, all the examples given in the original text have

been omitted.
3. Cf Acts 10, 10-12.

4. Isa. 6, 1.

COM M N
i; I A RY 3 6 y
 .

5- Cf. Cíen. 28, 12.

6. Cíf. Exod. 19, 16-24.

Cf. Job 38-40.
7. Cíen. 22, 12.

Acts 9, 4.

8. Cf Prov. -3 I I .

Cf Num. 22—24.

[o8oj

I. Isidori Hispalensis Etyrnolo^iarum lihri XX, lib. 7, cap. VIII, 37-40.

Cfr. Isidorus Hispalensis, Etymolo^iae. De summo bono: fol. 36 verso a-36 verso b.

In the transcription of the manuscript, all the examples given in the original text

have been omitted.

[081]

I. Epistula rabbi Samuel de Fez de adventu Messiae, missa rabbi Isaac. Barcelona, Paulus
Hurus et Johannes von Salzburg, c. 1475 (BMC X, p. 27).

Cf Madrid, Biblioteca Nacional, ms. 8586.

Cf Samuelis Marochiani Liber de Messiae adventu praeterito: PL 149, cols. 337—368.

[082]

1. Cf Samuelis Marochiani Liber, col. 353 AC-354

Cf Epistula, fols. 17 verso— 19 recto.
2. Cf recte Isa. 65, 15.

3. Cf Deut. 28, 13.

4. Cf recte Isa. 11,9.

5. Cf recte Kings 8, 41-43.

i

7. Cf Num. 14, 20-21.

8. Cf Ps. 21, 28.

9-10. Cf recte Isa. 60, i.

1 1. Cf Isa. 60, 3.
13. Cf Isa. 60, 3.

14. Cf recte Isa. 55, 5.

16. Cf recte Isa. 43, 9.

17. Cf recte Isa. 45, 20.

18. Cf recte Isa. 65, 1

19. Cf Jer. 3, 17.

20. Cf Jer. 16, 19.

370 COMMENTARY

It
 . .

21. C'f. Zeph. 3, 9-

Cf. Zeph. 2, I I

22. Cf. Zcch. 2, lo-i 1

23. Cf Zech. S, 20-21.

26. Cf Hab. 3, 13.

M3]

I. Cf Samuelis Marochiani Liber, col. 354 C.

Cf Epistula, fol. 19 recto- 9 verso. 1

3-6. Cf Isa. 65, 12-15.

I Cf recte Amos 8,11.
I .

[084]

I. Cf Samuelis Marochiani Liber, col. 355 AC.

Cf Epistula, fols. 19 verso-20 recto.
3. Cf Hab. I, 14.

6. Cf Hab. 3, 13.

9. Cf Ps. 18, 5.

10. Cf Ps. 8, 4. 1

[085]

3. Pseudo- Augustinus, Soliloquia animae ad Deum: PL 40, col. 884.

Cf Aurelius Augustinus, Opuscula plurima. Venice, Dionysius Bertochus,
26.iii.1491 (GW 2866): fol. XXI verso a.

[086]

I. Cf Aurelius Augustinus, Opuscula plurima, fol. XXI verso a.

Cf Pseudo-Augustinus, Soliloquia, col. 884.

I0871
m

1. Zeph. 2, 1 1.

2. Sancti Aureli Augustini ( . .

.
) De divinatione daemonum (...), recensuit losephus
Zycha. Pragae-Vienna-Leipzig, F. Tempsky-G. Freytag, 1900 (CSEL XXXXI):
chap. VII, p. 61 1
(lines 17-22).
Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. LX verso a.

3. De divinatione daemonum, chap. VIII, pp. 614 (lines 13— 22)-6i5 (line i).

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. LX verso b.

CO MMHN r ARY 3 7 I
 1

4- Zeph. 2, I 1 .

6-7. Ps. 21, 28-29.

8. De divinatione daemonum, chap. VIII: p. 616 (lines 3—14).
Cf. Opuscula plurima, fol. LXI recto a.

9-10. Ps. 2, 7-8.

1 1 . Ps. 21 ,
28.

13. De divinatione daemonum, chap. X: p. 618 (lines 7-13).

Cf. Opuscula plurima, fol. LXI recto b.

14-15. Isa. 51, 7-8.

[088]

I. Sancti Augustini Confessionum libri XIII, edidit Lucas Verheijen (CCSL XXVII).
Turnhout, Brepols, 1981, p. 140: V.13 (lines 8-10).
Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. Cl 1 verso a.

[089]

I. Confessionum libri, p. 227: XVI. 23 (lines 6-19).

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CXVIII recto a.

[090]

1. Confessionum libri, p. 265: XXV. 38 (lines 24-26)-XXVI.39 (lines 1-3).

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CXXIIII recto b.

2. Ps. 18, 5.

[091]

I. Sancti Augustini De doctrina Christiana (...), cura et studio losephi Martin (CCSL
XXXII). Turnhout, Brepols, 1962, p. 56: XXI.32 (lines 29-36).
Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CXXXIIII recto a.

4. Zeph. 13, 9.

[092]

I. De doctrina Christiana, pp. 107- 1 10: chap. XXXIV. 48-49 (lines 36-103).
Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CXLII recto a— CXLII recto b.

3. I Cor. 10, 18.

5. Ezek. 36, 23.

7-9. Ezek. 36, 23-29.
10. Isa. 10, 20; Rom. 9, 27.

Cf Titus 3,5.

3 7 2 COMMENIARY
1 1 . Cf. 2 Cor. 3, 2-3.
Ezek. 36, 26.
12. 2 Cor. 3, 3.

13. Gal. 3, 16.

16. Ezek. 36, 24.

Ezek. 36, 28.
17. Cf. Eph. 5, 27.

Cf Ps. 26, 13.

2 Tim. 1 ,
9—10.
18. Cf 2 Tim. 1,10.
19. Cf Apoc. 21,1.

[093]

I . Sancti Aureli Augustini De consensu Evan^elistarum libri quattuor, recensuit Franciscus

Weihrich (CSEL, XXXXIII). Vienna-Leipzig, F. Tempsky— G. Freytag, 1904, pp. 39

ff.

Cf Opuscula plurima, fols. CCXVIII verso a-CCXX verso b.

14.

[094]

I. De consensu Evan^elistarum, pp. 39-40: chap. XXVI (lines 11-24).

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CCXIX recto a— CCXIX recto b (chap. XXIX).
4. Jer. 16, 19.

II- 12. Cf Deut. 6, 4; 5, 8; Lev. 26, i.

Recte Exod. 23, 24.

[095]

I. De consensu Evan^elistarum, pp. 40-41; chap. XXVI (lines 15—21; i

— 13).
Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CCXIX recto b (chap. XXX).
3. Gen. 26, 4.

5. Isa. 7, 14.

7. Jer. 16, 19.

[096]

I. De consensu Evan^elistarum, p. 42: chap. XXVII (lines 1 1

— 14).
Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CCXIX recto b (chap. XXXI).
3. Ps. 71, II.

Co MM N
1. 1 ARY 3 7 3
 [
097 ]

1. De consensu Evangelist arum, p. 47: chap. XXX (lines 2-4).

Cf. Opuscula plurima, fol. CCXIX verso b (chap. XXXIIII).

2. Ps. iH, 4-5.

[098]

I. Cf. De consensu Evangelist arum, chap. XXXII, pp. 53-54.

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CCXX recto b (chap. XXXVI). The passage does not

seem to have been copied literally.

2-6. Cf Is. 54, 1-5.

[099]

1. De consensu Evan^elistarum, pp. 252—254: II, chap. LXXVII (lines 20—27; 0 -

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CCXLII verso b.

2. Matt. 24, 14.

Mark 13, 10.

5. Matt. 24, 15.

Mark 13, 14.

7. Luke 21, 20.

9. Matt. 24, 16-18. Cf Mark 13, 14-16.

10. Luke 21, 21.

12—13. Luke 21, 21-22.

[100]

1. De consensu Evan^elistarum, p. 380: chap. XXV (lines 7-1 1).

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. CCLVIII recto b.

3-4. Mark 16, 15-16.

[101]

2. Mark 16, 15.

[102]

2. Matt. 24, 14.

3. Cf Biblia sacra (. .
.) cum postillis Nicolai de Lyra. V, fol. 1063 recto b.

3 74 COMMENTARY
 .

|i 03 l

1. Cf. Biblia sacra, V, fol. 1063 recto b-1063 verso a.

2. Matt. 24, 14.

4. Acts 1, 8.

[104]

1. Cf. Biblia sacra, V, fol. 1063 verso a- 1063 verso b.

[105]

2. Cf Alfonso Tostado de Madrigal, Floretum Sancti Matthaei. Sevilla, Compañeros

Alemanes, 30. ix. 1491 (Hain '*^15581): II, chap. XXIV, q. 47.

[106]

I. Matt. 28, 18-20.

[107]

1-2. Ps. 71, 8.

3. Cf Biblia sacra, III, fol. 485 verso a.

5. Ps. 18, 5.

8. Matt. 28, 18.

[108]

I. De divinatione daemonum, p. 614: chap. VIII. 12 (lines 2-7); pp. 614-615; chap.

IX. 13 (lines 1 1-22; i); p. 616; chap. IX. 13 (lines 8-14); p. 616: chap. X.14 (line 24).

Cf Opuscula plurima, fol. LX verso b, and fol. LXI recto a.

4. Zeph. 2, 1 1

6. Ps. 21, 28.29.

[109]

1. Petrus de Alliaco, Tractatus de le^ibus et sectis contra superstitiosos astrónomos. Louvain,

Johann von Paderborn, c. 1483 (H ^836=837; BMC IX, II, p. 146), fols. 47 recto-48
recto.

2. The passage has been taken literally, with some omissions and modifications, from
the Opus mains, pars IV, cap. XVI: “Judicia astronomiae” of Roger Bacon, written by

the Oxonian theologist in 1267: cf The “Opus Maius“ of Ro^er Bacon, edited, with

COM MtN r ARY 3 7 .S

 Introduction and Alphabetical Table, by John Henry Bridges. Oxford, At the Claren-
don Press, 1897 (reprint: Frankfurt a.M., Minerva, 1964): I, pp. 266, 268, and 269.

3. Abu Masr, the famous ninth-century Arabic astrologer, whose Liber dc ma^nis
coniunctionibus annorum greatly influenced Latin scientific writing from the twelfth cen-
tury' on.

4. Arabic years of 354 days counted from 622 a.d., the date of the Hegira.
6. Cf Apoc. 13, 18.

7. The Venerable Bede (672-673/735), the most influential ecclesiastical writer of the

seventh and eighth centuries.

8.The sack of Baghdad, called Baldach by Bacon, under the leadership of Hülegü, a

nephew of Genghis Khan, took place in the Arabic year 656 after the Hegira.
The caliphate was the primary institution of medieval Islamic government.
12. A Cosmoj^raphy, attributed to Aethicus Ister, was probably written during the third
quarter of the eighth century within the circle of Virgil, the Irish bishop of Salzburg. It

enjoyed great success as a scholastic manual.

16. The name Sybiliine Oracles is given to a collection of prophecies about different
religions and historical events incorporatingjudaic and Christian doctrines of the Hel-
lenistic era.

The fame of the legendary British prophet derives from Tlie Prophecies of Merlin,
included by Geoffrey of Monmouth in his History of the Kirij^s of Britain (written around
1136).

Aquila is probably the proselyte who undertook in the second century A.D. a new
translation of the Bible into Greek. He was reputed to have been a seer before his
conversion.
Concerning Joachim of Fiore, see below (222).

17. Acts I, 7.

Matt. 24, 36.

18. Cf. Petrus de Alliaco, Tractatus et Sermones, Argentorati 1490 (Hain ^848; BMC I,

p. 1 41), fols. t 2 recto a-6 verso b: “Sermo de quadruplici adventu Domini, et specia-

liter de adventu ad iudicium” (reprint: Frankfurt a.M., Minerva, 1971).

Cf Matt. 24, 33.

[no]

1 . Vi^intiloquium de concordia astronomice veritatis cum theologia. Louvain, Johann von

Paderborn, ca. 1483 (Hain *836=837; BMC IX, II, p. 146), fol. 97 recto.
2. Augustinus, De civitate Dei, lib. XXII, cap. XXX, pp. 865-866.
4. Augustinus, De civitate Dei, lib. XXII, cap. XXX, pp. 865-866.
5. Petrus de Alliaco, Tractatus et Sermones: cf supra (109).
Cf Matt. 24, 33.

3 76 CO MMKN r ARY
I'M]

1 . Cf. lilucidarium astrommice amcordie cum tlicolo^ica et histórica veritate. Louvain, Johann
von Paderborn, ca. 14H3 (Hain '*^836=837; BMC IX, II, p. 146), fol. 126 recto.
2. The astronomical tables were completed around the year 1272 by Yehuda ben
Moses Cohen and Isaac ben Sid, two Hebraic astronomers commissioned by Alfonso
X, king of Castile. Arranged by three astronomers —Jean de Ligneres, Jean de Mars,
and Jean de Saxe — the tables were circulated from Paris throughout Europe around
1320.

[112]

1. Tractatus de concordia astronomice veritatis et narrationis liistorice. Louvain, Johann von

Paderborn, ca. 1483 (Hain *^836=837; BMC IX, II, p. 146), fol. 1 18 recto- 1 18 verso.

2. Lotario Conti (i 160— 161/1216), Pope Innocent

1 III after 1 198.

Constantinople was captured during the Fourth Crusade on 12 April 1204.

3. The Almohads were defeated at Las Navas de Tolosa on 16 July 1212 by the Chris-
tian armies of Sancho VII of Navarre and Alfonso VIII of Castile.
4. This is a reference to the missionary work of the Cistercian monks in Livonia in
1212, at the time of the Teutonic knights’ crusade in the Baltic countries.

5. The fourth Lateran Council took place in Rome in November 1215. It was fol-

lowed by the publication of Constitution 71, “Expedition for the purpose of recover-
ing the Holy Land,’’ and Constitution 2, “Concerning the errors of Abbot Joachim.’’
At the end of Constitution 2, the pantheistic doctrines attributed to the Parisian theo-

logian Amalric of Bene (+ 1206) were also condemned.

6. The meeting at Messina of Joachim of Fiore with Philippe Auguste II, king of
France, and King Richard I of England, known as “the Lion-Hearted,’’ took place in
the winter of 1 190-91, when the two kings were traveling during the third crusade.

7. Frederick I, called Barbarossa (ca. 1 122-1 190), emperor from 1 i 52.

|ii3l

1. Tractatus de concordia, fol. 120 recto- 120 verso.

2. The Revelations, compiled in Syriac between 660 and 680 approximately, are at-

tnbuted to Methodius, a fourth-century bishop and martyr.

The eight preambles to the text are derived from chapters 10 to 13 of the Sermo de

rej^no Cantium et in novissitnis temporibus certa demonstratio (ed. Ernest Sackur, Sibyl-

liniscfie Texte und Forschunj^en. Halle, Max Niemeyer Verlag, 1898, pp. 78-93.)

St. Jerome, in De viris illustribus liber, chapter 83 (PL 23, cols. 727B-730A), men-
tions Methodius, bishop of Olimpo in Licia, who was martyred at the time of the

COM MKN r ARY 3 7 7

 Roman emperor Decius or Diocletian. Jerome considers him to be the author of
the Bamhetto.

Cf. 2 Thess. 2, 3.

4. Cf. Dan. II, 15.

6. In 1169 Petrus Comestor, Parisian theologian and chancellor of the cathedral

school (ca. 1 100- 1 17S), completed his Historia scholastica, which became a text-book
of fundamental importance in the study of theology.
9. 2 Thess. 2, 3.

10. Cf. I Tim. 4, I .

15. Cf. I Thess. 5, 3.

Cf. Matt. 24, 42-44.

16. The legend of the gate built by Alexander the Great over a Caucasian mountain
pass in order to separate the barbarians from the civilized world began with the two
works of Flavio Giuseppe (37/38-102/ 103 ) — De bello ludaico (7: 7, 4), written in 75-
79, and Antiquitates ludaice (1: 6, i), written in 93-94.

[•14]

i. Isa. 1 1, 10-12.

[115]

1. Isa. 14, 32.

[116]

I. Isa. 19, 19-20.

[U7j

I. Isa. 25, 6.7.9.9-10.

Í118]

I. Isa. 27,13.

[119]

I. Isa. 28, 22.

(120]

I. Isa. 30, 18-19.27.

37 « COMMENTARY
|I2>|

I. Isa. 35, 1.2.9-10.

[122]

I. Isa. 40, 1. 5-9. 17-

[123]

1. Isa. 22, 20-25.

[124]

1. Isa. 55, I.3-5-I3-

[125]

2. Isa. 24, 14-16.

/

[126]

I. Isa. 41, 1-5.

I'27l

1. Isa. 42, 1-4.6.6-16.

4. The entire paragraph has been rewritten, in part by the Italian scribe over an erasure
of a line of the model text, in part in the margin above and to the right in the hand of
Gaspar Gorricio.

[128]

1. Isa. 43, 1-7.

[129]

1. Isa. 44, 1-3.23.25-28.

[130]

1. Isa. 45, 1-6.

CO MM N
i; I AKY 3 7 9
 I'3'l

1 . Isa. 46, 10-13.

[>32]

1. Isa. 49, I -4.5-6.

|U3|

I. Isa. 51, 1-13. 16-18.22-23.

[134]

I. Isa. 52, 1-3. 7-15.

[135]

I. Isa. 57, 13.

[136]

I. Isa. 59, 18-20.

[137]

I. Isa. 60, 1-22.

[138]

I. Isa. 62, 1-12.

[139]

I. Isa. 63, I.

[140]

I. Isa. 65, 1-5.16-24.

3 S o COMMENTARY
I'4i]

I . Isa. 66, 1 H-24.

[142]

I. Jer. 2, lo-i I.

[143]

I. Jer. 3, 14-18.

[144]

I. Jer. 4, 5-6.16.

[145]

I. Jer. 10, 9.

[146]

I. Jer. 16, 14-15. 19.

[147I

I. Jer. 23, 4-8. 24.

[148]

1. Jer. 30, 8-10.

[149]

I. Jer. 31, 6-8.9.10-12.

[»5o]

I. Jer. 33, 14-16.19-23.25-26.

COMMEN ARY
1 •
 (
151 ]

I. Bar. 4, 1 5.23-24.36-37.

[• 52 ]

1. Bar. 5, 1-9.

[153]

I. Ezek. 3, 5-6.

[• 54 ]

1. Ezek. 27, 15.22.35.

[•55]

I. Ezek. 28, 7.25.

[•56]

1. Ezek. 32, 25.

[•57]

I. Ezek. 34, 24.

[•58]

I. Ezek. 35, 14.

[•59]

I. Ezek. 36, 23-29.32.33-35.37-38.

[•60]

I. Ezek. 37, 21-22.23-28.

3 8 2 COM M K NTA RY
Il6l]

I . Ezek. 38, 8.

(162]

I. Ezek. 39, 25.27.

[I ^>3]

1. Dan. 8, 5.17.

[164]

I. Dan. II, 18.

[165]

I. Dan. 12, I.

[166]

I. Hos. 2, I.

I1671

I. Hos. 3, 3-5.

(| 68 |

I. Joel 2, 1.2.20-27.

[169]

I. Joel 2, 28-32; 3, 1-5.

[170]

I. Amos 9, 1 1- 1
5.

COMMENTARY 3X3
 [>7i]

1. Obad. I, 16-21.

[172]

I. Mic. 4, 1-13; 5, I.

['73]

I. Mic. 5, 2.

[174]

1. Mic. 6, 7-8.

['75]

I. Zeph. 2, 1 1-12

['76]

I. Zeph. 3, 1-20.

(1771

I. Zech. I, 14-17.

(781

1. Zech. 2, 1-13.

['79]

I. Zech. 8, 1-23.

[180]

I. Zech. 9, 1-17.

384 COMMENTARY
|
18 ,|

1. Zech. II, 12-13.

|
i 82|

1. Zech. 13, 1-9.

[1831

I. Zech. 14, I -2 1.

1 184]

Juan de Luzon, Suma de las virtudes. Zaragoza, Jorge Cocí, i 2.x. i 508: fol. h viii

verso.

Cf. infra (220).

[85]

1. Biblia sacra, III, fol. 425 recto a.

Ps. 2,1.

The rest of the page is blank.

I
'86)

2. Isa. 2, 2-3.
3. Cf.Jer. 1, 14-15.

[871

I . Isa. 5, 26.

[188]

I. Isa. 6, ] I — 13.

(189)

I. Isa. 8, 9.

COMMENTAKY 3«5
 1 1 yol

I. Isa. 12, 4-6.

[191]

1. Isa. 18, 1-7.

[192]

I. Isa. 26, 1-3.

[193]

I. Isa. 33, 13-14.17.20.

[194]

I. I Chron. 17, 7-15.

[195]

I. I Chron. 23, 25-26.

[196]

I. I Chron. 28, 1.2. 6-7. 9.

[197]

1. I Chron. 29, 4.17.

[198]

1 . 2 Chron. 6, 16.

[199]

1. 2 Chron. 7, 12.17-22.

386 COM MEN r ARY

 .

[200]

1 2 Chron. S, 6. 1
7- 1 K.

[201]

1. 1 Chron. 16, 7-8.23-36.

[202]

Lines copied in an unidentified Italian hand on a part of the page that had been left

blank.

Cf Fs. 105, 20.

[203]

Definitive text of the first two stanzas of the poem written by Ferdinand Columbus
in the margins of fol. 84 verso.
Cf infra (280).

[204]

2. Seneca, Medea, edited with introduction and commentary by Charles Desmond

Nuttall Costa, Oxford, At the Clarendon Press, 1973, p. 36, vv 374-379.

Cf Lucius Annaeus Seneca, Tra^oediae, comm. Gellius Bernardinus Marmita. Ven-

ice, Lazarus de Soardis, 12.xii.1492 (Hain 14666), fol. p V recto.

[205]

Translation in Christopher Columbus’s handwriting.

[206]

I. Cf Joannes de Monte Regio, Epliemerides ah anno 1482 ad annum 1306. Venetiis,

Erhardus Ratdolt, 1481 (Hain 13797)-

[207]

3. An ampolleta is a sand-filled hourglass having a duration of approximately 30 min-

utes.

5. Cf Joannes de Monte Regio, Epliemerides, and Abraham Zacutus, Tabulae celestium

COMMENTARY 3X7
 motuum and Almatiacli perpetuum. Leiria, Abraham ben Samuel d’Ortas, 1496 (GW
115).

6. This is a reference to the position of the stars of Ursa Major with respect to the

polestar.

[208]

I . Luke 1
,
48.

3. Cf. Biblia sacra, V, fol. 1 102 recto a.

6. Cf. Qur'an, sura 3: 45.

8. Cf Qur'an, sura 3:42.

[209]

I. Matt. 8, 1 1.

3. Cf. Biblia sacra, V, fol. 1033 verso b.

[210]

I. Matt. 2, 1-2.

4. Cf. Biblia sacra, V, fol. 1018 verso b.

6. This text has not been found in any of the hymn collections or indexes.

[211]

I. John 10, 14.16.

4. Cf Biblia sacra, V, fol. 1 168 verso b.

6. Matt. 1 5, 24.

8. Mark 16, 20.

10. Acts 13, 46-47.

11-12. Acts 13, 46-47.
13. Acts 13, 48.

|2I2|

I. Sancti Gregorii Magni XL Homiliarurn in Euanj^elia libri duo, homilia XIV: PL 76,
col. 1 129 BC.
Cf. Idem, Homiliae super Evan^eliis. Venetiis, Peregrinus de Pasqualibus, 14.iii.1493

(H* 795 i), fol. cevii recto b.

3. John 10, 16.

388 CííMMENTARY
 .

[1.
213 ]

Sancti Aurclii Augustini Sermones ad populum, s. CXXXVIII: De verbis Hvatij^elii

loannis: sum pastor bonus” etc. Contra Donatistas f . . . j; PL 38, cols. 765—766.
Cfr. Aurelius Augustinus, Sermones. Basel, Johann Amerbach, 1494: De verbis

Domini, s.L, fol. Í4 recto b (GW 2920).

4-5. John 10, 16.

[214]

1 . Cf. Joannis Chrysostom! Commentarius in sanctum loannem Apostolum et Evangelista:

Homilia LX, no. 2: PG 59, col. 329.

2. Cf. John 10, 12.

3. John 10, 16.

6. John 10, 16.

[215]

I. Sancti Gregorii Magni XL Homiliarum in Evan^elia libri duo, homilia XIV: PL 76,

col. 1 129 C.
Cf Idem, Homiliae, fol. cevii recto b.

[216]

I. Sancti Aurelii Augustini De civitate Dei, p. 626 (lines 1-2) and 627-62H (lines 26-

56).

Cf Aurelii Augustini De civitate Dei. Venice, Gabriele di Pietro, 1475 (GW 2880),

fol. U4 recto b-u4 verso b.

4-5 Jer. 16, 19-20.

7. Jer. 17, 9.

8. De civitate Dei, bk. XVII, chap. Ill, pp. 553

“ 554 -

10. Jer. 31,31-

12. Zeph. 3, 8. .

13. Zeph. 2, 1 1

15-19. Zeph. 3, 9-12.

21. Rom. 9, 27.

[217]

I. -2. Annotation in the hand of Gaspar Gorricio.

CO MMrN 1 ARY 3 X 9
 |2IS|

1. S. Aurclii Augustini Scnnottes ad populiwi, s. LXXVII: PL 38, col. 483-486. The

passage has been summarized.
Cf. Augustinus, Sermoties (1495): Dc tempore, s. LXXIIII, fols. iy verso a-i8 recto b.

Matt. 15, 21-28.

2. Cf. Matt. 1 5, 22.

4. Matt. 1 5, 24.
6-8. Ps. 17, 45.

II. Ps. 105, 47.

1 5. Cf Matt. 9, 1 8-22.

[219]

1. Ps. 2 ,
I.

Biblia sacra, III, fol. 425 recto a-425 recto b.

2. Cf 2 Sam. 5.
5. Cf Heb. I, 5.
Ps. 2, 7.

6. Cf Sancti Aurelii Augustini Epistulae, ed. Al. Goldbacher, F. Tempski-G. Freytag,

Prague-Vienna— Leipzig, 1885 (CSEL, XXXIIII), ep. XCIII, pp. 445—496.

7. Cf Acts 22, 3.

8. Cf Acts 4, 25; Ps. 2, I.

9. Rabbi Solomon ben Isaac, called Rashi (ca. 1040- 1105), the most authoritative
Hebrew exegete of the Middle Ages.

[220]

Juan de Luzon, Suma de las virtudes, fol. n ii verso.

Cf supra (184).

(22 1
|

2. Jer. 25, 1.

[222]

The page had been cut before the interventions in the manuscript by Ambrosio de
Morales in 1569 or 1576.
2. Falsely attributed to the theologian and monastic exegete Joachim of Fiore (+ 202), 1

this prediction agrees with the prophecy Vae mundo in centum annis by the Catalan
Arnold ofVillanova (c. 1240-13 ii).

3 90 COMMENTAKY
 The passage is not found in the letter of 13 March 1492 (Archivio di Stato di

Genova, cod. 34 Litterarum). An embassy, properly speaking, did not leave from
Genoa before March of 1493 (De Lollis 1984b, p. 148, nt. 2).

[223]

1-3. Pen-testings, probably in the hand of Ferdinand Columbus.

[224]

2. Gen. 10, 1.

1 Chron. i, 7.

3. Gen. 10, I.

4. Gen. 10, 3.

5. I Chron. 1, 7.

6. Biblia sacra, I, fol. 20 recto b; cf II, fol. 373 recto b-373 verso a.

Cf Act. 21, 39.

[225]

I. 2 Chron. 20, 35-37.

[226]

1
. 3 Kings 10, 21-22.

I2271

1. Jer. 10, 9.

3. Biblia sacra, II, fol. 754 recto a.

Cf 3 Kings 9, 28.

[228]

1
. 3 Kings 9, 26-28.
5. Cf Biblia sacra, II, fol. 343 recto b-343 verso a.

Cf 3 Kings 9, 28.

[229]

I. 2 Chron. 9, 20— 21.

COM MEN r AHY 3 9 I

 [^3o]

I
. Jth. 2, 12. I 3.

[231]

I. Ps. 47, s.

3. Cf. Biblia sacra, III, fol. 463 verso b.

[232]

I. Ps. 71, 10.

3. Cf. Biblia sacra, III, fol. 485 verso b.

U33]

I. Jon. I, 3.

3. Cf Biblia sacra, IV, fol. 935 verso b.

Cf Acts, 21, 39.

[234]

I. Acts 21, 39; cf 22, 3.

[235]

I. Alfonso de Palencia, Universal Vocabulario en Latino y en Romance. Seville, Com-

pañeros Alemanes, 1490 (GW 1267), fol. CCCCLXXXIX recto, s. v. “Tharsum”.

[237]

I. 3 Kings 9, 25-28.
6. Cf Biblia sacra, II, fol. 543 recto b— 543 verso a.

1238I

1. 3 Kings 10, II.

[239]

I. 3 Kings 22, 49.

3 9 2 CCJMMENTARY
 .

1240]

I
.
Jer. 10, 9.

1241]

I . I Chron. 29, 3-4.

[242]

1 . 2 Chron. 8, i 8.

N3]

I. 2 Chron. 9, 10.

[245]

1. Isa. 23, 1-2. 12.

[246]

I. Jer. 2, 10- 1 1

[^47]

I. Gen. 10, 4; cf. I Chron. i, 7.

3. Cf. Biblia sacra, II, fol. 373 recto b.

[249]

1. Gen. 10, 3.4.

2. Cf Biblia sacra, II, fol. 373 recto b-373 verso a.

[250]

I. Esther 10, i.

[251]

I. Ps. 71, 10.

COMM K N I ARY 3 y 3
 .

( 25^1

I . Ps. 96, I

[253]

I. Eccles. 47, 17.

[254]

I . Isa. II, II.

[255]

I. Isa. 24, 15.

[256]

I. Isa. 41, 1.5.

[257]

I. Isa. 42, 3-4.

[258]

I. Isa. 49, I.

[259]

I. Isa. 51, 5 -

[260]

I . Isa. 60, 9.

[261]

I . Isa. 66, 9.

3 94 COM MEN I ARY

 [262]

I. Jer. 2, 10.

N3]

I. Jcr. 25, 17-18.22.

[264]

I. Jer. 31, 10.

[265]

I. Jer. 47, 4.

[266]

I. Ezek. 26, 15 — 16.

[267]

I. Ezek. 27, 6.7.15.

[268]

I. Dan. II, 18.

[269]

I. I Macc. 6, 29.

[270]

1. 1 Macc. 14, 5.

[271]

I. I Macc. 15, 1.

COMM I -; N r A RY 3 9 .s
 272)

1 . Apoc. 1 , 9.

[^73]

I. Apoc. 6, 14.

I274) \

I . Apoc. 16, 20.

[^75]

Annotation in Gorricio’s hand.

[276]

1—9. A series of notes pertaining to persons and situations not well identified.

[277]

I. Cf (276.9).

[278]

Annotation in Christopher Columbus’s hand, illegible in the manuscript and at-

tested only by Streicher, 1928, p. 249.

[279]

This list of biblical passages corresponds only in part to those copied into the manu-
script.

[280]

Lines of verse probably added by Ferdinand Columbus in the margins of the table of
biblical passages (278), where other stanzas are also sketched out. Cf De Lollis, 1894,

p. 157; Varela, 1984, pp. 290-91; Fernández Valverde, 1992, pp. 13 1-133.
Cf supra (078; 203).

3 96 COMMENTARY
 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Aguilar, Francisco Galvez, Diego Alejandro de. Diccionario de Historia Eclesiástica de

1972 España 2: 968—969. Madrid: Instituto Enrique Florez— Consejo Su-

perior de Investigaciones Científicas.

de Albuquerque, Luís Abnanach Perpetuum de Abraao Zacuto. Reprodu<;:áo em fac-síniile

1986 do exemplar da Biblioteca Nacional com introdu(;:ao de Luís de

Albuquerque. Lisboa: Imprensa Nacional-Casa da Moeda.

Alvarez Seisdedos, Cristóbal Colón, Libro de las profecías. Estudio previo, traducción y

Francisco notas de Francisco Álvarez Seisdedos. (Colección “Tabula Ameri-

1984 cae,” 2). Madrid: Testimonio Compañia Editorial.

de Arriola, Alejandro Los libros de Colón. Boletín de la Sociedad Geoj,>ráfica de Madrid 27:
Maria 272-286.
1 889

Avalos, Héctor Ignacio The Biblical Sources of Columbus’s “Libro de las profecías.” Tra-

1994 ditio 49:33 1-3 35-

Ballesteros Beretta, Cristóbal Colón y el Descubrimiento de América (Historia de América y

Antonio de los pueblos americanos, IV— V). Barcelona-Buenos Aires: Salvat

1945 Editores S.A.

Baudot, George Utopie et Histoire au Mexique. Les premiers clironiqueurs de la civilisation

•977 mexicaine. Toulouse: Brivat.

Beer, Rudolf Handschriftenschatze Spaniens (Bericht über eine im Auftrag der kai-
1894 serlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften in den jahren 1886-1888
durchgeflihrte Forschungsreise). Wien: F. Tempsky.

Berchet, Guglielmo Fonti ¡taliane per la storia della scoperta del Nuovo Mondo, vol. I: Car-

1892 tej^i diplomatici. (Raccolta di documenti e studi pubblicati dalla R.

Commissione Colombiana per il quarto centenario della scoperta
dell’America. Parte III). Roma: Ministero della Bubblica Istru-
zione.

3 y 7
 1

de Berwick y de Alba, Antóc^rafos de Cristóbal Colón y papeles de América. Madrid: Sucesores

Duquesa (María del de Rivadeneyra.
Rosario Falco y Osorio)
892 1

Biblioteca Colombina Biblioteca Colombina. Catálogo de sus libros impresos (...), con notas
1888-1948 bibliográficas de Simón de la Rosa y López, vols. 1 , V, and VI.
Sevilla: E. Rasco.

Boscolo, Alberto Diego e Fernando paggi alia corte dei Re Cattolici. In Scritti in

1986 onore del Prof. Paolo Emilio Taviani, Vol. III: 52—59. Genova:
E.C.I.G. (= Annali della Facoltá di Scienze Politiche. Universitá
degli Studi di Genova, 11 — 13: 1983—1986).

Brigham, Kay Christopher Columbus, Book of Prophecies. Reproduction of the

1991 Original Manuscript with English Translation, ed. Kay Brigham.
Terrassa (Barcelona): Editorial CLIE.

Briquet, Charles Moi'sé Les filij^ranes . Dictionnaire historique des marques de papier de leur appari-

1907 tion vers 1282 jusque 1600. 4 vols. Paris: A. Picard. (Reprint Amster-
dam: Paper Publications Society, 1968).

Brown, Elizabeth A. R., On the Origins and Import of the Columbinos Prophecy. Traditio

and Robert E. Lerner 45: 219-256.

1989-1990

Buron, Edmond Ymaj^o Mundi de Pierre d’Ailly cardinal de Cambrai et chancelier de la

1930 Universite de Paris. Texte latin et traduction fran^aise des quatre

traites cosmographiques de d’Ailly et des notes marginales de
Christophe Colomb. Étude sur les sources de I’auteur. 3 vols. Paris:

Librairie Oriéntale et Américaine-Maisonneuve Freres Editeurs.

Caraci, Giuseppe Cesare De Ddlis studioso di Colombo. Roma: Edizioni dell’Ateneo.

•965

Caraci, Giuseppe, and 11 latino di Colombo. In Atti del I Conve¡^no Internazionale di Studi
Maria Luzzana Caraci Americanistici (Genova-Rapallo 1974), 87—93. Genova: Associazione
1976 Italiana Studi Americanistici.

Cataloj^ue of Additions Catalogue of Additions to the Manuscripts in the British Museum in the

1850 Years MDCCCXLI-MDCCCXLV. London: The Trustees of the

British Museum.

Catalogue . . . Venice Catalogue of Books Printed XVth Century now in the British
in the

1924 Museum. Part V: Venice. London: The Trustees of the British Mu-
seum.

Cioranescu, Alexandre Oeuvres de Christophe Colomb. Presentees, traduites de I’espagnol et

1961 annotees par Alexandre Cioranescu. Paris: Gallimard.

398 B 1.
BIBl.
B I lOCRAPHY
oC RA H Y l>
Godiic Prh’ilc^^i II codice dci privilcifi di Cristoforo Colombo, con tre Ictlcre au(0{fratc del

1
^9} medesimo di proprietd del Municipio di Genova ed altri documenti ri-

prodotti in fototipia. Genova; Stabilimento Fratelli Armanino.

Colección documental Colección Documental del Descubrimiento (1470—1506). Madrid; Real

1 994 Academia de la Historia— Consejo Superior de Investigactiones
Cientificas— Fundación MAPFRE América.

Colón, Fernando Le Historie della vita e dei fatti deirAmmiraj^lio don Cristoforo Colombo.

1 990 Introduzione, note e schede di Paolo Emilio Taviani e llaria Luz-

zana Caraci, vol. I (Nuova Raccolta Colombiana, VIII). Roma;
Istituto Poligrafico e Zecca dello Stato.

(editio princeps: Venezia, Francesco de Franceschi, 1571).

1992 Abecedarium B y Supplementum. Edición facsímil de los manuscritos con-

servados en la Biblioteca Colombina de Sevilla. Texto Introductorio de
Tomás Marín Martínez. Madrid; Fundación Mapfre América—
Cabildo de la Catedral de Sevilla.

Conti, Manna Le postille di Cristoforo Colombo alia “Naturalis Historia” di

1 986 Plinio il Vecchio. In Scritti in onore del prof Paolo Emilio Taiáani, vol.

Ill; 75—91. Genova; E.C.l.G. (= Annali della Facoltá di Scienze

Politiche. Universitá degli Studi di Genova, 1 1 — 13; 1983 — 1986).

Conti, Simonetta Biblioj^rafia colombiana lygj—iggo. Genova; Cassa di Risparmio di

1990 Genova e di Imperia.

Curtis, William Eleroy The Existing Autographs of Christopher Columbus. In Annual Re-
1895 port of the American Historical Association for the Year i8g4, 445—518.
Washington, D.C.; Government Printing Office.

l)e Cesare, Giovanni Libretto de tutta la navigatione de Re de Spagna de le isole et

Battista terreni novamente trovati. In L' America tra reale e meravij^lioso. Sco-

1990 pritori, cronisti, viaj^iatori. Atti del Convej^no di Milano, a cura di Giu-
seppe Bellini, 1 1—22. Roma; Bulzoni Editore.

l)e Fraja, Valeria Gioacchino da Fiore: biblw^rafia ig6g—tgS8. Florensia 2; 7—59.

1988

De Lollis, Cesare Autoj^rafi di Cristoforo Colombo con prefazione e trascrizione diplomática

1 892 (Raccolta di documenti e studi pubblicati dalla R. Commissione

Colombiana per il quarto centenario della scoperta dell’America.
Parte I, volume III). Roma; Ministero della Pubblica Istruzione.

1 894a Autograft di Cristoforo Colombo con prefazione e trascrizione diplomática.

Supplemento. (Raccolta di documenti e studi pubblicati dalla R.

Commissione Colombiana per quarto centenario il della scoperta

deir America. Parte I, volume III). Roma; Ministero della Pubblica

Istruzione.

BIBI. lOCKAl'HY 3 9 9
 I Sy 4 b Scritti di Criitoforo Colombo (Raccolta . . . Parte 1 , volume 11 ).

Roma: Mmistero della Pubblica Istruzione.

Dutton, Brian Ciitáhiio- Indice de lo Pocsia Cancioneril del Sij^lo XV, con la colabora-
1982 ción de Stephen Fleming y Jineen Krogstad, Francisco Santoyo
Vázquez, Joaquín González Cuenca. 2 vols. Madison (Wisconsin):
Seminary of Medieval Studies.

ESPASA Loaysa, Juan de. In Enciclopedia Universal Ilustrada Europeo-Ameri-

1967 cana: XXX 1230 and 1232. Madrid: Hijos dej. Espasa.

Fernández Val verde, Cristóbal Colón, Libro de las profecías. Volumen preparado por Juan
Juan Fernández Valverde. (Biblioteca de Colón, IV). Madrid: Alianza
1992 Editorial.

Fomiisano, Luciano Vespucci in America: recuperi testimoniali per una edizione. Studi
19H3 di filoloj^ia italiana 41: 37—43.

Gallardo, Bartolomé José Ensayo de una Biblioteca Española de libros raros y curiosos (...), vol.
1866 11 . Madnd: M. Rivadaneyra. (Reprint Madrid: Credos 1968).

de Gayangor, Pascual Cataloifue of the Manuscripts in the Spanish Lan^ua^^e in the British Li-

1976 brary, 11 . 2nd ed. London: The Trustees of the British Library.

Geraldini, Alessandro Itinerarium ad rej^iones sub aequinoctiali platea constitutas. Roma: Gu-
1631 glielmo Faccioli. (Reprint: ed. Enrico Menesto, Todi, Regione
deirUmbria, 1992).

Gil, Juan Colón y la Casa Santa. Historiografía y Biblioji^rafía Americanistas 21:

1977 125-135-

1984 “Decades” de Pedro Mártir de Anglería. Libros relativos a Cristó-

bal Colón. In Juan Gil-Consuelo Varela, Cartas de particulares a

Colón y Relaciones coetáneas, 17—39. Madrid, Alianza Universidad.

1986a Introducción. In El libro de Marco Polo. Ejempdar anotado por Cristóbal

Colón y que se conserva en la Biblioteca Capitular y Columbina de
Sevilla. Edición, traducción y estudio de Juan Gil (Colección

“Tabula Americae”, 5). Madrid: Testimonio Compañía Editorial.

1986b Los Franciscanos y Colón. In Actas del l Congreso Internacional sobre

los Franciscanos en el Nuevo Mundo (La Rábida: 16—21 septiembre
•9^5). 77—1 10- (— Archivo Ibero-Americano, Ser. 2, 46).

1987 El libro de Marco Polo anotado por Cristóbal Colón. El libro de Marco

Polo versión de Rodriqo de Santaella. Edición, introducción y notas de

Juan Gil. Madrid: Alianza Editorial.

400 bibuoc;kaphy
 1989a El archivo colombino de
Cartuja. El inven taño de 1544 y un
la

problema anejo. In Historia de la Cartuja de Scinlla. De ribera del

Guadalquivir a recinto de la Exposición Universal, 147—160 and 354—
355. Sevilla: Turner Libros.

1989b Mitos Y utopías del Descubrimiento, vol. 1 : Colón y su tiempo. Madrid:

Alianza Editorial.

Gil, Juan, and Consuelo Cartas de particulares a Colón y Relaciones coetáneas. Recopilación y
Varela edición de Juan Gil y Consuelo Varela. Madrid: Alianza Univer-
1984 sidad.

1992 11 “Libro Copiador”: Nuove e vecchie lettere di Cristoforo

Colombo ai Re Cattolici. In Cristoro Colombo, Relazioni e lettere sul

secando, terzo e quarto viajólo, a cura di Paolo Emilio Taviani, Con-

suelo Varela, Juan Gil, Marina Conti, 161—441 (Nuova Raccolta
Colombiana, vol. 11 ,
tomo I). Roma: Istituto Poligrafico e Zecca
dello Stato.

Gosselin, Edward A. A Listing of the Printed Editions of Nicolaus of Lyra. Traditio 26:

1970 399-426.

Guillen Tato, Julio F. La parla marinera en el Diario del primer viaje de Cristóbal Colón. Ma-
1951 drid: Instituto Histórico de Marina.

1952 La parla marinera en el Diario del primer viaje de Cristóbal Colón.

In Studi Colombiani. Atti del Convertía ¡nternazionale di Studi Coloni-

biani (Genova, 1951), vol. II: 291—293. Genova: Civico Istituto

Colombiano.

Harnsse, Henry Notes on Columbus. New York: Privately Printed.

1866

1871 D. Fernando Colón, historiador de su padre. Sevilla: R. Tarasco.

1 872 Fernand Colonib. Sa vie, ses oeuvres. Essai critique. París: Librairíe

T ross.

Hebert, John R ¡4g2: An On^oinj^ Voyaj,>e. Ed.John. R. Hebert. Washington D.C.:

1992 Library of Congress.

Hernández Díaz, J. and El Testamento de Don Hernando Colón y otros documentos para su bio-
A. Muro Orejón j^rafía. Sevilla: Impr. editorial de la Gavidia.

1941

de Hornedo, Rafael Morales, Ambrosio de. Diccionario de Historia Eclesiástica de España

María 3: 1737—1738. Madrid: Instituto Enrique Florez— Consejo Superior
1973 de Investigaciones Científicas.

BIBl lOCkAPH Y 4 O I
Huntington, Archer M. (^otoloiTuc of the Library of Lcrdinand Columbus. Reproduced in Fac-

1 905 simile from the Unique Manuscript in the Columbine Library of

Seville. New York: Privately Printed. (Reprint New York: Kraus

«967).

Imago mundi “lmay>o mundi" by Petrus de Alliaco (Pierre d'Ailly) with annotations by

1927 Christopher Columbus. Boston: Massachusetts Historical Society.

Imago mundi "Imay^o mundi" del cardenal Pedro d'Ailly y Juan Gerson. Introducción
1990 y traducción de Antonio Ramírez de Verger (Colección “Tabula
Americae”, 1 1). Madrid: Testimonio Compañía Editorial.

Jane, Cecil The Question of the Literacy of Columbus in 1492. The Hispanic
«930 American Historical Reinew 30: 500—516.

Jos, Emiliano Investigaciones sobre la vida y obras iniciales de don Fernando Colón.

«945 Sevilla: Editorial Católica Española (also Anuario de Estudios

Americanos i, 1944: 525—698).

Kaeppeli, Thomas Scriptores Ordinis Praedicatorum Medii Aevi, vol. 1 . Roma: Institutum
1970 Historicum Ordinis Fratrum Praedicatorum.

«975 Scriptores Ordinis Praedicatorum Medii Aevi, vol. 11 . Roma: In-

stitutum Historicum Ordinis Fratrum Praedicatorum.

Kerby-Fulton, Kathryn, English Joachimism, 1300—1500. The “Columbinus Prophecy.”

and Daniel, E. Randolph In II profetismo ^ioachimita tra Quattrocento e Cinquecento (Atti del III

«991 Conj^resso Internazionale di Studi Gioachimiti), a cura di Gian Lúea

Potestá, pp. 313—350. Genova: Marietti.

Langartner, G. Duranti(s), Guillelmus. Lexicon des Mittelalters 3: 1469—1470. Ber-

1980 lin— Zürich: Arthernis Verlag

Las Casas, Bartolomé de Historia de las Indias (B.A.E. 95). Madrid: Biblioteca de Autores
«957 Españoles.

Libro dei prwilej^i Libro dei privilegi di Cristqforo Colombo. Carte dei prhnlej^i, cedole ed

«987 altre scritture di Don Cristóbal Colón, Ammira^t^lio Ma^^iore del Alare

Océano, Viceré e Governatore delle hole e Terraferma. Genova: Re-

gione Liguria.

Lucchetta, Giuliano Viaggiatori e racconti di viaggi nel Cinquecento. In Storia della

1980 cultura veneta, vol. III/2: Dal primo Quattrocento al Concilio di Trento,

a cura di Girolamo Arnaldi e Manlio Pastore Stocchi, 433—489.

Vicenza: Nen Pozza.

Lunardi, Enrico, Elisa La scoperta del Nuovo Mondo ne^li scritti di Pietro Martire d’Anj^hiera

Magioncalda, and (Nuova Raccolta Colombiana VI). Roma: Istituto Poligrafico e

Rosanna Mazzacane Zecca dello Stato.

1988
Manzano Manzano, Juan Cristóbal Colón. Siete años decisiros de su oída, 1.^8^— t^gz. Madrid:
1 964 Ediciones Cultura Hispánica.

Marín Martínez, Tomás “Memoria de las obras y libros de Hernando Colón” del bachiller Juan
1970 Pérez. Madrid-Sevilla: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cien-
tíficas de Sevilla.

1973 La participación de Hernando Colón en las juntas de Badajoz-

Elvas de 1524. In El Tratado de Tordesillas y su proyección, vol. 111 :

171 — 178. Valladolid: Universidad de Valladolid.

Marín Martínez, Tomás,

Catálogo Concordado de la Biblioteca de Hernando Colón. Madrid, Edi-
José Manuel Ruiz torial MAPFRE.
Asencio, and Klaus
Wagner
1993

Meersseman, Gilíes
La chronologie des voyages et des oeuvres de frére Alphonse
Gérard
Buenhombre O.P. Archivum Fratrum Praedicatorum 10: 77—108.
1940
/

Melczer, William
Cristqforo Colombo, Libro delle prqfezie, a cura di William Melczer.
1992
Palermo: Edizioni Novecento.

Menéndez Pidal, Ramón

Nota adicional sobre el lenguaje de don Fernando Colón. In La
1968a
lenj^ua de Cristóbal Colón, el estilo de Santa Teresa y otros estudios sobre

el si^lo XVI. 3rd ed., 28—29. Buenos Aires: Espasa-Calpe. (Also in

Bulletin Hispanique 42: 1940).

1968b
Observaciones paleográficas sobre algunos autógrafos de Colón. In
La lengua de Cristóbal Colón el estilo de Santa Teresa y otros estudios

sobre el siglo XVI. 3rd ed., 41—46. Buenos Aires: Espasa-Calpe.

Menestó, Enrico
Alessandro Geraldini e il suo tempo (Convegno storico internazionale.
1993
Amelia, tg—21 novembre tggz), a cura di Enrico Menestó. Spoleto:
C.l.S.A.M.

Meseguer Fernández,
El Arzobispo Cisneros y la Iglesia misionera en América (1500—
Juan
1985 1512). Archivo Ibero-Americano 45: 451—486.

Miglioli, Maurizio

1968 La relazione di Angelo Trevisan ai primi viaggi di Colombo. Lausanne:

Université de Lausanne, Faculté de Lettres, Mémoire de Licence.

Milhou, Alain
1983 Colón y su mentalidad mesiánica en el ambiente franciscanista español

(Cuadernos Colombinos, XI). Valladolid: Casa-Museo de Colón-

Seminario americanista de la Universidad de Valladolid.

BIBLIOGRAPHY 403
 Millares Carlo, Agustín Tratado de palcoj^rafía española. Con la colaboración dejóse Manuel
19H3 Ruiz Asencio. Madrid: Espasa— Calpe (3rd ed.).

Moretti, Gabriella “Nec sit terris ultima Thule” (La profezia di Seneca sulla scoperta

1986 del Nuovo Mondo). Columbeis i: 95—106.

Nader, Helen Book of Privileges. In The Christopher Columbus Encyclopedia, ed.

1991 Silvio A. Bedini, 73—75. New York: Simon and Schuster.

Nader, Helen, and Tlie Book of Privilegies issued to Christopher'Columbus by Kinji Fernando
Luciano Formisano and Queen Isabel, I4g2—i^02 (Repertorium Columbianum 2).

1996 Berkeley-Los Angeles-Oxford: University of California Press.

Navarrete, Martin Coleción de los viajes y descubrimientos que hicieron por mar los españoles

Fernández de desde fines del sigilo XC ( . . . ), Obras de D. Martín Fernández de

1954 Navarrete, edición y estudio preliminar de D. Carlos Seco Serrano
(B.A.E., 75-77). Madrid, Atlas, 1954-1955 (ist ed.: 1825-1837).

Normas de transcripción Normas de transcripción y edición de textos y documentos. Madrid: Con-

1944 sejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas. Escuela de Estudios
Medievales.

Pérez-Bustamante, Fibro de los privilej^ios del Almirante don Cristóbal Colón (iqgS). Estudio

Cinaco preliminar, edición y notas. Madrid: Real Academia de la Histona.

1951

Pertusi, Agostino Fine di Bisanzio e fine del mondo. Significato e molo storico delle profezie

1988 sulla caduta di Costantinopoli in Oriente e in Occidente. Roma: Istituto

Storico Italiano per il Medio Evo.

Pezzella, Sosio Carletti, Angelo. Dizionario bioj^rafeo deqU italiani 20: 136—138.
1977 Roma: Istituto dell’Enciclopedia Italiana.

Phelan, John Laddy T/ic Millennial Kingdom of the Franciscans in the New World. Berke-
195b ley-Los Angeles: University of California Press [Revised edition:
1970].

Piergiovanni, Vito, ed. Tra Siviqlia e Genova: Notaio, documento e commercio nell’eta colom-

«994 biana. Atti del convegno internazionale di studi storici, Genova

12—14 niarzo 1992. Milano: Giuffre.

Pittaluga, Stefano 11 “Vocabulario” usato da Cristoforo Colombo (Una postilla all’

1986 “Historia rerum” di Pio II e la lessicografia medievale). Columbeis

1 : 107- 115.

1987 Cristoforo Colombo amanuense (e il suo incunabolo del “Catho-

licon” di Giovanni Balbi). Columbeis 2: 137— 151.

404 BIBLIOGRAPHY

i
Pou y Marti, José Mana Visionarios, Bcifuinos y Fraticcios Catalanes (Sij,;los XIII-XV). Vich:
1930 Editorial Seráfica (Reprint: Madrid, 1991, Ed. Colegio “Cardenal
Cisneros”).

Prospen, Adriano America e Apocalisse. Note sulla “conquista spirituale” del Nuovo
1976 Mondo. Critica storica 13: 1-61.

1991 Attese millenaristiche e scoperta del Nuovo Mondo. In U profetisnw

¡^ioachinnta tra Quattrocento e Cinquecento (Atti del III Cony^resso Inter-

nazionale di Studi Gioaclúmiti), a cura di Gian Lúea Potestá, 433-

460. Genova: Marietti.

1992 New Heaven and New Earth. Prophecy and Propaganda at the
Time of the Discovery of the Americas. In Prophetic Rome in the

Hi^h Renaissance Period, ed. Marjorie Reeves, 279—303. Oxford:

Clarendon Press.

de la Rada y Delgado, Tres autógrafos de Colón. El Centenario 3: 219-229.

Juan de Dios
i «93

Reinhardt, Klaus Die bihlischen Autoren Spaniens bis zunt Konzil von Trient. Salamanca:
1976 Instituto de Historia de la Teología Española.

19H7 Das Werk Nicolaus von Lyra im mittelalterlichen Spanien. Traditio

43: 321-358.

Reinhardt, Klaus, and Biblioteca bíblica ibérica medieval. Madrid: Centro de Estudios his-

Horacio Santiago-Otero tóricos.

1986

Romm, james New World and “novos orbes”: Seneca in the Renaissance Debate
1994 over Ancient Knowledge of the Americas. In The Classical Tradi-

tion and the Americas. Vol. I: European Images of the Americas and the
Classical Tradition, ed. Wolfgang Hase and Meyer Reinhold. Ber-
lin-New York: Walter de Guyter, 77—1 17.

de Rosa y López,
la Biblioteca Colombina. Catálogo de sus libros impresos (...), con notas
Simón bibliográficas de Simón de la Rosa y López, vol I. Sevilla: E.

1888 Rasco.
#

1891a Libros y autógrafos de D. Cristóbal Colón. In Biblioteca Colombina.

Catáh^o de sus libros impresos (...), vol. 11 ,
vii— .xliv. Sevilla: E.

Rasco.

1891b Sobre los libros anotados por Cristóbal Colón, que se conservan en
la Biblioteca Colombina, en Sevilla. In José Maria Asensio, Cristó-
bal Colón. Su vida. Sus Viajes. Sus Descubrimientos, vol. 1 : 216—235.
Barcelona: Espasa— Calpe.

BIBl lOGRAPHY 405

 Rouse, Richard H., and The Verbal Concordances to the Scripture. Archivum Fratrum Prac-

Mary A. Rouse dicatorum 44: 5—30.

1974

Runieu de Armas, Hernando Colón, historiador del descubrimiento de América. Madrid:

Antonio Ediciones de cultura hispánica.
1973

1985 Nueva luz sobre las Capitulaciones de Santa Fe de 14Q2 concertadas entre

losReyes Católicos y Cristóbal Colón. Estudio institucional y di-

plomático. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cien-
tíficas.

1989 Libro copiador de Cristóbal Colón. Correspondencia inédita con los Reyes

Católicos sobre los viajes a América. Estudio histórico-critico y edi-

ción. (Colección “Tabula Americae,” 8). Madrid: Testimonio
Compañía Editorial.

Rusconi, Roberto Cristoforo Colombo, Libro de las profecías, a cura di Roberto Rusconi

1993 a (Nuova Raccolta Colombiana, 111 / 1). Roma: Istituto Poligrafico e

Zecca dello Stato.

1993b 11 “Libro de las profecías” di Cristoforo Colombo: retroterra cul-

túrale e consapevolezza di uno scopritore. Rivista di storia e let-

teratura relij^iosa 29: 305—339.

1993 c Escatologia e conversione al cristianesimo in Cristoforo Colombo

e nei primi anni della colonizzazione europea nelle isole delle

“Indie”, in Alessandro Geraldini e il suo tempo (Atti del Convegno

storico internazionale. Amelia, 19—21 novembre 1992), a cura di
Enrico Menestó, Spoleto, C.I.S.A.M., 1993, 235—286 (anche in
Cristianesimo nella storia 14: 263—302).

1993d Cristoforo Colombo e Gioacchino da Fiore. Florensia 7: 95—108.

Sanuto, Marino / Diarii di Marino Sanuto. Ed. by Rinaldo Fulin and others. 58 vols.

1879-1902 Venezia: Deputazione Veneta di Storia Patria.

Sanz, Carlos Bibliotheca Americana Vetustissima, Ultimas Adiciones. 2 vols. Madrid:

i960 Librería General Victoriano Suárez.

Serrano y Sanz, Manuel El Archivo Colombino de la Cartuja de las Cuevas. Estudio his-
1930 tórico y bibliográfico. Boletín de la Real Academia de la Historia 97:

145-256, 534-037-

Stevens, Benjamin Christopher Columbus. His Own Book of Privileges, 1302. London: B.
Franklin F. Stevens.

1H93

406 BIBLIOGRAPHY
Streicher, Fntz Die Kolumbus-Onginale. Eine palaographische Studie. Spanisclic

1928 Forscfiutii’ctt dcr Gormiiescllsclujft 1: 196-249 e taw. I— VI.

1929 Las notas marginales de Colón en los libros de Pedro de Alíaco,

Eneas Silvio y Marco Polo, estudiadas a la luz de las investigaciones
paleográficas. hwestigacióu y proj^reso 3, nos. 7-8: 49—52.

Tamayo y Francisco, Catáloj^o de Incunables de la Biblioteca Universitaria de Sevilla. Sevilla;

Juan, and Julia Universidad de Sevilla.

Y sasi- Y sasmendi
1967

Taviani, Paolo Emilio The Voyaj^es of Columbus: The Great Discovery, vol. 11 . Novara:
1991 Istituto Geográfico De Agostini (1st. ed. 1984 in Italian).

Taviani, Paolo Emilio, II Giornale di bordo. Libro della prima navi^azione e scoperta delle Indie.

and Consuelo Varela Introduzione, note e schede di Paolo Emilio Taviani e Consuelo
1988 Varela, vol. II (Nuova Raccolta Colombiana, I). Roma: Istituto

Poligrafico e Zecca dello Stato.

Thacher, John Boyd Christopher Colombus. His Life. His Work. His Remains as Revealed by

1904 Ori^mal Printed. Manuscript Records (...), vol. Ill: 84—421. New
York and London: G. P. Putnam’s Sons.

Tognetti, Giampaolo Criteri per la trascrizione di testi medievali latini e italiani. Roma; Qua-
1982 derni della Rassegna de^li Archivi di Stato, no. 51.

Vails i Subirá, Oriol 77 jc History of Paper in Spain, vol. II. Madrid: Empresa Nacional de
1980 Celulosas.

Varela, Consuelo La obra poética de Hernando Colón. Anuario de Estudios Americanos

I 9«3 40: 185-201.

1984 Cristóbal Colón, Textos y documentos completos. Relaciones de viajes,

cartas y memorias. Madrid: Alianza Editorial. (Primera ed.: 1982;

segunda reimpresión; 1989).

1 989a Introducción, in Fray Bartolomé de Las Casas. Diario del primer y

tercer viaje de Cristóbal Colón {Obras completas, 14). Edición de Con-

0 suelo Varela. Madrid; Alianza Editorial.

1989b Fray Gaspar Gorricio, monje cartujo al servicio de familia Colón.

In Historia de la Cartuja de Sevilla. De ribera del Guadalquivir a recinto

de ¡a Exposición Universal, 109—128. Sevilla: Turner Libros.

Varnhagen, Francisco Vespuce et son premier voyage. Découverte et e.xploration pnmi-

/

Adolpho de tive du golfe du Méxique et des cotes des Etats-Unis (1497—1498).

1858 Bulletin de la Société de Géo^raphie de Paris, 4eme Sér., 15: 62—86.

B I B 1, i oGRAPHY 407
Wagner, Henry H. Marco Polo’s Narrative becomes Propaganda, ¡ma^o Munch 6:

1949 3
- 13 -

Watts, Pauline M. Prophecy and Discovery: On the Spiritual Origins of Christopher

1985 Columbus’s “Enterprise of the Indies”. American Historical Review

90: 73-101.

West, Delno C. Wallowing in a Theological Stupor or a Steadfast and Consuming

1987 Faith: Scholarly Encounters with Columbus’ “Libro de las pro-
fecías”. In Columbus and His World: Proceeding, First San Salvador
Conference, ed. Donald T. Gerace, 45—56. Ft. Lauderdale: The
College Center of the Finger Lakes.

1988a 11 “Libro de las profecías” di Cristoforo Colombo. In Columbus gz

4, nos. 4-5: 32-35-

1988b Colombo conosceva l’italiano. In Columbus gz 4, nos. 4—5: 33.

1991 The Abbott and the Admiral. Joachite Influences in the Life and
Writings of Christopher Columbus. In II prqfetismo j^ioacliimita tra

Quattrocento e Cinquecento (Atti del III Conqresso Internazionale di

Studi Gioachimiti), a cura di Gian Luca Potesta, 461-473. Genova:
Marietti.

1992 Christopher Columbus, Lost Biblical Sites and the Last Crusade.
The Catholic Historical Review 78: 519—541.

West, Delno C., and Hie “Libro de las profecías*’ of Christopher Columbus. Gainesville, FL:
August Kling University of Florida Press.
1991

Wilson, William Jerome The Textual Relations of the Thacher Manuscript on Colombus
1940 and Early Portuguese Navigations. The Papers of the Biblioj^raphical

Society of America 34: 199— 220.

1942 The Historicity of the 1494 Discovery of South America. Hie His-
panic American Historical Reinew 4.2: 193—205.

Zinner, Ernst Kolumbus und die Ephemeriden des Regiomontanus. Petermanns

1935 Mitteilungen 81: 367.

1937 Der Deutsche Kalendar des Johannes Regiomontanus. Nürnberg,

um 1474, hrsg. v. Ernst Zinner. Leipzig: O.Harrassowitz.

1990 Regiomontanus. His Life and Work. New York: Elsevier Science
Pub. Co. (Original edition Leben und Wirhen des Joh. Muller von
Koni^sberq, ^enannt Regiomontanus, 1938; edition augmented and
revised by the author, 1968).
 INDEX FONTIUM

Abraham Zacut 206-207 Sermons 008; 213; 218 Lucius Annaeus Seneca 204-
Alfonso X, king of Castile 01 1. (Pseudo- Augustine) Soliloquies 205
31; 1 1 1.2 085-086 Nicholas of Lyra 010; 102-104;
Alfonso de Madngal (“el Tos- Giovanni Balbi 005.1 185; 208-21 1; 219; 224;
tado”) 105 Gregory 212; 215
I 227-228; 231-233; 237;
Alfonso de Falencia 235 Guillaume Durand 006 247; 248
Angel de Clavasio 004 Isidore of Seville Pierre d’Ailly
Augustine De summo bono 009 De concordia . . . i 12-1 13
Cotifessions 088-090 Etymolo^iae 079—080 De le^ibus et sectis 109
City of God oil. iO', 110.304; Jean Gersqn 005 Elucidarium 1 1 i

216 (Pseudo) Joachim of Fiore 01 1. Tractatus et sermones 109. 1

8;

Oti the Diuination of Demons 52; 222 1 10.5

087; 108 Johann Müller (Regiomontanus) I'iqintiloquium iio

On Christian Education 090— 206-207 Rabbi Samuel of Fez 081-084

092 John Chrysostom 214 Valerius Maximus 01 1.28

409
 1 .
... . 1 ...
... 1 ..
.
.. ;.

INDEX BIBLICUS

Acts I 103.4; 109.17. 16 279. 1 26 095 -

3 -

3 002.6. 18 279. 1 28 079 -

5 -

4 219.8. 20 225.1; 279.2.

9 079.7. 21 279.2. Hab. 1 084.3; 279.1.
lO 079 -
3 - 1 Cor. 10 010.2; 092.3. 3 082.26; 084.3
•3 21 1.10; 211. 2 Cor. 3 092.1 1; 092.12. Heb. 1 010.7; 219.5.
11-12; 211.13. Hos. 2 166. 1

21 224.6; 233.3; Dan. 8 163.1. 3 167.1.

234 -I- 1 1 13.4; 164.1;

22 219.7; 234 I- , 268.1. Isa. 2 186.2; 246.1.
Amos 8 083.1 1. 12 165.1. 5 187.1.

9 170.1; 278.1. Deut. 5 094.1 1 — 12. 6 079.4; 1X8.1.

Apoc. 1 272. 1 6 094.1 1-12. 7 095.5.
6 273.1. 28 082.3. 8 189.1.

13 109.6. 10 092. 10.

i6 274.1. Eccles. 36 077.1. 1 082.4; 1 14. 1

21 092. 19. Eccles. 47 253.1. 254.1.

Eph. 5 092.17. 12 190. 1

Bar. 4 151.1. Esd. 1 279.2. 14 1 15.1.

5 1 52. 1
3 279.2. 18 191.1.

4 278.2. 19 1 16.1.

I Chron. i 224.2; 224.5; Esther 10 250. 1 22 123.1.

247.1. Exod. 19 079.6. 23 245.1.

1 279. 1 23 094.14. 24 125.1; 255.1.

15 279.1. Ezek. 3 53 -I- 25 1 17. 1

l6 201 .
1 ; 279. 1 26 266. 1 26 192. 1

17 194.1; 279.1. 27 154.1; 267.1. 27 1 18.1.

21 279. 1 28 155.1. 28 1 19. 1

22 010.4; 279.1. 32 1 56. 1 30 120. 1

23 195.1. 34 157.1. 33 193.1.

27 279. 1 35 158.1. 35 121.1.

28 196.1; 279.1. 36 092.5; 092.7-9; 40 122.1.

29 197.1; 241.1; 092.1 1; 092. 4 í 126. 1 ; 256. 1

279. 1 016; 159.1. 42 127.1; 257.1.

2 Chron. i 279. 1 37 160. 1

43 082.16; 128.1
2 279. 1 3 X 161.1. 44 129. 1

5 279. 1 39 162.1. 45 082.17; 130.1

6 198.1; 279.1. 46 131.1.

7 1991; 279 - 1- Gal. 3 092.13. 49 132.1; 258.1.

8 200.1; 242.1; Gen. 10 224.2; 224.3; 51 087. 14-1 5;

279. 1 224.4; 247.1; 1331; 259 -I-

9 229.1; 243.1; 249. 1 52 134 -I-
279.1. 22 079 7 - -
54 098.2-6.
 1 ..
. .. . 1 . 1 ..
....

55 082. 14; 124. 1 1 I 01 1 .25; 011.38. 71 038.1; 096.3;

57 1 35- '4 01 1.43. 107.2; 232.1;

59 1 36. 1 15 21 1.6; 218.1; 251.1; 279.2.

6o 082.9-10; 082. 218.2; 218.16. 73 039.1; 279.2.
I 1 ;
082. 1 3; 17 01 1
.44. 75 040. 1

1 37. 1 ;
260. 1 21 01 1 .25. 77 279.2.
62 138.1. 24 01 1.34; 099.2; 7X 041 . 1

^3 139.1. 099.5; 099 9; 81 042. 1

65 082.2; 082. 1 8; 102.2; 103.2; S3 043.1; 279.2.

083.3-6; 140.1. 109. 17; 109. 1
8; «5 044.1.
66 141.1; 261.1. 1 10.5; 1 13 -I 5 - 86 045.1.
28 106. 1; 107.6 88 046.1; 279.2.
Jer. 2 142.1; 262.1. Mic. 4 172.1; 279.1. 91 047 *; 279 2
- .

3 082.19; 143.1. 5 173.1; 279.1. 92 048. 1

144.1. 6 174.1; 279.1. ^ 93 279.2.

4
10 145.1; 227.1; 94 279.4.
240. 1
95 049. 1
Nah. 1 279.1.
16 082.20; 094.4;
Num. 082.7.
96 050.1; 252.1;
14
095.7; 146.1; 279.2.
22-24 079.8.
216.4-5. 97 05 1 . 1

17 216.7. 98 052.1; 279.2.

Obad. 1 171.1; 279.1.
23 147.1. 99 053.*.
25 221 .2; 263. 1 101 054.*.
30 148.1. Prov. 1-31 079.8. 104 055.*.
31 149.1; 216.10; Ps. 2 012.1; 105 056. 1; 202. 1;

264.1. 087.9-10; 218.11; 279.2.

33 150.1. 185.1; 219.1; 107 057.1.
47 265. 1 .
219.5; 219.8. 109 279.2.
Job 079.6. 4 279.2. 1 10 279.2.
Joel 2 168.1; 169.1; 5 013.1. 1 1 279.2.
279.1. 8 01 1.26; 014.1; 1 12 059.1; 279.2.
3 169.1; 279.1. 279.2. 113 059.1; 279.2.
John I 01 1.26. 9 015.1; 279.3. 114 279.2.
10 211.1; 212.3; 17 016.1; 218.6-8. 115 060.1; 279.2.
213.4-5; 214.2; 18 017.1; 084.9; 1 16 061 .
1 ; 279.2.
214.3; 214.6. 084.10; 090.2; 1
17 279.2.
15 008.2. 097.2; 107.5; 118 279.2.
Jon. I 233 -I- 279.2. 1
19 279.2.
Jth. 2 230.1 19 018.1; 279.2. 120 279 -
3 -

2 008.3; 009.2; 121 062.1; 279.3.

2 Kings 12 010.4. 019. 1; 082.8; 122 279-3-
3 Kings 8 082.5. 087.6-7; 087. 123 279-3-
9 227.3; 228.1; 1 1; 108.6; 279.2. 124 279-3-
228.5; 237 -I. 23 020. 1; 279.2. 125 063.1.
10 226.1. 25 021 . 1 126 279-3-
22 239.1. 26 022.1; 092.17. 127 064. 1

28 023.1. 128 065.1.

Lev. 26 094.1 1-12. 32 024. 1 131 066. 1

Luke I 208.1. 42 025.1. 133 067. 1

21 099.7; 099.10; 45 026. 1 *34 068.1.

099.12-13. 46 027.1. *35 069. 1

47 028.1; 231.1. *37 070. 1

I Macc. 6 269. 1
49 029. 1 *44 07 1 . 1

14 270.1. 50 030.1. *45 072. 1

15 271 . 1 56 031.1; 279.2. *47 073-*-

Mark 13 099.2; 099.5; 5« 032.1. 148 074-*-
099.9. 64 033.1. *49 075-*-
16 100.3-4; 101.2; 65 034.2. *50 076.1.
21 1.8. 66 035.1.
Matt. 2 210.1. 67 036.1. Rom. 9 092. 10; 216.21
8 209. 1 68 037.1; 279.2.
9 218.15. 69 279.2. 2 Sam. 5 219.2.

4 I 2 INDEX KIBE ICUS

 1 1 1 . .

1 TIk'ss. s 113.15. 3 279.1. 087.4; 108.4;

2 Thess. 2 1 13.2; 1 13.9. 6 279.1. 175. 1; 216.13;
1 Tun. 4 1 13.10. 8 082.23; 1 79.1; 279. 1

2 Tim. 1 092. 17: 092. H. 279.1. 3 082.21; 176. i;

Titus 3 0 ñ Ó 9 1 80. 1 ; 279. 1 216.12; 216.

1 181.1; 279.1. 15-19; 278.1.
Zech. I 177.1; 279 - 13 182.1; 279.1. '3 091.4.
2 082.22; 178.1; 14 183.1; 279.1.
279.1. Zeph. 2 082.21; 087.1; Wisdom 6 279-3

INOtX HI »L leus 4 I
3
 1 ,

SUBJECT AND NAME INDEX

Abecedarium B (Indice Alfonso of Falencia, Confessions, 20,

¡general alfabético), 9, Universal 138-141
10 Vocabulario en On the Divination of

Abu Masr, Liber de ma^nis Latino Y en Demons, 20,

coniunctionibus Romance, 40, 44, 136-139, 162-163
annorum, 165, 376 49 327-329
,
Opuscula Plurima,
Aethicus Ister, Alfonso VIII of Castile, 19-21, 42, 44, 49,
Cosmography, 167, '377 162-163
376 Alfonso X of Castile, (Pseudo- Augustine)
Agostino di Dacia, Tabulae Soliloquies of the
mnemonic verses astronomicae, 24, Soul with God, 20,
of in Book of 71, 169, 377 134-137
Prophecies, 26, 60, Alvarez Seisdedos, Sermones, 27, 43, 62, 63,
61 Francisco, 17 298-299, 306-309
d’Ailly, Pierre, 23-26 Amalric of Bene, 171, 377
Elucidarium astronomicae Amerbach, Johann, 27, 43
concordiae cum Angelo Carletti of Bacon, Roger, Opus
theoloj^ica et histórica Chivasso, Summa Mains, 375 , 376
veritate, 19, 24, 71, angelica de casibus Balbi, Giovanni, Catholicon
168, 169 conscientiae, 26, 43, seu summa
Imago mundi, 23, 25 60, 61 prosodiae, 27, 43,

Tract at us de concordia Aquila, 167, 376 60-6

astronomicae veri tat is Arias y Bobadilla, Bede, Venerable, 165, 376
et narrationis Francisco, 3 Bertocchi, Dionisio, 19,
historicae, 24, 25, Arnold of Villanova 42
32, 170-175 Tractatus de mysterio Bible, passages from in

Tractatus de legibus et cymbalorum, 3 i Book of Prophecies

sectis contra Vae mundo in centum Acts, }26-}27
0

superstitiosos annis, 390 Apocalypse, 346-347

astrónomos, 24, 32, Auctoritates, 5 Baruch, 220—223
164-168 Augustine Chronicles, 278—289,
Vigintilocjuium de On the Agreement of the 320-321, 322-325,
cotKordia Evangelists, 21, 332-333
astronomicae veritatis 147-155 Daniel, 22, 228-23 i

cum theologica, 24, On Christian Education, 344-345

168-169 21, 140-147 Ecclesiastes, 120-121,
Alexander the Great, 175, City of God, 24, 43, 70, 336-337
378 71, 301-302 Esther, 336-337

4 I s
 11 1 1

Bible {coutiuucd) criteria used in this Brigham, Kay,

Ezekiel, 222—229, edition, 48—5 I photographic
344-345 facsimile edition of reproduction of
Ezekiel, Book of, 1984, 16 Book of Prophecies,

222-228 first allusions to, 6 17

Genesis, 320— 321, first appearance in print

334-337 of, 11-12 Capitulations of Santa Fe,

Hosea, 230-23 i first critical edition of, 36
Isaiah, 176-21 1, 14 Chrysostom, John,
270-277, 334-335, first survey of contents 300-301
33H-341 of, 9- o1 Colección Muñoz, 1

islands of the sea, manusenpt Columbus, Bartholomew,

alluding to, 27-28, arrangement of, 3 , 4«,
40, 320-347 35-36 C'olumbus, Christopher.
Jeremiah, 31, 212-220, dimensions of folios, See also Letters
316-317, 322-323, 36 arrest and return to
332-333, 334-335, fascicle 1, 37-38 Spain of, 3

342-343 fascicle 11, 38-39 autograph interventions

Joel, 232-237 fascicle 111, 39 in Book of
John, 296-297 fascicle IV, 39-40 Prophecies, 12, 20,

Jonah, 326-327 four fascicles of, 20, 21, 40, 44-45,

Judith, 324-325 23 136-139, 146-147,
Kings, 320-321, handwriting of, 350-351
322-323, 330-331 11-17, 37, 4 «- 42 ,
excerpt from Jeremiah,
Luke, 294-295 43, 44-47, 4 « 38, 45, 212-213
Maccabees, 344-345 history of, 8—1 notes pertaining to
Mark, 156-157 interventions by second and fourth
Matthew, 156-157, Ambrosio de voyages, 7 35, 39, ,

160, 161 294-295

,
Morales in, 9 290-293
Obadiah, 240-241 interventions by B. transcription and
Psalms, 78-1 19, 160, G. Galvez in, 10 of lines
translation
161, 324-326, inventorial from Medea, 34,
336-337 annotation by 290-291
Zacharias, 249—265 Ferdinand choice of passages from
Zephaniah, 246—248 Columbus in, 8 St. Augustine and

Biblia Sacra cum ^losa missing folios, 3, 9, Nicolas of Lyra in

ordinaria et 10, 39-40 Book of Prophecies,
interlineari et cum watermark, 36 20-23
postillis Nicolai de See also Letters choice of scriptures in
Lyra, 6, 22, 42, 43, photographic Book of Prophecies,
49, 156-157, reproduction of, 22-23
268-269, 294-297, 17 death of, 8

310-313, 320-321, principal themes of, emphasis on universal

322-323, 324-327, 17-35 conversion to
330-331, 334-335, publication in Raccolta Christianity, 7, 20,
336-337 Colombiana, 13, 14 2
Biblioteca Colombina y purpose of, 5, 17-19 eschatological
Capitular, 11,12 redaction of, 5—8 perspective of, 21,
Bonhombre, Alfonso, }on restoration of, 10—11 24-26, 33, 34
Book of Priuilej^es, 45 n, 46 studies of, 11 — 17 facsimile editions of
copies of, 5 table of biblical incunabulurn
Book of Prophecies. See also passages, 350-353 owned by, 23/1
Columbus, title given by Corricio, handwriting in Book of
Christopher; 5 Prophecies, 44—45,
Columbus, transcription of, 1 48
Ferdinand; translations of, hypothesis of Fiebraic
Corricio, Caspar 17 origins of, 3011

4 I 6 SUBJECT AND NAME INDEX

 3 2 5 ,

influence of Joachim of inventorial annotation Cíálvez, B. G.,

Fiore on, 32-33 in Book of interventions in
influence of Pierre Prophecies, 8 Book of Prophecies,

d’Ailly on, 23—26 knowledge of Latin, 47 10

literary activity of language use, 47 Gálvez, Diego Alejandro
1501-1502, 3-5 Memorial de las cosas que de, reproductions
marginal notations in hay que de hazer y of Book of
printed editions dezir en Castilla, 8 Prophecies, 11, 50
owned, 40—41 pen-testings in Book of Genoese ambassadors,
narrative account of Prophecies, 318—319 letter to Ferdinand
third voyage, 25 verses copied into Book and Isabella, 3 1

obsession with of Prophecies, 3>b-3i7

reconquest of 1 1-12, 38, 39, 40, Geraldini da Amelia,
Jerusalem, 7, 46, 120, 121, Alessandro, 22
17-18, 33 266-267, 288-289, Gerson, Jean Charlier de,
personal copy of Pierre 354-357 24, 26, 60-61
d’Ailly’s Ima^o Constantinople, 31, 171, Gil, Juan, 17
26-
tnundi, 48 111 description of Book of
self-description of Council of Castile, (draft) Prophecies, 1

attributes, 18 letter from Giuseppe, Flavio, 378

use of Castilian Christopher Gorricio, Gaspar, 4, 5, 6
language, 45 Columbus to, 4, contributions to Book of
use of Latin, 45 18 Prophecies, 6,
Columbus, Diego, 3, 411, Curtis, William Eleroy, 30-31, 37,
27,
8 \\n 42-44, 302-305,
letter from Christopher 379
Columbus to, De LoHis, Cesare annotation in

1504, 7 Raccolta Colombiana, 13, handwriting,

Columbus, Ferdinand 14
27-
346-347
Colón de concordia, 8 study of Book of emphasis on universal
death of, 9 Prophecies, 1 preaching of the
Declaración del derecho que Durand, Guillaume, 27 gospel, 28—29
Los Anj^eles real Rationale divinorum letter to Christopher
Corona de Castilla officiorum, 43, 60, Columbus
tiene a Los Anj^eles 61 concerning Book of
conquista de las Prophecies, 6, 37,

provincias de Persia, El libro del famoso Marco 55-59

Arabia e India, e de Paulo Veneciano de methods of selection,
Calicut e Malaca, las cosas maravillosas 28
8 que vido en las partes rewrite of letter to
description of Book of orientales (Polo), 7 Ferdinand and
Prophecies, 8—9 Epistula rabbi Samuel de Fez Isabella, 29, 37, 42
disposition of library of, de adventu Messiae, selection of chapters

9 missa rabbi Isaac, from Epistula rabbi

handwriting in Book of 12, 30, 43, Samuel de Fez de
Prophecies, 46—47, 124-134 adventu Messiae,
48 missa rabbi Isaac, 30
History of the Life and Fernandes, Valentim, 7 selection of passages
Deeds of Admiral Fernández, Juan, 45 mentioning islands
Christopher Fernández de Santaella, of the sea, 27, 28
Columbus, 49—50, Rodrigo, 7 works used, 43-44
son Frederick 1 (Barbarossa), handwriting in Book of
Indice j^eneral alfabético 171, 377 Prophecies, 42, 43 ,

(Abecedarium B), 9, 48
10 Gallardo, Bartolomé José, letter to from
Indice numeral de los libros description of Book Christopher
(Rej^istrum B), 9, 10 of Prophecies, 1 Columbus

SUBJKCr AND NAMK INDKX 4 1

7
 8 1 8

(íorricio {continued) Jerome, St., 171, from Christopher

concerning book of 377 Columbus to
Prophecies (i 502), Joachim of Fiore, 377 Queen Isabella, 1

4 54-55
.
pseudo-prophecies of (draft) from Christopher
letter to from reconquest of Columbus to
Christopher Jerusalem, 31-33, Council of Castile,
Columbus from 40,67-77, 4, 18

Jamaica (1503), 170- 71, 31^-317,

1
(draft) from Christopher
6-7 390 Columbus to
Gregory 1 Juan, Prince, 3—4 Ferdinand and
Homiliae super Evani>elia, Juana de la Torre, letter Isabella, 17—19, 24,
44,296-297, from Christopher 30, 34 . 49
300-301, 300-303 Columbus to, 3—4, edition and
45/7 translation of,
Handwriting, Book of 66-77
Prophecies first appearance in

of Christopher Kittim, 40, 334-335 print, 1

Columbus, 44-45, Kling, August, 16 Gorricio’s rewriting

48 Konrad, Von Halberstadt, 29
of,

of Ferdinand Concordantia handwriting of, 45

Columbus, 46—47, bibliorum, 28 references to Pierre
48 Kromberger, Jakobus, 7 d’Ailly, 24, 25,
of Gaspar Gorricio, 42, 70-71, 76-77
43 48 ,
Landino, Cristoforo, 47 reference to
of the “Italian scribe,” Las Casas, Bartolomé de. pseudo-Joachimitic
37, 41 - 4 ^. 4b, 47 Historia de las prophecy, 32-33,
of “public scribe,” 50
Indias, 76-77
45-46, 47, 48 Lateran Council, fourth, temporal calculation
studies of, 1 1 — 17 377 of end of world,
Hansse, Henry, 12 “Letra cortesana,” 45 19, 24, 70-71
Ho liuro de Marco Paulo, 7 Letters from Christopher
(draft)

from Christopher Columbus to Pope

Indice general alfabético Columbus to Alexander VI, 4, 17
(Abecedarium B), 9, Diego Columbus, from Gaspar Gorricio to
10 1504, 7 Christopher
Indice numeral de los libros from Christopher Columbus, 55—59
(Registrum B), 8«, Columbus to from Genoese
9 10 ,
Doña Juana de la ambassadors to
Innocent III, 171, 377 Torre, 3-4, 4577 Ferdinand and
Isaac ben Sid,
377 from Christopher Isabella, 31, 3 1 77,

Isabella, letters from Columbus to 316-317

Christopher Ferdinand and Liechtenstein, Hermann,
Columbus to, 1 Isabella from 43
Isidore of Seville Jamaica, 17-18, Ligneres, Jean de, 377
De summo bono, 27, 49, 33-35 Livonia, 171, 377
62-63 from Christopher Loaysa, Juan de, 10
Etymologiae, 44, 49, Columbus to Lombard, Peter, 171
122-123 Gaspar Gorricio Longitude, calculation of
Sententiae, 27, 44, 49 concerning Book of from eclipse, 35
Islands of the sea, biblical Prophecies (1502), Loslein, Peter, 27, 44
passages alluding 4 54-55
,
Lucas, Alonzo, 45
to, 27-28, 40, from Christopher Luzon, Juan de
33 b -347 Columbus to Cancioncero, 40,
Kittim, 334-335 Gaspar Gorricio 314-315
Ophyr, 330-334 from Jamaica Suma de las virtudes, 3 1 4,
Tarshish, 320-329 (1503), 6-7 315

4 1 8 SUBJECT AND NAME INDEX

 1 1 ,1 1 3

Maiuizio, Aldo, 41 Bliny the Elder, Natural Santa Maria de las C'uevas,
Marmita, Bernardino History, 47 26
('.cilio, 34 Bolo, Marco, 7 Saxe, Jean de, 377
Mars, Jean de, 377 Bolski, Stanislas, 7 Senptures. Sec Bible,
Martyr, Beter, Decides dc Bope Ale.xander VI, (draft) passages from in
Orhc !\'ovo, 3 letter from Book of Prophecies
Mayoraziio, 46 Christopher Seneca, Lucius Anneus,
Merlin, 167 Columbus to, 4, Medea, 34, 4<jillus.,

Methodius, Bishop of '7 290-291

Olimpo, 1
71 -1 73, de Brexamo, Bedro Solomon ben Isaac, Rabbi
377 Jiménez, Floretum (Rashi), 310, 31 1,

Morales, Ambrosio de, 9, Sancti Mathaei, 29 390

390 The Prophecies o f Merlin, Spain, political
Müller, Johann 37b messianism, 32—33
(Regiomontanus), Streicher, Fritz, study of
Ephcmeridcs ab anno Book of Prophecies,

¡482 ad annum Raccolta Colombiana (De 14-15

1506, 18, 35, Lolhs), 13, 14 Sybilline Oracles, 167, 376
290-293 de la Rada y Delgado,
Muñoz, Juan Bautista Juan de Dios, Tabula Americae, 10
description of Book of study of Book of 320-329
Tarshish, 40,
Prophecies, 1 Prophecies, 1 Thacher, John Boyd,
Historia del Ntievo Rationale divinorum study of Book of
Mundo, 1 27
officiorum, Prophecies, 14
Real Academia de la “Thacher manusenpt,” 41
Historia, Madrid, Tostado de Madrigal,
Navarrete, Martin
1 Alfonso de. Postilla
Fernández de.
Colección de los
Regiomontanus. See litteralis in

Muller, Johann evangelium Mathaei,

viajes y
descubrimientos, 1
Registrum B (Indice numeral 29, 44, 15H-159
de los libros), 8n, 9, Trevisan, Angelo, 41
Nicholas of Lyra. See
10
Biblia Sacra cum
Repertorium Valerius Maximus, 70, 71
j^losa ordinaria et

interlineari et cum Columbianum, Valverde, Juan Fernández,

1 8m •7
pos til lis Nicolai de
Revelations,
377 Varela, Consuelo, 15, 15»
Lyra
Richard (England), 377
1 Varnhagen, Francisco
Rodriguez, Martin, 45-46 Adolpho de, 12
Oderigo, Nicolo, 5, 46// de la Rosa y López, von Olmütz, Matthias, 43
Ophyr, 40, 330-334 Simón, study of von Baderborn, Johann,
Opuscula plurima, 9—2 1 1
Book of Prophecies, 19, 23, 41
42, 44, 49, 12-13
162-163 Rotulus pugillaris, 26 Watermark, on folios of
Orthography. See Book of Prophecies,
Handwriting Samuel of Fez, Rabbi. See 3ó

Epistula rabbi West, Delno C., studies of

Paganini, Baganino, 26, 43 Samuel de Fez de Book of Prophecies,

Papeles varios de Indias, 1 1 adventu Messiae, 16-17

Bedro of Aragon, 32 missa rabbi Isaac
Betrus Comestor, Historia Sánchez de Carvajal, Yehuda ben Moses
scholastica, 378 Alonso, 5 Cohen, 377
Bhillipe Auguste 11 Sancho Vil of Navarre,
(France), 377 377 Zacut, Abraham, Almanach
Bisani, Domenico, 41 San Giorgio, Bank of, 5 perpetuum, 18, 35

SUBJECT AND NAMK INOKX 4 I

9
 '/• ...-irír-

^ «

N
t
 Ti

•{

J
 « t. '
!

,*-

"é'

j
/
 BOS ON PUBL C LIBRARY

bookofpropheciesOScolu
bookofprophecies03colu

II I

II I III III
bookofpropheciesOScolu
 : ) t'i'' i’'-}' j'- ('•'

lA-
''''
rj!: /})-'..

y«siíÉ^

'••’í
Aw4fÉs
-../I

Ifeff

- :'/’^;irfíí!':

i;':;oí'-',..7,v>'

Q^y-v '•VVU-' :
''K' Vi A.'v '

. i